Home

COMMANDconcrete - Command Alkon User Gateway

1. Application Management 321 The Materials Manager offers a number of features that make it easier for concrete companies to maintain and manage mix designs Companies often have mix designs that number in the hundreds even thousands such a large number of mixes can be very difficult to manage The Materials Manager is not intended as a mix design tool Mix designs will continue to be developed by engineers and materials specialists The Materials Manager provides an efficient means of turning that basic mix design into a salable item within COMMANDeeries Key Features e Yield Management Initial mix designs are generally estimates After field testing a mix may need modifications The Materials Manager will help you convert those ratios into a mix design while maintaining proper yield e Constituent Replacement or Blending Change material sources blend materials or replace a portion of a constituent with another while maintaining a specific yield e Constituent Quantity Altering Change the quantity of a constituent up or down by weight or percentage volume is not maintained e Generic Mix Designs Different plants sometimes have different inventory sources but still need to use the same mix design The Materials Manager allows you to specify one constituent for one plant and a different constituent a different type of sand for example at another plant The Materials Manager is comprised of several main screens
2. DBARPCR W Correct ARTB CUCO Balances Fa Batch Date Batch Number Verify Correct ARTB CUCO Balances by Customer This routine works just like the previous routine except that instead of correcting by batch you correct by customer Since balance errors are generally discovered at the customer level the customer is more likely to use this routine than the previous one DBACBAL A Verify or Correct ARTB CUCO Re calculate Customer Balances zl Customer Code gt thu gt The drop down list lets the customer select two options e Verify Customer Balances generates a report that identifies customer balances that do not balance with the associated detail records Recalculate Customer Balances Correct Sales Batch With G L Out of Balance When this option is selected you will be prompted for a date range Date range DBACGLD W Correct Sales Batches With G L Enter Sales Transaction Batch Date Range to Change Batch Date thru Data Management 369 Enter the date range to correct You will not be prompted to select a specific batch or sequence The routine will examine all sales batches within the specified range A list of the corrected sequences can be found in the message log at the bottom of the screen If you have been running 5 53 7 or 5 53 8 and are encountering corrupt data in sales batches do not use this update Remove Duplicate Products While COMMANDseries does not allow for du
3. Once the order level mix design is approved ticketing is just like standard concrete ticketing The only time the process differs is when the dispatcher attempts to ticket a load with an unapproved mix design What happens when a user attempts to ticket an unapproved mix depends on the setting of Allow Override of Unapproved Mix Designs in Tickets If the Allow Override flag is not checked The user will receive a message that the ticket has an unapproved mix design and cannot be ticketed The ticketing screen will clear If the Allow Override flag is checked The user will receive a message that the mix design is not approved and will be given a Yes No option to override If the user selects yes the load will be ticketed The mix design will still be recorded as unapproved If the user selects no the ticket process will be cancelled Appendix C Order Level Mix Design 405 406 Appendix C Order Level Mix Design The Automatic Caller Identification feature is designed to streamline the process dispatchers use when entering orders from phone calls in COMMANDeseries Previously when a dispatcher received phone calls callers had to identify themselves and then the dispatcher had to manually search for the caller in COMMAN Dseries Now when dispatchers receive a call from a contact with information already entered in the system the caller s name and orders can be displayed on the screen by the time the dispatcher pick
4. 1 Select Replace part of a constituent by percentage in the Adjustment Replacement Options field ltem Replacement PN rhe pte tes eget 8 te a a a a i i i i i aa Zcltutz tnert E EE ef A ET a Ashuisuients ditional Gogg sth e lt a S i aA 2 Enter the Item Code of the original constituent 3 Enter the amount by Percent of that constituent that you want to replace This percentage of material by volume will be removed and replaced with a like volume of the replacement constituent The Materials Manger will compute the quantity of new material needed from the G Enter the Item Code for the replacement constituent Accept the screen Select a print model for the report alos Or SS Based on the report either Update or Cancel the replacement Materials Manager 331 Adjust a Constituent To adjust the amount of a constituent in the mix 1 Select Adjust the amount of a constituent in a mix in the Adjustment Replacement Options field Mies Aggregates Cements Admixes Weer Item Replacement Hriejinal Constituent KS Zelter 2 Enter the Item Code of the constituent you want to adjust 3 Enter the adjustment quantity in kg or lbs Adjustments can be either positive or negative the system will consider all adjustments positive unless the minus sign is placed in front of the adjustment amount 4 Accept the screen 5 Select a print model for the report 6 Based on
5. 336 Materials Manager Batch Information screen EDTBINF 7 Batch Information 25 x The Convert button allows you to convert a mix from one location to another Mix Design Screen Middle Mix Design screen EDTMDSN lelelelelelele E E E E E E E E gt gt gt gt gt gt R GE EE ead The Blend column shows Constituents are color ntered weights are converte each constituent as a coded by Item Type to volumes using specific gravity percentage of the total Item Type The middle section is where the constituents are added and adjusted By default constituents are sorted by item type they are also color coded by item type e Blue Water e Gray Cement Cementitious Material e Light Green Coarse Aggregate e Dark Green Fine Aggregate e Red Admixture If the Sort by Item Type flag at the top of the screen is deselected the constituents will be displayed in their order within the ICST table This order will be used as the batch order for the mix Up and down arrow buttons can be used to rearrange the constituent order The arrow buttons will not display if the Sort by Item Type flag is enabled The detail button on the constituent line brings up the Materials Editor screen This screen allows you to edit mix and batch related information about the specific item This screen would most commonly be used to provide missing item information particularly the item s
6. To prevent unauthorized users from running database updates COMMANDeeries will not run the automatic database updates unless the switch dbupdate is in the command line If the switch is not present then when the system 1s started a message will display stating that database updates must be run and to contact the system administrator MS SQL To prevent the transaction log from growing to unwieldy sizes SQL Server must be modified prior to running database updates e Set the SQL Server recovery model to Simple before starting the update e Set the recovery model back to Full when the update finishes In addition certain internal processes must be disabled Open the assignment file and find the DRIVER_SETTINGS section That section contains a line that looks like this usys mss params procs on Change the procs value to OFF and save the assignment file After the database updates have been run exit COMMANDseries change the value back to ON and restart COMMANDseries To run the automatic database updates 1 From any client select the COMMAND concrete or COMMANDaggregate shortcut depending on the license the customer has When the application runs the following message will appear indicating that Database Updates needs to run The Database Updates function must be run before proceeding with COMMANDseries Would you like to run it now recommended If this dialog does not appear contact Command Alkon
7. lt TICK CMDSERIES gt lt DTDSAPTKT gt lt soap Body gt lt soap Envelope gt The SAP_TKT_ACTION TICK CMDSERIES field will tell whether the ticket is new deleted or reactivated The corresponding values sent in this field are CREATE REMOVE and REACTIVATE ERP Server Output Your function name and URL will be different than illustrated below The error code is a numeric value that corresponds to the particular error that happened Anything other than 0 420 Appendix F SAP On line Ticket Interface is considered an unsuccessful transaction in your ERP server The control number is a field used by some South American customers for governmental regulation purposes Other fields will be included in future releases depending on the need for them lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt ns1 ERPTicketResponse xmlns nsl http commandalkon com gt lt error code gt 0 lt error_code gt lt control_number gt 123456789 lt control_number gt lt ns1 ERPTicketResponse gt Appendix F SAP On line Ticket Interface 421 Appendix G Batch Confirmation and EU Link Enhancements COMMANDeseries has been updated so that the following occurs when the Generic EU Link is used for salable products salable products with constituents and alternative mix batch codes e New Tolerance and Sequence Codes will be set up in COMMAND and interfaced to COMMANDseries as part of the mix interface e Tolerance and
8. D Order Line Mix Design A100 C25 C30 KRANBETON hed Plant 252 Bisfeken LPI Defaults j al Spec Original Orginal Adusted Adusted Water Trim Gr Quartty Volume Quantity Volume a w 100103002 SANDOOLITIC 268 103025 38442 lies kg 334 42 E 1331750 ei UMESTONE 20G 268 918 89 34287 fasse ko 3287 l WER gt 21449600 CEMI 310 245 00 79303 ell 24500 kg 7903 d Target E Cem PI7O WRA 1 00 73500 73500 73500 m 73500 A Incl Abs 00 Excl Abs 00 B Effective 00 As 00 00 I Copy to All Total Vokme 1541 32 1541 32 d ES Hem Code Description Price Order Oty Trim Percerk Volume mmm IT Mex Design Approved By Quality Control 5 Enter the Scheduled Plant If you want to begin with the standard mix design press the Defaults button The mix design for the mix at the selected plant will display 7 The Sort Order number automatically displays in this field If changes are necessary detail on the field to adjust 8 For each item in the mix enter a Sort Order the Item Code for the Constituent Product and the Quantity Use the Add Occurrence button to add additional constituents All constituents included in this section of the screen will be included in the base mix price To add an item for which the customer will be charged extra use the Item Code field below 9 Ifthe order is to be shipped out of multiple plants you have two options o Select the Copy to All checkbox to make the design available at all plants o Select the
9. If a ticket is recalled and has not been invoiced the button will display as Print Invoice If a ticket has been recalled and the invoice has been printed the button will not display When the Print Ticket amp Invoice or Print Invoice button is pressed the Cash Sale Invoice Printing Options screen displays Cash Sale Invoice Printing Options Cash Sale Invoice Printing Options Detail Summary Set the options and accept the screen to print the invoices Invoicing Cash Sales via Standard Invoicing This option is only available for plants that are not configured to print invoices at ticketing The standard Invoice Print screen has been updated to allow greater flexibility in the invoicing of cash sales Updated Invoice Print Selections screen ES a 1 Print Invoices Selections z 2 z Ka D 242 Daily Invoicing There have been two key changes to the Print Invoice Selections screen These options only display when a single customer is specified and the Report Type is Original Print Order Code allows the selection of a single order or range of orders Detailing on the field will call a list of uninvoiced orders for the specified customer The Select Orders amp Tickets button calls the Print Invoice Order Ticket Selections screen Print Invoice Order Ticket Selections screen Print Invoice OrderTicket Sd ections Customer name search Order Date Order Code Customer Name Tiet
10. Order Order Number Customer Company name of the order s customer Address Shipping Address and City for the order Product Product Code and Short Description Ord Qty Quantity ordered along with the Unit of Measure UOM Del Qty The quantity delivered with the UOM The sum of the Ticket Quantity for all saved tickets for the order Tickets Tkt Qty Quantity of goods to be ticketed UOM Unit of Measure for the ticket Ticket Ticket number Maps to the TKT_CODE TICK field in COMMANDoeeries Ticket Press this button to create a ticket ready for acceptance Void Press this button to mark an existing ticket as voided Please note that tickets cannot be edited on your PDA but they can be voided and re ticketed You also have the following options on both the Order and Ticket tabs Signature The customer s signature as authentication of acceptance It is your responsibility to verify that a legitimate signature has been entered before the ticket is accepted Accept Press this button to accept the shipment and the ticket update delivery quantity and or print the delivery docket Cancel Press this button to cancel the proposed ticket Importing Tickets at the End of the Day Order and Ticket Data In Order and Ticket Data In has been modified to add an Import Type option for Web PDA Tickets Use this option to manually import tickets back to COMMANDeeries Web PDA Tickets and Order
11. e The Materials Manager screen lets you quickly sort through the Item Master file using a number of different search strings e The Mix Design screen lets you proportion a current mix ensuring that the target yield is achieved This same screen also allows you to make substitutions of constituents and to create aggregate blends Topics in this section Material Manager Setup Material Manager Screen Mix Design Material Manager Setup There are three major issues to address when setting up the Materials Manager 322 Materials Manager e System License e Lab Location e Sort Codes e Item Setup System License The system license must contain Material Manager MM If your license does not contain Material Manager contact your Command Alkon sales representative Lab Location A System Lab location must be specified on the Material Manager Configuration screen Files gt General gt Configuration gt Distribution gt Material Manager The system lab can either be adummy plant created solely for that purpose or can be an existing plant Mix designs are calulated based on the lab s available constituents that design then serves as a baseline to be used at the other plants Sort Codes The primary Material Manager screen provides multiple options for sorting and filtering it is always possible that you will have need an additional sort option Such a situation can occur when two companies merge because you wi
12. o You cannot add a product to a ticket unless that product has already been entered at the order level Enter a Delivered Quantity This value represents the amount of material delivered to the customer and controls usage reports and inventory It has no bearing on what the customer is charged 214 Edit Orders and Tickets 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Enter a Price Quantity This value has no impact on usage or inventory this value is multiplied by the price from the order record to determine the Extended Price for the product In most cases the Delivered Quantity and the Price Quantity will be identical In some cases the price quantity might be reduced to give the customer a special discount If for example a load was particularly late or the concrete truck accidentally ran over a mailbox the customer might be given a free yard of concrete by reducing the price quantity by one As long as the delivered quantity isn t also reduced inventory will remain correct Enter the Plant that batched the material Enter the Truck that delivered the material The truck s assigned Driver will default but can be changed if necessary The Total Ticket field provides a running total of all charges on the ticket If there are associated products on the order the Associated Products button displays Press the button to display the Ticket Associated Products screen You may edit information h
13. All of this information generally defaults during order entry You will not have to change values on this screen very often Order Entry 41 Other Order Information EDTORDR3 Other Order Information To enter other order information i The employee code of the person entering the order into the system defaults into the Taken By Employee Code field but only if the COMMANDseries user code is linked to the employee s code The Taken on Extension field lets you record the extension number on which the order was taken Some phone systems record all calls based on extension Entering the extension on this screen makes it easier to retrieve the stored call The Ordered by Name Ordered by Phone fields are used to store site specific information relating to the order Tracking Order Color determines the color used to display the order on the Tracking and Scheduling screen If the scheduling plant is changed after the order is accepted the Tracking Order Color defaults to the color specified by the order not the plant Pocket Number lets you store the filing pocket where the hard copy order form was placed Enter the Salesman who generally works with this customer Enter a Sales Analysis Code This field is used by COMMANDexccutive to generate Sales Reports Enter the Resale PO number where necessary This is an optional field used to store the resale purchase order number of goods This is an optional field which can be us
14. Five Important Functions COMMANDeeries has a wide variety of tools and commands and new users can easily find themselves overwhelmed by the different options Despite the large number of options four commands will serve you in most situations Entering Dates The lt Tab gt Key Accepting Saving Screens Add Occurrence Detailing Entering Dates You enter a lot of dates in COMMANDeseries and you have a great deal of flexibility in how you enter them e lt Tab gt through the field to enter the current date e The days of the week are numbered 1 7 with 1 being Monday Entering a number between 1 7 will enter the next occurrence of that particular day If it is Wednesday September 27 and you enter a 4 Thursday the system will convert that to September 28 If however you enter 3 Wednesday the system will convert that to October 4 the next occurrence of Wednesday e Enter the first three letters of the day The system will enter the next occurrence of that day e Enter 1 for tomorrow s date 2 for the day after tomorrow etc e COMMANDceeries recognizes standard date separators You can enter January 3 2009 as 1 3 09 1 3 09 or 1 3 09 You can also omit separators altogether however when omitting separators you should include leading zeroes to prevent any confusion 010309 If no year is specified COMMAN Dseries will default the current year The standard display format as well as the default on the D
15. Item SUbStItUTIOT Akagdeggegsrbuuga anandi na d EENS AE 341 Constituent Replacement LOG NENNEN EEN E 343 Data ENEE LE 1 dE 345 Initialize Analyze FIGS ugeduet ENN BEE 345 Import ETC NEE 346 Export Data cnsciciinvnsteevereinsnd saa ENEE ANN ERAN AEDO NNN SEENEN SEN ENE NA ENNER AEN AEN 348 Import Orders amp Tickets geeint 349 Export Orders amp Tickets 2e2dag gh EEN EA R IEREN gedd dee Ah dedenvargendadednts 350 Automated Data In Out EEN 351 Data Maintenance iscsisinsieeivnenisasteaateend ENTNER EE IEEE EA 353 Retrieve a Specific Record or Set of RecordS NEEN 355 Global EE eeh ee Aide a E N NEEE ia ia 357 Special Search Operators e EEN 358 Automatic Database Updates sgr GENEE 358 Manual Database Engage 98 ERENNERT MEA EREA E aE a Ea 362 Upgrad Options EE 363 stet Manual Updates ett ve ee AE guden 364 Mainvenance ROULINGS csstvecsasearasnsicncatadadanesscbeddentsecedueesaednassatemnaennnsae 369 SOL W rksheet ees ueN ANNER AER dE EEA E EEA 372 Re E EE 373 Service Control Ginen degkeet e 374 Comm Manager e e e EE 375 CONSOLE Miris oreina an a E E e a a 375 EEGEN Dee Ee 376 COMLEX Men A ee EE EE 376 NetWork taD WEE 377 LOGGING FUNCIONS EE 377 Run Comm Managers as a Windows Service sssssssssssssssssrrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrreress 377 NN ei To e BEE 379 agent e ENEE 379 Appendix A EXAMPICS cicssisivscnscsesimsscnscsicancensacnnasnsassensiansianniansens 380 Multiple Loads On One Truck 22gsgdr Eege de ENEE d
16. KVALUE Total K Value e TOTWAO Total water in aggregates per cycle COD Recap Report The COD Recap report provides a means of reconciling cash checks and credit slips collected during the day The report lists COD sales sorted by multiple parameters The report uses payment forms to differentiate different types of COD entries Reporting options will be restricted to whatever payment forms are configured in your system To run a COD Recap report 1 Open the COD Recap Selections screen Dispatch gt Dispatching Reports gt COD Recap Report COMMAND concrete Reports 295 D NAMM 10 11 COD Recap Report Selections SELCODR D COD Recap Report Selections X Enter a Report Name if you want to save this specific configuration for repeated use You will also need to select the Save Settings on Accept checkbox Select a Report Type The options are o Summary by Order o Detail by Ticket Enter the Report Sequence You can set primary secondary and tertiary sort keys In addition you can force a page break between sort keys by selecting the checkbox Select a Product Line Enter an Order Date or date range Enter a Shipping Plant or Shipping Plant range Enter a Customer Code or Customer Code range The default selection for Payment Form is All Should you need to adjust this setting select the Detail button to the left of the field A selection box appears Select any combination of Payment fo
17. Log Report Web PDA Tickets and Orders for Trowel Ready Mortar 179 Tasks Conditions and Driver Overtime COMMANDeceries contains a tool for managing and tracking a driver s clock time This feature is comprised of a number of separate components that work collectively to bring together related information Topics in this section Tasks Tasks Driver Overtime Conditions Tracking amp Scheduling Ticketing Deadheading Managing Driver Overtime Time and Task Manager Tasks describe different functions to which a driver or truck can be assigned while on the clock They are defined in the Task Codes screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Task Codes The following are the default tasks while additional tasks can be added these default tasks cannot be deleted On Load Deadhead Lunch Break Breakdown Shop In Service These tasks are broken down in such a way as to make it easier to track time efficiency particularly in tracking on clock time not spent in delivery Driver Overtime A dispatcher s job is to keep the trucks moving even on a relatively calm day it s difficult for a dispatcher to manage an entire fleet and also keep track of drivers who are getting close to qualifying for overtime COMMANDeseries now employs a Driver Overtime Table to 180 Tasks Conditions and Driver Overtime track a driver s on road hours and to provide automatic warnings to di
18. Receipt Allocation screen header EDTCODTK1 D Allocate Payments to Tickets mmm 2 Enter values in the Ticket Selection area as needed Once you lt Tab gt out of the Ticket field the system will retrieve all tickets with an outstanding balance that match the entered criteria Retrieved tickets B Allocate Payments to T ickets 07 May 2008 IS fd 07 May 2008 3 Enter a specific Receipt including date and plant code The receipt is retrieved 4 To apply money from the receipt to a ticket select the Apply box next to that ticket Cash Management 257 note the changes B Allocate Payments to Tickets EA25 3 20 6P 600005 Harcourt Fenton Mudd 627 00 700 07 May 2008 20783 a A single receipt can be applied to multiple orders and tickets for the same customer Scenario A user makes a prepayment for 500 00 He later places a COD order totalling 430 00 and makes an immediate payment of 200 00 1 Enter the order Once the total has been calculated press the Payment button 2 On the payment screen enter a payment for 200 00 When the payment is accepted the system will print a receipt for the customer and apply the payment against the order 3 At the end of the day open the Receipt Allocation screen Enter the receipt number and date The system will retrieve the receipt as well as all tickets for the customer with outstanding balances D Allocate Payments to Tickets 258 Cash Mana
19. s account is in dispute for any reason such as the customer disputes the price or requires payment before new delivery the following message appears Do not sell If the customer s account is C O D only the following message appears COD only If the customer code is retired the message below appears It may be necessary to assign the customer a new code or perhaps an incorrect customer number was entered initially Customer code has been retired Message Meaning Cash only The customer is a cash only customer Only cash related pay ment methods Cash Check Credit Card will be allowed Call Credit The customer s account requires constant supervision by the Department Accounting Department Note This message is a variation on the Cash Only code It does not prevent an order from being placed nor does it force the order taker to call the credit department before proceeding COD Only Another Cash Only variant Do Not Sell Ifa customer has a Do Not Sell credit code the system will not accept an order for the customer Customer Code A Do Not Sell variant Provides the order taker with additional has been retired information Appendix B Credit Checking 399 Appendix G Order Level Mix Design Order level mix design lets you modify a mix design at the order level without changing the base mix design stored in the item file To use this feature users must have the neces
20. 7 8 15 16 17 U S Customary Aggregates Cements Admines Weier item Replacement cy 2500 00 2500 1 2 3 8 cy 3000 3 4 3 8 cy 3000 Wall Mix cy 3500 3 4 cy 3500 00 3500 Wall Mix cy 3500 3 8 Curb Mix cy 4000 PSI cy 4000 00 4000 Floor Mix cy ice 5000 3 4 3 8 cy 5000 00 Item Setup Items both constituents and mixes must be properly configured Constituents Constituents must be entered into the system correctly for the Materials Manager to operate properly The most important field for constituents is the Specific Gravity field the system uses that value to convert the weight of a constituent into an equivalent volume and vice versa so that the yield of the mix may be accurately calculated In addition the Item Type and Item Category fields can be used for sorting Mixes Material Manager related fields for mixes are located on multiple tabs e Main o A mix cannot be loaded into the Material Manager unless the Allow Constituent Substitution box is set to True checked e Items Mix tab o Strength Class Materials Manager 325 o Water Cement Ratio o Aggregate Size o Slump o Sort Code see below These fields can be used as search parameters within the Materials Manager to quickly find a specific mix or a group of mixes All of this information needs to be entered correctly to ensure that the Materials Manager will function properly For addition information on entering items in
21. Bl 20 Oct 2010 Bl f20 0ct 2010 PS _ o lm Eg c 112 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 113 Aggregates Sold Through Ready Mix Plant Several companies sell blended aggregates through a ready mix plant These blended ageregates are set up ordered ticketed batched and delivered as though they were concrete mixes However since pricing information is often imported from other applications in tons not in cubic meters as would normally be required for a concrete mix these applications expect ticket price quantities to be returned in tons as well Presently COMMANDeeries does not support price quantities in tons for concrete items e COMMANDceeries can support the import and export of prices in tons for blended ageregates that have been set up as concrete mixes with an Item Type of Concrete e Item prices and project product prices are converted to cubic meters for the Data In routine Manage gt Data Management gt Import Data e Price quantities are converted to tons when printed or exported during Ticketing and the Data Out routine Manage gt Data Management gt Export Data e The Item Units of Measure Master File Data In Files gt Master File Data In process updates item prices and project product prices for price records that were imported when no UOMI Item Units of Measure record existed e All conversions from and to cubic meters or tons are base
22. Choose a number or letter combination that is not already in use in the credit codes file Enter the Description of the new credit code This field fully describes or names the credit code The code should have a clear and direct relationship to Credit Checking Enter a Short description of the new credit code The short description appears on screens and reports where the Description will not fit Enter the Credit Type This field identifies the credit type assigned to the credit code Following is a list of credit types o Cash only Only cash may be received from this customer o Charge only Only charge orders are allowed for this customer o Charge or cash C O D or charge orders may be taken for this customer o No sale No orders of any kind can be taken for this customer Tickets on orders already established will not be generated Enter the Exceed Limit Authorization Code This code releases a flagged order authorized by the credit department Privileged users should change this code each time it is used Check the Verify Credit Limits checkbox if this particular credit code needs authorization from the credit department to proceed with the order To make the new credit code available to projects mark the Allow Assignment To Projects checkbox To specify that when using this credit code Orders Require Authorization mark the checkbox The product line field coordinates with the following Do not exceed and Require
23. EDTSCHD Copy Products From Standing Order Order Code To Schedule Order Order Date lt Order Codex Ween Groupe Cancrate Une 8 Product Price Cuartty Gert Quantity For the Orcer M um 1020005 ALL SN 20MM CONCRETE 51 20 2200 Main Product f zm 1020015 ALL 15N 20MM CONCRETE C12 15 6500 6300 Main Product F Am 1180040 ALL 40MMCRUSHED ROCK 23 00 70 00 Extra Product M 400 1150050 ALL SM CRUSHED ROCK 1425 em Extra Product Selects _UnSelectAl _Copy Selected Cancel Order Entry 67 e You can select multiple product lines on this screen however only one main product is allowed per selection e Ifyou select one main product and one or more extra products without grouping them they will default into one schedule tab on the Order Entry form e Ifyou select multiple main ready mix products you can right click to Group the items just like you do already on the Project gt Product tab When you group multiple products with one main product o The checkbox for the main product is selected o The Plant will not display for extra products o All products will default into one schedule o Standard delivery quantities are measured individually customer credit rules remain the same You cannot select an extra product without selecting the main product first O o The Delivered Quantity and Remaining Quantity are calculated when the above form is called for a specific Standing Order e Concrete stan
24. Ifthe specified order is an aggregate order the Scale Number field will display Select the scale from the drop down list 5 Once the plant or plant scale has been selected select the plant printer to be used from the drop down list 6 Ifthe selected plant is configured for plant and or dispatch copies corresponding checkboxes will display defaulting as checked Adjust if necessary 7 Accept the screen to reprint the ticket s Canceling Tickets Sometimes after a ticket has been generated it becomes necessary to cancel the ticket Perhaps the ticket was generated for the wrong truck or with the wrong material The first step in the process is to retrieve the ticket on the Ticketing screen To retrieve an ticket 1 From the Dispatch menu select Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping 2 Enter the Order Date and select the appropriate Order Code 3 Select the appropriate Ticket Code or detail on the Ticket Code field to select from a list of all tickets generated for that Order Date 4 The ticket will be retrieved With the exception of the Truck and Driver Code fields all fields are read only The process from this point depends on one important question was any concrete actually produced If no concrete was produced then canceling the ticket is a simple matter the system cancels the ticket and treats it as though it were never generated If concrete was produced simply canceling the ticket would cause your ticket
25. Location Code in the ILOC table The actual certification text is set up on the Configuration gt National Standards tab To enter certification information 1 Access the National Standards tab Files gt General Information gt Configuration Project Frame Project Internal Report Numbers National Standards National Standard Name N ational Standards z Image V CAlogo af National Standard Text 2 Enter a name for this certification in the National Standard Name field Press lt Enter gt while the cursor is within this field to select from previously entered configurations You can then update the information for that certification and save it 3 Ifyou have an image you wish to print with your certification text enter the file location in the Image field 4 Enter the certification text in the National Standard Text field Up to 255 characters can be entered here 5 Press F2 to save the certification Information entered above will be saved in the below fields on the NSCF National Standards Configuration table Field Name Field Description Type NS_CONFIG NAME Configuration name Char 20 NSIM_FILE_NAME Image file name Char 50 NS_TEXT Free format text for National Standards text Char 255 146 Ticketing Selecting a Certification Once you ve created a certification in the Configuration editor you can assign it to a specific plant The Communication
26. Metric CONMET Concrete 01 2 Concrete US CONCUS Concrete 01 3 Cement Metric CEMMET Cement 21 4 Cement US CEMUS Cement 21 5 Cementitious Materials Metric CMTSMET Cementitious Material 03 6 Cementitious Materials US CMTSUS Cementitious Material 03 7 Sand Metric SNDMET Agaregate Fine GA 8 Sand US SNDBUS Other Product 13 9 Coarse Aggregates Metric CAGGMET aggregate Coarse 04 10 Coarse Aggregates US C4GGUS Aggregate Coarse 04 11 Water Metric WTRMET water 05 12 Water US WTRUS Water 05 13 Ar Entraining Agent Metric AESMET Am Entraining Agent 06 14 Air Entraining Agent US AEAUS Air Entraining Agent 06 15 Accelerator Non Chloride Metric ACCNCMET Accelerator 07 16 Accelerator Non Chloride US ACCNCUS Accelerator 07 Record 1 of 47 The left column displays all of the fields available for display The middle column lists the current fields and the right column shows the database name of those fields To add a field either double click on the field in the left column or select it and press the right pointing double arrow To remove a field select the field in the middle column and press the left pointing double arrow By default the middle column shows the standard database label for each field That name will be used as the column header in the lookup display If you want to change that label double click on the label Changing Column Labels Column Name IN Cust Co
27. Open the Lien Legacy Invoice Manager Manage gt Application Management gt Lien Legacy Invoice Manager 2 Enter the Transaction Date s that you wish to update Application Management 315 Select the Invoice Types you are interested in You may select all invoices paid invoices Or Open invoices Using the Project Types field you may select all invoices or only those invoices that are in a project The Project Actions field lets you specify if the lien location should be made a project default Use Lien Location Status to specify the lien status of the newly created locations If no status is specified the status will default to Open Use Preliminary Flag to specify whether or not these locations have already gone through the preliminary notice stage If you are specifying that the locations in question have already been filed for a preliminary notice then you can use the Prelien Date field to specify when these notices were issued Press Retrieve A list of all invoices that meet your criteria will be displayed Lien Legacy Invoice Manager DBALNLI 2020 Lakeshore Drive 10 Accept the screen or press lt F2 gt to create the new lien locations Realign Accounts and Cost Centers This option is used to change existing company cost center and account codes Once the screen containing the new codes is accepted the system will modify the detail and summary information to reflect the changes The
28. Select the Product Line Options are o All Orders o Concrete o Aggregate Select the Order Types to be included This option is helpful if you want to process credit and debit memos separately from regular sales The options are o Regular Sale o Incoming Material Dumped o Credit Debit Memos o All Select the Payment Method The options are Charge Cash Check Credit Card All Many companies prefer to process their COD transactions separately O O O 0 Enter the Invoicing Status that will be included on the Preliminary Invoice Register This field allows to differentiate between released and suspended orders tickets The default is All Enter the Order Date to specify the date or range of order dates to include on the Priced Orders Report This field is required Enter a Billing Customer or range of billing customers to include on the Priced Orders Report If the field is left blank Billing Customer will not be used for record selection Enter a Project Code or range of projects to include on the Priced Orders Report If the field is left blank Project Code will not be used for record selection 190 Preliminary Invoice Register 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Enter an Accounting Category or range of accounting categories to include on the Priced Orders Report If the field is left blank Accounting Category will not be used for record selection Enter a Co
29. TSME_LNG production week value TSTM Norm Standard TSME Start Date TSTM Short Description TSME LNG Test Method Code TSTM Test Method Code TSME_LNG Target Sample TSTM Test Method Short Description TSME Test Family Code TSTM Order Entry amp Ticketing Order Entry When you have the Display Test Message in Order Entry field enabled on the User gt Options tab the system will display the following message if a sample needs to be taken Sampling amp Testing Plan 121 Order Entry Sample Notification Confirm Samplesfor Testing Methods Tic kt _ amp Xe x Depending on the mix and various defined test plans it is possible that multiple tests may be required for a single mix An order taker s response to the message will be based on the company s business practices For example the order taker may need to add a dispatch memo to the order reminding the driver and batcher to take the sample Ticketing When a ticket is generated the system will check to see if testing samples are required If so a confirmation screen will display Ticketing Sample Notification screen Confirm Samples for Testing Method uch ob KEE G Confirm each required sample buy checking the appropriate box When a test sample is confirmed and the screen accepted test confirmation records will be created in the Ticket Test Samples TKTS table The test records will subsequently be exported to the Fire Q system for resul
30. To review or modify the delivery schedule select the Loads button on the screen Edit the information as necessary When you change a time in the projected schedule all of the subsequent times will be automatically adjusted to maintain the requested delivery rate This feature gives you a convenient means of scheduling a break in a delivery either for a lunch break at the job site or to allow for additional finishing From this screen you can o Assign loads from multiple plants o Roster trucks by entering the Truck Code Order Entry 57 o Schedule a truck to return to a different plant and adjust travel times accordingly o Adjust overall schedule by changing the On Job field o Designate a load usually the last load as a Clean Up load When a load is designated as a Clean Up load its scheduled ticket time will automatically be adjusted to coincide with the time that the previous load is scheduled to finish pouring This feature will reduce the disruption that clean up loads can wreak on a schedule All Time To Job and Time to Plant fields have a code beside them The code designates the source of the field value Project plant Project Map Page Map Page default value Overridden at the schedule level User entered at the load level Jaco zZz zZ mT Defaulted from schedule If a user enters a specific time all subsequent times are recalculated based on the schedule If chan
31. amp Tickets screen Invoicing gt Update Costs amp Prices for Orders amp Tickets 2 Enter selection ranges for Order Date Order Code Pricing Plant Code and or Company Code If a selection is left blank the system will not filter by that selection If no pricing plant codes are specified for example the system will update orders from all pricing plants within the range established by the other parameters 7 Update Costs amp Prices for Orders amp Tickets m 22Jun 2007 BY 22 Jun 2007 E E Update all costs Update all prices 3 Select the Cost Update Options The choices are o Update all costs o Update zero costs o Do not update costs 4 Select the Price Update Options The choices are o Update all prices o Update zero prices o Do not update prices 5 Ifa Price Update Option other than Do Not Update Prices is selected additional checkboxes will display in the lower half of the screen These checkboxes let you determine if pricing for extra charges is to be updated as well Options are o Update the rate for minimum load charges o Update the rate for seasonal charges o Update the rate for unloading charges o Update the rate for haul charges 234 Daily Invoicing o Update the rate for sundry charges o Update All Override Rates Note Update All Override Rates is only available when Update the rate for haul charges is selected Accept the Update Costs amp Prices on Orders amp Tickets
32. and then accept the screen These routines run automatically the first time COMMANDeseries is started after an upgrade the same routines can also be run manually see Database Updates However the routines as run from Database Updates run on a pre determined set of tables Running the routine manually allows you to select any table s in the database Initialize Tables in the Database This function examines the selected table s validating that the structure matches the structure COMMANDeseries expects the COMMANDseries schema number of columns columns formatted correctly etc Ifa mismatch is discovered the table will be restructured to conform to the current version of COMMANDeeries After the table s has been restructured the routine writes and deletes a dummy record to test that all fields are working correctly In some cases a database error can result in a table being stuck due to an error writing to the table The writing deleting of the dummy record has the effect of resetting the table During this process record locks are initiated on the specified table s Because of the potential risk to object resource allocation users should not use Database Update initialization during business hours there s a good chance that the resulting record locks will further disrupt business If it must be done however initializing a single table at a time will minimize the chance that other work will be disrupted Analy
33. beside the product indicates that the value does not effect inventory quantity The Ticket Report can also be printed with weights COMMAND concrete Reports 291 Ticket Report Selections SELTICK 3 Ticket Report Selections Ticket Code All Tickets Bl 02 07 2008 m 02 07 2008 Oo et Oooo e RS EERE EEE E Enhanced Ticket Report The Enhanced Ticket Report prints a list of all tickets that are actually produced for the day or date range you select This report gives you the ability to produce ticket reports based on your individual requirements 292 COMMAND concrete Reports Enhanced Ticket Report SELENTK COMMANDconcrete 4 Enhanced Ticket Report Selections La lala lala lalate Enhanced Ticket Report SELENTK COMMANDaggregate 4 Enhanced Ticket Report Selections By 14 May 2010 _ fia May 2010 COMMAND concrete Reports 293 Standard report functionality applies to both the Concrete and Aggregate versions of this report In addition full form and field level security is available for this report e Detail in the Document Format field to choose from a list of all Ticket Print and Ticket Data In Out document format types This field is required e Ifthe report is run from Aggregate you can select tickets based on a range of Scale Numbers if the report is run from Concrete you can select tickets based on a range of Driver Codes e Ifyou select tickets based on a range
34. o Total Order Amount Displays the total quantity of the project product that has been ordered to date This figure excludes all removed credit memo and debit memo orders o S button Opens the Detail screen Pressing this button displays the ordered quantity of the project product that exists on suspended orders split by suspend type o Total Delivered Amount Displays the total quantity of the project product that has been ticketed to date This figure excludes any removed debit memo or credit memo tickets and any returned quantities are subtracted from the total o S button Opens the Detail screen Pressing this button displays the ticketed quantity of the project product that exists on suspended tickets split by suspend type o Remaining Scheduled Amount Displays the remaining scheduled amount which is calculated as being the Estimated Quantity minus the Total Ordered Amount o Non delivered Scheduled Amount Displays the remaining scheduled amount that has not been delivered which is calculated as being the Estimated Quantity minus the Total Delivered Amount o Total Invoiced Amount If Invoicing IG is in the license this field will display This field shows the total quantity of all tickets where an invoice date is present excluding credit and debit memo tickets o Ticket Data Out Total If Invoicing IG is not in the license this field will display This field shows the total quantity of all tickets where the
35. or anything other than by orders you may see multiple orders invoiced together sometimes in an order that makes pricing review more difficult Either report can be used for pricing review If you invoice everything by order it doesn t matter which report you use If you do have some variety in your invoicing configurations you may want to work with both and see which suits your company s business practices best The Transfer Orders Register is not directly related to the invoicing process but is used to ensure that internal material use is properly tracked Topics in this section Saving Report Configurations Printing a Priced Orders Report Printing an Exceptions Report Exception Items Only Option Printing a Preliminary Detail Invoice Register Transfer Orders Register Saving Report Configurations Several of the more complicated reports give you the option to save individual report configurations Rather than enter each configuration option every time you need to run a report you can save commonly used configurations for repeated use Once a report 188 Preliminary Invoice Register configuration has been saved it can then be recalled at which point you will only need to add some additional information such as data ranges To enter save a report configuration 1 Open the report selection screen If configurations for the report can be saved the first field on the selection screen will be Report Name If th
36. order etc e The batcher will add a Reason Code to all non complying loads prior to printing the physical ticket e The quality department will follow the factory production control process to record the corrective action and make a suitable note against the ticket record in COMMANDeeries 422 Appendix G Batch Confirmation and EU Link Enhancements Logic The following is the system logic used when weights are returned from the batch control system Setup If the ticket IS in tolerance and the plant s Batch Confirm Option on the Plants gt TQS tab is set to Auto Print Yes the ticket will be automatically printed using the Print Delayed Ticket Weights Plants gt Communication option If the ticket IS NOT in tolerance and is unacceptable and the Batch Confirm Option is setto Auto Print Yes the ticket will be automatically printed using the Print Delayed Ticket Weights option The Batch Confirmation form with the Ticket Weight s comply status set to No will be automatically displayed as well A new Reason Code field on the Batch Weight Confirmation screen must be completed with the new Mix Non Compliance reason code before the user can save the screen when the system level batch confirmation action is set to Warn the User When the Batch Weights Confirmation screen has been successfully saved the system will automatically print the ticket using the Print Delayed Ticket Weights Plants gt Communication opt
37. pmo Cer 500 M3 11 The detail button to the right of the sequence field opens the Journey Detail screen which provides additional journey information Journey Detail EDTJOURO D Journey Detail Order Date Jan 12 2008 Order Code 250002 PRE E4 Order Delivered Quantity 3 00 Cust Code 24567 HOMEBUILDERS Project Code 200055 Christian Gas Station Delivery Addess Lidostrasse 5 Ticket Date Ticket Code Alt Item Bat Cd CKAI01 A100 Journey Line Status Created 12 Notice that the Journey Line Status displayed at the bottom of the screen now displays as Created The journey status messages that you may see here are o Created A journey stop has been created but not ticketed o Ticketed A journey stop has been created and ticketed o Removed An existing journey stop was removed at the time of ticketing o Added and Ticketed A new journey stop was added at the time of ticketing 13 To add another order to the journey tab through or hit lt F6 gt and repeat steps 7 10 The order that you select from the list must contain an identical product to the first If you select an order with a different product you will receive the following message Can t add different mix products on the same Journey You will then be able to select a different order Repeat this process until all the necessary orders have been added to your journey 14 Accept the journey Advanced Ord
38. the partially invoiced order Both the shading of the Status button and the asterisk indicate that the ticket is either suspended or canceled Edit the ticket if necessary or leave the information as it is 5 Once you have edited the suspended ticket and are ready to release the suspended ticket for invoicing click the Status button Suspending Orders and Tickets 203 6 The Ticket Status screen appears Click Release to release the ticket 7 The asterisk which distinguishes a suspended ticket is removed from the Edit Ticket Information screen and the Status button returns to normal The ticket is now released Accept the Edit Ticket Information screen You can invoice the previously suspended ticket on the order now 204 Suspending Orders and Tickets Edit Orders and Tickets The Edit Orders and Tickets function lets you correct discrepancies identified from preliminary invoice reports or to add to incomplete order and ticket information The primary functions of Edit Orders and Tickets include e General order and ticket preparation e Suspending orders and tickets e Issuing Credit Debit memos Topics in this section Edit Orders and Tickets Screen General Order amp Ticket Prep Editing Tickets Credit amp Debit Memos Options Menu Edit Orders and Tickets Screen The basic layout of the main Edit Orders and Tickets screen EDTPREP is similar to that of the standard Order Entry screen E
39. user This information is set up in the Plants tab of the Users screen Files gt System Information gt Users gt Users gt Plants If no user plants have been specified all plants will display 5 Press the All Plants button to open a popup that allows you to select a region This displays a list of the companies defined in the Company file Files gt General Information gt Companies Selecting one or more of these options includes only plants for that company region in the results screen Select Region to Show SELCOMP Select Region to Show kA NORTH CENTRAL SOUTH EAST SOUTH WEST T ATT f Select All OK Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 101 6 Once you have chosen which plants you want to see in the results the Economic Sourcing screen lists the costs for each plant Margin and the difference in costs between them and the least expensive plant s Variance This screen calculates the margin as Margin Material Price Material Cost Standard Haulage It then displays the results in ascending order of margin i e the most economical choice first 7 To select a plant other than the one that was selected for you double click anywhere on the line You will then be prompted to enter a reason code in the Economic Sourcing Reason Code screen to justify this choice Economic Sourcing Reason Code EDTESRC D Economic Sourcing Reason Code C30 C3007 Reason Code lf 8 On the title bar of t
40. zeroed out by changing the Price to zero When the ticket is invoiced the charge is printed on the invoice but with an extended price of zero Some companies will zero out unloading charges so that the excess time will be printed on the invoice letting the customer know of the delay Edit Orders and Tickets 219 o Acharge can be edited in the Delivered Quantity the Price Quantity and or Price fields If a charge is edited at the ticket level and the charge is subsequently removed and restored at the order level the charge will be restored with the calculated values not the edited values 5 Accept the Ticket Changes screen accept the Edit Ticket Information screen and accept the Edit Orders and Tickets screen Credit amp Debit Memos If an error is discovered before an order is invoiced it can be corrected at the order level in Edit Orders and Tickets but once the order has been invoiced corrections must be made either in COMMANDinvoicing or COMMANDreceivables Relatively small adjustments are usually made on the Receivables side It s fairly simple and you can make the adjustment at the same time you process the payment for an invoice However one drawback of Receivables adjustments is that you do not get something official looking to send to the customer documenting the correction The correction will appear on the customer s next statement but it will not have any explanatory information Consequently for larger
41. 1541 32 d ES Hem Code Descriptior Price Order Qty Tam Percent Volume mmm A M Mex Design Approved By Quality Control 5 Enter the Scheduled Plant If you want to begin with the standard mix design press the Defaults button The mix design for the mix at the selected plant will display 7 The Sort Order number automatically displays in this field If changes are necessary detail on the field to adjust 8 For each item in the mix enter a Sort Order the Item Code for the Constituent Product and the Quantity Use the Add Occurrence button to add additional constituents All constituents included in this section of the screen will be included in the base mix price To add an item for which the customer will be charged extra use the Item Code field below 9 Ifthe order is to be shipped out of multiple plants you have two options o Select the Copy to All checkbox to make the design available at all plants o Select the Add Occurrence button to the right of the Copy to All button A new design form will appear allowing you to enter a separate mix design You can scroll between these mix designs using the scroll bar on the right of the screen This feature may be useful if plants have different constituents on hand 10 If you want to add an associated product one for which the customer will be charged extra enter the product s Item Code Order Quantity and Trim Percent 11 The Mix Design Approved by Quality Control checkbox
42. 94 The Options Menu ett tee eege 95 When the Order Entry screen is displayed the Options menu becomes avail able Use the Options menu to navigate quickly to commonly used functions in COMMANDseries Prefix Screen sissssesnducacasaxasvidasevaenaeviaatedaerewsadteraataeweas 95 Switch to Concrete Aggregate Block Asphalt ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeaes 95 Test Order EE 95 Change Order to Metric EE 95 Addition Selection of NoteS ENEE 95 Re Verity Credit Bin EEN 96 Default Schedule amp Pricing Plants in Order Entry 96 MEN 96 Oe gl horan insoni nor ne TOE ERATEN E EREE EAE N EEA N E 98 EcOnGIMIC SOUNCING Ate EEN 100 Using Economic SOUTCING ger Een 100 IV leg TEEN 102 Pricing Authority Display Percentage Discount ENEE 102 Transport elei ne WEEN 104 New E 104 E e EE 105 JOUPMEYS 2007 ENENENN EEN ENN ENER RENE ANNE NEEN REESEN dienes EN Ne REES 105 Creating a New JOURNEY EE 106 Editing an Existing JOUrNeEyY 1 dEN ENER REENEN RENE Eh RE eiii 108 Ueleg TEE 108 Multi Drop Concrete Deliveries ex CSKENKENR ENNEN EK SE NEKSER RENE EN EEN ccusaactersesans 109 4 3 27 13 OVEIVIEW ei Ee EA SE RE E eae diana e SA Ee ZE ee See D 109 Plants e EE 109 Order ENUY EE 110 TICKING EE 110 Ticket RE DOL age Ee 111 Aggregates Sold Through Ready Mix Plant ees N EE NEE en 114 Sampling amp T sting Han oesggnesgegaeh eege ei REeb Ree bERE REES EREREEES ER eEN 116 Configuration energie 116 T st Methods gedu gg eege Ode 116 C
43. A Q To perform a task included on the toolbar simply click the button with the mouse For example to exit from the current screen click on the Exit button Standard Toolbar buttons Accepts the current screen Opens a screen assigned to the icon such as Orders Clears the current screen Exits the current screen Opens a Save As screen Opens a Request amp Search screen Deletes the current screen Sorts the entries of a list Prints the current screen Opens screen specific help Opens a Search screen Opens keyboard specific help E e ee ee E Siess Runs the Replication Filter Opens the Help file Other buttons can be added to the toolbar on the Preferences screen Misc gt Preferences Accessing Help There are several ways to access the online Help while working in COMMANDeeries For help specific to the screen in which you are currently working press lt Ctrl Alt F1 gt or click the Screen Help icon on the toolbar e For help with the functions of the keyboard press lt Shift F1 gt or click the Keyboard Help icon on the toolbar e From any COMMANDseries application click on the Help menu located on the far right of the COMMANDseries menu bar Select a specific help function such as Screen Help Keyboard Help Contents How to Use Help or the About window e From the COMMANDecseries Program Group in the Windows menu select the Help icon How to Use This Document
44. ABC Project Lot Block gt Order Type Credit Memo v Invoice Code gt When the Order Type is Credit Memo or Debit Memo the Invoice Code field appears Enter the Invoice Code on which this order was originally billed This field links the new credit memo with the original invoice If this field is left blank the system creates an open credit memo that must be manually assigned to an invoice at a later date Remove all products except the one s you are crediting If you are doing a full credit don t change anything All items remaining on the credit memo including associated products and charges will be credited back to the customer If you do not check the credit memo carefully before accepting you may inadvertently give a customer material for free It bears repeating check the Total field at the bottom of the screen that is the amount that you will be crediting to the customer and is an easy way to check for errors Accept the Edit Orders and Tickets screen Use Invoice Print to print the memo and create a sales batch Debit Memos You can create a debit memo to correct for an omitted product charge or inaccurate pricing The memo appears on printed invoices to show this correction to the customer A common use is as part of a Credit and Rebill a credit memo is used to credit the full amount of an order then a debit memo is used to bill the customer for the correct amount To create a debit mem
45. Accounting O Selection Current Page Ome E COMMAND concrete Reports 285 Scheduling Reports Scheduling reports show the commitment of trucks in each plant plant capacity and commitment for the total fleet They allow dispatchers to look ahead to the next day s deliveries Other reports show order schedules dispatch truck schedules and load suggested driver callout report Topics in this section Order Schedule Report Truck Demand Graph Plant Loading Report Driver Callout Report Dispatch Sheet Report Order Schedule Report The Order Schedule report provides information about orders to see which customer orders are on the schedule for a particular day You can specify the plant s order type s and scheduling date on which you want to report Also you can sort the reports by schedule plant or schedule start time The Order Schedule report includes plant schedule and quantity information generated in the Order Line Scheduling Information screen It provides the shipper with information on start time travel time and rate of deliveries It also shows the quantity of ordered product the type of truck designated for the job and the number of trucks required The report supports two Report Options Standard Format runs the report using the existing format Project Name Format uses a new format that includes the Project Name To make room for the Project Name the Truck Type Trucks Required and Zone C
46. Apat Weight 0 00 Schedule COD 1 Ifthe order is part of a project the Plant code defaults from the Project record If the order is not part of a project specify the plant code for the plant from which you plan to ship the scheduled order when it is ticketed The Plant field defaults to the most economical plant choice for delivering this order This can be altered on the Economic Sourcing screen To help you choose a plant select the button The Economic Sourcing screen displays listing the costs for each plant and the difference in costs between them and the least expensive plant This screen calculates material cost and delivery cost for each plant for one unit of material concrete or aggregate and lists those plants in ascending order by total cost Economic Sourcing SELECON Economic Sourcing Plant kem Cost Slump Primary Variance Magn Mileage Std Hav Ess 00 48 Eiken em 2500 fam 35 CT om om Gm pm D 50 Ermete 20 em fain ae TC om eem D p Gm 003 39 RUE Emematien 2500 en faite 355 Tom pm ppm om 04 2 Susan sTest 2501 2501 PSI Bam CG 300 2300 om o The dispatcher can determine which is the best plant to schedule an order from to receive the most profit The Must Finish checkbox states whether or not an order must finish Concrete orders default to a state of Must Finish when the mix is designed with TQS regardless of whether the box is checked or not For any other mix this check box must be selected in order
47. Code Howard Wilson Hauler Code McKinley Trucking Weighmaster Oliver Overwater Bill of Lading Pricing Information C Apply Minimum Haul Charges C Apply Seasonal Charges C Apply Sundry Charges User Defined Fields Explain Yourself This information can be edited as necessary although it is unlikely that you will need to edit information on this screen on a regular basis 13 The Status button opens a screen that lets you set the ticket as Active Removed or Suspended Released 14 Proceed to other areas of the prep screen or accept the screen to return to the main Edit Orders and Tickets screen Removing Items Occasionally it is necessary to remove an item from an order or ticket for example if a pack of expansion joints gets left accidentally off a delivered load of concrete but is still included on the ticket To remove a delivered product from an order 1 Retrieve the order in Edit Orders and Tickets Below is a detail from an order Let s say that the expansion joints were not delivered so we want to remove them from the order You cannot simply delete the expansion joints from the order line if you try you will get the following error message This restriction is here to protect the integrity of the database Edit Orders and Tickets 217 7 Clearing the Order Quantity field will not accomplish anything because the customer is charged based on ticketed quantities the ticket
48. Code to add to the journey Tab through the Ticket Code field to create the new ticket You can also remove any stops that are not required by navigating it and pressing the Remove button 7 Accept the screen The journey stops are ticketed and the journey is updated with any changes made to its stops and or sequence Once a journey has been ticketed changes can no longer be made One ticket instruction is sent to the batch panel for all individual journey tickets If you view the details of a completed journey in the Journey Editor pressing the detail button opens the Journey Details screen and lets you view the completed journey information Truck Counts Screen COMMANDeceries dispatch licensing is based on a maximum number of trucks being used at a given time The Truck Counts screen lets you compare your current truck use against your license limit as well as display current ticketing trucks including licensed trucks and scheduling counts By tracking the number of trucks that are punched in service on a daily basis COMMANDeseries can monitor the number of licenses in use If you punch in more trucks than you are licensed for you will receive an error message stating that the daily maximum truck allowance has been exceeded 82 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools Go to Files gt System Information gt Truck Counts to view the Truck Counts form It will display with current ticketing tracking scheduling truck and licen
49. Customer and Projects Information gt Projects Review all project information and update as needed Select Create Update Standing Orders from the Options menu The Order Entry screen will open with the selected project s information pre loaded If the project s credit code is set to Cash or Charge the Payment Form Selection screen will open Select a payment option and accept the screen to proceed to Order Entry The Order Date defaults to Standing The Order Code defaults to the project code of the project you had open Review the information making sure that the new standing order has an Expiration Date If you defined an Expiration Date in the projects screen it will be used as the Expiration Date on the Order Entry screen Accept the Order Entry screen to save the standing order and return to the project editor Scheduling Standing Orders You can schedule standing orders on the Schedule Standing Orders screen The scheduling process lets you enter a date range and schedule information The system then creates regular orders for every day in the specified date range With the tabbed Order Entry screen You can only schedule a Standing Order for Concrete Item Groups If the Standing Order is scheduled from the standard Order Entry screen a new selection form Scheduling Standing Orders will be displayed only products you select on this screen will create schedule tabs for each product Scheduling Standing Order screen
50. Delivery Type as Delivered e Prep does not support the automatic addition of auto products at this time You will need to manually add auto products to Prep that are related to Lime Items Set Up Item Groups The first thing you need to do is set up an Item Group Files gt Item Information gt Item Groups for Lime products Lime is typically considered to be an aggregate product so you should set the Associated Module to Aggregate Item Groups EDTCNEXS 23 Item Groups Se x ltem Group ID Description Associated Module Price UOM Active JC J ggegate Aggregate 4003 cumeter VV JCB Products Concrete Products 80007 each Vv jee Concrete Concrete z 40013 cumeter Jv cD Asphalt 40013 cu meter iv d ftime Agregate 60013 m tonnes Iv Item Category Now you can set up an Item Category Files gt Item Information gt Item Categories for Lime products You will need two Item Categories for Lime products the Lime product itself and a Lime delivery service charge To create the Lime delivery service set the Item Group to Lime the Item Type to Service and the Item Sub Type to Spreaderman Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality 2 Item Categories EDTICAT zy Item Categories OI E Item Category 2612 Description ime Spreaderman Service Short SPREADER Item Group Lime D Taxable Taxable ltem Type Service x ltem Sub Type Spreaderman x Key Item Code UOM Tax Overrid
51. Design The Order level Mix Design feature lets users with appropriate access design a mix from the Order Entry screen This mix design will be available only for the current order This functionality is useful when it is necessary to work around specific restraints such as weather conditions and loading times To set up Order Level Mix Design In order for a user to be able to use order level mix design two system flags must be set 1 Open the Distribution tab of the Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration Select Allow Order Level Mix Design to activate the feature at a system level 2 The Default Mix Design Approval Status flag determines the operational requirements of the feature Select one of the following options o Mix Not Approved the most common selection The system will not ship the mix until someone with appropriate system privileges retrieves the order opens the Order Line Mix Design screen and checks the Mix Design Approved by Quality Control box o Mix Design Approved Modified mix design can be shipped immediately Configuring Order level Mix Design IV Allow Order Level Mix Design Default Mix Design Approval Status l Mix Design Not pproved Mix Design Not A Mix D App J Generic Location for Mix Conversion Appendix C Order Level Mix Design 401 3 Accept the configuration settings 4 Open the Options tab on the Users editor Files gt System Informati
52. Driver Overtime 184 Index Tasks 180 Ticketing 182 Tracking amp Scheduling 182 Ticketing 133 Canceling Tickets 139 Load Size Logic 138 Maximum Gross Truck Weight 141 Reprinting Tickets 138 225 Ticketing Screen 135 Ticketing Prebatched Material 140 Time Analysis Missing Times Report 305 On Time Delivery Report 303 Order Snapshot Report 302 307 Overtime Report 306 Time and Task Manager 184 Driver Times 187 Ticket Times 185 Truck Times 186 Transfer Orders Register 195 Truck Ahead Behind 414 Configuration 415 Truck Counts Screen 82 Truck Unavailability 78 u Update Costs amp Prices for Orders amp Tickets 233 Update Zone Salesman 318 v Volume Calculator 72 Index
53. EEN Ed 380 TWO Mix PrOdUCtS on ONG TUCK 98 SkuKNEKNN ESMAN SANS SNE EENS NEEN 382 Scheduling an Order out of Multiple Plants saicesisinnwrcsasensascanedionnsiaceredionyes 383 Batching for Third Parties EE 387 Third Party Customers eege e 388 Third Party Customer Projects s sssserurssrereresrerenssresaseasanannararenrerane 389 10 3 27 13 EE 391 Appendix Bt Credit CHECKING sisiiisiidisddisidsscicaidascseicinedinasdendiasdeadan 392 Credit Checking ee TEE 392 Standard no license needed ENEE ENEE EEN 392 Credit Checking licensed feature NENNEN ENEE EE 394 Credit Checking Configuration entendu 394 Credit Codes ere Eed 394 Re son Ee TE 395 Assigning Customer Credit CodeS 2eNEENEEK ENRERERNK EEN SERN ANNER arse sretvarecanss 396 Using the Credit Checking Function wsdesieseiswuseccosincadvniadiens ian ENN EEN RE 397 Appendix C Order Level Mix Design sssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 400 Order Lev l le AR ele NEE 401 Mix D sign e TC a EE 404 Ticketing EE 405 Automatic Caller ID epgageetesengeenspeagEen ER RSR ENER REESEN EEER EES RE 407 COnHMOUratIOM eer 407 deal EE 408 of Ce ET 410 Contact Deliver To Customer Order LOOKUP Form cceceeeeee eens eee e teenies 410 Truck Ahead Truck Behind eseu EE KEE EE KEE EE Eben 414 Document Tags Formats EE 415 Signaling UNITS EE E 415 Appendix F SAP On line Ticket Interface sssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 418 Plant de Te le EE 418 Operations EE 418 Eeer
54. Each signaling unit must be configured for the feature Configuration is done on two different tabs within the Signaling Unit Editor Signaling Options Tab Enable the feature using the Send Truck Ahead Behind Msg drop down field Truck Ahead Truck Behind 415 Turn on the feature here F 3 Signaling Units Signaling Outgoing Tab In addition the signaling unit must be configured to send the update message on the Outgoing tab To configure the outgoing message 1 2 Enter a new Message Code Enter the Outbound Message Text This message will not be displayed the message will be based on the document format as described earlier Select Send Ahead Behind Msg as the Event When this event is selected the Return Plant Color and Flag fields will disappear for that occurrence Enter TRKAHD as the format name Press Add Occurrence and repeat the process to create the second entry Accept the screen 416 Truck Ahead Truck Behind Truck Ahead Truck Behind 417 Appendix F SAP On line Ticket Interface COMMANDeseries can export ticket information via XML to SAP and subsequently receive a Control Number from SAP The Control Number is stored against the Ticket Record The XML transmission is triggered by Ticketing events Ticket Creation and Ticket Removal Note The customer is responsible for providing an appropriate interface program Plant Configuration On the Plant gt Communicati
55. Economic Sourcing screen or can edit manually if you have proper privileges If User Login Plant is not selected during log in the application will consider the next priority setup o If Economic Sourcing is the top criterion the application will default the best economic possible available plant into the scheduling plant as standard More than Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools likely any priorities after economic sourcing will not be valid because economic sourcing will most likely suggest anything available o If Customer Project is the top criterion the application defaults the scheduling plant from the project if the project is available and the scheduling plant for the product line is not blank If there is no project or the Project Scheduling Plant is blank the application will check the customer record If the project is not available or the scheduling plant in the project is blank the application will consider the next priority setup o If Deliver To is the top criterion the system will check the Use Deliver To parameter each time if it is set as Disable the system will ignore the priority and retrieve and use the next priority setup If it is set to Enable and the scheduling plant in the Deliver To is not blank the system will default the Scheduling Plant in Order Entry If the scheduling plant is blank in the Deliver To the application will consider the next priority setup e Ifuser setup is not available the app
56. Editor snccctiieerviranndinarcedsdindeviapuivawalindeusacedivddanviniananets 150 Plants lt 150 THIGKOUING EE 152 HTML Document Format Interface et rte eege dE SEA dE NEE REENEN 154 Post Production Out of Tolerance LoadS xs ENER NNN RENE cceatsesaieedaskdoessabeeens 155 KT EE 156 Data IN OUC EE 157 Print Send Tax amp Cement Info to Batching System 159 SGUUD gt Ee E dati ioe EE ex hbo dows a i EE EE AE NEE SE AE 159 Record Sampled TicketS vcduvusamssvensadckinnssateaveschotussans DEE EE 161 Set UD uge deed EE ee Ee EE 161 TICKEtINO EE 162 RE DEE 164 F t re Day Ticketing Age ee EECHER AE ENEE EES 165 EEN enee deed TEE EE 165 ei de EECH en EE 165 Concrete Ticketing and Shipping set eNKENNSNNNENESKKEENERNESES ENNEN NNEEN EEN ENG 167 Tr ck PUNCH IM WEE 167 Tracking and Scheduling EEN 167 EUREN NALE A Ga ENANAR 168 Print User Defined FieldS ssssssssssssnsnunrenenrssossnsssssenennnnnnunnnnnnenunrenenrene 169 Web PDA Tickets and Orders for Trowel Ready Mortar _ ss0005 170 OVERVIEW suvasievsxeneavens REESEN EA AEET NEEN EREM E EENS 170 is et 170 CONMOQUPAUION Ae eege ee Ae GE dee 171 The COMMANDIog Interface sex EESNEeEEEKEEEKRREEEEEKKEEAENNEARENR ENEE EEENEN NES ERNNERR 172 L gging NEE 172 ai e E 172 S mmary Tab entree ee 173 Order E NEE 174 Tickets Tab EE 175 D ta ils TaB EE 176 Red ee EEN 177 Importing Tickets at the End of the Day xsstaivetsadsieniisieriieealesiis NNN EEN de EN 177 Order a
57. Enter the Receipt Code sequence to be used by the plant Detail on the field to select from a list e Enter the Quick Customer Code sequence to be used by the plant Detail on the field to select from a list If you do not use Quick Customer Creation this setting is not needed e Enter the Quick Customer code of the customer record to be used as a template for this plant s quick customers If you do not use Quick Customer Creation this setting is not needed Note Make sure that the specified customer template is configured correctly For example if the default customer has the wrong credit code assigned you will not be able to create anew COD order for the customer Users User records are configured on two tabs e Preferences e Order Type Defaults 250 Cash Management User Preferences e Plant Code The user must be assigned to a plant that is configured for cash management e Receipt Writeoff Limit This field relates to receipt allocation Sometimes the receipt amount does not match the ticket amount When this happens the user has the option to write off the difference To do that the user entered a special reason code Once the reason code is entered the system validates the difference against the Receipt Writeoff Limit If the difference is over the limit the system will not accept the writeoff Order Type Defaults Only one field needs to be changed here e Default Order Type This fiel
58. Extended Price Percentage and Minimum Allowed Price Percentage I Pric ing Authority The Extended Price Percentage displays the amount entered by the user and the Minimum Allowed Price will display the minimum price either item price trade discount or item price user discount whichever is less or item price trade discount user discount for users who have the Configuration flag noted below set to Enable that can be given to this customer Percentages will display next to these numerical values e Ifyou have set the Compute User Price Latitude after Discount flag to Enable on the Configuration gt Projects Quote tab the user discount is computed after the Trade Discount Zone Adjustment The entered discount is calculated against the Adjusted Price e Ifyou have set the Compute User Price Latitude after Discount flag to Disable the user discount is not computed after the Trade Discount Zone Adjustment The entered discount is calculated against the Item Price Email Notifications The email notification system used in conjunction with Pricing Authority Discount Levels uses a Uniface component to send emails These emails can only be sent within the company system Implementing this new system involves the following changes e The Bin Message Delivery folder is no longer needed and can be removed Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 103 e The EMLG database table will serve as an email log e Two fields should
59. Information gt Bank Codes Bank Codes EDTBKCD 3 Bank Codes Bank Code 2 Description Fred s Bank Short FRED Company 2 Command Aggregates Inc Federal Routing Number 92 2392 Bank Account Number 201211 Enter a Bank Code to identify the bank and account Enter a Description for the bank Enter a Short description Cash Management 247 5 Ifa specific company within your organization uses the bank enter 3 Company Code in the Company field Detail on the field to select from a list of valid companies 6 Enter the bank s Federal Routing Number 7 Enter the Bank Account Number 8 Accept the screen Contact Types Contacts The Cash Management system requires that plants be assigned a Bank Agent the person at the plant who deals with the bank The Bank Agent is first entered in the Contact table The contact is then assigned to a plant in the Plant editor Command Alkon recommends creating a new Contact Type for such contacts Files gt General Information gt Contacts gt Contact Types Contact Type editor EDTCTTY 8 Contact Type Codes ENGINEER ENG MAIN CONTRACTOR MAINCON JOWNER OWNER PROJECT MANAGER PROJMGF ROAD AUTHORITY JROADA SUBCONTRACTOR JSUBCON SITE FOREMAN SITEFMAI BANK AGENT BANKAG i KIKIKI i i JAHE i Eil bi g a Create a new Contact Type for Bank Agents the screen shot is just a sample then cre
60. Information screen While order takers sometimes open this screen for reference changes are seldom needed Order Entry 39 Access to this screen can be controlled through user privileges To enter order pricing information 1 Open the Order Pricing Information screen by pressing the Pricing button on the Order Entry screen Dispatch gt Orders gt Pricing Order Pricing Information EDTCORD2 Order Pricing Information 2 Change the Pricing Plant Code if necessary This field identifies which plant these products are priced from for this specific order This code is found in the Plant Code field in the Plants file Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants The pricing plant can default from the scheduled delivery plant by selecting Default Pricing Plant from Scheduled Plant in the configuration of COMMANDseries File gt General Information gt Configuration gt Dispatch If you choose to apply Minimum Load Seasonal or Unloading Charges you must also specify what charge table to use When the boxes are checked a field will display to the right of the label Detail on the field to select from a list 3 Select Apply Zone Charges if necessary Zone charges are calculated based on the Zone Code field This option is rarely used in the aggregate industry Check with your CA customer service representative for further information 4 To Apply Seasonal Charges select that checkbox The seasonal charges
61. Item Description Ticket mort Indudeon re Ddinmmeayyy 123456789012 Customer Name on Order 12345678 Correte Item Description 999 iv P Ddinmimeayyy 123456789012 Customer Name on Order 12345675 Corereteltem Description 9999990999 fe Ddinmmayyy 123456789012 Customer Name on Order 12345678 Concrete ltem Description 99999999999 IER When the screen opens it will automatically load any uninvoiced orders tickets that match the specified criteria on the selections screen Because the Print Invoice Selection screen filters by billing customers it is possible to get a list that includes multiple customers if necessary you can use the Customer Name Search field to refine the list Select the Include on Invoice checkbox for all tickets to be included on the invoice and accept the screen The Cash Sale Invoice Printing Options screen displays Cash Sale Invoice Printing Options Cash Sale Invoice Printing Options Print Products ickets Detail Summary el Copies to Print 2 Set the options and accept the screen to begin the invoice process You will be prompted for a print model and to update records as usual Order Discount Form Detail on the Order Line Price or Associated Product Price field for individual item discounts or from the Order Product Charges field for discounts to the entire order to display the Order Discount form in Order Entry When brought forth from the Order Line Price field the form displays as below Da
62. Item Master o Download from Order o Upload to Orders Select an Output to option from the drop down list The options are o Batch Panel Output o File Output This field will not be available if the selected Mix Download Method is Upload to Orders If File Output is selected enter an Output File and select a Document Format Group Enter a range of values for Item Code Plant Code and Item Category In the Mixes with Constituent field enter a constituent item code to be used when retrieving mix items If entered only mix items that contain the specified constituent item will be retrieved and sent to the batching system If you wish to delete all mixes from the batch panel at one or more plants mark the Clear Mix Files checkbox for the specific plants WARNING This function is very dangerous Selecting this checkbox instructs the system to delete all mixes from the batching system and they are NOT retrievable Click Retrieve This will save the products for downloading Accept the Mix Downloads screen to send the mix product constituent information to the batching system or to an output file Initialize TESYS Data If you are licensed for the Inform Interface this option will appear on your menu The Inform Interface connects your system with a third party schedule optimizer Running this function generates an output file that the Inform Interface then loads into the optimizer Application Management 313 To ini
63. Line Charges File OT ee ee At this point you are not looking at the contents of the table but rather the structure of the database itself Each numbered line represents an individual field within the table Selecting Toggle Field Display in the Command field will display the descriptive names of the fields for example Customer Code instead of the database field name CUST_CODE Viewing the descriptive names can make it easier to find a specific field 5 The default option in the Command field is Retrieve Occurrence s Select the Do button to execute the Command and retrieve the first record in the table Ticket Charges record DBAUFLD 2 Tent va Excess Unloading Time Excess Unloading er ue 80001 Retrieve Occurrences El al aa zech i 354 Data Management 6 To retrieve the rest of the records in the table select Last Occurrence in the Command field and select Do Data Maintenance screen DBAUFLD 3 All Ticket Charge records R 7 Review and edit the data as necessary H Select Store Modified Occurrence s to save the data changes 9 Close the screen Retrieve a Specific Record or Set of Records Being able to retrieve a complete table can be useful When diagnosing a problem with a report it can help to see the original data being used by the report Knowing how to retrieve a specific record or set of records makes that process a lot easier Suppose you wanted to exam
64. Number and Fax Number of the Contact if any If the customer has promised that a certain amount will be paid on account enter the Commitment Amount Enter the promised date in the Commitment Date field Enter a Follow Up Date This is the date on which you want to contact the customer to check on the status of the commitment This date can be before or after the Commitment Date The Follow Up Completed checkbox allows you to keep track of which follow up calls have been made The Note Completed checkbox allows you to track active notes and purge completed ones To send a message with the note complete the bottom portion of the screen Accept the screen to save the new customer note The Customer Notes screen will close and you will return to the prior screen Managing Customer Notes Accessing Customer Notes using the Notes button on a primary work screen often does not give you a clear idea of all the notes entered for a customer The Select Customer Notes screen gives you additional flexibility in viewing and managing customer notes To view customer notes 1 While viewing a primary work screen Orders Edit Orders and Tickets etc select Addition Selection of Notes from the Options menu The Addition Selection of Notes screen displays 276 Customer Notes Select Customer Notes EDTCNOT A Addition Selection of Notes E e H d E 0 1 2 The first seven fields allow you to choose data
65. Number sequences please consult the Setting Up the System user guide Plants Editor Several new options have been included in the Plants editor so you can determine how each plant handles removed cancelled tickets New fields are located on the Main Communication and Next Numbers tabs 150 Ticketing Main Tab A new checkbox Allow Removed Cancelled Ticket Print has been added to the Plants gt Main tab Select this option to have the system automatically assign the removal cancellation sequence number to the ticket when Ticket Print is performed Grp oor Ki le hl Jh A1 Communication Tab Print Removed Cancelled Ticket has been added to the Plants gt Communication tab When selected a Setup button will appear 2 n 2 D D e D Ticketing 151 Click on the Setup button to bring up the Plant Communication Setup screen Complete this screen as you would any of the other existing Plant Communication Setup screens associated with the Communications tab to ensure that removed cancelled tickets are automatically printed once the ticket has been removed cancelled during the ticketing process FB Plant Communication Setup 50 Next Numbers Tab Anew Removed Ticket Code field has been added to the Plants gt Next Numbers tab Select the Next Numbers sequence code you set up previously on the Next Numbers editor The removed cancelled ticket sequence number cannot be the same as t
66. Order Entry 59 Schedule Requirements Some orders have specific requirements for driver truck types and plants These requirements are entered on this screen Schedule Requirements EDTORDOC D Order Line Schedule Requireme _ Required Forbidden Drivers d Driver Security Pass Trucks Large trucks gt cy Small trucks lt 7 cy BHMPLT Only one Driver and Truck Type can be specified for a schedule These attributes are passed to the Optimizer along with the schedule Only plants configured for Optimization which is done on the Plants Scheduling tab are available on this screen Other options are configured on the Resource Attibutes screen Files gt General Information gt Resource Attributes Ifa plant or plants is flagged as either required or forbidden then when the screen is accepted you will be prompted for a reason code Available reason codes will be codes configured with a Reason Usage of Plant Unavailability If the Restrict Loads to Single Plant checkbox is selected If this field is set to yes then the Optimizer will be instructed to optimize the schedule for a single plant Ticketing has been modified to validate the field on all tickets after the first one If the flag is set to Yes and you attempt to ship from a plant different than the plant of the first ticket for the order the system will display a warning message WARNING The Schedule indicates that all loads should be shipped from a sin
67. Pici Map Page a Sales Anaiysis Code F One Dii Private Zone Code a Delve Method Other DebverTo Ongnal Address 1 DebverTo Deginal Address 2 9 Ho Instructions Jilin the instruchons mert Purchase Dider Customer Job P Truck Code Hauler Code 2500 nod Item Code Order Oty Delv Oty Ext Price La 1050010 Se OMM PUMP CONCRETE ar 2 00 bi K M3 5340 Hlolijaj Must Schedule Plant Fresh Stat TikTy Travel Times Spacing Unload Distance Load Oly Load Loads are T fioo fis 20 30 f 1000 f 100 2500 km f Fy 1 Ticket Schedule Rate Type Mine Apart Weight 0 00 Schedule COD 6 Enter a Customer Code Or Detail on the field to access the Customer Lookup Choices screen The customer code and name automatically transfer to the appropriate fields The Customer Name can be edited you may need to change the Name for COD customers After the customer code is entered the system automatically checks for the existence of customer projects If any are found the cursor moves to the Project Code field o If the credit code is valid the system moves the cursor to the Project Code field o If the credit code is invalid the system warns you of the problem and returns the cursor to the Customer Code field so you can enter a valid customer 7 The Customer Name defaults from the Customer record It can be edited if necessary generally it is only changed for COD orders 8 The Order Type can default from the project file Regular Sale will be
68. Plank Code 252 Birsfelden LP1 Truck Code Dider Date Order Code tem Code Load Oty Sequence 12Jan 20t 250002 1 25 030 500 M3 gt 12 Jan 2008 50003 A100 Ce 500 M3 rd gt 11 The detail button to the right of the sequence field opens the Journey Detail screen which provides additional journey information Journey Detail EDTJOURO F Journey Detail Order Date Jan 12 2008 Order Code 250002 i fm EY Order Dekvered Quantity 3 00 Cust Code 24567 HOMEBUILDERS Project Code 200055 Christian Gas Station Delivery Addess Lidostrasse 5 Ticket Date Ticket Code Alt Item Bat Cd CKAION A100 Journey Line Status Created 12 Notice that the Journey Line Status displayed at the bottom of the screen now displays as Created The journey status messages that you may see here are o Created Ajourney stop has been created but not ticketed o Ticketed A journey stop has been created and ticketed o Removed An existing journey stop was removed at the time of ticketing 80 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools o Added and Ticketed A new journey stop was added at the time of ticketing 13 To add another order to the journey tab through or hit lt F6 gt and repeat steps 7 10 The order that you select from the list must contain an identical product to the first If you select an order with a different product you will receive the following message Can t add different mix products on the same Journey Y
69. Plant for a new order To enter a default sequence 1 Entera User ID or a Group ID in the User field and press lt Tab gt If the user belongs to a group the Group Name will display If the entered ID is a Group ID the Group flag will be checked 2 Ifthe Do not Default checkbox is selected no schedule plant will default in Order Entry for the selected user group The user group will have to enter the schedule plant manually Checking this box will also deactivate the Priority fields 3 Select up to four levels of Priority Options are o User login Plant O Economic Sourcing o Customer Project O Deliver To this option will only be available if Use Deliver To is set to Enable on the Configuration gt Project Frame Project tab 4 Accept the screen Configuration gt Dispatch tab A number of changes have been made e The Default Pricing Plant from Scheduling Plant has been renamed Overwrite Pricing Plant from Scheduling Plant e Anew field Default Pricing Plant from User Login Plant has been added These two fields are mutually exclusive if one is selected the other is grayed out Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 97 e Various fields have been rearranged to make the tab more accessible System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Aggregate Signaling Invoicing Inventory Concrete JI CopytoAll Truck Tracking First Status X Truck Tracking Orders to Load Lead Time KEN Truck Tracking Messages Al
70. Pricing Information screen Invoicing gt Edit Orders amp Tickets gt Pricing lets you set various pricing and taxing related information This information defaults from either the customer or project Pricing Information screen Changes made to an order s pricing structure from this screen override customer and project pricing information but do not change the customer and or project files This editor will only change the current order Edit Orders and Tickets 209 To enter order pricing information 1 10 Go to the Order Pricing Information screen Invoicing gt Edit Orders amp Tickets gt Pricing button Change the Pricing Plant Code if necessary This field identifies which plant these products are priced from for this specific order This code is found in the Plant Code field in the Plants editor Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants The pricing plant can default from the scheduled delivery plant by selecting Default Pricing Plant from Scheduled Plant in the configuration of COMMANDseries File gt General Information gt Configuration gt Dispatch The discount Terms Code for the current customer project is displayed for reference It cannot be edited Select Apply Zone Charges if necessary The zone charges are calculated based on the Zone Code field In addition zone charges are also used in conjunction with zone based destination taxing This option is rarely used in the aggregat
71. Project checkboxes The field defaults to Concrete set the product line as necessary then proceed to the following checkboxes Check the Do not exceed ordered quantity in ticketing checkbox to ensure the delivered quantity of product does not exceed the ordered ticketed quantity of product Check the Require Project for all Orders checkbox if necessary To modify other product lines change the product line field to the appropriate product and repeat Steps 9 and 10 above Reason Codes You can build Reason Codes that are relevant to Credit Checking using the Reason Codes seditor Files gt General Information gt Reason Codes The Reason Codes editor lets you access reason codes that explain the reasoning behind setting another field to a particular value For instance a non taxable reason code is used in the Customers function to tell why a particular customer is set to a non taxable status The non taxable flag field indicates whether customers are non taxable If they are non taxable the reason code tells why Following is a list of reason types relevant to credit checking Credit Checking is most likely related to A R Balance Remaining o Removed Item Order or ticket has been removed or canceled o Suspended Item Order or ticket has been suspended from invoicing Appendix B Credit Checking 395 o Non taxable Item Customer project order is set to non taxable status o A R Balance Remaining A balance remains for an invo
72. Realign Accounts and Cost Centers function changes data in many files It must be run only when no other users are logged in and when all invoicing and G L postings have been completed Before using this screen all possible batches must be posted Ideally it is 316 Application Management best to make any necessary code changes at the beginning of the fiscal year or at least at the beginning of a month Be aware that any changes to the length of the company codes cost centers accounts and or sub accounts will be reflected in general ledger data across COMMAN Dseries applications If third party systems are being used be sure that the appropriate changes are made to make those systems conform to the new codes In addition G L Data Out document formats will need to be updated with the new field lengths To realign accounts and cost centers 1 Go to the Realign Accounts and Cost Centers screen Manage gt Application Management gt Realign Accounts and Cost Centers Realign Accounts and Cost Centers DBAREAL 3 Realign Accounts and Cost Centers 2 Enter the New Company Code Length for the desired length of the company codes used in the system Because the company code is also the first portion of the cost center code the New Cost Center Length field will recalculate its value when you tab out of this field 3 Ifyou wish to adjust the length of the cost center codes enter it in the New Cost Center Length field fo
73. Reports EE 286 Order Schedule Report genee ger ge EE 286 8 3 27 13 TRUCK Demand Graph ut ie ggeb Ree Ee AE EE tanner 287 Plant Loading Report sswnexscapsuxcsievsdinixeeenuiedindiscraveeenatraseneruataievsanavians 288 Driver Callout ee EE 288 Dispatch Sheet Report aetage r uesee geg ee Ee EENS NEE gg 289 Dispatching ReportS veer 290 Order REPOT EE 291 Ticket Report eegene ee 291 Enhanced Ticket e EEN 292 COD Recap Report gege EE deg 295 Order Recap RepOrt ssaveiauseerudderavverd cle EAR ENEE 297 Plant Production Report EE 298 Customer Sales Recap Report extgEeNuES REENEN ENNEN KEEN KERNE ENNEN EEN EEN 298 Inventory Usage Report cece cece eee e eee eee eee eee teen eee enna 298 Product Sales Usage Report esssssssssssssssenssnsnnnnnnnnennnrnnenenrosenersssenensane 299 Raw Materials Requirements Report ue NEEN 299 Batching Comparison Report oiicisiesssaaline cide viatisvvsaseeadierdaseuvacdlaavsdadiens 300 Batch Info RTE 300 Order Audit Log e 301 lun EE 301 Driver Times and Truck Times degt 302 Order Snapshot RepOrt EE 302 On Time Delivery Report s sssssssssssssssssnsnrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrnrnsrssrsrsnnnnnnnnnnnnannnn 303 Time A alysis REPOMS EE 303 Missing TIMES EEN 305 Overtime REDO eege reese eege ee EE 206 Payment Option ReportS L ntgener dE 307 Reconciliation REDON EE 307 Uncollected Tickets Report cincsscansvectniasdanekncnsdveceeiiaraveasea veut awaueaneron 308 Unallocated Receipts Report afetten Ed Eeer 308 Gege
74. SI thru Company Code J thru Ship Plant J thru Customer Code J thru Project Code J thru Item Code J thru Rebate Rayalty Contact thru T Zero Amount Rebates Royalties Only I Save Settings on Accept To generate the Rebates and Royalties Report 1 CON Dw Go to the Rebates amp Royalties Selections screen Invoicing gt Rebates amp Royalties Selections Enter a Report Name to save this specific configuration for repeated use The Save Settings on Accept checkbox must be selected for the report criteria to save This step is optional Select a Report Type from the drop down list Options are o Detail Rebates o Summary Rebates o Detail Royalties o Summary Royalties In the Report Sequence section highlight the report sequence option to include on the report in the left hand box by clicking on it and then click the Add button to add it to the report If the option is successfully added it will move into the right hand box The report will be broken down by the first option added to the report and then further broken down by any other options added To remove an option click on it in the right hand box and then click the Remove button The option will return to the left hand box Enter an Order Date or a range of dates to appear on the report Enter a Company Code or a range of company codes to appear on the report Enter a Ship Plant or a range of ship plants to appear on the report Enter a Proje
75. Sale 3000 Charles Contractors Inc 200 Command Aggregates Inc 100 Command Concrete Inc The lookup screen displays reference information above the actual list o The active lookup file Customer o The entered search string C o Sort key Records selected by Sort name 2 Double click on the Customer Code to load a specific customer into the active editor e Ifonly one customer matches the entered search string it will be automatically loaded into the active screen e Ifthe search finds more than 5000 matching records the system will warn you with the message This listing will retrieve more than 5 000 records and will take longer than normal Cancel and Continue buttons will allow you to decide whether to continue with the lookup 22 How to Use This Document Customized Lookup In some cases you may need to modify a search To modify a lookup search 1 The search configuration screen can be called in one of two ways o Leave the Customer Code field blank and detail on the field o With the lookup results on screen select the Select button on the COMMANDeeries toolbar Select screen FNDCODE D Select Sort name gee Df This screen lets you search for customers using one or more search parameters Each search parameter has its own line The first field lets you select the field you wish to key on The Customer Sort Name is the default value but you can select other
76. Saving Screens Throughout COMMANDeseries you will often need to save your work also known as committing data to the database There are a host of different screens in COMMANDeeries but they all have one thing in common the Accept command The Accept command is the same as Save OK Execute etc There are a number of different ways to accept a screen e Pressing lt F2 gt is the most common method e Clicking on the toolbar Accept button a green checkmark e Selecting the File gt Accept menu option e Clicking on the screen s Exit button When you close a screen that contains new or changed information a dialog box displays asking whether or not you want to save this new information Because the command Accept does not refer to a single button or key in the documentation the word accept will not have any special formatting For example you must accept the screen to continue Add Occurrence Many forms in COMMAN Deeries call for varying amounts of data For example one order might have only one item but the next might have four For any situation in which you finish entering something and say I need to enter another one of these use the Add Occurrence button The hooked arrow on the button is taken from the symbol on a typewriter s lt Return gt key the key you pressed whenever you needed a new line Anytime you see it you can select it to create another line for data entry For example if you
77. Selected Amount of a Different Constituent The previous replacement routines operate on a one for one basis that is a certain percentage or amount of one material is replaced with the same percentage or amount of another material This option allows you to replace one material with another allowing you to specify the amount of the new material To replace a constituent with a selected amount of a different constituent 1 Select Replace constituent with selected amount of different constituent in the Adjustment Replacement Options field Materials Manager 333 Mies 1 Aggregates 1 Cements len Replacement Aggregates Titem Replacement 7 FEY et 3 m Zelter fianlascamnant Clegg st e n Aeheiscunenits 2 3 4 5 6 7 Remove a Constituent Enter the Item Code of the original constituent Enter the Item Code for the replacement constituent Enter the replacement Amount of the new constituent Accept the screen Select a print model for the report Based on the report either Update or Cancel the replacement To remove a constituent 1 Select Remove Constituent in the Adjustment Replacement Options field EY pepe ch Cotten a apa i a i m Ma Zelter Elagl e ament E otz ttlen ES elie nah oer e Schzinert 2 3 4 5 Enter the Item Code of the constituent you want to remove Accept the screen Select a print model for the report Based on the report either Update or Canc
78. Sequence Codes will be sent in addition to Water on Board quantities to the batch control system e The batch control system will look up the Tolerance values and Batching Sequence to determine the batching operations e Hydraulic Pressure from the truck mixer will be measured electronically or manually and then entered into the batch control system e The batch control system will control the number of cycles and determine if an additional manual Adjusting Cycle is required and what weights can be batched in that cycle e The batch control system will determine if the load is in tolerance e The batch control system will send the tolerance information hydraulic details etc to COMMANDeseries where they will be stored at the appropriate level e COMMANDeseries will interface Ticket Weight information with COMMANDqc but will not interface cycle level information Reporting on cycle level information will be done directly from COMMANDeseries e COMMANDeseries will automatically print the ticket if the load is marked as being in total tolerance or acceptably out of tolerance Any component that is outside the acceptable tolerance range be noted with a flag on the ticket print e Tickets that are outside the overall tolerance level but are still acceptable will be automatically suspended and reviewed by the quality department who will instruct the batcher as to the allowed course of action i e dump the material use it on a different
79. Setup Copy Order Revalidation Testing System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Aggregate Signaling Invoicing Inventory Receivables Aging Statements Financials Projects Quotes User Fields System Required Fields Cartage Mix Mapping Import Groups Event Logging H Validate Alternate Item Batch Codes T Look Up Alt Item by Class Option Alternate ltem Batch Code Priori Prioritize by Economic Sourcing Altemative ltem Control Default Economic Sourcing Mode Map Page Plants X Activate Mix Strength Warming res 7 Alternate Item Batch Code Do Not Limit to Project Product s Alternative Items Batch Codes Using Economic Sourcing 1 To open Economic Sourcing for a particular project product non TQS mixes only open the Products tab of the Projects screen Files gt Customer amp Project Information Press the button to open the Product Detail Information screen Go to the Miscellaneous tab and press the Economic Sourcing button To perform this process for a TQS mix please refer to the TQS User Guide 2 To open Economic Sourcing while processing an order press the button in the Scheduling section of the Order Entry screen 3 Initially the screen displays a list of plants on the map page of the project or order Choose whether to view only user plants defined for the current user or all plants Press the User Plants button to display results for the plants defined for the current
80. Spreader Functionality 23 Cartage Rate Tables No Minimum Pay BY 15 Nov 2004 D Data Maintenance Ticket Line Charges File 4800015 artage Charge artage Chrge l 11 Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality D Data Maintenance Ticket Line Charges File 2610999 imespreading imespreading Terms Code Modifications To allow for discounts Item Groups can be selected in the Terms Codes editor Terms Codes editor EDTTRMS D Terms Codes Tess Code Descrpucr ay Item Groups ETS IPpE J Deliver Evempt M a Vv E E a Vv a E temiaroup E ston Click on the Item Group selector button at the bottom of the Terms Codes screen to bring up the Items Group screen which displays all available Item Groups You can add as many Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality 12 active Item Groups to the associated Terms Code Select Lime for any Terms Codes you wish to be associated with the Lime Item Group you set up earlier Edit Orders and Tickets The following standard functionality rules apply when an auto product record is manually added to an order in Edit Orders and Tickets You can remove the auto product from the Order Line if necessary If the default quantity of the auto product in the IMST file is NOT zero or blank the quantity will be defaulted in the Order Line DFLT_LOAD_QTY ORDL and the UOM will be defaulted to the Order Line DFLT_LOAD_QTY_UOM ORDL as well If the defau
81. Suspend Order Reason Code is the label for the field in both cases Exception Suspension Orders can also be suspended through a Priced Orders Exceptions Report If a valid reasons code is entered in the Suspend Reason Code for Exception Orders field then any order that meets any of the specified selections will be suspended Suspended Orders amp Tickets Report If a company is to use suspension effectively a procedure to manage such tickets must be in place Without such a plan there is a risk that an order or ticket might get left in suspension limbo and thus never invoiced The Suspended Orders and Tickets Report lists any orders products or tickets that have been suspended from the system This information also automatically prints at the end of the Preliminary Invoice Register To print a suspended orders tickets report 1 Goto the Preliminary Invoice Register Selections screen Invoicing gt Preliminary Invoice Register 2 Enter the Report Name This lets you create a report give it a unique name and save the parameters by marking the Save Settings on Accept checkbox at the bottom of the screen 3 From the Report Type field select Priced Orders Select an option from the Report Sequence list to indicate the sequence in which invoice information will appear Suspending Orders and Tickets 201 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 From the Order Type field s list se
82. Suspended Tickets Addition Selection of Notes 224 Edit Orders and Tickets e Process Goods Returned Change Order to Metric Customary When an order is retrieved the system determines if it is a customary or metric order This menu command lets the user temporarily convert the current order to the other measurement system This conversion is done strictly for reference purposes you will not be able to save a customary order as metric or vice versa This functionality is also available on the toolbar Ticket Times When this option is selected the Time and Task Manager screen displays The Order Date and Order Code of the current order will be selected Tabbing through the remaining fields will display all of the tickets for the current order allowing you to edit all those ticket times at once Note The Time and Task Manager does not display tickets created in prep Reprinting Tickets This function only reprints existing ticket information it does not re calculate or update any information in the files The Reprint Tickets function is available in the Options menu in all ticketing screens as well as Edit Orders and Tickets The functionality of the screen depends on the screen from which it was called To reprint a current ticket If tickets are printed from the batch computer this option will restack the ticket 1 2 Enter the Order Date and select the appropriate Order Code 3 From Order Entry press th
83. The dispatcher can determine which is the best plant to schedule an order from to receive the most profit The Must checkbox states whether or not an order must finish Concrete orders default to a state of Must Finish when the mix is designed with TQS regardless of whether the box is checked or not For any other mix this check box must be selected in order to state that the order must finish To state that an order must finish check the checkbox Enter the Start Time the time the customer wants the first load to arrive This value will be used as the basis for all scheduling calculations To speed order entry you can just enter the hour for example 9 and tab through The system will automatically convert the 9 to 9 00 COMMANDeseries defaults to military time To override this default for example if you need to enter 3 00 pm enter 3p and press lt Tab gt Select a Truck Type This field can default from the Project file The field can be left blank if a specific truck type is not required The Scheduled Quantity will default to the Order Quantity You will only need to adjust this field if you use multiple schedules discussed later If you wish to suspend delivery on the order after a certain amount has been delivered enter a Hold Quantity Once this amount has been ticketed this schedule will be placed on hold Other schedules on this same order will not be affected The fields default from the Projects screen or from specific
84. There is a button to the right of the Payment Form field labeled with a dollar sign This button brings up a screen for additional information about the customer s payment For checks you can enter bank and check information for credit cards enter the last four digits of the card number the card type and expiration dates o Ifyou have multiple cash only payment forms the Payment Form field will activate press the drop down button to select from the list o A dialog box may appear with some sort of warning message Contact Credit Dept before taking an order for this customer Press OK to continue The Payment Form field will then display whatever method has been approved for the customer You may be prompted to select a payment form o Ifthe Customer has been assigned a No Sale credit code a dialog box reading No Sale will appear Once you select OK the order form will clear You cannot take an order for a customer with a No Sale credit code If you do not select a project the system verifies the customer s credit code and then performs one of the steps below as necessary To continue with the order you will need to enter a Delivery Address required field You may also enter a Purchase Order Job Number Map Page Zone Code and Additional Instructions as necessary If the selected customer has no projects the field will not be available If you have purchased COMMANDcredit a credit checking module additional credit mana
85. To Plant Code field 5 Enter the Estimated Minutes to travel to the new plant If the system has map pages entered the travel time can default from the appropriate map page Map pages are assigned to plants in the Plant file The map page must contain travel times from the origination plant to all other plants 6 Accept the screen On the Tracking and Scheduling screen the truck token will move to the Trucks returning section The arrival timer will indicate the entered travel time The truck code on the token may change color or there may be a flag in front of Tasks Conditions and Driver Overtime 183 the truck code or both depending on system configuration The plant code at the end of the token will reflect the new plant 7 When the truck arrives at the new plant end the deadhead task by dragging and dropping the truck into the In Yard section of the Truck Tracking screen The Deadhead condition color and or flag will disappear from the token Another way to do this is to access the Tracking and Scheduling Operations screen and select End Task Changing a truck s assigned plant by deadheading is a temporary change When trucks are reset at the end of the day the truck will be returned to its original plant If a truck is to be assigned to a plant for more than a single day change the truck s permanent plant assignment in the Truck file Managing Driver Overtime COMMANDeeries uses conditions to alert dispatcher
86. W C Ratio displays the ratio as calculated from the current mix design If the initial design has to be modified this field can serve as a reference to ensure that changes do not unduly affect the strength of the mix 338 Materials Manager Max Water The maximum amount of water that can be in the mix without compromising the mix s strength This value does not affect the calculated W C ratio on this screen This value can be entered manually or it can be calculated when a Job Water value is entered Caution Setting this value greater than the Mix Water value can compromise the mix design Lightweight Volume If the mix contains an item that is so porous that it is impractical to calculate a volume from the weight the volume can be manually entered here Note When the lightweight material is entered into the Item Master list it will need to be given a specific gravity of zero Mix Water SSD displays the total amount of non SSD water in the mix This value is derived from the Est Free Moisture content of all constituents and the Est Batch Water Target Yield Enter the desired yield Est Free Moisture Enter the estimated amount of free moisture Design Slump The Materials Manager screen can search for mixes based on the slump This field can be printed on delivery tickets Percent Air Volume Enter the percentage of air to be incorporated for the mix The system will multiply the percentage by the Ta
87. You must use the lt gt key on the numeric keypad After pressing lt Ctrl gt press the parameter The entered parameter will appear on the screen as gold text Because of their appearance these parameters are usually referred to as gold keys Automatic Database Updates The structure of the CS08 database is significantly different from that of V5 Variable length fields as well as the need for overflow tables have been eliminated These and other database improvements have improved database retrieval by as much as 40 The database conversion process has been substantially updated as well In V5 new database columns were simply added at the end of the table eventually resulting in inefficient table structures CS now stores the database model within special database tables When the program starts it compares its version with the version of the database If they do not match you will be prompted to run the automatic database updates These updates will restructure the database to match the configuration of the current version of COMMANDeeries 358 Data Management The system validates each table against the stored model and generated a SQL script to restructure the table as needed The SQL scripts write existing data to temporary files restructure and initialize the primary database tables and then copy the information back from the temporary tables DB Conversion Map gt CaS Sr The update process has t
88. a general rule these files are not suitable for importing into a third party program To export files 1 Open the Export Data screen Manage gt Data Management gt Export Data 348 Data Management Export Data screen DBAEXPR 3 Export Data a E x c csO6 import 2 Scroll through the table list on the left side of the screen and double click on the table s you wish to import or Select a table you wish to import and select the Export checkbox If you want to export all tables select the All button 3 Enter a File name if necessary If this field is left blank the file name will be the table name with the extension TXT 4 The default location of the export file s defaults in the Output File Location field detail on the field to specify a different location 5 Check the Show Selected Only checkbox to restrict the tables being displayed to the left to only those tables that have been selected 6 Accept the screen to begin the export process A progress bar will indicate the system s progress Import Orders amp Tickets Use the Import Orders amp Tickets function to load orders and tickets taken at a remote site into the primary system for invoicing The function loads order ticket files that have been created using the COMMANDseries Export Orders amp Tickets function To import orders amp tickets 1 Open the Import Orders amp Tickets screen Manage gt Data Management g
89. a screen for additional information about the customer s 62 Order Entry 10 11 12 13 14 15 payment For checks you can enter bank and check information for credit cards enter account numbers and expiration dates o Ifthe customer has been assigned a Cash Only credit code a dialog box will alert you The Payment Method field will activate press the drop down button to select between cash check and credit card o A dialog box may appear with a customized warning message Contact Credit Dept before taking an order for this customer Press OK to continue The Payment Method field will then display whatever method has been approved for the customer o Ifthe Customer has been assigned a No Sale credit code a dialog box reading No Sale will appear Once you select OK the order form will clear You cannot take an order for a customer with a No Sale credit code If this is not a project order the system verifies the customer s credit code and then performs one of the bulleted steps above as necessary If the selected customer has no projects the Project Code field will not be available Ifyou selected a project the Delivery Address Instructions Zone Code Purchase Order and Customer Job default from the customer and project files Edit this information if desired If you did not select a project you nevertheless must enter a Delivery Address before you can complete the order Enter a Purchase Order C
90. accommodate the new adjustment logic When the update is run you will be prompted for a date range The routine will update all adjustment batches within that range Load Order Line Delivered Quantity The Delivered Quantity field in the ORDL Order Line Item table is the sum of the Delivered Quantity fields on all of the order s tickets It is possible that the ORDL table can lose its integrity either through system or user error This routine recalculates the ORDL Delivered Quantity fields by summing up the associated tickets It is recommended that this routine be performed when upgrading from V4 to V5 as a precautionary measure The routine does not have to be run on all orders and tickets particularly if the user retains records in the database for more than a year General guidelines for what date ranges to update are as follows e Command Alkon recommends that the previous year s data be updated e Any dates that have not been invoiced that is the orders were entered and ticketed in V4 but will be invoiced in V5 must be updated e Any dates that have not been posted to COMMANDexecutive that is the orders were entered and ticketed in V4 but will be posted to COMMANDexecutive in V5 must be updated Data Management 367 Load Order Line Delivered Quantity screen DBAORDL A Load Order Line Delivered Quantity x Order Date Ir thru Order Code lf thru Regardless of the module from which this
91. be completed on the Configuration gt Defaults tab o E mail Host Identifies the email host o Email from Address Defines the address to be used in the From field on all notification emails The assignment file must be updated so that COMMANDeseries can access a required NET DLL The ASN Wizard will automatically add the line bin uauthlogin dll to the USER_3GL section If the system is configured for email notification and this line is not in place when COMMANDeeries starts it will prompt you to have your administrator run the ASN Wizard Transport Pricing In many European countries it is required by law to record and print the unit price and total price for any product and service at the product line level on pro forma invoices Previously COMMANDeseries was unable to support calculation of transport and other services rendered when no concrete is produced such as Pump Relocation when distance was a variable in the price Now COMMANDeseries can define such an item and price it using a Cartage Rate Table which will price the item properly in Order Entry when the order schedule is entered and the distance is defined e Discounts on Cash orders will apply to transport line items just like they do for any other kind of order line item The Item Code Description Price and Extended price will display on the Proforma invoice e Prices for distance based items can be modified until the order is shipped by changing the dis
92. been damaged in transit In these cases the existing order ticket can serve as the basis to create a Goods Returned ticket Invoicing gt Edit Orders and Tickets gt Processed Goods Returned in the File menu which is the form a driver uses to pick up items from the customer site This form can also be run at retail locations if the customer actually brings back the material The Goods Returned ticket then goes through certain phases Printed Verified or checked in at the plant At that point the Goods Returned ticket becomes the basis for a Credit Memo to be created Unscanned Hauler Tickets Report The Unscanned Hauler Tickets report identifies those tickets that have not yet passed through the Proof of Delivery steps You can specify the following ranges for the report e Ticket Date e Hauler Code Truck Code e Company Code e Shipping Plant Code Select Page Break Between Haulers to have each hauler broken down on separate pages Print Certification Text on Delivery Notes With the introduction of EN 206 1 in Europe for item certification companies are required to print certification information on delivery notes including information about the item that is plant specific and mix specific This information will inform the customer of a load s conformity to EN 206 1 142 Ticketing EN 206 1 is a European standard that specifies requirements for various aspects of concrete creation including but not limite
93. cash 0 15 shortage You are required to enter a note explaining the difference 11 Press Next The Final Step screen displays B Cash Reconciliation Final Step 500 00 Fred s Bank 77563 2 12 You may select two reports to run o Reconciliation Report o Uncollected Tickets Report 13 The screen will total all the available cash Specify the amount of Cash to be kept in Cash Box This amount will display as the Beginning Balance for the next reconciliation 14 Enter the Bank Deposit Reference The information entered will be determined by your company 15 Enter the Credit Card Batch Number received from your credit card processor 16 Press Done If you have selected any reports you will be prompted for a print model 17 Select your print model to finish the process Cancel Cash Reconciliation The Cancel Cash Reconciliation function lets you cancel cash reconciliation transactions 262 Cash Management The routine validates the Data Out Date field for each payment line being canceled you will not be able to cancel a reconciliation that has already been interfaced to a third party system To cancel a reconciliation entry 1 Open the Cancel Cash Reconciliation form Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Cancel Cash Reconciliation Cancel Cash Reconciliation form DBACNCR D Cancel Cash Reconciliation Ea Plant Code 50 Emmetten Reconciliation Date m 03 07 2008 Thurs
94. contained in this publication Command Alkon Incorporated assumes no obligation whatever to inform any user of the modification This publication may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Command Alkon Incorporated assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual This publication is intended only for the direct benefit of users of Command Alkon Incorporated products This manual may not be used for any purposes other than those for which it is provided Information disclosed herein was originated by and is the property of Command Alkon Incorporated and except for rights granted by written consent such information shall not be disclosed disseminated or duplicated in whole or in part Command Alkon Incorporated reserves all patent proprietary design manufacturing use and reproduction rights Command Alkon Incorporated 1800 International Park Drive Suite 400 Birmingham AL 35243 4232 205 879 3282 5168 Blazer Parkway Dublin OH 43017 1339 614 799 6650 www commandalkon com COMMANDeeries and the names of its components such as COMMAND concrete and COMMANDnetwork Spectrum Eagle and COMMANDbatch are registered trademarks of Command Alkon Incorporated All rights reserved Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation of Redmond Washington Contents Welcome to COMMANDCON Crete sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 13 Product Fe tureS aeg ee
95. corrections most companies rely on credit debit memos There are three basic approaches to performing a correction with Credit Debit memos e Credit Debit Memo with a per unit adjustment e Credit Debit Memo with a single blanket adjustment e Full Credit and Rebill You can control whether a Credit Charge based on Terms Discount is to be applied to Credit Memo Invoices and or Debit Memo Invoices at the point in time when the Memo is created Credit Charges represent an addition to a Customer s Invoice that can be taken off if the Customer pays the Invoice by the prescribed date Otherwise the Customer pays the Invoice amount including the Credit Charge Credit Memos If a customer has been billed incorrectly you can use a credit or debit memo to correct the charge and provide the customer with a record of the correction Once invoiced an order can no longer be edited however it can be used as a template for the credit debit memo streamlining the entry process Credit memos can be used to make small adjustments or they can be used to credit the entire order back to the invoice To create a credit memo 1 On the Edit Orders and Tickets screen enter the Order Date and Order Code of the order you wish to correct The rest of the fields automatically fill with previously entered details of the order If the order has already been invoiced a dialog box will appear 220 Edit Orders and Tickets Invoiced order COMM
96. data from the comm manager is processed by CMDseries Every time a comm manager is started it checks the CMCT table If the CMCT indicates that manager is already active the system will prevent the duplicate instance from starting Console The Comm Manager Console is located at Manage gt Data Maintenance gt Comm Manager Console Data Management 375 Comm Manager Console EDTCMGR A Comm Manager Console Comm Manager Network Mg Num Manager Name Status Update Date Computer Name Prompt Type o COMMAND signaling No Prompt Display Log ale 001 Libra Lane Number 1 No Prompt Display Log Jace Log DR Sege No Prompt Display Log J eeia 2 Stopped 06 30 2009 15 37 al ithomas104 No Prompt Display Log PurgeLog M7 Libra Asphak No Prompt s Display Log lag Log 039 Reports 17CP1 Landscape No Prompt v 666 Stopped 06 30 2009 15 59 aljthomasi04 No Prompt s Display Log Purge Log The list is populated by scanning the database for assigned managers signaling units order printers batch interfaces etc Once the list of managers is assembled additional information on those managers is drawn from the CMCT table and is updated every 30 seconds or whenever a manager is polled The console displays CMCT records with statuses as follows e Blank Either the manager has never been started or the last update time in CMCT is more than 24 hours old e Running The last status update time
97. double click inside the field to see a list of available products Once the list displays double click the appropriate item to select it The options displayed in the lookup list depend on the source of the list Project or Item The radio buttons at the bottom of the list control the display of available items o From Item Displays all saleable items in the system Accept the screen to return to the order lines The Description is taken from the Short description field on the Possible Items screen displayed above Detail on this field to display the Product Descriptions screen With this screen both the long description and the short description can be accessed and modified Changes made on this screen affect only the current order If the same item is subsequently added to a different order this information will default from the Item Master file IMST o Ifthe item is a constituent or mix the Batch Code can be viewed or edited Accept this screen to return to the Order Entry screen Product Descriptions EDTSHIP5 D Product Descriptions C30 ItemDesc f Description item Desenpton Short Descr fitemDesc Technical Desct En ese Purchase Order Number x Load Qty Aktemative Item 241541023 Altemative Item Description PIGMENT YELLOW SBCLAY Altemative Item Short Description 2nd alt T Ovemide Altemative Item Altemative Item Technical Descnption PIGMENT YELU Enter the Order Quantity This is the total
98. easier to incorporate HTML in document formats The editor TinyMCE is an open source HTML editor and is installed in the BIN tinymce folder The editor has been incorporated into the Document Format editor If the document format is e Order Print amp Data I O e Ticket Print amp Data I O e Ticket Print 154 Ticketing and the Print Method is Standard or Overstrike a new field Use HTML will display Document Formats editor D Document Formats If this field is set to Enable the Display button will change to Edit Pressing the Edit button will load the current document format into the HTML editor HtmlPreview Le H se HU sa esoe SL es Bl He EES SE zue rem Fontfemly Fontsze XBOORIAGIEELEREC O Cymm AAE EEE EEEE ET EE DI EERI SSt APs ome AAP TBO Documentation for TinyMCE is available at their website http tinymce moxiecode com index php Post Production Out of Tolerance Loads COMMANDeseries has been updated to increase flexibility to process Out of Tolerance OOT loads after production and to not include them in manual or automatic Ticket Out Ticketing 155 as a result these loads will not be sent to external third party Quality or ERP systems Instead COMMANDeseries will automatically cancel any tickets that have a Weight Comply Status of OOT Batch Confirmation logic has been changed to automatically mark tickets as Canceled when the Weight Compl
99. edit the task times as needed Accept the screen to save the changes or proceed to another tab Selecting the Add Occurrence button or lt F6 gt will create a task after the currently selected task Insert Occurrence or lt Shift F6 gt will create a task before the currently selected task Tasks Conditions and Driver Overtime 187 Preliminary Invoice Register The Preliminary Invoice Register is your primary price reviewing tool It has a variety of options that let you generate price information in a way that will best suit your business practices The Preliminary Invoice Register Selection screen actually provides access to two different reports the Priced Orders Report and the Preliminary Invoice Register What s the difference between a Priced Orders Report and a Preliminary Invoice Register When you physically look at the reports they look pretty similar The answer is the difference between orders and invoices The Priced Orders Report gives you pricing information on an order by order basis It does not take into account any invoice settings a specific customer or project may have You get one major report division for each order The Preliminary Invoice Register on the other hand simulates an invoice run It takes into account customer and project level invoice settings and gives you one major report division for each would be invoice Ifa project or customer is set to invoice by Project Customer or Order PO
100. exceeded o Ifthe Load Quantity exceeds the truck s maximum load size a warning dialog box will appear reading This truck is overloaded Do you still wish to ticket it Selecting No will return you to the ticketing screen where you can adjust the load size Selecting Yes will continue with the ticketing process o Ifthe Order Status is Hold Delivery Will Call Weather Permitting or Review you will be prompted with appropriate options Respond appropriately o Ifthe Load Quantity is small enough to trigger a Minimum Load Charge a dialog box will appear asking Do you wish to apply a Minimum Load Charge to this ticket Select Yes and the system will add a Minimum Load Charge to the ticket based on the selected charge table Select No and no charge will be added o Ifthe travel time for the load will put the driver over the limit for overtime a warning dialog box will appear Driver on truck message EDT overtime warning COMMAND concrete Q Driver on truck 1 will exceed rolling overtime maximum before this trip has been completed Do you want to use this truck Select Yes to continue with the ticketing procedure Select No to return to the Ticketing screen from there you can assign a different driver or truck or press the Overtime button to get a summary of the driver s current hours Once any questions concerning the ticket have been resolved the ticket will print The assigned ticket number will appear in the mes
101. expiration dates are not entered when a project is created The Edit Project Expiration Dates screen lets you edit expiration dates for multiple projects and specific customers This function provides quick expiration date changes to multiple projects as opposed to using the Project editor which retrieves one project at a time To edit a project expiration date 1 Go to the Edit Project Expiration Dates screen Manage gt Application Management gt Edit Project Expiration Dates 2 Inthe Customer Code field enter the code of the customer whose project expiration date you wish to edit When you lt Tab gt out of the field all projects related to that customer will display on the screen 3 Enter a new Expiration Date for each project as needed If the field is left blank the project has no expiration date and is good indefinitely 4 Accept the Edit Project Expiration Dates screen to save the new expiration date s Lien Legacy Invoice Manager COMMANDIiien is often bought or installed after other COMMANDseries applications have been up and running for some time These users need a means of assigning existing invoices to lien locations The Lien Legacy Invoice Manager provides a flexible means for doing this Based on the system configuration and on your selections the Lien Legacy Invoice Manager creates new lien locations and assigns the existing invoices to those locations To assign existing invoices to lien locations 1
102. extra product as in standard functionality 7 Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality Order Entry EDTCORD 3 Order Entry gx Ordet Date Eat Order Code Al zen ne e E ree Port 108 Customer Code pa A JOE FORDE Onder Type EGULAR IRS D Deliver To ime Lime Delivery point for the Payment Fom CHARGE z d Project Code 3000 Al COTTSTOWN Hot J Lot Block f MapPoge f Zone Code BR SUNDRY pes Delve Addess Deive To Dee Address 1 Deiverlo Ongnal Address 2 Instructions fin the matractons Mn Purchase Order Sales Ange G Agicuiwe Delivery Method M OELIVERD Item Code Description V Ext Price 2610002 Groime Oetvered Spread D f 23 00 to 00 g al 2610393 Line Speeaderman Service 2 1 00 s w F H Plant Must Stat Tek Ty Travel Temes Spacing Urioad Distance Load Qty Losd sihe C fien MS af a EE E a Rate Type Mrs Apart Weight This Product 0 00 to Weight This Osder 2309 to e Ifmultiple products in multiple tabs have the same service product each should be entered in the related tab even though they are the same product e Ifone tab has a mix product and an extra product they will both have the auto product as the same service product One auto product will be defaulted e Ifthe service product s item Sub Type is Spreaderman the Hauler field on the Order Header or Order Detail will be relabled Spreaderman o Ifthe Hauler Code Spreaderman is in the Order Information line one Spreaderman product will be enough for
103. extra products Only one item group is allowed per order For instance a concrete product block and a ready mix product cannot be on the same order but two ready mix products can be on the same order You will need to create different orders for different item groups even if they are delivered to the same customer or address The first product on the order line defines the main product if different types of products are added afterward they are considered extra products Each Schedule is entered on a new tab You cannot create a second schedule until you have filled out the current one Create a new tab via one of the following methods o Click on the tab icon o Press F6 while the cursor is in the schedule line o Right click with your mouse on the order and select Add Schedule Remove a schedule tab via one of the following methods o Press F5 while the cursor is in the schedule line to clear the schedule line then press F5 again to remove it o Right click with your mouse and select Remove Schedule Regarding Economic Sourcing when a product is entered on the Order Entry screen the product with the best cost for available plants will be assigned to the scheduling 44 Order Entry plant When an extra product is entered that is not available for that plant the system will find an available alternative product if possible You can enter an unlimited number of products on a single order Either detail on the field or
104. for the cash invoices Daily Invoicing 239 e Enabling the printing of cash invoices on a plant by plant basis Document Format Group The document format group should be created using the standard invoice print document tags Plant Configuration Anew field Allow Cash Sale Invoice Printing has been added to the Plant gt Communications tab Plant Communications tab 2 Plant Communication Information Werk Birsfelden Bim ke WE WE Print Server Device Selecting that checkbox will display the associated Setup button which calls the Plant Communications Setup screen 240 Daily Invoicing Plant Communications Setup screen Ei Plant Communication Setup 251 Manager Number Port Name d carfilesty SAVIN MAILAQOM I Selective Address LC Deutsche Di Auto Dial Flag Configure the invoice printer the same way you would configure any other plant printer Operations The Cash Invoicing feature is designed for two different situations e Invoicing cash sales at the time of ticketing e Invoicing cash sales at a later date Invoicing at Ticketing The Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping form has been updated to display a Print Ticket amp Invoice button under the following conditions e The plant is enabled for Cash Sale Invoice Printing e The current order has a cash based Payment form Concrete ticketing f Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping Daily Invoicing 241
105. generic mixes A base mix design can be entered and then adjusted as needed at each plant In order to use this feature you will need to create a dummy location and plant to act as a lab in which to create the generic mixes Creating the generic mix in a virtual plant prevents the generic mix from accidentally being sold or batched Depending on your circumstances Materials Manager 339 you may also need to set up generic items for use in generic mix designs A generic mix does not have to contain only generic items it can be composed of a combination of specific and generic constituents When creating generic constituents make sure that they are available only at the generic plant To create a generic mix 1 In the Mix Design screen enter a Mix Code This code will become the Item Code 2 Enter a Description of the mix 3 As soon as you lt Tab gt out of the Description field a box will appear Select your Generic plant in this example LAB and accept the screen 4 Set up the mix design as you normally would 5 Accept the screen to save the new mix design A generic mix can then be used as a template with which a similar mix can be created at specific locations Similarly any mix that exists at one location can be copied to other locations The Materials Manager will adjust the new mix designs to accommodate differences in the available constituents To copy a generic mix to a plant 1 In the Mix Design
106. in place at a target location Substitution Warning COMMANDseries eh Substitution Hem Code 28 was found for Item Code 29 at location 2 Ki Do you wish to use substitution or original item code 6 When the conversion is complete you will be returned to the Mix Design screen You can confirm that the conversion took place by confirming that all of the target locations are now included in the Locations scroll box Item Substitution The Item Substitution feature Files gt Item Information gt Materials Manager gt Item Substitution assigns a constituent at a production location as a substitution for a constituent at the Lab plant Once a substitution rule is in place if a mix design using the lab constituent is converted to another plant the system will automatically substitute the constituents you will be prompted to confirm the substitution It does not alter the batch weights even if the specific gravities of the two constituents are different To maintain volume use the item conversion feature To assign a substitute constituent for a generic one at specific plants 1 Open the Item Substitution screen File gt Item Information gt Materials Manager gt Item Substitution 2 Enter an Item Code from the lab location or detail on the field to select from a list Materials Manager 341 Item Substitution EDTISUB 3 Item Substitution The screen will display the System Lab Location along with the
107. in the yard and on the order that they are assigned to a specific order in the Ticketed status The truck number is colored based on the Pre ticketing color assigned in the Conditions setup screen to indicate that the truck is pre assigned to an order Round Trip Trucking is not the same as pre ticketing Pre ticketing involves queuing tickets before the load is actually batched or before the truck has even returned to the plant Round Tripping a truck establishes the schedule for the truck but does not automatically print tickets A Round Tripped truck however can be pre ticketed To schedule a round trip for an order 1 Go to the Order Entry screen Dispatch gt Orders 2 Locate the appropriate order and go to the Order Line Schedule Information screen by pressing the Scheduling button 3 Select Round Trip from the Options menu Options gt Round Trip Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools T7 Round Trip Trucks EDTORDRU 7 Round Trip Trucks Round Trip Yes O No C Remove Round Trip when Order Sched Oty has been met Number of Trucks Enter the truck code s you wish to round trip on this order or leave the field s blank to let the system assign trucks as they are dispatched Truck Code gt Mack 95 Truck Code gt Volvo 94 Truck Code gt DDAF 94 When the Round Trip Trucks screen appears select Yes for Round Trip 5 By default trucks assigned for a round trip on a schedule will continu
108. information Uncollected Tickets Report Selections SELUNTK Uncollected Tickets Report Selections My Uncolected Tickets Report D Unallocated Receipts Report The Unallocated Receipts Report lets users select a range of dates plants and customers and displays unallocated receipt information for each plant Unallocated receipts are defined as those that are not fully allocated and not removed from the system This is closely linked with the Allocate Payments to Tickets Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Allocate Receipts screen which allows payments to be allocated to tickets and receipts 308 COMMAND concrete Reports Unallocated Receipts Report Selections SELUNRC Bi Unallocated Rex eipt Report Selection Ma Unallocated Receipts Report d COMMAND concrete Reports 309 Each COMMANDeseries module has an Applications Management menu located in the Manage menu This menu contains options that will assist you in maintaining your system The Application Management menu provides access to application specific management functions used by the COMMAND concrete and COMMANDaggregate applications They are performed on an as needed or possibly periodic basis The forms accessed from the Application Management menu include e Calculate a Price Change e Mix Design Interface QA e Initialize TESYS Data e Batch Interface Queued Tickets e Batch Code Generator e Edit Project Expiration Dates e Lien Legac
109. information and defaults load quantities to ticketing e Allows change of delivery date e Allows typing of temporary tickets and test tickets e Allows for ticket reprint next ticket number display and ticket retrieval e Offers easy access to data through drop down menus and lists Welcome to COMMAND concrete 13 Allows project or job information to default into Order Entry so the order can be entered quickly Handles dumped and resold concrete Handles GST PST taxing issues for intangible products Prices products sold according to various pricing formulas These formulas include quotes by project customer discount etc Prices for minimum loads and other special charges can be determined Provides Sales Dispatch and Time Analysis Reports Computes taxing according to user defined tax formulas Creates a priced order register which prints price tax and extended orders for validation prior to editing the data Allows editing of all past orders and tickets Exports data to third party invoice accounting systems The data can be tailored as required Supports a caller ID interface to easily look up contacts when they call the office Welcome to COMMAND concrete How to Use This Document This section provides guidance so you can more easily locate information within our manuals Topics in this section Style Before You Begin Setting Up the System Starting COMMANDseries Accessing Help Add Occurrence
110. late or promised payment e Dispatch Memo Dispatch Memos are a specialized variant of customer notes that can be entered during order entry standard order level notes can only be entered against an existing order Dispatch Memos will be discussed at the end of this section 272 Customer Notes Entering Notes Customer Notes can be entered and accessed in a number of ways The most common method is from one of the following primary work screens Notes can be entered or accessed by Using the Salesmen Quote screens Order Takers Order Entry screens Dispatchers Batchers Ticketing screens Invoicing clerks Edit Order and Tickets screen A R clerks Transaction Detail screens Account Managers Customer Project edit screens Notes Button in Order Entry F Order Entry Order Date Customer Code Project Code 1 at fDlaal Since the above screen represents a new unsaved order it is not possible to enter an order level note Order level Notes should be entered as Dispatch Memos When the Notes button is dark as shown above there are no notes associated with the customer or project or order if the button is lit JJ there is at least one note present in the system Selecting a lit Notes button displays a list of relevant notes Pressing an unlit button takes you directly to the Customer Notes editing screen Notes can be configured to automatically display in certain situations For example if you ente
111. line success Receipt Code 1011 created Open Payments Open Payments are payments that are not entered during order entry or ticketing and thus are not allocated to specific tickets These payments are often entered prior to order entry but can be entered and allocated after the fact as well To enter a an open payment 1 Open the Cash Payments screen Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Cash Payments 2 lt Tab gt through the Receipt Number field Cash Management 255 Cash Payments oy x Receipt Number AUTO Plant 139 Customer Code Sree Project Code a Payment Date 06 May 2008 Transaction Type Payment on Account Payment Form z Amount Go Receipts _ Check Number _ S Sort Code a Account Number Ir Expiration Date j go Account Bank z Check Name oo Authorization Code ot Bank Agent vana Wana Muny 1 of 1 Records Add Remove Total for this Order AR Balance to Resolve IO Payment Required Total Payments 00 Invoice Reference eege Balance Due 00 3 Enter the Customer Code and if necessary the Project Code If this is a new customer lt Tab gt out of the blank Customer Code field to call the Quick Customer Entry screen 4 Enter payment information as described above Ifa single payment is made with multiple Payment Forms cash and check for example enter the payment information for the first payment form then press the Add button to display
112. logic has been invoked Plant Must Start Trk Ty Travel Times Spacing Unload Distance Load Qty Loads Products d O I Il ml EO To f Product Charges Schedule Loads Tax SP _Ticket RateType FOB J Weight This Product 0 00 Total Price Weight This Order 0 00 P Pamen When the order is completed press the Payment button If you attempt to save the order before entering a payment the system will inform you of the error COMMAND series xX Must enter a Payment for Cash amp Carry When the Payment button is pressed or when the preceding error message is acknowledged the Cash Payments screen will display Appendix H Counter Sales Cash and Carry 431 B Cash Payments The full payment amount will default into the Amount field The screen cannot be accepted if the Balance Due is anything other than zero When the payment is accepted you will be prompted to select a receipt printer Once the receipt has been sent to the printer you will be returned to the Orders screen From there press the Tickets button to open the ticketing screen Note For Cash and Carry orders the Payments screen must be accessed through the Orders screen It cannot be accessed from the main menu 8 Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping 432 Appendix H Counter Sales Cash and Carry e The Load Quantity is automatically set at the Ordered Quantity with no option to edit the amount Enter an FO
113. match is found the first available schedule is updated regardless of the plant To schedule an order 1 Ifthe order is part of a project the Plant code defaults from the Project record If the order is not part of a project specify the plant code for the plant from which you plan to ship the scheduled order when it is ticketed The Plant field defaults to the most economical plant choice for delivering this order This can be altered on the Economic Sourcing screen To help you choose a plant select the button The screen displays listing the costs for each plant and the difference in costs between them and the least expensive plant This screen calculates material cost and delivery cost for each plant for one unit of material concrete or aggregate and lists those plants in ascending order by total cost Economic Sourcing SELECON Economic Sourcing tem 99 Map Page Location E At Pricsily Plant kem Cost Slume Primary Variance Magn Mileage Std Haul Ko 48 Eiken 2500 2500 fo 35 fF Dm mp Dm Gm one 50 Ermetter 2500 2500 faim 35 TC Dm a00 om Gm 003 99 RUE Emmatten 2500 2500 ait 355 TC om em om om Du 2 Susan sTest 2501 2501 PSI um P 30 2300 om Gm D 251 Bisfelden LPI 2504 2501 PSI um P 30 gor pm aw DS A7 Birsfelden 200 2500 ao am TC om zem aoo aw Ko D0 Birsfelden 2500 2500 Dem Am CO Da 2 SusanfsTest 2900 2500 iea 255 TC 105620041076300 om Gm Ki 251 Birsfeklen LPI 2500 2500 now 255 TC 1056300 1076900 000 Gm 54 Order Entry
114. not created due to errors in the data If this should occur CA Service will help determine if such is the case this routine will prompt for a date range DBACTKX E Create TKTX record for ticket without any Mi E3 Enter Ticket Date Range to add TKT records for Order Date JJ thru Upon acceptance the form will create TKTX records for any tickets within the date range that do not have any corresponding records Existing TKTX records will not be affected Convert USCF to FCUS Records The older non NET based version of FNDCODE stored configuration settings in the USCF table The NET version stores its settings in the FCUS table This routine converts configuration settings from the older version of FNDCODE to the newer Update GUID fields for Integration The Item Master table IMST has been updated with a new field GUID Global Unique ID an ID code used by COMMANDedkx when synchronizing data between systems A GUID will be generated whenever a new record is created A new manual database update Update GUID fields for Integration will generate GUIDs for existing records provided that the GUID field is null Update EDX Synchronization A new field EDX Synch Status Code has been added to the Item Location table ILOC This field replaces the Item Status Code field for useby EDX in identifying records that are to be synchronixed via EDX This update will scan each ILOC record copying the Item Status
115. of Strength Codes in Concrete the Strength Code value will be taken from STRGTH_CODE ORDL and STRGTH_VALUE ORDL e All user defined order types are available for selection when you detail in the Order Types field e Select Include Page Break for Each Ticket to print each ticket record on a separate page e The report page header will be the same as the header for the existing Ticket Report e There is no separator such as a horizontal line after each ticket if you wish to have one set up it must be included in the selected Document Format e The report footer will be the same as the footer for the existing Ticket Report and will display summary and quantity information for the number of records selected Document Tags The following calculation document tags have been created for Ticket Print and Ticket Data In Out to enable printing of batch related information similar to what is seem on batch reports e WGTDIO Difference of Actual and Target Weights WTDFPO Difference of Actual and target Weights THEWAO Theoretical Water Content FRWPTO Free Water per Meter e TOTAGO Total Water in Aggregate e DOSWAO Total Dosed Water AMRLWO Amended Real Water e TOTAWO Total Actual Weight Being Batched e ACTPMO Total Actual Weight per m3 Being Batched TOBTWO Total Target Weight Being Batched BUTRPO Total Target Weight per m3 Being Batched e TOACEO Total Actual Cement e TOTCEO Total Th
116. of loads When the total load quantity does not match the order quantity you will receive an error message with the following options o Adjust Order Quantity The order quantity will be adjusted based on the total scheduled quantity of the product o Adjust Scheduled Quantity The scheduled quantity will be adjusted beginning with the first load all the way to the last load o Cancel Return to the order Apply Minimum Load Charges and Zone Charges are not editable on the Order Entry Pricing screen Ticketing Below is the logic for ticketing with Concrete Products 110 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools e The Pre Quantity and Cube Check fields will not display for Concrete Product orders e When a loading ticket is printed all quantities related to that ticket will be recalculated since the quantity may have changed after actual loading has been completed Inventory files will also be updated with these quantities e The delivered quantity is subtracted from the order quantity the next load quantities are then compared with the remaining quantity o Ifthe remaining quantity is greater than or equal to the load quantity the load quantity defaults to ticketing o Ifthe remaining quantity is not greater than or equal to the load quantity and it is not negative or blank the subtracted value defaults to the load quantity in ticketing e When a ticket is created with quantities other than the scheduled quantities e t
117. on the Material Cost field will bring up a new screen Project Product Standard Cost EDTPRDLB Typically costs are maintained for each item at the location level When an item is added to a Job Quote or Project for a certain location that cost is retrieved for the line item to show margins Some supply plants however do not maintain item information at the location level because they are not actual inventory keeping plants Therefore since no cost will be retrieved for the item at that location the Project Product Standard Cost screen lets users enter the cost for the item supplied at this plant so that target margins can be viewed Project Product Standard Cost EDTPRDLB A Project Product Standard Cost D Standard Cost Standard Cost Effective Date Si Previous Standard Cost Back on the Products tab select Total Margin from the drop down list located under Default Price Type The Total Cost will display the adjusted Total Cost including the effect of rebates and royalties on the Material Cost Rebates and Royalties 127 Products Tab Total Margin EDTPRDL1 oos Plant Name F All Products Fix Material Delivered Price Total Margin oof fizsisrorws E 2 8 Crushed Store E fFz_ o 200 When a Plant is changed for an item that has a rebate or royalty associated with it on the Products tab the Project Product Price Change screen will display with the below new warning message letting the user know
118. on the regular Tracking amp Scheduling screen If only one truck is required skip the truck spacing and populate the Trucks Required field with 1 Caution FOB orders are not displayed on the normal Truck Tracking screen but have a separate screen of their own Tracking will display FOB orders on the main screen please consult Tracking documentation for configuration details consequently orders that are inadvertently entered as FOB may not get delivered Please refer to the Tracking and Scheduling section of this manual for additional information concerning FOB orders Minutes Apart o Minutes between trucks arrival on site Enter a Truck Spacing in minutes The Unload Time value will default to this time but can be edited The Delivery Rate per Hour and Trucks Required fields will be calculated but grayed out o In all scheduling calculations or recalculations the system will make changes in order to maintain the specified Truck Spacing interval regardless of other factors Quantity per Hour o Tab through the Truck Spacing and Unload Time fields and enter a quantity per hour in the Delivery Rate per Hour field The Trucks Required field will be calculated but disabled the Truck Spacing and Time fields will also be disabled o Particularly with large pours the contractor is more interested in making sure that the mix is arriving at a steady rate This rate keys primarily on individual load sizes Quantity per Hour Unload Opt
119. or groups of data to select which notes to display For example if you want to display notes for Project Codes 10 through 50 enter those numbers in the Project Code fields The filtering is progressive the screen will initially display all notes but the list will be pared down as you add more filter criteria 3 Mark the checkbox next to Include Notes Marked Follow Up Completed if you want to see those notes 4 Mark the checkbox next to Include Notes Marked Note Completed if you want to see those notes 5 Notes matching the specified criteria display at the bottom of the screen Double click on a specific note to display the entire note Notes Listing The Notes Listing function lets you print selected notes Functionally Notes Listing is identical to the procedure for viewing customer notes explained previously the only difference is that the selected notes are printed instead of listed on the screen To print customer notes 1 Open the Notes Listing screen Files gt General Information gt Notes Listing Customer Notes 277 Notes Listing Selections SELCNOTE F Notes Listing Selections x Customer Code J thru Job ID thru Quote Code thru Project Code thru Transaction Code D o Order Date it Order Code th Entered Date three Follow Up Date hwu lalalala lale le lalele Note Reason Code thru Include Notes Marked Follow Up Completed Include Notes M
120. receive a dialog box to warn you that Load size is less than the Order Schedule Load Size by UOM Do you wish to ticket it Select Yes and the truck is ticketed and appears on the Tracking and Scheduling screen Do not load the truck yet 5 At this point the system has the truck assigned to the first order and will not allow you to re ticket it until the load has been delivered so to trick the system into thinking that 380 Appendix A Examples the truck has finished even though it hasn t even been loaded yet drag the truck directly to the To Plant status 6 Drag the truck to the second order When the Ticketing screen appears you are prompted with a dialog box that reads Truck is returning from order to plant do you wish to ticket it now Click Yes Double check the ticket information and press lt F2 gt to ticket the truck 7 The Tracking and Scheduling screen now looks something like this Tracking amp Scheduling a E H The black box where the truck number is usually displayed indicates that the truck has already been ticketed to a second order so that the dispatcher will not try to ticket the truck to a third order But the system thinks that these two orders are two separate trips Drag the truck back to the yard As soon as this is done the truck will immediately appear on the second order The truck can now be loaded with the total yardage for the two jobs and go on its way 9 Using this m
121. received SAP generated control number The control number is stored in the control_num TICK field A new Ticket Print Data Out document tag has been created to the field SAPCTL Description SAP Control Number Type Ticket print and Data in out Field control_num TICK XML Formats COMMANDseries This is the post that CMDseries will send at the time of ticketing to your ERP server The function this post is sent to will need to parse and send all pertinent information to your ERP server in order for the ticket to be printed All available fields are listed below and will be sent regardless of whether there is a value contained within the tag or not lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt lt soap Envelope xmlns soap http schemas xmlsoap org soap envelope xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance xmlns xsd http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema gt lt soap Body gt lt DTDSAPTKT gt lt TICK CMDSERIES gt lt TKTL CMDSERIES gt lt TLAP CMDSERIES gt lt DELV_QTY TLAP CMDSERIES gt lt CSTMRY_ DELV_ QTY TLAP CMDSERIES gt lt METRIC_ DELV_ QTY TLAP CMDSERIES gt lt DELV_QTY_UOM TLAP CMDSERIES gt lt CSTMRY_ DELV_ QTY UOM TLAP CMDSERIES gt lt METRIC_DELV_ QTY _UOM TLAP CMDSERIES gt lt PROD_CODE TLAP CMDSERIES gt lt INTRNL_LINE_NUM TLAP CMDSERIES gt lt TLAP CMDSERIES gt lt DELV_QTY TKTL CMDSERIES gt lt CSTMRY_DELV_QTY TKTL CMDSERIES gt Appendix F SAP On line
122. record must be removed Select the Tickets button The Edit Ticket Information screen displays The illuminated Extra Products button indicates tickets that contain extra products If the product you are trying to delete was delivered on multiple tickets you must remove the product from all of those tickets before you can remove the product from the order Select an illuminated Extra Products button The Ticket Extra Products screen displays Clear the Delivered Quantity field or change the value to zero and press lt Tab gt Accept the screen When you accept the screen the Price Quantity field will automatically be cleared as well The Price Quantity field will update automatically only if the Delivered Quantity field is cleared or set to zero If the Delivered Quantity is increased or reduced to a value greater than zero the Price Quantity must be manually updated If there were no additional extra products on the ticket when you return to the Edit Ticket Information screen the Extra Products button will no longer be illuminated If there were additional extra products the button will still be lit A quick way to confirm that change has been made is to check the Total Ticket price when you accept the extra product screen the total amount should be reduced Accept the Edit Ticket Information screen to store your changes and return to the main Edit Orders and Tickets screen Confirm that both the Price Quantity and Extended Cos
123. reused concrete against several parameters to ensure that it can be safely used with the newly batched mix The three criteria available are Strength e Maximum Aggregate Size e Difference in Load Times Setup Reason Codes Anew Reason Usage Returned Concrete Override has been created If you intend to give users the ability to override a warning you must create some reason codes with this new usage D Reason Codes Reason Usage Code Description JRemoved Item z fi Material Rejected Re Quality JRetumed Concrete Override 51 Strenath Difference is Acceptable JRetumed Concrete Override JY Time Difference is Acceptable JRetumed Concrete Override AGG Max Agg Difference is Acceptable Configuration A new button Returned Concrete Options has been added to the Configuration gt Dispatch tab This button calls the new Returned Concrete Options screen Returned Concrete Options EDTROPT A Returned Concrete Options 3 Mel x Validate Strenath Enable E Validate Max Agg Size Enable E Validate Load Time Difference JEnable z Excessive Time joz og Ticketing Action wam User and Continue X 438 Appendix J Validate Reused Concrete You can enable or disable validation of Strength Max Agg Size and Load Time Difference If enabling the Load Time Difference you will need to enter an Excessive Time value This value represents in hours minutes the maximum allowed difference between the batch
124. review the impact of the proposed change If the proposed change is accepted the details are stored to the database providing a change history for future review Log data is stored in the Material Manager Transaction Log Header MMHD and Material Manager Transaction Log Detail MMDT tables Note Changes made on the Item Substitution screen are not stored in the log To run a Constituent Replacement Log 1 Open the Constituent Replacement Log screen File gt Item Information gt Materials Manager gt Constituent Replacement Log Constituent Replacement Log screen SELMTMG 7 Constituent Replacement Log Blslk Plant Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15 16 17 Create Date thru Unique Number User Name Mix Code thru Constituent Code thru Materials Manager 343 2 The Plant Code field will default to all plants to which you have privileges Enter a plant or plants as needed 3 Enter a Create Date or date range to restrict the log lookup 4 Each replacement transaction is assigned it a Unique Number to serve as a primary key This number serves much the same as an order code or transaction batch number Detail on the field to get a list of all replacement transactions that occurred during the specified date range list of replacements note the unique number 3 Choices A Material Manager Transaction Log Header Unique number A Username Description 3 SYSTEM 4 SYSTEM Double clic
125. same information at the same time Normally when you are finished with the record either by accepting a screen or closing a screen that record is released so other people can access it If COMMANDeeries or the server should crash however there is a possibility that a record can get stuck in a locked status preventing anyone from accessing the data The Database Locks screen lets you see what records are locked and by what user If necessary you can terminate a user session releasing all records in use by that user You can only terminate a session from this screen on an Oracle system it you are running SQL Server this screen can be used to determine what session must be killed in SQL Server Manager Terminating a user session can result in data loss This function should only be used in an emergency Users must have the database permission View Server State to run this form if you do not have the permission the following message will display COMMANDseries CH One or more of the following privileges that are required for the Database Locks screen are missing VIEW SERVER STATE Recommend stopping and granting the privileges before continuing If the above privileges are missing then the Database Locks editor will not function property In addition Show Blocking User Name on the Configuration System tab should be selected To use the database locks screen 1 Open the Database Locks screen Manage gt Data Manageme
126. sample logic executes and the actual number of samples taken exceeds the maximum for all parameters the system won t request a sample e Statistics Statistical information can be hand entered or uploaded from the Fire Q system Field level security can be applied to all fields on this form Note Multi language support is provided for the Description and Short Description fields for both testing methods and testing families If your system is configured to support multiple languages those field will be stored in the TSME_LNG and TSTF_LNG subtables and retrieved as needed Item Testing Methods A new tab Test Methods has been added to the Items editor This tab will display only for mix items Sampling amp Testing Plan 117 Items Test Methods tab Ge ees P k a ees Technical Alternative Batch Item Codes Batching Constituents Automatic Products Quality Codes Test Methods Location 250 al Test Method ID 9004 consistence slump al Sample Minimum Maximum Actual Statisitics form Quality System Per m3 produced 200 Target number of samples 25 Per day 1 2 Actual number of samples 20 Per week 5 10 Start Date 01 Jan 2008 Per month 10 20 End Date 31 Dec 2008 Per year 20 40 1 Production Day equals 25 Cubic meters Samples recorded since End Date 4 1 Production Week equals 5 Days Total Samples 24 d el Concrete Family FS 00053 Betonfamilie Druckfestigkeit l _ FS 00053 Betonfamilie Druckfestig
127. scheduled for delivery This may include city state and code Although there is no practical limit to the length of the address that can be keyed into the system the physical printing space available on the order form and ticket form must be considered This field is required Detailing on the Delivery Address field opens a text box If you are interfaced to Microsoft MapPoint refer to the Microsoft MapPoint User Guide The Instructions field contains order specific instructions that can be printed on the order s tickets The text box allows for lengthy instructions however practically you are limited to the available space on the ticket These layouts are defined in the Document Formats editor Files gt General Information gt Document Formats The Zone Code may be required to establish cartage rates zone charges or tax authority The Zone Code value can default from a project or from a map page Press lt Enter gt or detail on the field to display a list of zones entered in the system The customer s Purchase Order number is optional by default to make it required go to either the Customer or Project screen and select the Accounting tab Check the Purchase Order box in the Required in Order Entry section If this field is required the entire field will be shaded Enter the Delivery Method Select a delivery method from the available list The Delivery Methods field identifies the order as Delivery F O B Various levels of detail can
128. screen or through the Ticketing screen Tickets are printed at the plant seconds after they are printed or typed by the dispatcher The dispatcher can generate tickets with as little as two pieces of information the order number and truck number Tickets can also be canceled reactivated or retyped You can also generate a ticket for a future day s order The following is applicable for users using the tabbed Order Entry screen with enhanced functionality e When the main product is selected for ticketing only products from the same schedule can be added to the ticket You cannot add main products from other schedules e Different schedules from the same order are not allowed on the same Journey When there is more than one schedule for the same order two separate tickets will be printed e Multiple mortar products can be entered on one order that has different schedules however a truck that carries only one mortar product to different customers must have different orders e Multiple schedules will not be allowed for block delivery Aggregate Ticketing e The Aggregate Ticketing editor will remain the same however the Delivery Method Hauler Code and Truck Code will be defaulted from the Schedule as opposed to the Order If any of these fields are blank they will be defaulted from the Order e When the Order Code is selected the product code and its associated information will be defaulted from the Item Code the first schedul
129. screen retrieve a mix that exists in the lab plant 2 Ifthe mix already exists at multiple locations make sure that the lab plant location is selected in the Location scroll box 3 Select the Convert button The Convert Mix screen will display Convert Mix screen EDTCNVT D Convert Mix 2501 2500 1 2 3 8 Convert From Location Convert To Location Existing Birmingham Plant Hoover Plant T Bessemer Plant C 4 Alabaster Plant Copy To All The screen will show the Convert From Location and the available Convert To Locations any location linked to a concrete plant In addition the Existing checkbox indicates locations at which the mix already exists 4 Select the locations to which you wish to copy the mix Use the Copy To All button to quickly select all available locations 5 Accept the screen to initiate the copy The system will validate the available constituents at each location 340 Materials Manager If there is a problem with a constituent such as missing information the system will display a warning giving you the option to skip that location or do a direct copy from the conversion location using that locations data Conversion Warning COMMANDseries gt Location 2 has constituents that do not have specific gravities set Ze Click Yes to do a direct copy from the conversion location click No to skip this location The system will also notify you if item substitutions are
130. specific gravity Materials Manager 337 Materials Editor screen EDTMTLS 7 Materials Editor Water Free Moisture The moisture available beyond the surface saturated density SSD amount This moisture does not affect the mix design but will require adjustments during batching either manually or with moisture sensors Absorption Factor This field is not currently used functionality for this field will be added in future releases If you are using COMMAND inventory the Receipts button will bring up information relating to the most recent material receipts for this item That information may be useful in determing the specific product supplier and or specific gravity Mix Design Screen Bottom Mix Design screen bottom EDTMDSN d Flatio The fields in the lower part of the screen allow you to check the validity of the mix as well as provide additional information about the mix for both batchers and drivers The live fields are optional and are for reference purposes only Min Cement Content A value entered here will give a batcher some guidance if manual adjustments of batch weights are necessary Est Batch Water The system will automatically calculate the water content of the muss non water constituents based on SSD moisture content and subtract that from the specified amount of the water constituents The result is the estimated amount of water that should be added during batching
131. the R button on any of the above screens to bring up the new Ticket Product Other Information screen This screen displays the rebate royalty amounts that were calculated and applied to the current ticket as well as the name of the contact associated with the rebate royalty The information can be modified or entered directly on the screen if desired Ticket Product Other Information EDTTPOI Ticket Product Other Information Rebate Contact Rebate Amourt Royalty Cortact Royalty Amount Update Costs amp Prices for Orders amp Tickets The Update Costs amp Prices for Orders amp Tickets process will update rebate and royalty amounts Reporting A new report under the Invoicing option in the menu has been created specifically for rebates and royalties This report will list any rebates or royalties that were actually applied to tickets This report will be useful to users as it is common practice that rebates cannot be claimed from their supplier nor royalties paid to the land owner until the material is actually consumed that is shipped on a ticket The Rebates and Royalties Report provides the basis for companies to file for rebates and pay royalties 130 Rebates and Royalties Rebates amp Royalties Report Selection SELRRPT zy Rebates amp Royalties Report Selections E Report Name e Report Type SEALE FES Report Sequence Rebate Contact Add Item Code Remove Order Date
132. the caller while on the phone The new Contact screen will be prepopulated with the incoming caller s phone number To edit a contact click the Edit Contact Information button on the far right of the contact line to open the Contact Editor for that contact Manual Lookup There are now two ways to manually look up a contact by phone number and by name A new search field has been added to the Order Prefix screen to allow for this functionality See the Configuration section for more information on how to set up this feature To search manually by phone number 1 Select Phone Number from the Search drop down list 2 lt Tab gt to the Phone Number field and then enter the phone number 3 lt Tab gt again to display information for the contact associated with the phone number entered Once you have successfully searched for a contact using either the Name or Phone Number option select the detail button next to a contact in the new Contacts section to display all customers projects and orders associated with the selected contact Contact Deliver To Customer Order Lookup Form A new form similar to the existing Customer Contact Project CCPOL form has been created for the Caller ID module This form called the Contact Deliver To Customer Order Lookup form or CDCOL for short will display Deliver To information in addition to Order Customer and Contact information for incoming callers Note Only users with Contract
133. the entire order to turn the Hauler label to Spreaderman o Ifthe Hauler Code Spreaderman is at the schedule line turning the Hauler Code label to Spreaderman will depend on whether or not the individual tab contains a Spreaderman service o Ifthe Hauler Code is changed to Spreaderman only Spreaderman haulers will display if you detail on the field o The Spreaderman field in Order Entry is required for entry e Ifthere is a service type of a Spreaderman item on the Order Line the Hauler Code must be entered as Spreaderman in either the Order Header or the Order Schedule based on the order s set up If you select a Hauler that does not have a Type of Spreaderman you will receive an error message Schedule has Service Spreaderman item you must select Spreaderman Hauler Type Cartage Changes Cartage Sequence Code Cartage Sequence Code has been added to the Cartage Ticket table CTTK as well as all associated child tables This sequence code allows you to have multiple cartage charges on one ticket If you enter an existing Sequence Code on the Cartage Ticket Edit screen the Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality application will retrieve the existing cartage charges If the Sequence Code does not exist you will receive an error message To add a new Sequence Code you must tab out of the cartage Sequence Code field the application will assign the next Sequence Code Note All cartage tickets created on this screen will b
134. the most frequently used option Use the drop down button to select a different option if needed See the Order Types section of this manual for additional information regarding order types 9 Ifenabled on the Configuration Project Frame Project tab the Deliver To field will display Enter a Deliver To code or Detail on the field to select from a list A Deliver To record contains delivery information to a specific site The Behavior of this field is determined by the various settings on the Configuration Project Frame Project tab 36 Order Entry 10 11 12 If this is a project order enter a Project Code Press lt Enter gt to display a list of projects for the selected customer Ifyou select a project the system verifies the project s credit code If you do not enter a project the system will check the customer s credit code Depending on the results of the verification the system behaves as follows o Ifthe customer has been cleared for charge orders only the Payment Form field will display Charge The field will be grayed out you cannot change it o Ifthe customer credit code allows for multiple payment forms a dialog box will display asking you to select a Payment Form Payment Forms are user defined Select a radio button and accept the dialog box The selected option will display in the Payment Form field The field will be active you can press the drop down button to change the payment option o
135. the relevant unit of measure and as a percentage of the target weight In addition to this the average actual material consumption for the batches selected in the report is also now calculated and displayed When the The Include Removed Tickets checkbox is selected removed tickets will be displayed on the associated report with a minus sign next to them The Remove Reason Code and its description will display as well Additionally the total volume will display after each ticket detail under both the Target and Actual columns Batching Comparison Report SELBCMP D Batching Comparison Report Selections Shipment Date By 0171272007 thu f 01 12 2007 Ticket Code thru Plant Code A oor thu xj foo Order Types v Al Company Code z foci thu sl los Customer Code sl thru Project Code sl thn Truck Code gt thru Product Code A IT Plant Summary Lines Batch Info Report The Batch Info Report is used to present data imported from the batching system This can be printed at the time of batching to present to the customer with the ticket It shows the customer a technical specification for the actual quantities they are receiving This is a very helpful tool to ensure consistent quality concrete for the customer 300 COMMAND concrete Reports Batch Report Selections SELBATR EB Batch Report Selections EX Order Date z 05 Aug 2008 thu m 05 Aug 2008 Order Code thru Ticket Code xli thru Batch
136. the report either Update or Cancel the replacement Add a Constituent To add a constituent 1 Select Add Constituent in the Adjustment Replacement Options field Mies Aggregates Cements Admives Weier Item Replacement Oriel Forsite peer ae E Flag amerg Corista Ka Aclestnerits Seite gah Cornstitant e lt Schiet 2 Enter the Item Code of the constituent you want to add 3 Accept the screen 4 Select a print model for the report Based on the report either Update or Cancel the replacement 332 Materials Manager Replace Part of a Constituent by Amount To replace part of a constituent by amount 1 Select Replace part of a constituent by an amount in the Adjustment Replacement Options field Mixes Aggregates Cements Admixes Waters Item Replacement ltem Code Description UOM Amount Percent seen ltem Code Description UOM Amount Enter the Item Code of the original constituent Gap Enter the amount by negative quantity of that constituent that you want to replace quantity of material will be removed and replaced with a like quantity of the replacement constituent Enter the Item Code for the replacement constituent Enter the replacement amount for the new constituent this value should be positive Accept the screen Select a print model for the report 2 Jm gt Based on the report either Update or Cancel the replacement Replace Constituent with
137. the system checks the credit code of the customer o Ifthe credit code is invalid the system notifies you and returns the cursor to the field so you can enter a valid customer and or project 6 Enter the Lot Block This field identifies lot block information for a project order This feature is a key component of COMMANDlien and is required if COMMANDIlien is licensed See the COMMANDlien User Guide for more information The Order Type can default from the project file Regular Sale will be the most frequently used option Use the drop down button to select See Order Types on page 75 for additional information regarding order types 7 The Order Type field determines how this record will be processed by the AR system 8 The Payment Form specifies how the customer will be paying Available payment options for a customer are determined by the customer s assigned credit code o Ifthe customer has been cleared for charge orders only the Payment Method field will display Charge The field will be grayed out you cannot change it o Ifthe customer credit code allows for multiple payment forms a dialog box will display asking you to select a Payment Form Payment Forms are user defined 208 Edit Orders and Tickets Select a radio button and accept the dialog box The selected option will display in the Payment Form field The field will be active you can press the drop down button to change the payment option o There is a butto
138. the system will display a dialog box stating that charges are being removed or recalculated o To change the charge rate on a charge other than a sundry charge detail on the Charge Table field and select a different charge table o To change the charge amount of a sundry charge enter an override in the Rate field 4 Accept the screen The system will display a dialog box stating that charges on tickets are being removed and or recalculated e Ifan unloading charge was added or modified Calculate Unloading Charges must be rerun to update the order The routine will replace existing unloading charges with the updated rates To edit delete charges at the ticket level 1 Retrieve the order in Edit Orders and Tickets 2 Select the Tickets button to open the Edit Ticket Information screen Ifa charge has been entered on a ticket the Charges button will be illuminated 3 Select the Charges button on a ticket with active charges The Ticket Charges screen displays The sundry charge information is grayed out and cannot be edited from this screen All 7 Ticket Charges 21238 1 00 1 00 100 00 41 00 41 00 10 00 changes to sundry charges must be made on the Order Pricing Information screen 4 There are a number of options from this screen o Acharge can be removed from the ticket by selecting the line and using the Remove command When the ticket is invoiced the charge is not printed on the invoice o Acharge can be
139. ticket codes Daily Invoicing 231 10 11 12 13 14 To specify tickets on particular orders enter an Order Code or a range of order codes To specify tickets for a particular truck enter a Truck Code or range of truck codes Enter a Plant Code or range of plant codes This specifies which tickets you want on the report based on the ticket s shipping plant Enter a Company Code or range of company codes This specifies which tickets you want on the report based on the companies to which the ticket belongs This is dictated by the order s pricing plant shown in the Price Plant Code field on the Order Pricing Information screen Dispatch gt Orders gt Pricing Enter a Driver Code or range of driver codes This specifies which tickets you want on the report based on the driver code This is the driver code shown in the Driver Code field on the Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping screen Dispatch gt Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping Select an Order Type s This option specifies which tickets you want on the report based on the order type This is the order type shown in the Order Type field on the Order Entry screen Dispatch gt Orders o Regular Sale represents all orders for which shipments are made and for which invoices will be created This may include both trade and some inter company customers o Incoming Material Dumped represents material dropped off for disposal O Job Transfer accommodates th
140. to 90 Workflow Projects Quantity discounts are validated when entering products on the Projects Retail tab No user intervention is required Order Entry Quantity discounts are validated during order entry whether in Concrete Order Entry or Aggregate Ticketing No user intervention is required Appendix L Quantity Discounts Invoice Prep Quantity discounts are based solely on order level ordered quantities If a customer gets a quantity discount but ends up receiving an amount less than the break point the discounted price will remain on the order unless the ordered quantity is updated Appendix L Quantity Discounts A Associated Products 51 Auto Caller ID 407 Configuration 407 Contact Deliver To Customer Order Lookup 410 Manual Lookup 410 Workflow 408 Automated Data In Out 351 B Bank Codes 247 Batch Code Generator 314 Batch Interface Queued Tickets 314 Batching for Third Parties 387 Third Party Company Document Formats 390 Third Party Customer Projects 389 Third Party Customers 388 c Calculate a Price Change 310 Cartage Operations Update Cartage Tickets 237 Cash Management Order Entry 251 COD Calculator 71 COD Recap Report 295 Comm Manager Console 375 COMMANDconcrete Reports 283 COMMANDseries NET FNDCODE 24 Accepting or Saving a Screen 20 Accessing Help 18 Add or Insert Occurrence 20 Calendar Function 31 Detailing on a Field 21 Entering Master File Information 17 Exiting COMMANDseri
141. to give to the third party customer A different ticket sequence can also be set up to differentiate between normal and third party tickets Appendix A Examples 387 Third Party Batching Process You invoice your customer billing customer Concrete Provider 2 The billing customer 3 You ship the order to your customer places the shipping customer that order with you on third party on behalf behalf of their customer of your customer shipping customer billing customer Billing Customer Shipping Customer 1 The shipping customer places an order with billing customer your customer Your customer billing customer invoices their customer shipping customer third party customer The diagram illustrates the third party batching process In COMMANDeseries third party batching is managed through customers and projects The Ticket Weights Data Out screen Invoicing gt Ticket Weights Data Out has also been modified to provide the ability to export tickets for specific customers or customer ranges where before it allowed only date and ticket code ranges Topics in this section Third Party Customers Third Party Customer Projects Third Party Company Document Formats Third Party Customers A third party customer must be set up as a valid customer in COMMANDeseries and then flagged as a third party company You then reference that customer within a project set up for the
142. to state that the order must finish 3 Enter the Start Time the time the customer wants the first load to arrive This value will be used as the basis for all scheduling calculations To speed order entry you can just enter the hour for example 9 and tab through The system will automatically convert the 9 to 9 00 COMMANDeeries defaults to military time To override this default for example if you need to enter 3 00 pm enter Ap and press lt Tab gt 4 Select a Truck Type This field can default from the Project file The field can be left blank if a specific truck type is not required Order Entry 47 The Travel Time fields default from the Project the Deliver To or from specific map pages The values indicate travel time from the plant to the site and back You can modify these times as needed for things such as weather or traffic The value entered in the Time To Job field is automatically duplicated in the Time To Plant field however the values can be changed If the values are changed from the default the fields will become shaded to indicate that they have been altered If the order is a non project order enter an estimated travel time for the drive from the specified plant to the job site and then back Good service and delivery efficiency are based upon sending trucks at the rate the customer can unload them There are exceptions but generally there is no need to send trucks at a 15 minute spacing when the unload
143. types of specification information are now accessible through the Files gt TQS Information menu e DC Classes Specifies Max Aggregate Size Minimum Cement Content and Maximum Water Cement Ratio e Strength Codes Specifies the minimum allowed Strength e Batch Book Types e Material Classes These records are edited in accordance with the required specifications For each mix the same fields are available on the TQS tab Constituents Automatic Products TQS Batch Book Type IT Strength Code Strength Value 025 30 230 00 Minimum Cement En Replacement foo Aggregate Size 32 0 DC Class LC XC22 Exposure Class Min Cement l Chloride Class l Approval Type Standard E 434 Appendix I Assigning Mixes to Technical Products Configuration A new field Look Up Alt Item By Class Option has been added to the Configuration Mix Mapping tab This option will force validation of the TQS item options in the lookup query for an alternative item A new button Alternative Item Control has also been added Pressing this button calls the Alternative Item Control Options screen This screen allows you to set the criteria for mixes assigned to technical products Statements Financials Projects Quotes UserFields Cartage Mix Mapping P Validate Alternate Item Batch Codes IT Look Up Alt Item by Class Optio Altermate ltem Batch Code Priority Prioritize With Primary Flag H Alternative Item Control Activate Mix Strength Warn
144. will be included 3 Enter a Credit Code or detail on the field to select from a list If the field is left blank all credit codes will be included 4 Accept the screen Purge Records Over time a large number of cash management records can accumulate within COMMANDeseries With this modification you can purge cash management records in COMMANDeeries freeing up space in the database A new screen Purge Cash Management Records Manage gt Application Management gt Purge Cash Management Records has been created to allow for easy purging of cash management records The only required field on this screen is the Payment Date As Of date field You can chose to include payments that have not been reconciled or interfaced yet by selecting the associated check box 266 Cash Management Purge Cash Management Records DBAPMTS 7 Purge Cash Management Records x Payment Date As Of TI Include Payments Not Reconciled Include Payments Not Interfaced Once you ve entered a purge date and selected any necessary checkboxes press F2 The below message will display COMMANDseries Q Okay to purge these records Select Yes to purge the records All PMTS Payment PMTL Payment Line Information PMTA Payment Allocation and PLCR Plant Reconciliation records meeting the criteria selected on the Purge Cash Management Records screen will be deleted Note If PMTA records are removed for at ticket the ticket
145. 000 3 4 3 8 cy 5000 00 I G 2 Open the Mix Design editor directly Files gt Item Information gt Material Manager gt Mix Design and either enter an existing mix or detail on the Mix Code field to select from a list Either method will achieve the same result Materials Manager 335 Mix Design Screen Layout Mix Design screen EDTMDSN ele lelelelele E zl d zl gd zl EE zj t EE EE EC Salen aisr TLZ YALE Siten mm The Mix Design screen is broken down into three major areas Mix Design screen Top Mix Design screen top EDTMDSN Loads the current mix into the editor iE More 2500 3 4 3 8 Loc 2 ge 2500 00 il The top area has general information about a mix mix code description location etc The button to the right of the Mix Code field loads the current mix into the Items editor so that non design information such as pricing can be added There is one important difference between the Mix Design screen and the Item Editor The Mix Design focuses on individual ICST records instead of the whole IMST record So the mix design on the screen represents a specific mix design at a single location The Location selector allows you to select any location at which the mix already exists once a new location is selected the appropriate ICST information is displayed Pressing the More button calls the Batch Information screen where batch information can be added to the design
146. 08 COMMANDseries CS MMANDconcrete Users Guide CSOs 3 12 3 27 13 Command Alkon Solutions To Build On Copyright 2013 Command Alkon Incorporated All rights reserved Command Alkon Incorporated believes the statements contained herein are accurate as of the date of publication of this document HOWEVER COMMAND ALKON INCORPORATED HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANT OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE In no event will Command Alkon Incorporated be liable for any damages including any lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damage arising out of the use of or inability to use any information provided through this publication even if Command Alkon Incorporated has been advised of the possibility of such damages or for any claim by any other party Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability or consequential damages so the above limitation may not apply This information is not intended to be an assertion of future action The contents of this document are for informational purposes only and are subject to change without notice Command Alkon Incorporated expressly reserves the right to change or withdraw current products that may or may not have the same characteristics listed in this publication Should Command Alkon Incorporated modify its products in a way that may affect the information
147. 2 Press Yes The conversion process will begin A series of progress bars will track the process In some cases it may become necessary to run the updates manually As a general rule you will only want to do so at the direction of your Command Alkon service representative All Database updates can be manually performed from the Database Updates screen 360 Data Management Database Update screen SELVERS ry Database Updates CU E E E E E 1 1st 17 e Initialize Required Tables This routine writes and deletes a dummy record to test that all fields are working correctly In some cases a database error can result in a table being stuck due to a error writing to the table The writing deleting of the dummy record has the effect of resetting the table e Add New Database Columns This routine analyzes the database determines if there are missing fields and if any are found generates a SQL script to rebuild to table to include the new field e Add Database Indexes Indexes are collections of related data presorted to make retrieval easier The system uses a number of views to speed retrieval of frequently used record types As information in the primary tables changes the indexes are automatically updated e Create Database Views Database views are built in queries used to quickly retrieve data They are often used as temporary workspaces in certain forms that draw from multiple tables For exam
148. 2500 1 2 3 8 cy E H 3 3000 3000 3 4 3 8 cy 45 o m H a 3001 3000 Wall Mix cy o H 5 3500 3500 3 4 cy 42 3500 00 Oo J H E 3m 3500 Wall Mix cy E F 3502 3500 3 8 Curb cy o H 8 4000 4000 PSI cy 45 4000 00 E CC 9 4001 4000 Floor Mix cy PR H 10 5000 5000 3 4 3 8 cy 5000 00 o ff va Use this tab to select the appropriate mix for editing If the list is too long you can add additional filters and press the Get Data button again The Notes column indicates if the mix has an item level note attached A black note indicates no note Double clicking the note will open a text box in which a note can be viewed if present edited or created The Selected flag is used to flag a mix as subject to an Item Replacement If the box is unchecked that mix will not be affected by a replacement The Add Occurrence button provides ready access to the Item editor Double clicking on any add occurrence button will open a blank Item editor the selected item will not be loaded into the editor The list can be sorted by any of the columns simply by single clicking on the appropriate column header Once you have found the specific mix you want to edit click on the associated line number The selected mix will be loaded into the Mix Design screen discussed below Constituent Tabs The other tabs on the Material Manager screen Aggregates Cements Admixes and Waters allow you to access the different constituents in your system It
149. 32 00 With An Estimated Profit 8 78 To use the Bid Price Calculator 1 Goto the Bid Price Calculator Misc gt Bid Price Calculator 2 Select a Customer and Plant for which to estimate bid price If available enter a Project and or Quote 86 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 3 Select the Product for which to estimate bid price The calculator calculates the price according to information set up for this product at the plant and customer level 4 From the Calculator tab enter the Average Load Size for the product This value represents the average size of a truckload of the product The unit of measure for the product defined on the Items editor Files gt Item Information gt Items defaults into the area to the right of the field 5 Enter the Travel Time in minutes from the plant to the job site This field affects the value in the Delivery Cost field As travel time increases so too does the cost of delivery 6 Enter the Unload Time in minutes to represent the amount of time from the truck s arrival at the site to the time the product has been unloaded This field affects the value in the Delivery Cost field As unload time increases so too does the cost of delivery 7 Enter the Average Days to Pay This value represents the average number of days the typical invoice will be outstanding in Accounts Receivable The annual percentage rate defaults from the plant file and represents the cost of financing th
150. 9 Enter a Delivered Quantity This value represents the amount of material delivered to the customer and controls usage reports and inventory Unlike Concrete tickets which allow for differences between the delivered Quantity and the Price Quantity the Price Quantity for aggregate tickets is automatically set as the delivered quantity 10 As soon as a delivered quantity is entered the system will calculate cartage charges for the ticket Press the Haul button to review haul charges attached to the ticket Product Cartage Charges EDTPREPR D Product Cartage Charges 103118102 CS Mar Item Code Description Price Load Oty Minimum Amount AGGHAUL AGG HAUL 0 00 EA 1 00 EA Surcharges Code Item Code Description Price Load Qty Extended Price E f If the order is configured to combine haul charges with the material charges text at the bottom will display reading These charges are included in the delivered price on the front screen They will not show separately Accept the screen to return to the ticket editor 216 Edit Orders and Tickets 11 Press the Times button to review enter ticket times for the ticket 12 Press the Other button to display the Other Ticket Information screen 3 Other Ticket Information Ticket Date 19 Jun 2000 Tax Code Birmingham Purchase Order 97462 Lot Block Delivery Address 1400 Star Lake Drive Delivery Method 2 Company Distance Job Phase Driver Employee
151. ACH Prod Page 3 Plant Payment Bank Payment Transaction Payment Reconciliation Deposit Code Receipt Date Agent Hethod Customer Name Type Amount Date Reference Data Out 10 10133 14 Oct 2008 HARGIE Check HDAVIS HDAVIS Cash Sale 1500 00 14 Oct 2008 Banking Detail Check Number Sort Code Account Number Account Bank Check Name authorization Code 52146 Bank 1 Allocation Detail Ticket Code Order Code Order Date Amount 10 10134 14 Oct 2008 HARGIE Credit Card HRDOOL HRDOOL Cash Sale 5000 00 14 Oct 2008 Banking Detail Expiration Date Account Number Account Bank Responsible Name Fathorisation Code 10 2011 85213698745631 Wachovia Bank Allocation Detail Ticket Code Order Code Order Date Amount Direct Deposits Cash Management has been updated to allow direct deposits These direct deposits will be recognized as a cash form of payment but will be handled separately during the Cash Reconciliation process from cash checks and credit cards Configuration and Workflow To accommodate the addition of direct deposits new fields have been added to the Cash Reconciliation screen Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Cash Reconciliation Before you can use direct deposit you must set up a payment form for direct deposit Note A new field DIRECT_DEPOSIT_CODE has been added to the PMTF Payment Form record to hold the new direct deposit information To set up a Direct Deposit payment form 1 Goto the Payment Forms screen Files gt Cust
152. ANDseries p Order has been invoiced 5006 Changes not allowed we j Note the invoice number provided it will be used while creating the credit memo If you do not get this message then you can edit the order directly a credit memo will not be necessary 2 To continue with the memo perform the Save As Copy function lt F9 gt to copy the order 3 Enter the Date for the credit memo and an Order Code number or tab through the field to allow the system to assign the order code If the date is different from the original order date a dialog box displays Do you want to retain the original ticket dates Select Yes or No as needed You will also be asked if you want to Revalidate prices answer No to that one From the Order Type field select Credit Memo 5 Once you select credit or debit memo the Order Credit Debit Memo Information screen displays Order Credit Debit Memo Information EDTPREPU 3 Order Credit Debit Memo Information _ Reason Code gt Credit D ebit Memo How should all quantities effect _ inventory and sales analysis Quantities on hand should be adjusted for all products v Comments Quantities on hand should be adjusted for all products U Quantities should be handled as damaged goods for all products No adjustment to quantities should be made for any products Prompt for this information with each product code entered 6 Ifa Reason Code is configured specificall
153. Add Occurrence button to the right of the Copy to All button A new design form will appear allowing you to enter a separate mix design You can scroll between these mix designs using the scroll bar on the right of the screen This feature may be useful if plants have different constituents on hand 10 If you want to add an associated product one for which the customer will be charged extra enter the product s Item Code Order Quantity and Trim Percent 11 The Mix Design Approved by Quality Control checkbox determines if the mix can actually be shipped Use field level security to restrict access to this field to QC engineers 12 Accept the screen to save the mix design and return to the Order Entry screen The Mix Design button will be highlighted to indicate that a mix design is present 13 Schedule and save the order as usual Appendix C Order Level Mix Design 403 The modified mix is stored at the user level and has no effect on the mix design in the Item Master File Once the order has been created the sequence of events is dependent on how your system is configured Design Interface QA The Mix Design Interface screen lets the user send mix product constituent information to a batching system After the selection parameters are entered the user is allowed to edit the list of products to be downloaded After the user is satisfied with the products to be downloaded accept the screen and the mix product information is d
154. B truck and ticket normally e Trucks configured as Delivered cannot be used for Cash amp Carry tickets e Ifyou exit the ticketing screen without generating a ticket the system will automatically cancel both the order and payment You will be prompted for a reason code Cancelling an Order Cash amp Carry orders can only be cancelled from one of two screens e Order Entry e Edit Orders amp Tickets When you attempt to cancel a Cash amp Carry order you will be prompted for a reason code as usual After you have entered a reason code the following screen will display COMMANDseries V This is a Cash and Carry order Ticket 181473 and receipt 30096862 will also be removed with reason code 10 Do you want to proceed If you reply yes then the order payment and ticket will all be removed with the entered reason code Appendix H Counter Sales Cash and Carry 433 Appendix I Assigning Mixes to Technical Products COMMANDeeries has been modified to allow certain concrete classes and specifications to be associated with concrete technical products When QC staff subsequently attempt to link specific mix designs with a technical product at a location the system will validate the mix design against the classes and specifications Concrete Classes amp Specifications Previously concrete class and specification data were restricted to users with TQS in the system license With this modification four
155. C ABC7 ABC7 This label indicates the database table view used for the lookup Trevor Bentley III Samuel Smith Ole Hage Billy Jones Sven Anderson Jim Smith Jim Smith To load a record double click anywhere on the line in the CS08 Uniface lookup you had to double click on the Primary Key field in this case the Customer Code You can also select a record using the up down arrow keys The screen supports basic Windows functionality e Clicking on a column header will sort the list on that column Clicking on the column again will toggle between ascending and descending sort order e You can resize a column either by dragging the separator between column headers which allows you to set the column width as desired or by double clicking on the separator which automatically sets the column width to the width of the longest field in the column e You can rearrange the columns by dragging and dropping the column headers e You can enter a different search string in the Fine Tune field the lookup list will update automatically Anything you type will automatically go into this field Options If you right click anywhere on the screen but the title bar the options menu will display Options Select Columns Save Settings Show Query About How to Use This Document 25 Select The Selection screen provides the ability to modify the selection criteria Lookup Select Aggregate ap
156. CT ROYALTY CONTACT SUBCONTRACTOR tele lee ede lt RW Rebates and Royalties 125 Item Editor Next go to the Items editor Files gt Item Information gt Items A new Rebates Royalties tab has been added to this screen so that rebate royalty information can be specified for different items This tab will only be available for Concrete and Aggregate item types If either rebates or royalties is not enabled in the Configuration editor the Rebates Royalties tab will display but information pertaining to the disabled feature will not display Items Rebates Royalties Tab EDTIMST Main UOM Conversions Sales Tax Override User Fields Locations Costs Rebates Royalties Location 43 Birsteld Rebate Information aE fective Dates Current Current Amt Previous Target Contact From Thru Amount Effective Amount Quantity 03 Sep 2008 23 Sep 2008 120 000 03 Sep 2008 50 000 150 000 Royalty Information H Effective Dates Current Current Amt Previous Target Contact From Thru Amount Effective Amount Quantity RE EN IEN ee T Copy to All Complete all fields for the relevant sections below o Contact The contact is the supplier or other rebate related entity for which a rebate is associated or in the case of a royalty is the landowner or other royalty related entity for which a royalty is associated Detail on the Contact field to select from a list of contacts Only thos
157. Canceling a Cash and Carry order will automatically cancel the associated ticket and payment Cash and Not Carry A Cash and Not Carry order is a standard cash order Cash amp Carry Configuration Credit Codes The Credit Code editor has been updated so that if the Credit Type is set to Cash only a new checkbox Apply Cash and Carry Rules will display Appendix H Counter Sales Cash and Carry E Credit Codes E oj sl Credit Code CC Description Crystal Cash or Credit tt ttsti i s S S Short JCCBLOCK Credit Type IR v M Display Credit Code Description IT Apply Cash and Carry Rules Exceed Limit Authorization Code Ir IT Allow Assignment to Projects Verify Credit Limits IT Orders Require Authorization Concrete X Do not exceed ordered quantity in ticketing a IT Require Project on All Orders 5 You will need to create at least one Cash and Carry credit code and assign it to your cash and carry customers Cash amp Carry Order Entry When a customer with a Cash and Carry credit code is entered in Order Entry whether it is the standard Order Entry Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping or Aggregate Ticketing two things will happen o Your Login Plant will default as the Schedule Plant The Schedule Plant field is not editable for Cash amp Carry Orders o A Ticket button and a Payment button will appear in the lower right corner that indicates that the Cash and Carry
158. Code value to the EDX Synch Status Code field Data Management 371 SQL Worksheet You can use an SQL script to execute commands on a database Normally you have to launch an SQL script program to execute a script COMMANDeseries provides an internal interface for running SQL scripts Do not run SQL scripts unless you are the system administrator Improper use of an SQL script can cause serious damage to the database To use the SQL worksheet 1 Open the Database SQL Worksheet screen Manage gt Data Management gt Database SQL Worksheet Database SQL Worksheet DBASQLW 3 Database SQL Worksheet K 2 Enter the SQL script command in the SQL Command box There are small variations in commands and syntax between Oracle and MS SQL Be sure to use syntax appropriate to your database 3 Accept the screen to execute the SQL script The messages from the SQL script will be displayed in the large message area 4 Ifyou need to connect to your SQL server using a login different from your COMMANDeceries username select the Connect button You will be able to log in using a different name The login screen supports usernames and passwords of up to 32 characters 372 Data Management Database Locks When a user accesses a particular record in a table the database locks that record so that no other user can access that record This lock prevents the chaos that would occur if two people attempted to edit the
159. Configuration minus 20 the system will warn you that you only have a certain number of tickets left for storage and will request that you resynchronize as soon as possible Once you have activated a ticket you will be presented with a Signature area and Accept Cancel buttons Tap Accept to save the ticket record update the delivered quantity on the order and print a single part delivery docket This means that the delivery has been confirmed Tap Signature to verify that the customer has accepted the terms of the ticket Press Cancel to remove the ticket Web PDA Tickets and Orders for Trowel Ready Mortar 175 Note The system will use the Order Code Order Date and Truck code as well as data elements from tables that reference those fields to calculate auxiliary data such as Minimum Load Charges Surcharges and Cartage Charge Pay Tables Note A modified copy of the existing ticketing error handling component is created to log all PDA errors to the import log file Details Tab The Details tab displays details of either an order or a ticket depending on which option you have selected EZ comManDlog 7 d 1130 amp Customer ABC Construction Inc 2204 Lakeshore Or Birmingham AL 35209 3000 3000 Ssk 3 4 lcy icy 176 Web PDA Tickets and Orders for Trowel Ready Mortar Controls Below are a list of fields on the Details screen depending on whether or not you are viewing an order or a ticket Orders
160. Creating Standing Orders from Projects ccccccescccescesseeeeseeseeeseetseeeeusensanes 67 Scheduling Standing Orders aiccnrswnscevsdaievad arana EEEE ENLA 67 3 27 13 3 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools assssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 70 Customer Project Order LOOKUP ENEE EEN 70 Th COD Calculator eege Ee 71 RV ee ENEE 72 Updating Projects from Order Entry sissiaseicvcianssiaeviviserssiacsevisoransecswsdaonnnien 73 Changing Units Of Measure dicen cinien aT EAEE AAT E AET OTE E a 73 Re moving Orders erbei 73 Copying and MOVING Orders vesscesdsesieudasndvaneranavadennuvedciyiatauveemensaieynecane 74 i Te 75 Suggested Shipping Plants ee 83 ENEE AEN senaaedd ven devsaacdbewissreeancideddeeneiad 76 ROUNG Trip TrUCkiNg gien g gek iert ee Eege 77 Truck Unavailability EE 78 dE ME dereen E E E E de 79 Creating a New JOUrney e ke EEN d dee EEN diada 79 Editing an Existing JOUrney eg teb e ge gbeNuEE REENEN EE Sie nindevedshende rests 81 Ticketing a Journey EE 81 Tr ck e tee NEE 82 P ring Methods EE 83 Order ee MTN e 84 Bid Price Calculator Lee 85 Order Level Mex DeSiIGh sexes gg KEREN Egeter SEENEN AEN kt gt 87 Product Sales Option EE 90 The Order Trees sitisivvssiiinersiccviactiusdioniiieelsadcsniaddaasawidiesianiscestacdlg a ia 92 Configuring the Order Tree scsi crs rerserceretcsemveserarenecsvactanrdveenarsennes 92 Right Click Mouse Functionality Using the Order Tree ccccceeneeeee eee eens
161. Credit Alert When dispatch enters an order that exceeds the credit limit of a particular customer the Credit Inquiry screen will appear before the system will accept the order The dispatch person can display shipped orders booked orders invoices and or receipts using the buttons but ultimately has three options Cancel Suspend or Override Appendix B Credit Checking 397 Credit Inquiry SYSCREX T SJ Credit Inquiry Select one of the following options Click the Cancel button to cancel the order Click the Override button to enter the Credit Override Authorization code Dispatch then calls the credit person responsible for supervising this customer s credit needs to get the password or phrase Credit Override Authorization SYSCREX1 Credit Override Authorization E4 Click Suspend Order if the credit department is unreachable and it becomes necessary to suspend the order until authorization is provided Enter the Suspend Order Reason Code Dispatch can return to that order at a later time without having to re enter the order Warning Screens Warning screens pop up when specific situations occur in order entry Depending on how credit is set up for individual customers different types of warning screens appear Remember whether or not warning screens appear depends on how the customer s credit code and credit type is set up in the customer file 398 Appendix B Credit Checking If the customer
162. Customer Notes EDTCNOT 7 Addition Selection of Notes cht x E E E E 5 C From this screen you can sort through all customer notes stored in the system Please see the Customer Notes section for additional information Re Verify Credit Limit Re Verify Credit Limit for existing non delivered current or future orders The current value of the order will be removed from the calculated Booked but not Shipped Amount of the credit limit and credit check will be done as if the order was a new order Current Day orders that have been delivered or past day orders will not be available for the Re Verify Check Limit option Default Schedule amp Pricing Plants in Order Entry You can establish default hierarchies for loading the Schedule Plant and Pricing Plant in Order Entry Setup Two different areas must be configured for this feature e User Schedule Plant Default e Configuration gt Dispatch Tab 96 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools User Schedule Plant Default Anew form Schedule Plant Default for Order Entry EDTSPDO has been added to File gt System Information gt User Schedule Plant Default B Scheduling Plant Default for Order Er DS User Group Group Name rr IT Do not Default Priority lt 1 gt M Priority lt 2 gt z Priority lt 3 gt z Priority lt 4 gt z This screen lets you establish a default sequence to be used in determining the Scheduling
163. Daily Warning The driver is approaching the limit for overtime e Daily Max The driver is now drawing overtime e Weekly Warning e Weekly Max e Rolling Warning e Rolling Max e Deadhead These default conditions cannot be deleted Drivers enter into the overtime related conditions when the flagged time reaches limits specified in their assigned Driver Overtime Table All other conditions such as deadhead time are linked to driver tasks Enter or edit Condition Codes in the Condition Codes editor Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Condition Codes Each condition can be tied to different manners of display on the Tracking screen A condition can change the color of a truck token add a flag at the beginning of that token or both Tasks Conditions and Driver Overtime 181 Tracking amp Scheduling All of these features come together on the Tracking and Scheduling screen to provide the dispatcher with a clearer picture of fleet operations and status In the following screen there are three truck tokens that do not have the standard token appearance Tracking and Scheduling Screen Tracking and Scheduling Truck 1 order 1 1 To job at 14 36 44 orders to load see ee e eee Here s how to read the warning colors on this screen keep in mind that colors and flags are user defined e Truck 267 currently assigned to Order 1 has had its ticket printed but for some reason it has no
164. Data Out Date is not blank excluding credit and debit memo tickets The figures displayed on the Calculation screen will not include quantities that have been added or edited for an order until changes have been saved Order Entry 53 Scheduling an Order When entering a delivery schedule in the system you need to make sure that the customer receives the ordered material in a timely manner without hindering the timing of your other deliveries The Scheduling section of the Order Entry screen lets you enter scheduling information specific to the current order This scheduling information is used in Dynamic Scheduling and Truck Tracking to help ensure on time delivery Many of the fields on the Scheduling screensdefault from other files primarily the project and items files Schedules are required for concrete orders Scheduling Logic COMMANDeseries creates a new load when the scheduled quantity is exceeded For example if a schedule is entered for 60 00 tons and each load is targeted for 20 00 tons COMMANDeeries creates three loads If a fourth load is generated an additional load shows on the Loads screen When multiple schedules are entered by plant for one product the shipping plant on the ticket determines which schedule to update For example three schedules are entered for one product Each schedule is for a different plant If a schedule is found that matches the ticket s shipping plant that schedule is updated If no
165. Detailing SmartLookup NET Fndcode Five Important Functions Style This document uses a style designed to help you identify specific functionality e Button names are capitalized and bold For example Select the Pricing button e Field names are capitalized and bold For example Enter the Order Code in this field e Forms also called screens or windows Menu names and Options are capitalized For example On the Edit menu if you select Volume Calculator the Item Code screen may appear first e Required user input examples use Courier New plain For example Enter 123 Main Street in this field e Braces and arrows gt indicate how to navigate to a specific screen For example To navigate to the Tickets screen go to the Dispatch menu and select Tickets from the drop down menu Dispatch gt Tickets Before You Begin The COMMANDeseries client runs under Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional Edition If you are not comfortable using Windows you will not feel comfortable using How to Use This Document 15 COMMANDeeries It would be helpful to spend some time acquainting yourself with the environment Certain functions are unique to COMMANDeseries To help you with these functions we have provided a COMMANDeeriesGetting Started in the Workplace manual This manual will show you how to work effectively in COMMANDeeries applications We encourage you to look through the manual before you begin working i
166. Dispatch gt Orders gt Options gt Prefix Screen To find information using the Customer Project Order Lookup 1 Enter a character group of characters or a specific name to search for a customer sort name in the Name field lt Tab gt to display the results of your search The system will search your entry for Customer Names not Customer Codes 2 If necessary use the field adjoined to the Name field to add single characters to the current search value 3 If desired enter a specific Project Code and or Order Date to narrow the search A dash in front of the date indicates that the order was canceled 4 The Customer section displays the results of your Name search As you highlight a customer that customer s projects are displayed in the Project section You may transfer a customer or project to the Order Entry screen by selecting the Detail button to the left of the display 5 Select the Orders button to display a chronological starting with most current list of the highlighted customer s orders Selecting the button to the left of the order opens the old or current order for copying or moving The list of orders will include every single order that customer project has ever had If your company does not purge expired orders on a regular basis this list can get quite long and may take some time to load COD Calculator Whenever a customer places a COD order the person taking the order must be able to tell th
167. Enter distance and travel time as necessary 5 This brings us to the Truck Spacing field They want 10 minute spacing but we want to alternate trucks between the two plants That means that for the plant 1 schedule we need a truck spacing of 20 minutes Enter the truck spacing 6 Press the Add Occurrence button or lt F6 gt It will look as though the schedule form has cleared but if you look at the upper left corner you will see that it now reads Schedule 2 Now enter the delivery schedule for the second plant If you need to refer to Schedule 1 use the scroll bar on the right side of the form to move back and forth between the two schedules 7 Enter Plant 2 for the plant Next is the start time The first load which we scheduled out of plant 1 arrives at 2 PA M and they want 10 minute spacing So we ll schedule first load out of the second plant for ten minutes later 14 10 8 The Scheduled Quantity will default to the remaining unscheduled order quantity in this case 1 5 M3 At the bottom of the form the ordered quantity now matches the scheduled quantity 9 Enter the Distance and Travel Time In most cases these values will not be the same as for Plant 1 If these values are not accurate the 10 minute truck spacing will not be maintained 10 Press lt F2 gt to save the schedule and return to the main order screen Note that the schedule summary only displays information for the first schedule Appendix A Exampl
168. Hauler Tickets Report Print Certification Text on Delivery Notes Greek Cancelled Ticket Print HTML Document Format Interface Post Production Out of Tolerance Loads Print Send Tax amp Cement Info to Batching System Record Sampled Tickets Future Day Ticketing Print User Defined Fields 134 Ticketing Ticketing Screen Use the Concrete Ticketing screen Dispatch gt to generate tickets If mistakes are made you can change the truck the amount of mix or the amount of item on a specific ticket after it has been generated using the screen Because a delivery ticket is a legal document care must be exercised in changing data on an already printed ticket particularly if that load has already been batched A batched load affects inventory materials used general ledger entries and other data within the system To generate a ticket using the Ticketing screen 1 Open the Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping screen Dispatch gt Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping Select the order you want to ticket by entering the Order Date and Order Code You can also enter an order date and detail on the order code field to select from a list of orders with that date o You can go straight to the Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping screen when entering an order by pressing the Tickets button on the Order Entry screen o Ifyou access the Ticketing screen for a project order through Order Entry and have the Allow Project Updates from Orders Ti
169. Integration in their license will be able to use this form 410 Automatic Caller ID CDCOL Contact Deliver To Customer Order Lookup Screen EDTORDRY Contact Deliver To Customer Order Lookup Certact Code Mame Addess City Phone Number Role Title Edit Geach Dew Totode losie he T Order Date al haoa el a Customer Project Sequence Detive To Code Customer Sihat Name Address Credit Plart ET e 58768 Tosch Daven at Hoicim Le 1007 DAVET 1 daves test customer 1600 Intemational Park Orders New Or Order File E Schedule Standing Order in Order Date Order Date item Code Delivery Auer e Search Select either Phone Number Contact Name Deliver To Code Deliver To Name or Customer Code to view those associated records The field next to the Search drop down will change according to what you ve selected Enter your search criteria in this field to bring up related records that start with or match your search criteria A Contact Deliver To Customer Order Lookup Search Del To Code v Deliver To Order Date Phone Number Contact Name Contact Code Delv To Code Address City Tuesday Dely To Name Customer Code e Customer Project Sequence Select this button to switch to the CCPOL form When you are on the CCPOL form the button will be renamed Deliver To Customer Sequence and will take you back to the CDCOL form when pressed The process flow for the Caller ID module rema
170. Invoice Register 9 Enter the Company to specify a company or range of companies to include on the Transfer Orders Register Report 10 Enter the Pricing Plant Code to specify a pricing plant or range of pricing plants to include on the Transfer Orders Register Report 11 Mark the Save Settings on Accept checkbox to save the report parameters All selections for the report are maintained and the report is saved as the Report Name 12 Accept the Transfer Orders Register Selections screen Preliminary Invoice Register 197 198 Preliminary Invoice Register Suspending Orders and Tickets Ideally when a question concerning the pricing of an order is discovered it can be resolved quickly Sometimes a problem cannot be solved quickly if the salesman is out of town for example it may not be possible to determine the correct price for an order This type of problem presents a serious problem Do you go ahead and print an invoice for a customer knowing that the invoice is incorrect Or do you place everything on hold until the issues can be solved Some companies choose to go ahead and invoice the order knowing full well that corrections may have to be made via a credit debit memo Other companies choose to suspend the disputed order ticket or product A suspended order ticket is not the same as a canceled order When an order ticket is canceled as far as the system is concerned no material was delivered When an order tick
171. LOAD_TIME TICK field and stored in the TYPED_TIME TICK field Configuration gt Dispatch tab EDTCNFXE System Defaut Distrib I E M J Deteult Prema Plant From User Login Plant M E If you select Let Ticket Typed Time Calculate Normally in this field the Typed Time will be calculated when the ticket is actually entered in the system Generic 2 Way Batch and Middleware Interfaces If the Configuration gt Dispatch tab s Future Day Ticket Typed Time is Use Schedule Time as Ticket Typed Time the following applies to users with Generic 2 Way Batch Interfaces and Middleware Batch Interfaces e The Ticket Date PET DATE TICK is the same as the Schedule Date e The Schedule Load Time is based on the future day s Schedule SCHED LOAD TIME TICK e The Typed Time TYPED_TIME TICK uses the same calculation as the Schedule Load Time Each time the truck code is removed from a ticket the ticket will be removed from the batching system as usual 166 Ticketing Concrete Ticketing and Shipping Concrete Ticketing and Shipping has been modified to display a dialog box when a truck is ticketed for a future day order asking you if you wish to print the ticket now or generate a future day order If Ticket Now is selected the truck will not be punched back in e If the truck is on another ticket and the truck status is equal or greater than the Earliest Pre Ticketing Status specified on t
172. ML ticket layout press the List button on the Document Formats screen You can manipulate all elements on the ticket by changing their Line Begin At and End At properties Press the Detail button next to each item to view more Ticketing 149 information on the Document Format Field screen Be sure to add the NTSTTX document tag in the Name field on the Document Format Field screen To change the placement of fields boxes lines and images look for those words under the Name column on the Document Fields screen If you wish you can add new fields boxes lines and images by pressing F6 4 Press F2 to save once you are satisfied with your changes Greek Cancelled Ticket Print In order to meet legal and fiscal requirements in Greece COMMANDseries has been updated so you can print a ticket that references the previous ticket and a unique auditing number This document can be printed for all cancelled and removed tickets in COMMANDeseries This auditing sequence number will be printed on the ticket and provides an accurate auditing trail for those tickets that have been removed or cancelled The removed cancelled ticket code will be used for external reporting printing and auditing purposes only Next Numbers Editor Enter the auditing sequence code for removed cancelled tickets as you would a normal ticket sequence number in a new Ticket Sequence field on the Next Numbers editor For information on how to set up Next
173. Number thru Single Loads E When the Batch report is run for multiple batches loads the averages and sum totals of the Measurement fields will be displayed in the following fields in a new Measurement section e Total Mixing Time average and sum e Mixer Time average and sum e Actual Power Consumption average and sum Concrete Temp average only e Ambient Temp average only In each case averages will reflect the sum divided by the number of loads Each average will be rounded up to the nearest whole number When no OLPD record is present the system will use the ILOC record for Recycled Water For solid material spec gravity the system will use CNF2 if no ILOC or OLPD record is present Order Audit Log Report The Order Audit Log report is used to view response data from customized prompts set up on the Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration The prompts appear upon acceptance of an order The Order Audit Log report shows user responses to customized order acceptance prompts The information can be sorted by order date order code customer code and or shipping plant Time Analysis The Time Analysis menu Dispatch gt Time Analysis has a number of options that can be used to generate reports that give information on the various timings recorded in the system Topics in this section Driver Times and Truck Times COMMAND concrete Reports 301 Order Snap
174. Order Entry 65 o Use letters If you enter a number for an order code there s a chance that the number will duplicate an existing order code If you must use numbers at least consider adding a letter as a prefix o Plan ahead The standing Order Code will become a regular Order Code when the standing order is scheduled it will show up on the Tracking and Scheduling screen When possible make the code descriptive customer code project code etc Continue to enter the standing order as you would a regular order 5 The Expiration Date field is the only field on a standing order that is not in a regular order Once the specified date is passed the standing order cannot be scheduled or ticketed This is a required field A quick way to enter future or past dates is to use the and keys If for example you enter 30 in any date field and tab through the system will automatically enter the date 30 days from the current date 6 Continue entering the standing order as you would a regular order When you are finished accept the standing order The Order Quantity on a standing order is the amount needed each time the order is scheduled It is not the total quantity for the life of the standing order Switching Between the Standing and Regular Order File COMMANDeseries order lookups can use one of three order files e Regular orders e Standing orders e Order Schedule This option displays individual delivery schedu
175. Orders and Tickets screen without editing the tickets If all you need to do is adjust the quantities involved all you have to do is edit the ticket Above all if you are adding an item to the order you must add it to both the order and ticket or the customer will not be charged The Edit Orders and Tickets screen is not intended as a Dispatch or Order Entry tool Orders for the current date can be edited and created however any order information entered in Edit Orders and Tickets will not be updated on the Tracking amp Scheduling screen If the current date is entered warn the user that the tracking system will not be updated To edit orders 1 Open the Edit Orders and Tickets screen Invoicing gt Edit Orders amp Tickets 2 Inthe Order Date field enter the date on which the order was shipped This can be the current date or any previous date The default value is one day prior to the current day 3 Enter the Order Code of the order to edit If the order code already exists current order information is retrieved and displayed You may also detail on the field to display a list of orders for the specified date If you are creating a new order using this screen tab through the Order Code field to generate a code based on Next Numbers or enter an appropriate order code the code will not be generated until the order is saved An order code can be entered manually but it is not recommended the manually entered code might c
176. Products I Use Reporting Units of Measure mM COD only TI Print Dumped Resold Information 2 Select the Report Options This field is used to specify what type of ticket report you wish to generate The valid options are o Detail Prints virtually all information related to each ticket o Summary Prints the minimal vital statistics for each ticket in a single line format This option is most appropriate for initial ticket reconciliation since the only goal is to account for the tickets o Missing Tickets This report identifies gaps in the ticket number sequence Such gaps can indicate that someone has tampered with the database 3 Select the Report Sequence This field specifies how to sort the report You can sort the report in one of the following ways Ticket Code Order Code Plant Code Order Code Plant Code Ticket Code o Other If you select Other the Other Sequence field will activate You can then click on the detail button to display a dialog that contains a scrolling list of other report selection options These include such options as sorting by order date ticket code hauler code etc The options here are restricted to fields within the ticket record D 0 0 D 4 Enter the Order Date This specifies a range of ticket dates to be included on the report The order date is the only required selection criterion on this report 5 To specify particular tickets enter a Ticket Code or range of
177. RE C Include Matching Orders and Tickets J N Enter an Order Date or range of dates or detail on the field to select from the Calendar Enter an Order Code or range of codes or detail on the field to select from a list Enter a Ticket Code or range of codes or detail on the field to select from a list Enter a Shipping Plant Code or range of codes Enter a Billing Company Code or range of codes oD En ZS Enter an Output File path and file name The default filename is ord mmdd txt based on the date of the exported records H Select Include Orders to include data from the order files 9 Select Include Tickets to include data from the ticket files 10 Accept the screen to generate the export file 350 Data Management Automated Data In Out The Automated Data In Out function lets you automate a variety of export and import functions Sometimes you need to perform exports on a regular basis but you should do it when there is no database activity Setting up permanent parameters in Automatic Data In Out functions will cause COMMAND comm to automatically perform these functions on a timed basis based on the N lt min gt for Data In and O lt min gt for Data Out switches in the COMMANDcomm command line If these switches are not set the default time of 10 minutes will be used The parameters in the Automatic Data In Out configuration will control the file names and formats used in these function To p
178. Removing or Reactivating Orders 73 Round Trip Trucking 77 Schedule Standing Orders 67 Scheduling an FOB Order 61 Scheduling an Order 54 Index Simplified Order Entry 61 Standard Order Entry 34 Standing Order Entry 64 Suggested Shipping Plants 76 Switching Order Files for Order Lookup 66 Units of Measure 73 Updating Projects from Order Entry 73 Using the COD Calculator 71 Order Tree 92 Order Types 75 P Payment Option Reports Unallocated Receipts Report 308 Uncollected Tickets Report 308 Preliminary Invoice Register 188 Printing a Detail Preliminary Invoice Register 193 Printing a Priced Orders Report 189 Printing an Exceptions Report 192 Product Sales Option 90 R Realign Accounts and Cost Centers 316 Rebates amp Royalties Reporting 130 Reports Generating Reports 283 Scheduling Reports 286 Time Analysis Reports 301 303 307 Round Trip Trucking 77 S Saving Report Configurations 188 Scheduling Journeys 79 105 Optimization 58 Scheduling Reports Order Schedule Report 286 Simplified Orders 61 Standing Orders Scheduling 67 Standing Order Entry 64 Suggested Shipping Plants 76 Suspended Orders amp Tickets Report 201 Suspending Orders and Tickets 199 Automatic Customer Suspension 201 Editing Suspended Tickets on Invoiced Orders 203 Exception Suspension 201 Manual Suspension 200 Releasing Suspended 202 T Tasks Conditions amp Driver Overtime 180 Conditions 181 Deadheading 183 Driver Overtime 180 Managing
179. Specific Gravity and Moisture Percent values for the selected item at the lab location 3 Enter a Location Code for which you want to enter a substitution 4 Enter the Item Code that will be substituted for the generic constituent The specific gravity and moisture percent for the item location will be displayed These are live fields and if a value is changed it will be written back to the Item Master when the screen is accepted Use the Add Occurrence command to enter additional substitution rules Accept the screen Select a print model for the report 2 N AM Based on the report either Update or Cancel the replacement To review or edit the existing substitution rules for a given lab constituent open the Item substitution screen and enter the constituent s Item Code 342 Materials Manager existing substitution rules 3 Item Substitution ltem Code 10 Specific Moisture Description Sand US Gravity Percent System Lab Location 1 Birmingham Plant 2 65 6 500 Locatic Substitute to Specific Moisture Code Wem Code Description Gravity Percent 2 Hi Sand Type A US 263 6 400 3 is Sand Type B US 267 6 650 4 OH Sand Type A US 2 63 6 400 Substitution rules can be added removed or edited using standard screen commands Constituent Replacement Log Whenever a replacement is performed the system generates a report prior to the actual change allowing you to
180. TL _VEN_CODE IDTL if field 010 Generic EU Link Enhancements The Generic EU Link has been updated to send the below new fields from the batch control system to COMMANDeceries Information contained in these fields will then be to COMMAND c using the standard interface tables This information is viewable on the Ticket Weights Confirmation screen which is discussed in the next section WEIGHT COMPLY _STATUS TICK Used to indicate ifa Load that has been batched is in tolerance These values will be sent in the new 015 Load Tolerance field in the Ticket Results Section o Serious Out of Tolerance 00 o In Tolerance 01 o Slightly Out of Tolerance 02 o Compensated Out of Tolerance 03 WEIGHT _COMPLY_REASON CODE TICK The Reason Code indicating why the mix was out of tolerance This information will be sent in the new 016 Load Tolerance Reason Code field in the Ticket Results Section e COMPENSATED CONSTITUENT TWGT Indicates if the component item was included in the adjusting batch to compensate for tolerance Sent as a T value in fields 260 through 275 in the Ticket Results Section e MANUAL ADJUSTING_CYCLE TWGB Indicates if the cycle batch is a manual adjusting cycle Sent as a T value in field 023 of the T015 Batch Results section MIXER LINE _ NUMBER TICK Indicates the Mixer or Line Number that was used to mix the load Sent in field 017 of the T014 Ticket Results section TRUCK_HYDRAULIC_PRESSURE TICK I
181. The delivery method is not blank and the delivery type is FOB e FOB The delivery method is not blank and the delivery type is delivered FOB AND the truck code is blank e Delivered The delivery method is not blank and the delivery type is delivered FOB AND the truck code is not blank e FOB The delivery method is blank and the truck code is blank e Delivered The delivery method is blank and the truck code is not blank Order Recap Report Selections SELRCAP 3 Order Recap Report Selections Report Type Detail Report Sequence Order Code Other Sequence Order Date 02 07 2008 Order Code thru Customer Code gt thru Pricing Plant Code Schedule Plant Order Types sl All C Use Reporting Units of Measure C Print Dumped Resold Information C Include Order Specific Customer Notes COMMAND concrete Reports 297 Plant Production Report The Plant Production report is used to show the volume of weighed product sold for each plant This report can be sorted by plant and hour A table will be generated showing the total weighed product quantities to be produced at each plant each hour Plant Production Report SELPLTP 7 Plant Production Report Selections Bl 02 07 2008 oh Customer Sales Recap Report The Customer Sales Recap report retrieves data from daily order and ticket records It provides a summary of the total quantity shipped for the selected customer
182. Ticket Creation 418 EE Ticket Removal 419 Ticket Reactivation EE 419 XML F rmatS gasii pisana E A E a 419 KRIER ANEN 419 ERP Server Output ee EN EEN AEN 420 Appendix G Batch Confirmation and EU Link Enhancements _ 422 e tee 423 e EE 423 Add New Reason Code eege g t fe dE NEES KEEN ee 423 Set COMPMGUPALION ege Eed dee ee 424 PANGS lt 424 Items e TEE 425 Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping Screen 7 EEN R RENE geed 426 EU Generic Link Field Updates ctiiwtinsscervssannnieeraavscinasiaxiansscasestasswasenness 426 Generic EU Link Enhancements veer Ee Eet ge ENEE EENS 427 Ticket Weights Confirmation witssaisancanicacessansewsdereinomassciacdduareaedneeedasboanwis 428 Ticket PriNt sesadean iaee geg EE E E AAE EE A EUNE 428 3 27 13 11 Appendix H Counter Sales Cash and Re de ANE 430 Cash amp Carry OYdErS ege Edge 430 Cash amp Carry eh e Tee NEE 430 Cash amp Carry Order Entry ite Ee 431 Cancelling an e E 433 Appendix I Assigning Mixes to Technical Products ssssnnnnnnnnnnn 434 Concrete Classes amp Specifications kee ENKEN SR EEKEE KEE NEE KEEN REN EE NENNEN EK EEN ENN 434 COMMOURAUON EE 435 an WE EEN 435 REASON COMES EE 436 Material CISSSES E 436 Items e e EE 436 Appendix J Validate Reused Concrete ees KREE ENEE NEE en 438 El ME 438 Reason ge TE 438 ConfgUraAtION gege EEN 438 Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality ee NEEN EEN NEE KEE Ne 1 OVETVIEW eniaint deu dE EENS EEN EEN NENNEN EUREN Ee
183. Ticket Interface 419 lt METRIC_DELV_QTY TKTL CMDSERIES gt lt DELV_QTY_UOM TKTL CMDSERIES gt lt CSTMRY_ DELV_ QTY _UOM TKTL CMDSERIES gt lt METRIC_DELV_QTY_UOM TKTL CMDSERIES gt lt PROD_CODE TKTL CMDSERIES gt lt INTRNL_LINE_NUM TKTL CMDSERIES gt lt TKTL CMDSERIES gt lt ORDER_DATE TICK CMDSERIES gt lt ORDER CODE TICK CMDSERIES gt lt TKT_CODE TICK CMDSERIES gt lt TKT_DATE TICK CMDSERIES gt lt DRIV_EMPL_ CODE TICK CMDSERIES gt lt HLER_CODE TICK CMDSERIES gt lt LOT_ BLOCK TICK CMDSERIES gt lt PO TICK CMDSERIES gt lt SHIP_PLANT CODE TICK CMDSERIES gt lt SHIP_PLANT LOC _CODE TICK CMDSERIES gt lt SCALE CODE TICK CMDSERIES gt lt TRUCK_CODE TICK CMDSERIES gt lt TRUCK_TYPE TICK CMDSERIES gt lt TYPED_ TIME TICK CMDSERIES gt LOAD TIME TICK CMDSERIES gt lt LOADED_TIME TICK CMDSERIES gt lt TO_JOB_TIME TICK CMDSERIES gt lt ON_JOB_TIME TICK CMDSERIES gt lt BEGIN UNLD_TIME TICK CMDSERIES gt lt BEGIN_UNLD_ TIME PRINT TICK CMDSERIES gt lt END_UNLD_TIME TICK CMDSERIES gt lt WASH_TIME TICK CMDSERIES gt lt TO_PLANT TIME TICK CMDSERIES gt lt AT_PLANT TIME TICK CMDSERIES gt lt DELV_ADDR TICK CMDSERIES gt lt INSTR TICK CMDSERIES gt lt USER_DEFINED TICK CMDSERIES gt lt CUST_ CODE TICK CMDSERIES gt lt PROJ_CODE TICK CMDSERIES gt lt SAP_TKT_ ACTION TICK CMDSERIES gt lt CUST_JOB_NUM TICK CMDSERIES gt
184. Truck 1 does not receive any message o Truck 2 does not receive any message o Truck 3 if active and not Ar Plant receives a message similar to 414 Truck Ahead Truck Behind Truck Ahead TRUCK2 Truck Behind TRUCK4 o Truck 4 receives a message similar to Truck Ahead TRUCK3 Truck Behind blank Cancelled Tickets When a ticket is canceled during ticketing the remaining ahead behind vehicle s if any no longer have the correct ahead and behind information Corrected information will be sent to the remaining active ahead behind vehicles if any in the delivery cycle for that order Configuration There are two elements to configuring this feature e Document Tags Formats e Signaling Units Document Tags Formats Two documents must be created for document type Mobile Signal Message Tag Code Tag Description Tag Type TRKSAH Truck Ahead Calculate TRKSBH Truck Behind Calculate Once the tags have been created a new document format TRKAHD should be created using the following parameters e Line 1 Literal Begin at 1 End at 12 Literal Text Truck Ahead e Line 1 Field Name Trucks Ahead TRKSAH Begin at 14 End at 26 e Line 1 Literal Begin at 30 End at 42 Literal Text Truck Behind e Line 1 Field Name Trucks Behind TRKSBH Begin at 44 End at 56 The document layout should look like this Truck Ahead lt TRKSAH gt Truck Behind lt TRKSBH gt Signaling Units
185. UMP 100 00 cy TMC KRERERERERERER ll TRUCK MOUNTED CONVEYOR 40 00 cy N DA Ei e Enter a Pouring Method code to identify the entry The code can be alphanumeric up to four characters in length Enter a Description of the method Enter a Short description of the method Enter an Unload Rate per Hour Detail on this field to select a rate UOM Press Add Occurrence to add another pouring method or accept the screen Order Hold Functions An order can be designated as a hold order in one of two ways The entire order can be placed in Hold Delivery status on the Order Entry screen Orders are generally not placed on hold when they are initially entered if the customer is uncertain that the material will be needed the order can be placed in Will Call status AHold Quantity can be specified in the delivery schedule When an order has a hold quantity value the order will display as a normal order until the hold quantity amount has been ticketed Once the amount has been ticketed the order is automatically placed 84 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools on hold When the customer confirms that more material is needed the order can be returned to normal delivery status The order hold function has an immediate impact on Tracking and Scheduling If an order has a hold quantity but that quantity has not yet been ticketed that order displays normally on the Tracking and Scheduling scree
186. Update Tickets now looks at the Cartage Flag on the Reason Code when updating Cancelled Tickets If the Reason code is set to NOT create Cartage then Cartage Tickets are not created If the Reason Code is set to Create Cartage then Cartage Tickets are created COMMANDinvoicing has been modified as follows O O O Preliminary Invoice Register and Invoice Print looks at the Invoicing Flag on the Reason Code when selecting Cancelled Tickets If the Reason code is set to NOT Invoice the system will ignore the ticket If the Reason Codes is set to Invoice the system will include the ticket COMMANDinventory has been modified as follows O Inventory Usage Update and Automated Usage Update Com looks at the Inventory Flag on the Reason Code when selecting Cancelled Tickets If the Reason code is set to NOT Create Inventory then the system will not create inventory transactions for the ticket If the Reason Codes is set to Create Inventory then the system will create inventory transactions for the ticket COMMANDexecutive has been modified as follows O O O Post Sales Data looks at the Flag on the Reason Code when selecting Cancelled Tickets If the Reason code is set to NOT include in Exec Report the system will ignore the ticket If the Reason Codes is set to include in Exec Report the system will include the ticket HTML Document Format Interface COMMANDeeries now includes a built in HTML editor to make it
187. Usage Report 299 Raw Materials Requirements Report 299 Ticket Reports 291 Truck Demand Graph 287 Edit Orders and Tickets 205 Credit amp Debit Memos 220 Display Taxes 227 Edit Orders amp Tickets Screen 205 General Order and Ticket Prep 206 Options Menu 224 Edit Project Expiration Dates 315 Index Entering Dates 19 Error Log Report 318 I Initialize TESYS Data 313 Invoicing 229 Calculate Unloading Charges 235 Create Orders for Separate Invoices 236 Reconciling Tickets 230 Update Costs amp Prices for Orders amp Tickets 233 J Journeys Creating a New Journey 79 106 Editing an Existing Journey 81 108 Ticketing a Journey 81 108 L Lien Legacy Invoice Manager 315 M Manual Database Updates 362 Maintenance Routines 369 Upgrade Options 363 Material Manager 322 Generic Mix 339 Item Substitution 341 Mix Design 335 Screen 326 Setup 322 Mix Design 335 Interface 313 404 Order Level 87 400 401 Order Level Ticketing 405 O Order Entry 32 Adding or Entering Products on an Order 43 Associated Products 51 Copying and Moving Orders 74 Creating Standing Orders from Projects 67 Customer Project Order Lookup 70 Economic Sourcing 100 Entering a Standing Order 65 Entering Other Order Information 41 211 Forecasted Shipped Quantity 52 Options Menu 95 Order Haul Information 38 212 Order Hold Functions 84 Order Pricing Information 39 209 Order Types 75 Other Order Line Information 50 Product Sales Option 90
188. While dispatchers and order takers frequently have to estimate travel time it is important that those estimates be as accurate as possible One underestimated schedule can disrupt the entire day s deliveries Order Entry 55 The Unload Time value will be calculated based on the Unload Rate the system will calculate the Unload Time for each load so that a 3m clean up load will be given a proportionally smaller unload time than a standard 10m This value can be entered manually however manually entered values are static no changes to the Unload Time will be made based on load size The system will use the information entered thus far to generate a delivery schedule Before it can complete the calculations however it has to know what to use as the primary means of measurement The options for the delivery Rate Type are FOB Freight on Board o Enter a Truck Spacing time in minutes The Unload Time value will default to this time but it is irrelevant The Delivery Rate per Hour and Trucks Required fields will be calculated but grayed out o The Trucks Required field will be cleared of data o The material will be picked up by someone else s truck Accordingly the system won t worry about truck availability For delivered orders something must be entered in either the Truck Spacing or Trucks Required fields If both fields are left blank the system will consider the order as an F O B order and the order will not appear
189. You can enter your company s direct deposit reference number in the Direct Deposit Reference field Both the direct deposit totals and the direct deposit reference number will be posted to new fields on the PLCR Plant Reconciliation record DD_DEPOSIT_AMT and DD_OVER_UNDER_AMT Reporting The Reconciliation report Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Payment Reports gt Reconciliation Report has been modified to include direct deposit totals at the bottom of the report Preliminary Reconciliation Report The Preliminary Reconciliation report Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Cash Reconciliation pulls information from the payment records currently loaded in the Cash Reconciliation screen providing a convenient means of reviewing the allocations before saving them Click the Preliminary Report button on the Cash Reconciliation screen to bring up the Preliminary Reconciliation Report selection screen 270 Cash Management Cash Reconciliation Screen DBACREC 4 Cash Reconciliation The Preliminary Reconciliation Report Selections screen is identical to the existing Reconciliation Report selection screen Enter any relevant information and press F2 to generate the report Preliminary Reconciliation Report Selections SELPCREC iy Preliminary Reconciliation Report Selections Cash Management 271 As companies grow it can become harder to communicate between different divisions The Customer Notes
190. a COMMANDcomm shortcut This field is not required if configuring a COMMANDnetwork service When you press OK the program will store the parameters and return to the manager screen COMMANDseries Service Manager File Help New Startup Name Status Type Executable Start In Start Parameters Auto Ticketing M Automatic A fdir D Y Refresh Am Exit JExecuteScCommand SC CreateService SUCCESSoOO x You can start services manually from this screen or restart the computer to start any automatic services Services can also be edited or deleted from this screen Auto Signaling COMMANDcomm supports a command line switch n time in seconds for auto signaling This switch adjusts the truck polling time and is intended for use in a test environment If the switch is not present the default value of 60 seconds will be used Data Management 379 This appendix contains some sample scenarios These are common tasks that most dispatchers or order takers will eventually face Topics in this section Multiple Loads on One TruckTwo Mix Products on One Truck Scheduling an Order out of Multiple Plants Batching for Third Parties Multiple Loads on One Truck Sometimes a dispatcher needs to send a truck to two different locations on the same trip either there s a site on the way that needs a clean up load or there are two small jobs fairly close together In this case there are two jobs tha
191. a Reconciliation Date Select a Bank Agent if necessary Select Payment Method s The Sequence Number will default based on the available sequences for the entered date If 000 appears then there are no sequences for the selected date Accept the screen and select a Print Model Uncollected Tickets Report The this report shows all COD tickets that have not been completely paid To run an unallocated tickets report 1 No KR La Open the Uncollected Tickets Report Selections screen Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Payment Reports gt Uncollected Tickets report Uncollected Tickets Report Selections SELUNTK 8 Uncollected Tickets Report Selections Report Name J e Report Sequence Ticket Code Plant Code lb Ticket Date Order Date Bl thru Company Code ll thru TT Save Settings on Accept If you want to save a report configuration enter a Report Name and check the Save Settings on Accept field Select a Report Sequence Currently the only option in this field is Ticket Code Select a Plant Code or enter a range of plants If necessary enter Ticket Date Order Date and Company Code ranges Accept the screen to generate the report Unallocated Receipts Report Just as the Unallocated Tickets report finds COD tickets that have not been paid the Unallocated Receipts Report identifies receipts that have not been assigned to any ticket s To run an unallocated receipts repor
192. a new Payment Form Enter that information and proceed When a single payment is made with multiple Payment Forms it is treated as a single payment for allocation purposes but when the Reconciliation Report is run the individual payment forms will be used to break out the cash properly 5 Accept the screen or press the Receipt button to process the payment Receipt Allocation During the course of the day orders are taken and tickets are created Cash Payments are made for the variety of cash customers In the perfect world all Cash Payments for a single day would be allocated to the Cash Tickets for that day In reality some Cash Payments may be left unallocated for future day orders and some tickets may not get an allocation thus remaining uncollected at the end of the day Cash Payments made at the time of Order Entry for Customers where the Credit Code field Verify Credit Limit is false are immediately assigned to the Order and allocated to its Tickets Other Cash Payments must be allocated to tickets manually The Allocate Payments to Tickets entry form allows for this process to happen The Receipt Allocation function lets you take previously entered payments and allocate them to a delivered ticket In this example we ll apply the payment taken earlier against existing tickets Cash Management To allocate receipts 1 Open the Receipt Allocation screen Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Receipt Allocation
193. actual amounts in the cash drawer The concept is similar to cashing out a cash register in a retail store The screen displays the various cash payments that have been collected since the last reconciliation breaking them down by Payment Type The dispatcher or plant manager totals up the cash on hand checks and credit slips and compares them to the screen totals When the process is finished the system makes a record of the balance results and the reconciliation date using that as the baseline for the next reconciliation In addition the screen displays unallocated receipts and uncollected tickets giving you the opportunity to apply receipts to the tickets as needed To reconcile cash 1 Open the Cash Reconciliation screen Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Cash Reconciliation Cash Reconciliation screen header EDTCREC B Cash Reconciliation Plant Code 251 BIRS Mx1 Cash Check Credit Card Reconciliation Date p Total on Hand Sequence Number Less Payments Logged Payment Types X Less Beginning Balance 500 00 Difference Over Under 0 00 0 00 0 00 2 Your user Plant Code will default 3 Enter the Reconciliation Date The system will only reconcile payments and receipts with dates that fall between this date and the previous Reconciliation Date 4 Select the Payment Types that you wish to reconcile Options are o All o Cash and Check Only o Credit Debit Card Only 5 Take note of the Less Beg
194. ad sequence and has not been dispatched Order Entry 63 o Weather Permitting The order is on hold due to unfavorable weather conditions It does not display in the load sequence and has not been dispatched o Hold Delivery The order has been put on hold for undelivered loads The undelivered loads are not canceled and should be shipped when the order is returned to a Normal status It does not display in the load sequence The loads that were shipped on the order can be invoiced in COMMANDinvoicing o Completed The order has been completed This may occur with loads remaining The remaining loads on the order are canceled and will not be delivered The order is not reflected in Truck Tracking The loads that were shipped on the order can be invoiced in COMMANDinvoicing 16 Use the Haul Pricing Other and Scheduling screens if this particular order requires special pricing haul or scheduling information that is different from the information in the Customer or Project file Select the buttons as necessary to edit defaulted project and customer information on the order level 17 Accept the Simplified Orders screen to save the order Standing Order Entry Some customers get the same material every single day To avoid having to re enter identical orders day after day COMMAN Deeries offers support for Standing Orders A standing order contains all relevant order information except for the order date and the delivery sc
195. addition to the ability to affect order suspension at the time of order entry a second means of automatic order suspension lets you run the Priced Orders Report with Exceptions and automatically suspend orders which meet the exception criteria To print a Priced Orders report with exceptions 1 Goto the Preliminary Invoice Register Selections screen Invoicing gt Preliminary Invoice Register 2 Enter a Report Name to save a new report configuration or select an existing Report Name from the drop down list This field can be left blank if you want to run the report with your own settings but do not wish the save those settings 3 From the Report Type field select Priced Orders 4 When Priced Orders is selected the Exceptions button will display Select this button to display the screen on which exceptions are specified 5 Check the exceptions to be shown on the report Enter a corresponding symbol for each exception for identification purposes on the report There are no restrictions on what character can be entered in the Symbol field However it is best to use a symbol instead of a letter or number to make the exception easier to see 6 Ifyou enter a valid Suspend Reason Code for Exception Orders all orders that meet any of the selected exception criteria will be automatically suspended using the entered reason code 7 Fill out the rest of the selection screen as needed 8 Accept the exceptions screen to return to the
196. ading and it will generate a list of necessary updates 362 Data Management D Update Calculator f Select the closest versions of COMMANDseries without going over your versions Version From v Version To v Suggest The automatic database updates modify the structure of the database Manual database updates modify the data itself The following database update routines fall into two categories Some are used to modify data in accordance with a specific change to the program Other routines are maintenance utilities designed to address specific issues that may be encountered during regular use of COMMANDeseries Topics in this section e Upgrade Options e List of Manual Updates e Maintenance Routines Upgrade Options Following are the current COMMANDseries Manual Database Updates The table below can be used to quickly determine what updates are needed for any given upgrade Find the customer s current version on the table When upgrading to the most recent version of COMMANDseries run the updates for the current version as well as any more recent versions Version Update V4 Update Roster List Update PRJO for Upgrade from 4 21 and Earlier Update Customer s Minimum Haul Flag from Version 4 Upgrade Update Customer s Ticket Charge Tables from Version 4 Upgrade Update Customer s Trade Discount Amount UOM form V4 Upgrade Update Prepayment Adjustments Linkage to Invoices Load Order Line Deliv
197. ag from the ticket before saving the recorded information user name and date time stamp will be cleared from the TKTL file What if the ticket is saved and then you clear the cube check field Reason Codes Next set up a new Reason Usage specifically used for Sampled Tickets on the Reason Codes editor This Reason Code will be used in both Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping and Edit Orders amp Tickets when the Cube Check flag has been selected Reason Codes screen EDTRSNC 3 Reason Codes Reason Usage Code Description Short Ticket Resolution Pmt x SKI Skip Hire SKIPHIRE Ticket Resolution Pmt zl ISMA Small Load SMALLLO Ticket Resolution Pmt TAM__ TRM Premium TRMPREK Ticket Resolution Pmt Se ai Waiting Time WAITING Economic Sourcing 007 DAVES TEST DT Economic Sourcing faav Inventory problem Jaay Haulage Adjustment H atlae Adiustmen ds Sampled Tickets EAM Sampled Ticket SAMPLE The Reason Code will not be interfaced to your third party system upon export In addition it will not be available for editing after the ticket has been marked as invoiced Ticketing Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping The Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping form has been updated with the new Cube Check flag Select this checkbox if the ticket contains a mix that is to be sampled Ticketing Concrete Ticking amp Shipping screen EDTSHIP Ad Remove When you select the Cube Check box you will prompte
198. all orders that qualify for an unloading charge If the information on the report is correct answer Yes to the dialog box that follows the report The unloading charges will be automatically added The charges will be added to individual tickets as specified in the appropriate charge table If the information is incorrect answer No to the dialog box that follows the report The unloading charges calculated on the report will not be written to the database However you may have to do one of the following o Correct any ticket times that are incorrect o Verify that the correct unloading charge table is assigned to each order and that the Apply Unloading Charges flag is selected on the order The customer or project information may need to be updated as well so that future orders are correct o Verify that the unloading charge table is configured correctly Daily Invoicing 235 Accepting the charges is an all or nothing proposition you cannot accept or remove individual charges from the list If you see some charges that you do not want to issue for a favored customer for example you have two choices o Cancel all charges edit the relevant orders so that they are no longer subject to unloading charges and re run the Create Unloading Charges function o Apply all charges then edit the relevant orders to remove the charges before invoicing An alternative means of using this feature is as follows 1 Configure and print the upd
199. all the architects in the system you could either e Press lt Tab gt until the cursor is in the Architect field then press lt Enter gt Or e Click on the detail button to the left of the Architect field regardless of the location of the cursor The act of bringing up a list of available choices whether by using the detail button or the lt Enter gt key is referred to as detailing on a field Some types of fields have specialized detail buttons such as date fields Example of a Date button Order Date How to Use This Document 21 Even though the button is different its place to the immediate left of the Order Date field lets you know that it is a detail button SmartLookup Many COMMANDeeries procedures involve entering codes It is important that you feel comfortable finding customer related information in the system These directions are based on an order entry screen however this procedure will work anywhere you have to enter a customer code SmartLookup is available for many fields which are linked directly to a database tables Standard Lookup To look up a customer code 1 Enter the first few characters of the customer s Sort Name and press lt Enter gt The system will display a list of all customers whose Sort Name begins with those characters Customer Lookup 3 Choices A Customer File C Records Selected By Sort name Customer code Name A Cadwell Homes 0 Cash
200. allows you to create relatively complex searches If necessary you can now export the lookup results either to an Excel spreadsheet or to Notepad using the buttons at the upper right of the lookup screen Exporting Lookups awm Both buttons export the current lookup screen using only the active columns Notepad exports will be semi colon delimited 30 How to Use This Document Export to Notepad P Temptmp127 txt Notepad File Edit Format View Help Customer code Name Sort name Contact name Invoicing name card de onsible name 1000 Alpha Construction ALPHA Jeremy Blanton EC 10000 ABC Construction ABCCONST Jim Smith 10001 Abernethy Contractors Ltd ABERNATH John Smith 10202 Advance Paving Contractors ADVANCE 3 10293 Ancon ANCON Trevor Bentley cu ee ee 10321 Arrow Construction ARROW Samuel Smith 10400 Action Building Contre ACTION Ole Hage ae 10600 Alabama Masonry Supply ALABAMA Billy Jones 310090 Anderson and Rivard Masonry ANDERSON Sven Anderson ABC ABC Jim Smith 3 ARC ABC2 ABC1 Jim Smith S ABC2 Jim Smith ABC3 ABC3 Jim Smith ABC4 ABC4 Jim Smith ABC5 ABC5 Jim Smith ABC6 Jim Smith ABC7 Jim Smith ABC8 Jim Smith ABCO Jim Smith The Calendar Use the Calendar feature in COMMANDseries to simplify date entries You can use it when
201. anage exe application The initial screen will show you all existing services COMMANDseries Service Manager Startup Type Executable Startin Start Parameters 2 Press the New button to call the New Service screen New Service lel ea Startup Type Luana Interactive True e Executable D cmdseries BINtcmdserieService e Start In fatcmdseriesjolients idir c somdseries clients cmdserie Parameters Reset A Name The name for the service COMMANDnetwork Mgr 32 etc Startup Type The startup method Options are o Automatic The service will be started with Windows 378 Data Management o Manual The configuration will be saved but the service must be manually started o Disabled Used for services that are temprarily unneeded Interactive An interactive service can be displayed on the screen Comm Managers and COMMANDnetwork cannot effectively unless these values match which is why this field is disabled in the individual service editor The value for all services managed in this program can be edited from the Files menu Executable In this field specify the path to the cmdService exe file or the cmdnetw exe Start In If configuring a comm manager specifiy the location of the assignment file This field is not required if configuring a COMMANDnetwork service Parameters If configuring a comm manager specifiy the command line parameters just as you would on
202. ance Load Qty Load Products His EF fiaco fea f sf 3 100 1o00f sai kmf zm Product Charges Tax Ticket j Rate Type ie Apart Weight This Product 300 Total Price Weight for this order 3 00 2 When you get to the schedule screen enter the plant number and start time The next field is the Scheduled Quantity Normally the total order amount defaults into this field however we will only be delivering 1 5 M3out of this plant Enter 1 5 and tab through Appendix A Examples 383 Order Line Schedule Information A100 C25 C30 KRANBETON Order Line Schedule Information EDTORDR4 Schedule 1 1 Distance zif 541 km Loads Plant Code lg Eiken Time To Job TE Start Time 14 00 Time To Plant 93 Scheduled Quantity 1 50 M3 Truck Spacing f 20 00 Hold Quantity M3 Unload Time 20 00 1 Loads Truck Type x 6a Delivery Rate per Hour 9 00 M3 Load Qty Tif 300 M3 Trucks Required 1 0 Job Wash Time 5 Rate Type Mins Apart D Pouring Method Rail Adjustment Type Always adjusted zl al Unload Rate per Hour M3 M Detaulito Evcluce tron Grtinereportin lucketina TT Apply Minimum Load Charges I l Total Quantity 1 50 M3 Ordered Quantity 3 00 M3 3 At the bottom of the schedule screen the Total Quantity field will indicate that you currently have only half of the order scheduled for delivery COMMANDseries will not accept any order until the total ordered quantity has been scheduled for delivery 4 Select a Truck Type
203. ance that the mixes can be approved by QC The following are some possible scenarios No Batch Interface No 3rd Party QC 1 Orders are entered with mixes attached 2 QC runs the Order Mix Design report for approved and non approved mixes 3 QC reviews edits and approves the mixes on the order If a mix cannot be approved the customer is notified and an alternate mix design is worked out 4 The approved mix is dispatched normally Batch Interface amp 3rd Party QC 1 Export the mixes to a mix design output file 2 Import that file into the 3rd party QC program 3 Edit as necessary 400 Appendix C Order Level Mix Design 4 Import corrected mix design file back into COMMANDeseries 5 Download mixes to batch panel The mixes are now ready to be dispatched Batch Interface No 3rd Party QC Program 1 Orders are entered with mixes attached 2 QC runs the Order Mix Design report for approved and non approved mixes Note The Order Mix Design Report is available under the Dispatch option in COMMAND concrete It shows what Order Level Mix Designs have been approved or not approved 3 QC reviews edits and approves the mixes on the order If a mix cannot be approved the customer is notified and an alternate mix design is worked out 4 Download mixes to batch panel The mixes are now ready to be dispatched Topics in this section Order Level Mix Design Mix Design Interface QA Ticketing Order Level Mix
204. are calculated based on the Seasonal Charge Table field Select the seasonal charge table using the detail button 5 To Apply Unloading Charges select that checkbox Unloading charges will be calculated based on the Unloading Charge Table field Select the unloading charge table using the detail button 40 Order Entry 6 Enter a Cartage Charge Table or detail on the field to select from a list 7 Charge tables have a default rate or rates If you want to change that rate for this order enter an Override Rate for the cartage charge 8 Enter an Override Pay Table or detail on the field to select from a list 9 Ifnecessary enter an Override Rate for the pay table 10 Enter a Surcharge Code or detail on the field to select from a list 11 Ifnecessary enter an Override Rate for the surcharge 12 If necessary select Apply Surcharge to Hauler Pay 13 Ifnecessary select Add Occurrence to add another surcharge 14 To Apply Sundry Charges to an order select that checkbox Sundry Charges are extra charges added to an order such as after hours delivery a weekend delivery environmental charges or a minimum ticket charge Sundry Charges provide you with a way to charge customers for purchases that exceed normal circumstances You can assign sundry charges at the project customer and order level 15 Enter the Tax Code for the plant order This field identifies the tax code representing the location where the load owners
205. are entering job types and need to enter a new one press the Add Occurrence button How to Use This Document Example of the Add Occurrence button 3 Job Types Job Type Description Highway Job Subdivision Detailing Many COMMAND series fields link to other data sources For example the Customer Code field on the Order screen is linked to the Customer file item codes to the Item file etc Such fields will only accept values that already exist in those linked records Sometimes you know what needs to be entered in these fields in those cases you can simply enter the data press lt Tab gt and move on However sometimes you need to look up the appropriate entry such as a Customer Code an Item a charge table etc If you need to look up an value from a list of available options press lt Enter gt A form will display a list of selections available for that field Some fields allow for more advanced lookup options These options are discussed in the next section SmartLookup Some fields also have small buttons next to them that have the same effect Example of fields with detail buttons Owner sl Baptist Church Architect gt JFasenden Architechs Engineer gt JLindhurst Engineering GeneralContractor aus Anderson These small buttons are called detail buttons Clicking on the detail button will do the same thing as pressing the lt Enter gt key In this example to retrieve a list of
206. ark the Save Settings on Accept checkbox to save the report parameters All selections for the report are maintained and the report is saved as the Report Name Accept the screen Select a print model from the Possible Print Models screen Select a printer using the scrollable list Releasing Suspended Orders amp Tickets A method of automatically releasing orders is available on the Preliminary Invoice Register Priced Orders report A Release Suspended Orders Tickets checkbox lets you invoice immediately after the receipt has run This functionality also lets you enter a limited range of suspended order reason codes This constraint will be relevant for both reporting and releasing orders To release a group of suspended orders tickets 1 Go to the Preliminary Invoice Register Selections screen Invoicing gt Preliminary Invoice Register Set the Report Type to Priced Orders Fill out the form to define a range of orders 202 Suspending Orders and Tickets 4 If desired enter a Suspend Reason Code or range of reason codes to further restrict the suspended orders affected 5 Select the Release Suspended Orders Tickets checkbox This field only displays when running the Priced Orders Report Accept the screen Select a print model from the Possible Print Models screen Select a printer using the scrollable list DNA Once the printing of the report is complete the Release Suspended Orders Tickets screen appear
207. arked Note Completed The fields in the top portion of the screen let you choose data or groups of data to select which notes display For example if you want to display notes for Project Codes 10 through 50 enter those numbers in the Project Code fields Mark the checkbox next to Include Notes Marked Follow Up Completed if you want to see those notes A Receivables clerk for example might run a listing once a week to return a list of notes for which follow up calls are required this week Mark the checkbox next to Include Notes Marked Note Completed if you want to see those notes Accept the screen The Print Models screen appears Select the appropriate print model to generate and print the Notes Listing Dispatch Memos in Order Entry COMMANDeeries provides an easy means to add dispatch level notes to orders Users can enter dispatch memos on the standard simplified order screens and on the Concrete Ticketing screen Notes can be added while an order is being entered Order specific notes including dispatch memos can be printed on several dispatch reports This feature is intended for concrete orders While dispatch memos can be entered on an ageregate order from the standard orders screen they cannot be added from the various dispatching and ticketing screens Configuration Even though they are entered differently dispatch memos are stored as order level customer notes Some configuration is
208. assigned username in the User field and press lt Tab gt 2 Enter the assigned Password and press lt Tab gt The COMMANDeeries application module opens Exiting COMMANDseries There are several ways to exit COMMANDeeries e Click the Exit button in the upper right portion of the screen X e Press lt Alt F4 gt e Select Exit from the leftmost menu The name of the menu depends on the current module in Concrete or Aggregate for example it s Dispatch but in Receivables it s Transactions A screen appears which asks you to confirm that you want to close the program entirely restart the program entirely or close all open forms and log on as another user Entering Master File Information Once inside the application you will find that most of the screens used to enter Master File information are located in the Files menu The menu options under the Files menu vary from module to module If for example you want to create or modify A R accounting periods you need to be in either COMMANDinvoicing or COMMAND receivables A R Accounting Periods will not be an option if you are in COMMANDconcrete How to Use This Document 17 Toolbars Use the mouse to quickly execute common commands The Toolbar displays changes according to the necessary commands for the current active screen To identify an icon point to the button and note the tool tip that appears Toolbar Icons AN H amp G x Concrete z Customary z E 7 0
209. at difference by several thousand and you can better appreciate the practice The downside of this method is that previously if you were to retrieve an item category record in Data Maintenance all that would be listed in the Item Type field would be a number which doesn t help 28 How to Use This Document The new Lookup screen can include both the field value and the associated label for code list fields To enable this feature you simply have to import data into two tables CDLS Code Lists and MSGS Messages These two files are located in the CMDSERIES Import folder Once they have been imported code list fields will be displayed in the lookup field by the description followed by the code in parentheses ltem category Record 1 of 47 Code Lists Item Type ICAT Item Category File Description CRY1 Concrete Metric Concrete US Cement Metric Cement US Cementitious Materials Metric Cementitious Materials US Sand Metric Sand US Coarse ggregates Metric Coarse Aggregates US Water Metric Water US Air Entraining Agent Metric Air Entraining Agent US Accelerator Non Chloride Metric Accelerator Non Chloride US Short description CRY1 CONMET CONCUS CEMMET CEMUS CMTSMET CMTSUS SNDMET SNDUS CAGGMET CAGGUS WTRMET WTRUS AESMET AEAUS ACCNCMET ACCNCUS Item type Other Product 13 Concrete 01 Concrete 01 Cement 21 Cement 21 Cemen
210. at field is not present then custom configurations for that report cannot be created 2 Inthe Report Name field enter a name that will identify the configuration The name can be up to 40 characters in length When you go back to select a Report Name you will select from a list of all stored configurations in the system not just those you have entered So make sure you enter a name that you will easily be able to identify 3 Enter the rest of the report options Mark the Save Settings on Accept checkbox 5 Accept the screen to run the report The configuration will be stored for future use To use a saved report configuration 1 Open the report selection screen 2 Select the desired report from the Report Name drop down list 3 Press lt Tab gt to leave the the Report Name field The configuration for the selected report name will be loaded into the selection screen Make any needed changes to the selection screen 5 Accept the screen to generate the report To delete a report configuration 1 Open the report selection screen 2 Select the desired report from the Report Name drop down list 3 Press lt Tab gt to leave the Report Name field The configuration for the selected report name will be loaded into the selection screen 4 Press lt Shift F5 gt or the Delete button on the COMMANDeseries toolbar A confirmation box will ask if you really want to delete this record 5 Select yes to delete the record Th
211. at total For example if you press the detail button next to the Tax Amount a screen displays showing the tax broken down by tax authorities Order Sales Tax Distribution COD Calculator breakout EDTORDRI D Order Sales Tax Distribution Tax Authonty Location Non Taxable Reason Taxable Non Taxable Tax Amount VAT 17 5 1 245 60 0 00 217 98 E Total Tax 217 98 The Volume Calculator The Volume Calculator lets you calculate the needed quantity of ready mix product for any of the following common construction components e Slabs Flat broad fairly thick and rectangular blocks e Footings A base for walls columns etc e Integral footings Combination of a slab on top of a footing e Walls Vertical dividers e Columns Cylindrical solids caissons piers e Steps On a level grade a series of vertical steps on a flat base e Stairs Self explanatory The Volume Calculator can be accessed from the main menu Misc gt Volume Calculator from the keyboard lt Ctrl B gt or from the Order Entry screen To access the Volume calculator from the Order Entry screen press lt Enter gt while the cursor is in the Order Quantity field In order to use the volume calculator with a weighted product such as aggregate each item must have a volume to weight conversion factor entered on the Item gt Conversion tab To calculate a volume amount 1 Select the a construction component from the Volume Calculato
212. ate new Contacts for bank agents Files gt General Information gt Contacts gt Contacts Contact Editor EDTCTCT E Contact Information Contact Code GIMME Customer Code Company Name Last National Bank ET Name Ivana A Dough Role Title Jredt Manage OOO O Address UI City State Postal Code Phone Number 1 Phone Number 2 Phone Number 3 Phone Number 4 E mail Address 1 E mail Address 2 E mail Address 3 Contact Type BA BANKAG Inactive 248 Cash Management Plants Three tabs in the Plant file must be updated e Main Tab e Communication Tab s Next Numbers Main Tab Three fields on the Plants main tab must be set e Cash Receipting must be set to Enabled When this field is set two additional fields display below e Bank Code Enter the bank code for the bank to which this plant will make deposits You may detail on the field to select from a list e Bank Agent Contact Enter the Bank Agent Contact code for your company s primary banking contact at the selected plant Communication Tab There is a new option to configure a receipt printer Once the Allow Receipt Printing box is enabled a Setup button will display The receipt printer is configured just like any other printer Please refer to the Setting up the System manual for details Cash Management 249 Next Numbers Tab Two sequences need to be set here Plants Next Numbers tab EDTPLNTZ e
213. ate Order Month before day or vice versa is configurable at both the system Configuration gt Defaults and user Preferences gt Users level The lt Tab gt Key COMMANDeeries is a form based program most screens are essentially simply forms To move from field to field press lt Tab gt Doing so will move the flashing cursor which may also be referred to as the focus through the entire form There are a couple of additional things to remember about the lt Tab gt key e lt Shift Tab gt takes you back one field which can be useful if you overshoot your target e The cursor not only moves from field to field but also moves across the buttons on the screen If the cursor is resting on a button a faint box appears inside it How to Use This Document 19 The cursor is on this button If you can t find the cursor in a field look at the buttons If the cursor is on a button you can access the button by pressing lt Enter gt e Fora standard keyboard COMMANDcseries remaps the numeric keypad lt Enter gt key to function as a lt Tab gt key This mapping allows for more efficient data entry This remapping is only for COMMANDeseries in most other programs the key functions as a standard lt Enter gt key To issue the lt Enter gt command use the main lt Enter gt key the one that is equivalent to lt Return gt on a typewriter This key is sometimes referred to as the Center Enter key Accepting
214. ate report Answer No to the update inquiry Review the report B amp O NS If the report is fine rerun the report send the report to the screen and then answer Yes to the update prompt If you find problems retrieve the order in Edit Orders and Tickets and correct the issue then rerun the update Create Orders for Separate Invoices Some customers prefer to have additional charges invoiced apart from the deliveries themselves Customer and Project files have flags on the Pricing tabs that enable the creation of separate orders for different charges These new orders can then be invoiced normally This function lets you create orders for these separate invoices for any given day To create orders for separate invoices 1 Goto the Create Orders for Separate Invoices screen Invoicing gt Create Orders for Separate Invoices 2 Enter a range of dates in the Order Date field 3 Enter the Order Sequence Click on the detail button in the field to access the Choices screen Accept the Create Orders for Separate Invoices screen 5 The system will create orders complete with tickets containing nothing but the flagged charges Those charges will be removed from the original orders These new orders can then be invoiced according to company policy Price Review Once the updates are out of the way standard pricing review can begin The specifics of pricing review will vary from company to company There may be one person in the bi
215. ates soreiromoi nitir erai EE E EE ENE aeea 233 Update Costs amp Prices for Orders amp Tickets cccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 233 Calculate Unloading leet 235 Create Orders for Separate INVOICES s sssnssrrrrrrssrrnrrrrrsnrrrrrnnnrrnrnsn 236 Price REVIEW surant ena NENNEN aE SE NEE AEEA EEANN EENE EAEE a 236 Run a Priced Orders Report Preliminary Invoice Register ccce 237 WinGate Cartage Tickets EEN 237 Zero priced Exception Items Only Report NEEN EEN 238 Invoice Print if licensed tiiiiscicateatanieacataversarwars eerie vers sinerraeiGanneiiasaunes 239 Post to Receivables if licensed ENEE ENEE EE 239 Plant level Invoices for Cash Sales ee EEN EEN EENEEEE E RREENERNEER ENEE ENER ANEN ENKE 239 ee e EE 239 ODGratiOnS EE 241 Order Discount FOr vseresivecrivynnisuntenbevenuunyeeeuayanieentenldsaskeenseuneunakeeiuens 243 7 3 27 13 Cash Management siissssndstcicidssccdedcccssdadsecesserestnessstmesenssteseesersesnans 246 ee de Ed WEE 246 Ree ee 246 Bank COGS gedenken EE ENEE Ee eE 247 Contact Types ContactS eigene deed 248 Plante tte 249 Main CC W 249 C mm nication WC NEEN 249 Next N mbers E 250 USE S uires Eug HEEN EE d REENEN ge DEE EE ENEE tes eee conser EN RE E ee 250 Cash Management Order Entry NEEN NEE ENNEN KEREN ERKENNEN ERKENNEN KREE KEEN RRE Keen 251 Entering a COD Onder ege ee ices AE ANE EAA DER 251 Quick Customer ENEY sessar mne EE 252 Payment ENtry 2 29 e 8 NN EEN DERNIER AEN REENEN E
216. ather it opens up a new form on top of the current one The All DB Locks button shows all database locks that include locks from Comm Managers and external processes In addition you can view the Comm Manager number the Client Machine and the Client Process ID Service Control The Service Control screen is a tool for performance monitoring It lists the services used in the application the number of times they have been used during the current log in and the total and average times it took for them to perform their given service 374 Data Management Service Control SYSSVCC m Service Control Serice Description S ID Auditing Form OPT AUDREC 6 00 00 00 114 00 00 00 01 al The screen gives the option of viewing Client and Server services This option has been created for future use as currently all COMMAND series installations are done on the client Comm Manager Console The Comm Manager Console allows you to monitor all active comm managers and prevents multiple identical comm manager processes from executing concurrently A new field Com Manager Threshold has been added to the Configuration Defaults tab The system uses this value in seconds to evaluate a manager s current status A new database table Comm Manager Console Table CMCT has been created to store information about current comm managers A CMCT record is created for a comm manager the first time it is started and is updated every time
217. ating to charges such as minimum load and sundry charges Respond to these prompts appropriately Appendix A Examples Scheduling an Order out of Multiple Plants Sometimes it is necessary to deliver an order out of two or more plants either because of the sheer quantity of material being delivered or because of prior scheduling commitments Multiple plant scheduling is easy to accomplish in COMMANDseries although you do need to work out a couple of details beforehand Let s say that we have a3 M3 order that we want to split between two plants The customer wants the first load to arrive at 2 PM with 10 minute truck spacing To make life a little easier we ll alternate trucks from the two plants 1 Set up the primary order screen normally Order Entry EDTCORD E Order Entry Eile k4 ider Dake 0671272007 z Thursday Dedes Code MULTPI Al ltemGioup CONCRETE User Plant Customer Code BCI ABCI Order Type REGULAR SALE AS z Project Code Erop TAMOIL PETROL Paymert Form CHARGE Lot Biock I Hu Map Page Lg Cat Zone Code JBASELOos BASELOOS Pig Delve Address S chsiihausersnasse 44 Sten q Instructions Tum LEFT West onto 7 Baslerstrasse Anmwe Tamod q Oha f Purchase Order Customer Job Sales Analysis SE SERVICES Hauler Code Delvery Method E DELIVERE Curent Status Noma Consist Order Qty Del Qty Price Ext Price a Eeer a 300 M3 bi Hlolilaj j Plant Must Stat T i Travel Times Spacing Urioad Dist
218. base For example version 5 51 of COMMANDeseries introduced Order Types as a means of recording if an order was a commercial order or an internal transfer Previously Order Type was used to determine if an order was Charge or Cash A new field Payment Method was created to address that function Customers upgrading to 5 51 needed a method to update existing order records The Database Update function Update Order Types modifies existing orders to be in line with the new functionality Tools Tools allow you to correct data problems For example over time it is possible that duplicate products get entered in project and standing order files In some cases the duplicate products are necessary but in others the duplication simply wastes valuable server resources The Remove Duplicate Products function will search project and or standing order files and delete duplicate records Suggesting Updates A Suggest button is in the manual update section of the Database Updates screen Manual Operations Suagest__ C Create External Translation Table a C Convert Check Numbers in ITRN Table O O O O O LI Update Order Types Update Map Page Travel Times Update Roster List Update Schedule Load Size Flag Update Allow Price Change Flag for COD Customers Projects Convert PRJC for upgrade from 5 51 or earlier v Press that button to call the Update Calculator screen Enter your current version and the version to which you are upgr
219. based on the configuration options 50 Order Entry Exclude from Sampling Scheduling Report If the flag is checked then the Contracted Samples will not be reflected on the Sampling Schedule Report Additional Samples Allows entry of number of additional samples requested by the customer Apply to Contracted Total If the flag is checked then the customer additional samples will be counted toward the total number of contracted samples during calculations of the number of samples already taken for a project product Total Samples to Take Sum of the above sample values Associated Products Admixtures fall into two general groups Modifiers and Must Contains e Must Contains These are the components that must be in the mix or the mix will not perform as designed When a mix is designed the Must Contains components are entered in the mix design e Modifiers These are components that do not generally affect the basic mix but that can be added to make the mix behave differently while retaining its core functionality May include retarders accelerators color and fiber mesh In entering an accelerator to an order you can t just add it to the order as you would with a pair of gloves or a stack of expansion joints the system needs to know that the accelerator is to be added to the specific mix COMMAND concrete connects the admixture to the appropriate mix through what are called Associated Products Associated pr
220. be set up for Delivery and F O B delivery methods Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Delivery Methods Enter the Current Status This is the current status of the order Choose from o Normal Will Call Weather Permitting Hold Delivery Completed An order with a status of Completed will not display on the Tracking and Scheduling screens regardless of whether or not the order has actually been completed o Review Any order entered or edited by a customer user a COMMANDseries user assigned to a customer for order entry will automatically be assigned to this status OO 0 O Once an order has been ticketed Will Call and Weather Permitting are not available Order Haul Information Order haul charges are initially established by the customer and or project files Most of the time there is no need to modify these settings during order entry In some cases however 38 Order Entry you may want to modify or review the haul charges for an order The settings on this screen serve as defaults for order line item level haul information The haul charge settings are accessible through the Haul button on the order screen To modify order level haul charges 1 On the Order Entryscreen enter a customer code and if necessary a project code The Haul button will not display until a valid customer code has been entered 2 Select the Haul button The Order Haul Information screen displays Order Haul In
221. becomes active It is not necessary to enter anything in this field For example if you want to replace the salesman entered for all item groups in a range of zones you do not need to enter anything However if you want to replace a particular salesman with another enter the employee code of that salesman in this field Update Inactive Customers This form allows you to batch update your customers to an Inactive or an Active status based on their associated Accounting Category and the number of Days Since Last Order Ticket for each customer All orders and tickets for those customers will display once you have tabbed out of the header fields Update Inactive Customers DBAIACU iy Update Inactive Customers fal EN Accounting Category D thru Days Since Laster Order Ticket 1 Customer Code Name Last Order Ticket Date Mark As Inactive 437469 JOHN SLATTERY 437474 JOHN DWAN 437748 THOMAS BYRNE 437749 MYLMAR O ROURKE 437562 TOM BUTLER 437569 JIM O DONNELL 438017 LOWRY HIGGINS 437862 MARTIN FOLEY 437863 SEAMUS FOLEY 437865 JOHN FURLONG JNA 437839 THOMAS CROSBIE 4 KKK zi Select All Un Select All p a wa T Application Management 319 The Mark As Inactive flag is checked by default for all Customers on this screen but can be unchecked for any customer who should not be set to an Inactive status Press the Update button to save any changes you make on this screen 320 Application Management
222. billing customer 388 Appendix A Examples To set up a third party customer 1 A In order to use third party batching the Use Multiple Customer Codes checkbox on the System tab of the Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration must be checked Open the Customer screen Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers Detail on the Customer Code field to select an existing customer To add a new customer enter an appropriate customer code and create a customer in the usual way Check the Third Party Company check box at the bottom of the Main tab Customers screen EDTCUST Main tab Third Party Company Man Contacts Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution Invoice Address Tite EH Address CUSTOMER OF THIRD PARTY COMPANY ADDRESS Kee bn City Du e State a Country CH Postal Code Je Contact re Phone Number 1 is Phone Number 2 mem Phone Number 3 Phone Number 4 i Setup Date B fiSNov 2007_ L Thied Party Company Press lt F2 gt to accept the screen to save the changes Third Party Customer Projects In order to achieve third party business you must set up a project for the billing customer that references the billing customer To set up a project for a third party customer 1 Da Six rb o Open the Projects screen Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers Detail on the Customer Cod
223. ble Price Review 5 Review product pricing Priced Orders Report Detail Preliminary Invoice Register 6 Edit Orders and Tickets if necessary 7 Update tickets for Cartage if applicable 8 Run an Exception Items Only report to verify all orders are priced Invoice Print if licensed if licensed 9 Runa Detail Preliminary Invoice Register or Priced Orders Report 10 Print Invoices and verify they ve printed correctly Update 11 Run Final Invoice Register Summary Balance Final Invoice Register to Priced Orders Report or Preliminary Invoice Register Post to Receivables if licensed 12 Runa Detail Sales Transactions Register Check all entries especially GL Distribution Entries 13 Post Transactions This list assumes you use both COMMANDinvoicing and COMMANDreceivables If you use a third party A R package you will export the data from COMMAND invoicing and import it into your system This export process will be discussed in a separate section Reconciling Tickets At the end of a business day you have large stacks of tickets that the drivers have returned from their deliveries The first step of the invoicing process is to reconcile these hard copy tickets to the ticket records within COMMANDseries The goal of reconciling tickets is to physically account for all tickets generated by COMMANDeseries The Ticket Report is not available from COMMANDinvoicing but is available in the Dispatching menu fo
224. can be configured to print one invoice per order order PO project etc In addition the prelim register calculates the due date and available discount for any terms discounts assigned to the included orders When Preliminary Detail Invoice Register is selected as the Report Type you will see the form change in the following ways Preliminary Invoice Register 193 Preliminary Invoice Register Selections Screen iy Preliminary Invoice Register Selections Preliminary Detail Invoice Register Billing Customer The Invoicing Status field disappears The Preliminary Invoice Register only returns orders that have not been invoiced Consequently this report is used at the end of the month to ensure that all month s orders have been invoiced The Suspend Reason field disappears as does the Release Suspended Orders Tickets field Orders cannot be suspended or released from the preliminary register The Exception Items Only field disappears Exceptions can only be run in the Priced Orders Report The Invoice Date field appears along with fields to allow selection of customers by invoice frequency Choose from the following options Daily Weekly Monthly The option to Include Previous Days Released Orders Tickets becomes available Select Exclude Non Priced Orders to exclude those orders from the Preliminary Invoice Register Non Priced orders are defined as those orders in which no pricing is found for the items based on the pr
225. cated on the Products tab in the Project editor If for example the checkbox is not active 310 Application Management in a given project then the Calculate Price Change routine will not change the price of any product on the project even if that specific project is targeted There is also an Allow Automatic Price Adjustment flag on the Pricing tab of the Customers and Projects screens This flag establishes the default flag setting for all new items added to the customer project changing it does not affect existing products in the customer or project record Please consult the Setting Up the System manual for additional information To calculate a price change 1 Go to the Calculate Price Change screen Manage gt Application Management gt Calculate Price Change Mark the Change Prices In Items and or Master Project Products checkboxes to indicate where price changes are being calculated When Master Project Products is selected the Type Price set on the Projects gt Products tab will always display on the report The Material Price will display only if the Type Price on the Projects gt Products tab is either Fixed Material Price or Fixed Cartage Delivered Price and if the Material Price is not the same as the Delivered Price Enter the Effective Date For the calendar shortcut click on the box to the left of the field Double click on the date the price change will be effective Select a method to Chang
226. ccurrence s The system will search the database and the first record matching the parameters will be displayed Select Last Occurrence The system will search the rest of the table All records matching the parameters will be retrieved 356 Data Management Search Results A Data Maintenance Order File 6 Once the records have been retrieved you can examine the data Global Replace Over the course of time your use of the system changes and in some cases the program itself changed through upgrades and service packs If for example you changed your credit code structure and needed to modify existing customer records to bring them in line with the new credit code structure In this example we want to select all customer codes with a credit code of 1 and change that code to AAA To perform a global replace 1 Select the CUCO Customer Credit table 2 Retrieve all customer records with a credit code of 1 Refer to the preceding section for details 3 Right click on the Credit Code field Select Replace Field Value A dialog box will open Replace Field Value DBAUFLD1 7 Replace Field Value E3 CRED_CODE v 4 Enter the new value in this case AAA in the With Value field 5 Accept the dialog box The changes will be made in the display screen Even though you can see the changes on the screen the changes have not been saved to the database yet You must proceed to the next step to sav
227. ck Project Code Al Domed Stadium Project Delivery Method Delivered Map Page Ei Al Zone Code ZONEGU ZONEOOT Delivery Address 973 Shades Crest Drive Instructions In addition a WATER_ON_BOARD_UOM field has been added to the TKTL table to record the UOM Double click on the Water on Board field to display the Units of Measurement screen and select the desired UOM e When the system level measurement system is set to Metric the default value will be 50011 Litres e When the system level measurement system is set to Imperial the default value will be 50004 Gallons EU Generic Link Field Updates The following fields have been added to the T007 Batching Related Fields section Information stored in these fields comes from the information you entered on the above screens 426 Appendix G Batch Confirmation and EU Link Enhancements e The value of the new SEQUENCE_CODE ILOC in field number 435 e The value of the new TOLERANCE_CODE ILOC in field number 436 e The value of the new WATER_ON_BOARD TKTL in field number 437 e The value of the new WATER_ON_BOARD_UOM TKTL in field number 438 The following fields have been added to the T007 TQS Related Fields Section e The value of MAX_WATER_CEM RATIO IMST relating to the saleable product e The value of MIN_CEM CONT RATIO IMST relating to the saleable product The following field has been added to the Transfer of Purchase Order and Raw Material Receipts section e The value of MA
228. ckets are suspended from the Ticket Information screen To suspend an order 1 Retrieve the order in the Edit Orders and Tickets screen Invoicing gt Edit Orders and Tickets 2 Select the Options menu from the toolbar ad Select Suspend Order from the Options menu 4 The system will display a confirmation box Click Yes to suspend the order or No to return to the Edit Orders and Tickets screen 5 Select a Suspend Reason code on the Reason Code screen 6 Accept the Reason Code screen To suspend a ticket 1 Retrieve the order in Edit Orders and Tickets Select the Tickets button to display the order s tickets 2 Locate the ticket you wish to suspend Click the Status button The Ticket Status screen appears 3 Click the Suspend button to place the ticket into a suspended status 3 Ticket Status This Ticket is in a Active Status Suspend This Ticket is in a Released Status 4 Select a Suspend Reason code on the Reason Code screen When you accept the screen you will be returned to the Edit Ticket Information screen The Status button will now be highlighted to indicate that the ticket has been either suspended or canceled To suspend a product 1 Retrieve the order in question in Edit Orders and Tickets 2 Select Suspend Product from the Options menu If you select Suspend Product for an order with only one product a dialog box will instruct you to suspend the entire order 3 Enter a S
229. ckets checkbox checked on the Options tab of the Users editor Files gt System Information gt Users gt Users you will encounter the following popup message Project Information has been changed Update Project Selecting Yes will update your project with the following information o Purchase Order number o Job Number o Delivery Address o Delivery Instructions o Map Page o Zone Selecting No will leave your project information unchanged Selecting either option opens the Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping screen Ticketing 135 Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping EDTSHIP 3 Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping N Order Date 26 Oct 2007 Plat Code 27 CHIPSODC Scale Code T GENERIC Track Code jaj Driver Code Journey i Order Code MYSTO2 A Heen Drop CO CONCRETE Ticket Code Sequence Travel Distance f 10 00 Order Type REGULAR RS Pay Distarce On Job Time few Shipping Customer Al ABC Materials LoBok Project Code 1 Al ABC Project Map Page Zone Code IR yecoul DelveryAddess St Anne Rosd Bastol Instructions Purchave Order I Cuttomer Job Nem Code Descreton Order Qty Deiv Oty LosdQty Pree Pre Oty cx cor Al 2350 M3 800 f 20 f _Other_ J al Add JL Rame f Stop 1 o1 Status New Ticket Most of the necessary information is brought in from the order Enter a Truck Code to assign a truck to this ticket or press lt Enter gt to display a list of trucks The Driver Code defaults with the truck edit t
230. ct Code or a range of project codes to appear on the report Enter an Item Code or a range of item codes to appear on the report 10 Enter a Rebate Royalty Contact or a range of contacts to appear on the report Rebates and Royalties 131 11 Select Zero Amount Rebates Royalties Only to have the report display only those rebates and royalties with zero as their amount 12 Accept the screen to generate the report Rebates and Royalties Ticketing An order in COMMAND concrete is essentially a planned delivery It has all the information needed to get the right material to the right customer at the right time All orders in COMMANDseries have two components an order code and an order date Each combination of code and date is unique you may have several orders on the same date after the second day you will have two orders with the same order code but you will never have two orders with the same combination of order code and date While an order describes what you intend to do a delivery ticket describes exactly what you did When a load is dispatched a delivery ticket is generated recording what material was dispatched and where it went This information is used to bill customers for their material Three things define a ticket the order code the order date and the ticket number The Ticketing function lets you generate delivery tickets for previously entered orders either by dragging and dropping trucks on the Tracking
231. ct exactly what you see on your PDA Icons may be different depending on the PDA you are currently using Toolbar The toolbar lt re displays on every tab in COMMANDlog however certain icons display only on specific tabs e Synchronize Synchronizes your PDA version of COMMANDseries with the COMMAND Web Service so that ticketing and order information is updated Displays on the Summary Orders and Tickets tabs e Log Out Prompts you with the message Do you wish to log out and stop using the system Select Yes to log out or Cancel to return to the prior active tab Displays on the Summary Orders and Tickets when not in Create Ticket mode tabs e Previous a Change the focus to the previous order or ticket Displays on the Orders Tickets and Detail when not in Create Ticket mode tabs Web PDA Tickets and Orders for Trowel Ready Mortar e Next Change the focus to the next order or ticket Displays on the Orders Tickets and Detail when not in Create Ticket mode tabs e Create Ticket S Begin creating a ticket Displays on the Orders and Tickets tabs e Void Ticket Mark an existing ticket as void Displays on the Tickets tabs Summary Tab Once you have successfully logged in you will see the Summary tab which displays the number of open orders and tickets in the mobile database which resides on your PDA Web PDA Tickets and Orders for Trowel Ready Mortar 173 Order Tab The Order tab
232. cture No user input is required Convert Price Type field for Upgrade from V5 57 and Earlier This routine adjusts Price Type records to accommodate the new Fixed Material Delivered Price feature The routine checks all pricing records in order and project files e Ifthe original Delivery Price Type was FOB the new Price Type will be FOB e Ifthe original Delivery Price Type was Delivered the new Price Type will be Fixed Cartage Delivered In addition the routine will also update existing records as follows Data Management 365 e All tickets with a null Material Price field will be updated with the corresponding value from the associated order file e The routine will validate the Price Type values for Customer defaults in the configuration file and existing Customer Product records CPRD If the value is blank it will be set to 1 FOB pricing The routine will run automatically once it is selected No user input is required Rebuild Current and Future Schedule Loads Version 5 uses two separate tables to store schedule records while Version 4 used one In addition V5 schedules include two additional fields Time to Job and Time to Plant This routine scans current and future orders If an order is found with a Travel Time value but no Time to Job or Time to Plant value the Travel Time value will be used to populate both fields No user input is required If this update is not run any current and future orders i
233. d You can specify the plant s order type s and shipment date on which you want to report The Plant Loading report shows the date and time that each order needs to be loaded along with the total load quantity for the specified date and time It also breaks down each order by plant showing the required quantities from each plant for each order Plant Loading Report Selections SELPLTL 3 Plant Loading Report Selections Shipment Date m 02 06 2008 Wednesday Order Types sl All Plant Description H Birmingham Plant Hoover Plant Bessemer Plant Alabaster Plant Trussville Plant amp Quarry Birmingham Quarry Hoover Quarry O LI LI LI O LI LI Driver Callout Report The Driver Callout report uses the booked delivery schedules along with start up information from the plant and truck type files to generate a schedule showing when drivers need to clock in to be able meet the delivery schedule You can specify the plant s 288 COMMAND concrete Reports order type s and shipment date on which you want to report You can sort the reports by schedule plant or schedule start time The Driver Callout report is used by the scheduler in the evening to call drivers for the next day s work The dispatcher can also use this report in the morning to plan the first round of deliveries The report shows the required punch in time to load and deliver the order on time It also shows the type of truck needed to del
234. d eebe SNE 1 GE e gel EE 1 El le HR e 2 Items E e EE 2 Item ee te CEET 2 CGI ee e EE 2 Items E EE 3 Assigning Item Groups to Customers and Projects s sssssrssressesresesrsrrsen 5 Projects Edit r inco orina a E a aa a 6 ESCHER savstshautiensvaesnwe rind wvatebicieivenseninud covrmiintiusatserdariios EEE a E 7 Ord r ue EE 7 Cartage Changes eege 8 Catlage Sequence Code eeben eg Eege 8 Removing an Original Cartage Ke E 9 Update Cartage Ticket Changes ssssssssssrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrresrssssrsnssnsnnnnnnnnn 9 Terms C de Modifications Yassesscesaseninaennrsdannyadnatesaenieratedaneuracseedeneuindans 12 Edit Ord rs qa M Hie 13 Appendix L Quantity DISCOUNTS ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 1 OVETVIEW get N et Ee SEN EE ENEE VEER UE E EATEN E EEEE 1 CONMMGUIAUION td use SE 1 Price Categ rieS A seeugeeEhkEER NEEN ENNER ENNEN NA ATEA L en EEN 1 Kean EE 2 PrOJECUS ciiciasadianssasaacwasandaenaasancne teasuataa SDE D EAEE AREA DEE RAEE PETERKA 2 Order ENtry widecauinanusvataverannseamhuurdinausadieyvagassomesindeaudadamennneneuundancudae 2 INVOICE WEE 3 Indek E A 12 3 27 13 Welcome to the COMMANDooncrete User Guide The COMMAND concrete software package is designed to establish sound ready mix dispatch control improve customer service reduce delivery costs decrease the dispatcher s workload provide immediate management reports and capture information for invoicing and accounting Product F
235. d for a Reason Code Cube Check Reason Code EDTSHIPB FB Cube Check Reason Code nn e The Reason Code entered on this screen must have a Reason Usage of Sampled Tickets e Ifyou close the Cube Check Reason Code screen without entering a valid reason code the Cube Check box will be cleared automatically Edit Ticket Information The Cube Check flag has been added to the Other Ticket Information form in EditTicket Information which is part of Edit Orders amp Tickets This will allow those users who do not have access privileges to the Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping form due to the Number of Days Back to Allow Dispatch on the Configuration gt Distribution tab to still be able to flag tickets as sampled Ticketing 163 Other Ticket Information screen EDTPREPG 4 Other Ticket Information Appi seasonal Erres Appi sindy enades The Cube Check flag will not be visible on any ticket that does not contain a Mix Product You must enter a Cube Check Reason when you select the Cube Check box e The Reason Code must have a Type of Sampled Tickets sz IfCube Check is selected on this screen you cannot save successfully unless you have entered a Reason Code e The Reason Code will not be available for editing on existing tickets if the ticket has already been invoiced In this case CS will interface the invoice information to mark the ticket as invoiced from your third party system Database Fields The below ne
236. d on the conversion factors stored in the item s UOMI record The following Document Tags have been created e PPPCNYV Project Product Price Conversion Tag Document Type Project Data In Out e TKQCNYV Ticket Quantity Conversion Tag Document Type Ticket Print And Data In Out e UOMISO UOM ISO Code Tag Document Type Ticket Print And Data In Out e PRPCNV Previous Price Conversion Tag Document Type Item Data In Out e IMPCNV Item Master Price Conversion Tag Document Type Item Data In Out 114 Aggregates Sold Through Ready Mix Plant Aggregates Sold Through Ready Mix Plant 115 Sampling amp Testing Plan Sampling and testing plan functionality allows the user to enter basic testing frequency parameters Based on those parameters COMMANDeseries will notify the user that the concrete being produced needs to be sampled and tested Note To use sampling and testing you must have Concrete Testing Database CS in your system license Configuration Test Methods A new form Test Methods Files gt Item Information gt Test Methods is used to store basic test method information This data will be stored in the new Testing Methods TSME table Test Methods screen Test Method ID 9004 Description Consistence Slump Short Description Constite Norm Standard EN 12350 5 e Test Method ID This unique identification code will be used on other fields to assign a given testing method to a mi
237. d should be set to a Regular Sale RS Order Type Cash Management Order Entry The cash management functions in COMMANDeeries are designed to let you accept monies received from customers and assign them to specific tickets without having to use COMMANDreceivables Cash management routines may slightly affect how routine tasks are performed Entering a COD Order There are two variables involved here e For new customers use the Quick Customer Entry form to create the new customer record Cash Management 251 e Ifa customer makes full or partial payment at the time of order entry you will have to enter the payment and generate a receipt When a receipt is generated during order entry it is automatically allocated to the ticket Quick Customer Entry If the customer has already bought concrete the customer record should already be in the system Do a standard customer search from the order screen If you cannot locate the customer create a new record To use the Quick Customer Entry screen 1 Make sure that the Customer Code field is clear then lt Tab gt out of the field The Quick Customer Entry screen will display Quick Customer Entry EDTQCUS B Quick Customer Entry Customer Code lt SUTO gt Name Duck Customer Defaull Sort Name QCUSTDE Address Quick customer address 4 City Quick customer city State jf ti Country Postal Code Im Contact z Phone Number 1 8281 12600 P
238. d to constituent materials verification of the properties of fresh and hardened concrete and production control procedures In addition anew construction law and technical regulation for concrete production requiring that legal text be printed on delivery notes and associated with items was introduced in 2009 in Croatia and is expected to be in power for Germany 2009 and Switzerland 2010 Instead of associating legal text with the Mix Design Code the system will associate it with the SAP item Quality Concrete Code Five text fields will be imported for the SAP Item Item Location and Mix Design Code This text will be printed on the delivery note and interfaced to the Batch Computer The certification Data In text will be maintained at the Item location level The legal text will be associated with the Concrete Code and Mix Design at the Production Location Plant level In COMMANDseries you can e Use images in different formats Lat and jpg to represent symbols for national certification standards and associate one of the images with one or more plants through a new setup screen e Enter national standard text up to 255 characters on the new setup screen and associate the text with one or more plants When a delivery note is produced COMMANDeseries will check to see if the mix and its constituents excluding water are certified If so certification information will be stored on the delivery note If not certification i
239. day Sequence Number ID 2 The Plant Code assigned to the current user will default if necessary you can enter a different plant or detail on the field to select from a list You must have permission to a plant in order to select it 3 Enter a Reconciliation Date Enter a Sequence Number or detail on the field to select from a list 5 Accept the screen to cancel the reconciliation Reconciliation Report This report provides details of a given reconciliation sequence To run a reconciliation report 1 Open the Reconciliation Report Selections screen Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Payment Reports gt Reconciliation report Reconciliation Report Selections SELCREC B Reconciliation Report Selections Eq Report Name Report Sequence ReceptNumer zl Plant Code SD N Reconciliation Date 30 May 2008 Bank Agent z Payment Method all z Sequence Number 000 I Show Banking Detail I Show Allocation Detail I Page Break by Report Sequence Save Settings on Accept 2 Ifyou wish to create a saved report configuration enter a Report Name and check the Save Settings on Accept box 3 Select a Report Sequence Options are o Receipt Number o Payment Method Cash Management 263 OND D 9 o Bank Agent Your assigned plant the plant you selected at login will default in the Plant Code field You may change this value to any other plant to which you have CS privileges Select
240. de Enter the new label and accept the screen Once yov ve finished modifying the columns accept the screen to enact the changes in the lookup screen How to Use This Document 27 Save Settings This command will save the configuration of your current lookup for future use Configurations are maintained for each lookup customer item order etc Show Query The Show Query option displays the actual SQL query command that was used to generate the current list Show Query CSFINDCODE Query select CUST_CODE NAME SORT_NAME CONTCT_NAME PHONE_NUM_1 STMNT_NAME CRED_CARD_NAME CRED_CARD_RESP_NAME INVC_NAME from CUST where Lower SORT_NAME like a order by INVC_NAME sed This option is primarily used as a troubleshooting tool Note You cannot enter new queries in this screen About This option displays the information screen for FNDCODE Code Lists Many fields in COMMANDeseries such as the Item Type field in the Item Category editor are Code List fields Item Category editor EDTICAT 7 Item Categories Coarse Aggregates US CAGGUS Aggregate Coarse v When you look at the Item Type drop down you see descriptions of different item types But when you select one a numeric code is saved in the database that code is linked to a code list This method of data storage saves space only two characters per item type are required as opposed to a 20 30 character description Multiply th
241. ded When the override is used the reason code will be stored in a new field in the Alternate Item Batch Code table alternative_item_rsn_code I MLB Material Classes The Material Classes editor has been updated so that there are two new fields available for the Material Class Type Coarse Aggregate B Material Classes E loj x Material Class ID TEST Material Class Type Coarse Aggregate _ Description Short Description Base Class Item Code ID Segment Terminal Class sz Notification Message Maximum Strength Allowed J Aggregate Size Mix Design Agg Size Range J To 1 Items Editor The Items editor has been updated so that values selected in the configuration option Alternative Item Control are validated when entering an alternative item Null values for the parent item options will not be validated For example if the alternative item control option Strength Code is selected a comparison will be made between the parent item s strength code and the alternative item s strength code only if the parent item s strength code is populated If the parent item s strength code is null no comparison will be made for that value 436 Appendix I Assigning Mixes to Technical Products Appendix I Assigning Mixes to Technical Products 437 When a truck returns with concrete on board that mix can be reused on the truck s next load This modification enables COMMANDeeries to validate the
242. ders screen Dispatch gt Orders Orders header EDTCORD DN Order Entry ME A Rem mmm mm ri 2 Enter an Order Date COMMANDeceries provides many options for entering an order date 3 The next field is the Order Code If this is a new order tab through this field and COMMANDeeries assigns the next number available To look up an existing order enter the Order Date and Order Code Pressing the lt Enter gt key while in the Order Code field will display a list of orders entered for the specified day When you tab out of the Order Code field the top part of the form becomes unavailable this header information is now locked to prevent another user from attempting to make an entry using the same order date order code combination If either field is incorrect the entire form must be cleared and entered anew See Standing Order Entry for information on entering a standing order 4 The Item Group value will defaults from the current user s Default Item Group setting located on the Users Preferences tab Available options depend on the system license 5 The User Plant defaults from the Plant Code specified when the user logged into COMMANDeeries Order Entry 35 Orders EDTCORD B Order Entry Pile for Dane Soan z Wednesday Order Cod Al nenne Feces UserPrart 101 Customer Code L al PAB Concrete Concrete Order Type REGULAR AS a Had Deliver To Toon Paymert Foma CASH z d Project Code Curent Status Nowa D
243. details Update Cartage Tickets The Update Tickets function reads delivery ticket data from related COMMANDeseries applications Charges cannot be applied in cartage without a related ticket After reading the tickets COMMANDcartage uses the necessary information to compute and store pertinent cartage information COMMANDcartage creates cartage charges on those same tickets and creates appropriate payment information for the relevant haulers To update tickets 1 Go to the Update Cartage Tickets screen Cartage gt Update Tickets 2 Enter the Order Date or range of dates for the tickets you are importing for update 3 Enter the Ticket Code or range of codes for the tickets you are importing for update 4 Enter the Order Code or range of codes relevant to the tickets you are importing for update 5 Inthe Cartage Rate Table field select the cartage rate table to be used as extra selection for updating If the code is entered only haulers using this rate table will be posted to the cartage system 6 Check the Replace Existing Cartage Information checkbox to remove any existing tickets and replace them with the current import Note To add new tickets to the existing tickets leave this checkbox unchecked 7 Select the Include Removed Tickets in Cartage Calculations field if necessary 8 Accept the Update Cartage Tickets screen Daily Invoicing 237 Zero priced Exception Items Only Report At this point in the
244. determines if the mix can actually be shipped Use field level security to restrict access to this field to QC engineers 12 Accept the screen to save the mix design and return to the Order Entry screen The Mix Design button will be highlighted to indicate that a mix design is present 13 Schedule and save the order as usual Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 89 The modified mix is stored at the user level and has no effect on the mix design in the Item Master File Once the order has been created the sequence of events is dependent on how your system is configured Product Sales Option The Product Sales Option simulates a Point of Sale environment in Orders by providing an inventory inquiry for products ordered and an automatic generation of a ticket from the Orders screen It also provides for limited reporting capability for block equivalent units You must have a license for the Product Sales Option unless you use COMMANDinventory however without the inventory license you cannot query on hand inventory amounts To set up the product sales option 1 From the Locations screen Files gt Item Information gt Locations set up an inventory location and a corresponding plant Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants for the block building material operation Assign the plant to specific ticket printers for dispatch copy order printing and report printing on the Plant Communication Setup screen File
245. ding orders must be scheduled before they can be ticketed e Aggregate standing orders do not have to be scheduled If you attempt to dispatch or ticket an aggregate standing order the system will automatically create a daily order based on the current date and the standing order and then will dispatch or ticket that daily order You can schedule a standing order when rostering to see the order on any tracking screens or if planning the delivery time for specific loads To schedule a standing order 1 Go to the Schedule Standing Orders screen Dispatch gt Schedule Standing Orders 2 Enter the Order Code for the standing order Detail to get a list of standing orders This code will become the Order Code for the scheduled regular orders The system will retrieve the standing order additional order information will populate the top part of the form 68 Order Entry Schedule Standing Orders EDTSCHD 5 Schedule Standing Orders Payment Method Charge Convalescent Center m 09Aug 2007 Thursday thu 09 Aug 2007 Thursday ltem Code move Schedule 1 Plant Code z o TRUSQRY Distance xj Start Time 14 00 Time To Job Scheduled Quantity 300 00 in Time To Plant Hold Quantity in Truck Spacing Truck Type z o SNGDMP Unload Time Load Qty 4500 in Delivery Rate per Hour 2000 in Truck Tarp Time 200 Trucks Required 28 Pouting Method Kess Rate Type Mins Apart Unload Rate per Hour 180 00 th Adjustment Type Always adj
246. dispatcher selects Yes the truck will be ticketed as usual If the dispatcher selects No they will be returned to the Ticketing screen to select another driver Overtime button This button provides the dispatcher a convenient means of checking the clock status of any driver during the course of the day Deadheading Dispatchers can conveniently deadhead a truck from one plant to another For a truck to be eligible to be deadheaded it must be clocked in and not assigned to another delivery load To deadhead a truck 1 On the Tracking amp Scheduling screen right click the truck to be sent to another plant and choose Change Tasks OY Open the Tracking amp Scheduling Operations screen Dispatch gt Tracking amp Scheduling Operations select the Change Task tab and enter the appropriate Truck Code Select Change Truck Task from the popup menu 3 On the screen that appears select Deadhead from the Change Task drop down menu Tracking amp Scheduling Operations Change Task Tab DBATSOPK Display Trip Profile Change Task Driver Overtime Change Conditions Truck Code 101 Ford 94 Driver Code 3 Howard Wilson Truck Status j 07 Aug 2007 15 52 Current Task Previous Task Change Task A v From Plant Code Trussville Quarry To Plant Code 5 Trussville Quarry Estimated Minutes 4 The truck s current plant will default into the From Plant Code field Enter the plant to which the truck is being sent in the
247. displays a list of all orders and the associated Customer Name and the first line of the Ship To Address that are open in the mobile database Tap on an order line to view the Detail tab for that order Each PDA is assigned to a specific Hauler Only orders with the Hauler that has been assigned to your PDA will be downloaded 174 Web PDA Tickets and Orders for Trowel Ready Mortar Tickets Tab The Tickets tab displays a list of tickets that have been created in the mobile database From this tab you can view the Customer Name the local Ticket Number tickets are numbered in order of delivery time beginning with 1 for the first ticket of the day Quantity Delivered and the Delivery Time Tap on a ticket line to display the associated Details tab Note Delivery dockets for days prior to the current date are not available for viewing on your PDA EJicommanoiog Zi 4 3 52 _ Customer Ticket Qty Time gt fa wis Roos kee STEVEN 2 AS Ston The number of ticket dockets you can create and store at a given time is set on the Configuration screen within your PDA When you create a ticket from an order on your PDA the system will perform two capacity checks e Ifthe number of stored tickets is equal to or greater than the number set in Configuration on your PDA the system will ask you to resynchronize before you can create another ticket e Ifthe number of stored tickets is greater than the number set in
248. dit Order and Tickets EDTPREP P Edit Orders and Tickets Order Date Jut 2008 Wednesday Order Code Header Al ltem Group Order information 4 CASH D Ce Patchase Orde EN thew Code Description Order Oty Pree Gy Extended d 3000 JaDMoq a 000 M3 f i000 M3 1000 bd aj aoa ii inzi tiith a AEO Prods EI Order Line Totals amp Tickets Edit Orders and Tickets 205 The Header contains the primary database keys the fields that define a unique database record In the case of orders the primary keys are the Order Date and the Order Code This section also indicates the Item Group of the order currently being displayed The Order Information section contains information relating to the order as a whole In addition to customer and project information pricing including charges haul and other information related to the order as a while are accessible under the appropriate buttons The layout is virtually identical to the same section in the standard Order Entry screen with one notable exception on this screen the delivery address is accessed through the Other button This is because although the material has already been delivered the delivery address isn t as critical a piece of information as it was before The Order Line contains the items products on the order Primary and extra products are on individual order lines while admixes are under the Assoc Prods button for the relevant mix Cartage charges as
249. down menu on the Order Entry screen defaults to a value according to how you have set up the system You are not able to override this and select from the order types you have defined if the Do not allow edit order type in Order Entry flag is checked in the distribution tab of the Quotes Customers Projects editors Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 75 After each user defined order type is a code in parentheses that indicates its hard coded order type Each hard coded Order Type has specific effects on the dispatching process The hard coded order types are as follows e Regular Sale RS Represents all orders for which shipments are made and for which invoices will be created This may include both Trade and intra company customers Job Transfer JT Represents the shipment of inventoried materials to job sites for intra company construction related activity e g gravel provided to make a base for a plant access road A Job Cost Phase code Files gt General Information gt Job Cost Phase will be associated with the order to accommodate the needs of the construction job cost environment This order type is intended for use with internal material transfers for a specific job The order and ticket are processed normally with the following exceptions o The Payment Method field will not be available as this is a non invoiced order o Job Cost Job and Job Cost Phase will be required The Job Cost Job is an internal j
250. dule Tools Suggested Shipping Plants EDTORDRQ 2 Suggested Shipping Plants Plant Plant Name Distance Matera Cost Per load Difference Material Cost per unit Birmingham Plant 8 00 376 60 376 60 37 66 Trussville Quarry 20 00 376 60 376 60 37 66 Hoover Plant 30 00 376 60 376 60 37 66 Bessemer Plant 40 00 376 60 376 60 37 66 Alabaster Plant 60 00 376 60 376 60 37 66 The dispatcher can determine which is the best plant to schedule an order from to receive the most profit e Cost information must exist in both item and plant files for this feature to function correctly If cost inforamtion is not entered correctly the result will be a screen somewhat similar to the one above e Ifyou have your system set for Cost Suppression no costs will display in the screen the plants will simply be listed in order of profitability from highest to lowest Round Trip Trucking COMMANDeseries supports Round Trip Trucking for orders with a schedule defined as round trip orders Round trip schedules will set a specific number of trucks to round trip to an order Round trip schedules assign trucks to each load in the schedule and base Type Times for Trucks on when they will arrive in the yard from their previous load On the Horizontal Tracking screen a round trip truck shows on the Order line rather than the Plant line when returning to the plant On the Analog Tracking screen when trucks arrive in the yard the trucks show
251. e Batching Ordered Quantity Ordered Quantity Extension Code E Ern ee a Delivered Quantity Ticket Quantity Extension Code gt 8000 each Delivered Quantity z Batch ER Inventory Cost v l O Price Quantity Price Quantity Extension Code Purchase gt 80001 each gt s000 each Delivered Quantity z Now set up a Lime category that is not a service Set the Item Group to Lime and the Item Type to Aggregate Fine Now you will have two Item Categories for your Lime products one that is a Service such as spreading Lime and one that is not the actual Lime product Item Categories EDTICAT 23 Item Categories Item Category 2610 Description Grolime Short e D ltem Group JLime D Taxable Taxable D Item Type Aggregate Fine ltem Sub Type Spreaderman Key Item Lode UOM Tax Override Batching Ordered Quantity Ordered Quantity Extension Code sl 0001 sach Per Unit z Delivered Quantity Ticket Quantity Extension Code E Jeoon each Delivered Quantity x Batch v Inventory Cost gt Price Quantity Price Quantity Extension Code Purchase gt gt s0001 each Delivered Quantity z Items Editor Service Lime items will be entered in the Item Master file as an item If the Item Category is Service the Keep in Inventory Saleable Item Do not allow ticketing and Constituent Item flags will be available You will not always need to use the Keep in Appendix K Lime Spreader F
252. e Before it can complete the calculations however it has to know what to use as the primary means of measurement The options for the delivery Rate Type are FOB Freight on Board o Enter a Truck Spacing time in minutes The Unload Time value will default to this time but it is irrelevant The Delivery Rate per Hour and Trucks Required fields will be calculated but grayed out o The Trucks Required field will be cleared of data o The material will be picked up by someone else s truck Accordingly the system won t worry about truck availability For delivered orders something must be entered in either the Truck Spacing or Trucks Required fields If both fields are left blank the system will consider the order as an F O B order and the order will not appear on the regular Tracking amp Scheduling 48 Order Entry screen If only one truck is required skip the truck spacing and populate the Trucks Required field with 1 Caution FOB orders are not displayed on the normal Truck Tracking screen but have a separate screen of their own Tracking will display FOB orders on the main screen please consult Tracking documentation for configuration details consequently orders that are inadvertently entered as FOB may not get delivered Please refer to the Tracking and Scheduling section of this manual for additional information concerning FOB orders Minutes Apart o Minutes between trucks arrival on site Enter a Truc
253. e s product will default next to the Truck Code e Load Quantity remains the same e Extra products are shipped with their associated main product and schedule Two Ready Mixes on One Truck 133 e The Ticketing form will check to make sure that multiple ready mix products come from the same order and same schedule as opposed to checking only the order e When the same Order Code is added for the next ticket the system will ensure that the same schedule product is selected which should be the next ready mix product for the next schedule COMMAND ac Mixes Mixes created in COMMAND can be viewed in COMMANDeseries via the Mix Revision Number allowing users to identify the particular recipe of qualified raw materials The Mix Revision Number is available in QC on the Test Specimen Details grid report and is viewable in several places in COMMANDeeries e Items gt Constituent tab stored in the Item Location ILOC table e Delivery Notes o The Order Line table ORDL saved with the mix code that is selected for the order o The Ticket table TICK saved with the mix code selected for ticketing Use the Ticket Print document tag REVNUM to print the Mix Revision Number on the Delivery Note Topics in this section Ticketing Screen Ticketing Load Size Logic Reprinting Tickets Canceling Tickets Ticketing With Prebatched Material Maximum Gross Truck Weight Proof of Delivery Process Goods Returned Unscanned
254. e Field 092 Mix Legal Text 2 AN 40 e Interface Field 093 Mix Legal Text 3 AN 40 e Interface Field 094 Mix Legal Text 4 AN 40 e Interface Field 095 Mix Legal Text 5 AN 40 HTML Tickets You can create HTML delivery notes using the new HTMLTICK document format 148 Ticketing To create an HTML ticket 1 Go to the Document Formats screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Formats and enter HTMLTICK in the Document Format field and tab 2 Document Formats Html Ticket DEE 2 Press the Preview button to view a preview of what the HTML ticket will look like at this default stage You can choose to close the screen or print the layout example E HtmlPreview Plant Dispatcher Phone Supplier SK Ico 00 214 973 Ic DPH OR OS Ba I Odd Sa vl c 1265 B Concrete Volume m7 Recipe Order Num Water Cement Ratio Strenght development factor Cement Producer Admixture 1 Producer Max admixture content 1 Certifikate Number Datum of conformity issuance Delivery Note Date Delivery Printed at Custome Recipient Street Street city City Tax Cod Construction Name Job Site Shipping distance Loading 15 min Unloading 15 min Max processing time min Air Content Max additional water 1 Addition Admixture 2 Producer Max admixture content 2 Certification authority QUALIFORMN SLO 3 To change the HT
255. e Lime business is now available for all companies e Lime can be made available for any customer and project e You can restrict customers and projects to Lime products only e SpreaderMan or any other type of secondary hauler can be paid separately from the main hauler If the secondary hauler code is entered in Order Entry a separate cartage payment for the secondary hauler will be created during the Update Cartage Ticket Process e Any changes in Prep that affect cartage will display on the SpreaderMan cartage ticket as well All hardcoded user data that was used previously for Lime has been eliminated Lime functionality is now configurable e You no longer need to define a Lime Customer within the Terms Code editor Item Groups within Customer Projects and Items now provide this functionality e Ifyou wish you can set up a Item Category for Lime such as 2610 but if you do so service products can only be assigned to products beginning with the Item Category code 2610 in this case e In addition to SpreaderMan any service addition can be added to any ticket Background Lime is a product that is treated like aggregate in COMMANDcseries When specific Lime products are purchased you must deliver another service the actual Lime spreading There are two terms you may wish to familiarize yourself with e Delivery Hauler The truck actually used to deliver the Lime e Spreaderman The entity person actually spreading the L
256. e Only one future day ticket is allowed per truck e You can future ticket a truck even if the truck is on another non future day order e You can print store the schedule s date and time for future day orders e When the truck returns to an At Plant status the next ticket will be loaded to the truck the truck will not be punched out e You cannot punch out a truck when it is on any future ticket or pre ticket order If you change the date for a future ticket you must punch the truck out and in again otherwise the truck will not be assigned e When a truck is not on an order the next ticket fields will be blank so the truck can be punched out When the truck is punched in again a future day ticket will be assigned to the order if the current day matches a future date e Future day tickets are delivered to the batch panel at the time the ticket is created It is your company s responsibility to produce the ticket at the correct time Configuration The following will occur in Concrete Ticketing and Shipping if the Configuration gt Dispatch tab s new Future Day Ticketing Ticket Time field is selected as Use Schedule Time as Ticket Typed Time e The Order Date from the Schedule Load SCHL is used for the Ticket Date field PET DATE TICK e The Load Time is calculated from the Scheduled Load time on the SCHL table and stored in the SCHED_LOAD_TIME TICK field Ticketing 165 The Typed Time is calculated from the SCHED_
257. e Price By in the associated field Prices can be adjusted by a set amount or by a percentage Enter ranges for Customer Code Project Code Location Plant Code as needed The availability of these fields is dependent upon the Change Prices In selections Select what to Change Prices For The options are o Specific o Specific o Specific Type Select the Items button to display a price change selection screen The screen that appears reflects the Change Prices For option Calculate Price Change for Specific Items SELPCHG1 D Calculate Price Change for Specific Items Application Management 311 10 11 Calculate Price Change for Specific Item Categories D Calculate Price Change for Specific Item Categories 12121212 i2 i2 i2 ieie fe Co L ce C Ao C Wi 6 sl Ce P KRKRRKKRRR Each screen lets the user enter a price change based on an amount or a percentage based on the Change Price By option on the main screen All screens except the Specific Type screen allow entry of multiple prices changes through use of the Add Occurrence command Enter the percentage or amount by which you want the price changed Use negative values to reduce prices Caution If you are entering an amount do not enter a new price If you do that amount will be added to the current price of the item Accept the Calculate Price Change screen to calculate the price change information You will be prompted for a Print M
258. e RE dE EA E E EEN d EEN a 252 CO COSTS eege EE Ee 253 Open Pay ens E 255 Receipt e e EE 256 Emergency ee EE 259 Cash Management THOS Lee det ANE 259 Cash Reconciliation Aug ere 260 Cancel Cash RECONCIIATION sseesdccsvenasensaccansd dasi unean Eua ANE aE Eat 262 Reconciliation Report GE 263 Uncollected Tickets Remote geen ae dE ERR excises 264 Unallocated Receipts Report ak 264 DOCUMENE Format verk it AN RN EEN ANNER KAREN dE EEN KENNEN EN a aaa 265 Purging Quick CustomerS s sssssssssusssresrosesessssenennanannnnnnnnenenrosensssenesensane 265 Die e e EE 266 REPOMS iviisecicsesiav ZENNER NENNEN REENEN NENNEN NEES NEEN ee NN EEN ENEE EA 267 Direct DepOSItS erer EE 268 Configuration and WorkfloW od SkaNgANN dee Edge 268 Cash RECONCINGKION WEE 269 Preliminary Reconciliation Report date ge eet EE e Ga Eed EE 270 CUSTOMGEr NOTES ggssgeaseaeREeeR GEREEST EEN EES EE 272 Typesof e EE 272 Entering NOTES secavedssnevacavs weeds ETAO ANAREN YEERE EEEE AAEE EEEE RRRA a 273 Managing Customer NOLES lt sisicuwssesicsacsnwssonnsiawnniedses EEN 276 N tes LISTING EE 277 Dispatch Memos in Order Entry agx eege REES Ee 278 elei dee EE 278 Operations tee ee 279 REPOMES e e ustN sd ENER de REENEN E AA EENE deste casiouvesentana ven dE REN Ee 281 Deleting Managing amp Purging Completed Notes cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 281 COMMAND concrete Reports nk E KEE EK KKK R KEE KEE EK KKK E KEN 283 Generating Reports EE 283 Sch d ling
259. e Ticket button to open the Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping screen From the Edit Orders amp Tickets screen go to the next step 4 From the Options menu select Reprint Ticket s to open the Reprint Tickets screen The above graphic lists all form fields Some fields will not display depending on your selections 5 Ifthe screen was displaying an order that order date and code will be passed to the reprint screen If the screen was blank then enter the Order Date and Order Code associated with the ticket s to be reprinted 6 Select Print all Tickets on Order or specify a Ticket Code or range of codes 7 Ifthe Reprint Tickets screen has been called from Edit Orders and Tickets you may only Print to a standard local or network printer 8 Enter an appropriate Document Format or detail on the field to select from a list 9 Accept the screen to reprint the ticket s Edit Orders and Tickets 225 To reprint to a plant printer You can only print to a plant printer if the reprint screen is called from 1 Enter the Order Date Order Code and Ticket Code s as above 2 Select Plant Printer in the Print to drop down field The lower portion of the screen will activate 3 Specify a Plant Code The reprint ticket will be sent to that plant s default ticket printer 4 Ifthe specified order is an aggregate order the Scale Number field will display Select the scale from the drop down list 5 Once the plant or
260. e Water Content b c e For the total load Total sum of Extended Design Weight Total sum of Theoretical Wet Weight Total sum of Actual Batched Weights Total Theoretical Free Water Content Per m3 Extended Design weight Per m3 of Theoretical Wet Weight Per m3 of Actual Batched Weights O O O O O 0 0 Actual Water Cement Ratio O Appendix G Batch Confirmation and EU Link Enhancements 429 Appendix H Counter Sales Cash and Carry This modification begins the process of migrating Cash and Carry functionality from V6 00 to CS08 V3 enabling Point of Sale POS purchases through standard COMMANDseries functionality With this functionality someone can order material receive it and pay for it at the same time This modification addresses five major forms e Credit Codes e Customers e Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping e Edit Orders amp Ticketing e Aggregate Ticketing Cash amp Carry Orders A Cash and Carry order is an order in which the customer comes to you orders merchandise pays for it and takes it away himself An order is defined as as Cash and Carry if the customer is assigned a Cash and Carry credit code Cash and Carry orders have the following constraints e They must be paid in full and ticketed when the order is saved Only one ticket is allowed the delivered quantity must equal the ordered quantity e Once payment has been entered a Cash and Carry order cannot be changed or copied e
261. e a delivery method at all the system will not let you print a ticket and you will receive the following error message Delivery Method must be FOB or Delivery for a ticket to be printed If an order is set to be Delivered you must also choose a truck that is set to make deliveries Trucks set as F O B Only cannot be assigned to delivered tickets If this does 136 Ticketing occur you will receive the following error message Truck is configured for F O B only select a different truck or set the delivery method on the truck The Load Quantity will default from the Truck s load size file or the remaining concrete on the order unless the load size was restricted in order entry If the truck has any remaining material from a previous load that amount will appear in the Preload Quantity field Any preloaded material will automatically be subtracted from the truck s load size sent to a batching system if they are interfaced If there is no interface you must remember to inform the batchman that there is preloaded material on the truck The Cube Check checkbox is used solely to send a true or false flag to the batch panel and may or may not be used depending on batch panel settings It has no effect on the ticketing process Press the Print Ticket button to print the ticket A number of things might happen before the ticket is issued depending on a number of different factors o Ifthe scheduled Hold Quantity is
262. e adjusted for all products v Comments Quantities on hand should be adjusted for all products U Quantities should be handled as damaged goods for all products No adjustment to quantities should be made for any products Prompt for this information with each product code entered 6 Ifa Reason Code is configured specifically for Credit Debit Memos it will default otherwise detail on the field and select one from the list 7 Select a How should all quantities effect inventory and sales analysis option The inventory sales analysis adjustment options are as follows o Quantities on hand should be adjusted for all products All items appearing on the credit memo will be returned to inventory Generally used when doing a credit rebill when issuing a credit memo for a delivery that never took place or any credit memo that adjusts the amount of material received by the customer O Quantities should be handled as damaged goods for all products Items on the credit memo will not be placed into inventory they will be tagged as damaged goods for inventory and reporting purposes Edit Orders and Tickets 223 10 11 12 13 o No adjustment to quantities should be made for any products No adjustments are made for any item on the credit memo Only used for adjustment credit memos in which you are crediting a customer who has been overcharged O Prompt for this information with each product code entered Upon accepti
263. e contacts who have a Contact Type of Rebate or Royalty will display when detailing on this field o Effective Dates Effective dates are those dates for which that rebate royalty with its contact and target quantity is to be used It is like a contract that is good within the specified dates Tickets look for the valid rebate royalty using this date range Any ticket for a date prior to the effective date will use the Previous Amount All tickets up to that date will use the Previous Amount and on or after that date will use the Current Amount o Current Amount Sometimes the amount of the rebate royalty can change within one effective date range Enter the changed rebate royalty amount in this field The previous Current Amount will then move over to the Previous Amount field upon changing the former o Current Amt Effective The effective date range for the amount entered in the Current Amount field o Previous Amount The last used Current Amount for the rebate royalty o Target Quantity Used to limit the life of the rebate royalty within its Effective Date causing the rebate royalty to exist only until the target quantity is reached For example if halfway into the Effective Date range rebates have been applied to tickets consuming the entire Target Quantity specified the rebate would cease to be effective Accept the Items editor to save the rebate and royalty information pertaining to that item 126 Rebates and Royalti
264. e customer what the total will be The Order COD Calculation function calculates and displays the COD amounts for the order Any time an order is entered with a Payment Method other than Charge the COD Calculator button will appear on the right side of the Order screen Press the button and the total amount due is displayed along with the individual parts that make up the total amount Calculations are based on the ordered quantity of the products entered on the order The detail button next to the Sundry Charges field displays a detailed listing of all the sundry charges that make up this total on the Sundry Charge Distribution screen The detail button beside the Tax Amount field displays a detail listing of the tax amounts on the Order Sales Tax Distribution screen There are two factors that can result in the final total being different from the Order Total listed in the COD Calculator e Differences between the ordered quantities and the delivered quantities This is generally more of an issue for aggregate operations than for concrete e Unloading charges because unloading charges cannot be calculated until after the delivery Two common means of compensating for this type of discrepancy are to Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 71 charge a higher price for COD deliveries or to let customers know that they may be billed for excess unloading charges A detail button next to an amount indicates that there is breakout information on th
265. e field and select your customer the billing customer from the list Tab through the Project Code field or enter a unique project code Continue to enter project details in the usual way Detail on the Shipping Customer field and select a third party company from the list The Reference Customer will typically be the same as the billing customer Detail on the field to select from the list or enter the customer code Appendix A Examples 389 D Projects Projects screen EDTPROJ Main tab Third Party Project Name THIRD PARTY SHIP Master Project Main Contacts Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution Distances Products Orders Forecast Standard Haul Costs A Project Contact Address O O Delivery Address 4 SOMEWHERE OVER THE RAINBOW Instructions Re OE Purchase Order tt Customer Job a Measutement System To Use Metric Only D Contact eee Phone Number 1 Phone Number 3 fr Phone Number 2 Phone Number 4 rr Setup Date TSNov 2007 Begin Date Expiration Date Segen Shipping Customer lt 410390 shipping customer thid party Reference Customer 700700 biling customer Bil ToProject T 7 Press lt F2 gt to accept the screen and save the changes For a normal order when you detail on the Project field in Order Entry the list shows projects for the billing customer since the shipping customer and the billing customer are the same person When the Use Multip
266. e industry Check with your CA customer service representative for further information To Apply Minimum Load Haul Charges select that checkbox The minimum haul charges are calculated based on information in the charge cartage table selected To Apply Seasonal Charges select that checkbox The seasonal charges are calculated based on the Seasonal Charge Table field Select the seasonal charge table using the detail button To Apply Unloading Charges select that checkbox Unloading charges will be calculated based on the Unloading Charge Table field Select the unloading charge table using the detail button Unloading charges do not appear in the COD Calculator for a COD order These charges are determined once ticket times are completed To Apply Sundry Charges to an order select that checkbox Sundry Charges are extra charges added to an order such as after hours delivery a weekend delivery environmental charges or a minimum ticket charge Sundry Charges provides you with a way to charge customers for purchases that exceed normal circumstances To create a separate invoice for any of the above charges check the Create Separate Invoice check box on the appropriate line Enter the Tax Code for the plant order These fields identify the tax code representing the location where the load ownership changes This code will be the taxation point for the order and all of its tickets Origination based taxation destination based taxation a
267. e outstanding receivable Therefore the value in the Financing Cost field grows larger with the increase in days to pay H Select a Terms Code for the bid This code uniquely identifies the payment terms and any discount being offered for the customer or project and the resulting invoices 9 Using the amounts in the various cost and adjustment fields along the right side of the screen as reference especially the Minimum Selling Price enter a Quoted Selling Price for the product per cubic yard or meter When a value has been entered here the With An Estimated Profit field displays the estimated profit that will be gained if the product is ultimately sold at this price 10 Review the contents of the Bid Price Calculator and change amounts as necessary The cost and adjustment field values are recalculated immediately The Material Costs Overhead Costs and Delivery Costs tabs let you see details of how the various costs are calculated Order Level Mix Design The Order level Mix Design feature lets users with appropriate access design a mix from the Order Entry screen This mix design will be available only for the current order This functionality is useful when it is necessary to work around specific restraints such as weather conditions and loading times To set up Order Level Mix Design In order for a user to be able to use order level mix design two system flags must be set 1 Open the Distribution tab of the Configurat
268. e ready to edit a mix from the Order Entry screen To perform order level mix design 1 Open the Order Entry screen and create an order as normal 2 When the system is set up for order level mix design the Associated Products button on the main Order Entry screen becomes the Mix Design button Order Level Mix Design Order screen ltem Code Description Price Order Qty Load Oty Dely Qty Slump 25466 2500 3 41 6 30 00 cy i Scheduling Other Mis Design d 3 After entering a mix and an Order Quantity press the Mix Design button 4 The Order Line Mix Design screen displays The screen title bar will also show the selected mix o Ifyou are licensed for the Technical Quotation System TQS and use it to create a mix opening the Order Line Mix Design screen will only let you view the mix details you cannot edit them Order Line Mix Design screen EDTORDRP 88 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools Order Line Mix Design screen EDTORDRP D Order Line Mix Design A100 C25 C30 KRANBETON Spec Onginal Original Adjusted Adusted Water Trim 4 Gr Quantity Volume Quantity Volume oOo B 100103002 SAND OOLITIC 268 1030 25 38442 102025 kg 38442 E gt 133175011 UMESTONE 20G 268 918 89 34287 51869 ko M287 d WER 2443600 CEMI 310 245 00 7303 250 wm d Target 241544004 P1I70 WRA 1 00 735 00 735 00 750 m 73500 f Incl Abs 00 Excl Abs 0 H Effective 00 As 00 00 I Copy to All Total Vokme 1541 32
269. e record will be deleted and the selection screen will close Printing a Priced Orders Report Use the Priced Orders Report to obtain pricing information for orders and tickets being prepared for invoicing This report option lists and totals each order separately whereas the Preliminary Invoice Register Option groups and totals orders and tickets as they will be invoiced based on individual customer settings This report includes important prices and pricing related information such as zone code project pricing plant and the price source code It also shows the delivery zone for each Preliminary Invoice Register 189 order which can influence the price Suspended Orders can also be seen on the Priced Orders Report The Priced Orders Report has one option the Exception Report that is not available from the Preliminary Invoice Register To print a Priced Orders report without exceptions 1 10 11 Go to the Preliminary Invoice Register Selections screen Invoicing gt Preliminary Invoice Register Enter a Report Name to save a new report configuration or select an existing Report Name from the drop down list This field can be left blank In the Report Type drop down list select Priced Orders Select an option from the Report Sequence list to indicate the sequence in which invoice information will appear These sequences are particularly useful if multiple people participate in the price review process
270. e shipment of inventoried materials to job sites for inter company construction related activity A Job Cost Phase code Files gt General Information gt Job Cost Phase will be associated with the order to accommodate the needs of the construction job cost environment No invoicing will be associated with this order type o Material Transfer is used for shipping inventoried materials to an inter company plant or business No invoicing is involved o Incoming Material Received represents incoming inventory material o Credit Debit memos represent a credit debit against the customer s account The default value is All Order Types SELORTP D Order Types xi Regular Sale Incoming Material Dumped Job Transfer Material Transfer Incoming Material Received Credt Debt Memos a900904 Select Print Weights to print constituent products weights included in mix products for each ticket Select Print Associated Products to print the associated products for each ticket Select Print Extra Products to print the extra products for each ticket Daily Invoicing 15 Select Use Reporting Units of Measure to indicate that products will be represented in the Total section of the report only if they have a valid unit of measure code in the Reporting Unit of Measure field identified on the Items editor Files gt Item Information gt Items Otherwise only ready mix products are represented in the total section Using repor
271. e the changes Data Management 357 6 Select Store Modified Occurrence s 7 Close the Data Maintenance screen Using the Data Maintenance screen effectively requires that you have an extensive knowledge of the COMMANDeeries database In the example above for instance you would have to know that the customer credit code was stored in the CUCO table COMMANDeeries does provide a quick method of determining where a particular piece of information is stored If you open a customer record go to the Accounting tab place the cursor in the Credit Code field and press lt Ctrl W gt you will see the following in the message line at the bottom of the screen Field Message Field CRED_CODE on form EDTCUSTG in file CUCO This text tells you that the Credit code information is stored in a field named CRED_CODE in the CUCO table EDTCUSTG is the file name of the accounting tab screen In some instances the file will be XXX such as XXX2 In such a case the field data comes from a database index not directly from a table Special Search Operators The Data Maintenance screen supports wildcards and search parameters Those parameters are Equals gt Greater than gt can be used for Equal to or greater than lt Less than lt can be used for Equal to or less than Single character wildcard Broad wildcard A special code must be entered to use these values Before entering parameter press lt Ctrl gt
272. e to be assigned to subsequent loads even after the schedule quantity has been met Select the Remove Round Trip when Order Sched Qty has been met chcekbox to prevent addition loads from being ticketed 6 Enter the Number of Trucks that will be needed to deliver the round tripped order 7 Enter the Truck Code of the trucks that are being assigned to the round tripped order 8 Accept the screen Truck Unavailability Nothing can destroy a schedule faster than a truck that has been slotted for a delivery but which is actually unavailable COMMANDseries lets you flag a truck as unavailable for specified date and time ranges COMMANDeeries uses a truck s unavailable status in the following ways e An unavailable truck will not appear on the Tracking and Scheduling screen e Ifyou try to assign an unavailable truck to an order either through ticketing rostering or dispatch you will receive an error message that the truck in unavailable COMMANDeeries can store multiple instances for a truck s unavailability allowing you to enter information well in advance To flag a truck as unavailable 1 Open the Truck Unavailability screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Truck Unavailability 2 Enter the Truck Code 3 Enter the date and time for the Start Unavailable Time 78 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 4 Enter the date and time for the End Unavailable Time The system will calculate the total numb
273. e updated Once the lock has been removed the stored ticket weight will be updated as usual You can view queued ticket weights on the Batch Interfaced Queued Weights screen via Application Management Batch Code Generator While COMMANDeseries allows for an unlimited number of items and mixes some batch panels particularly older batch panels have severe restrictions on the number of batch codes that are supported The only solution is to reassign batch codes every day only assigning batch codes to those mixes that will be shipped that day In this situation use the Batch Code Generator to scan a given day s deliveries determine how many unique mixes are being shipped and then assign a unique batch code that can then be entered in the batch computer 314 Application Management The routine generates a standard COMMANDeeries report The codes listed on the report must be entered into the batch computer manually To generate batch codes for a day s deliveries 1 Go to the Batch Code Generator screen Manage gt Application Management gt Batch Code Generator 2 Enter the Order Date for which batch codes are to be generated 3 Enter an Batch number that reflects the maximum number of batch codes to be generated 4 Accept the screen to generate the report Edit Project Expiration Dates The Purge Expired Projects routine uses the Project Expiration Date to identify outdated projects However in many cases
274. eatures e Allows entry of orders for the current day or multiple dates e Retains past orders for future reference or copying e Allows orders to be canceled reactivated moved to a different date or duplicated today or in the future e Allows inclusion of extra product and admix sales These products can be varied from one ticket to the next e Permits toggling between Order Entry and Ticketing without losing information e Estimates the required volume for slabs footings slabs with integral footings walls columns and steps with the volume calculator If the calculated volume is accepted it will default into the quantity ordered field e Provides for unique ticket formatting during system setup to provide flexibility e Allows orders with multiple mixes and or non mix products e Prints tickets at the plant within seconds of the dispatcher s demand e Automatically prices extends and taxes COD deliveries and displays the amount the customer owes e Allows tickets to be canceled uncanceled or retyped e Provides valuable information on daily activity reports for the current day s and prior day s orders production and deliveries These reports can be directed to the screen or any printer e Allows for easy ticket editing e Permits changing of the map page zone distance job number purchase order number and order status from the ticketing screen e Applies minimum load charges e Automatically pulls up load
275. echnical Altemate Item Batch Codes Batching Constituents Automatic Products TQS Location Code 48 Eiken IT Download to Batch System Status JActive Y Batch System UOM 7 Maximum Batch Size Mixer Time Rounding Factor f Order Dose mme H Suggested Order Quantity TT M Minimum Quantity M3 Maximum Quantity 7 M3 Tolerance Code D Sequence Code fs Mixer Number IT Maximum Batch Size Mixer Power Consumption Mixer Time Air Content Effective Water Content Slump Slump UOM Slump Tolerance Discharging Speed Mixer Feeding Sequence Number Delay Time Until Aggregate Discharge in Seconds Delay Time Until Cement Discharge in Seconds Delay Time Until Additive Discharge in Seconds Delay Time Until Water Discharge in Seconds M Copy to All Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping Screen The Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping screen has been updated with the new Water on Board field WATER_ON_BOARD TKTL which is used to store the amount of water that is on board the truck prior to batching Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping Screen EDTSHIP E Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping weights Order Date 15 10 2009 Plant Code 251 BIRS MXx1 Scale Code 1 GENERIC Truck Code je Freightl Driver Code jg Johmyl Joumey Overtime Order Code 250000 Al Item Group 60 CONCEng Ticket Code 25001318 Sequence Other Travel Distance 35 72 Order Type SEWERS E Tor On Job Time 15 20 Water on Board Times Shipping Customer 1000 Alpha Construction Lot Blo
276. ed to display in the details section of Ticket Data Out 42 Order Entry 9 Itis possible to set up a number of different customers that play different parts in the system For example you may have one customer making the order reference customer on behalf of another customer The customer that will pay for it billing customer may also be different It may then be shipped to one of those or another customer shipping customer In order to use this functionality the Use Multiple Customer Codes checkbox must be checked on the Main tab of the Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration Individual Shipping Customer and Reference Customer details can then be defined on the Main tab of the Projects screen Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects In the Projects file the billing customer is the owner of the project The Billing Customer defaults to display the customer code and name for the customer that will be billed for the current order This field is greyed out and read only 10 The Reference Customer defaults to display the customer code and name for the reference customer that is defined in the Projects file This will typically be the same as the billing customer but there may be cases where it differs 11 If your system is enabled for GPS tracking the Truck Poll Type field displays Polling refers to the GPS base system polling or requesting GPS coordinates when a truck enter
277. eeries database standards This routine cannot be used to import order ticket records or other records exported using a document format It is best to use the four letter table name for the file name with the extension TXT example CUST TXT otherwise you will have to specify a file name for each file you are importing When importing files using any Data In process manual or automated the system will truncate any information that is over the maximum field length specified in the database instead of throwing an error For example if a maximum field length in the database is 40 characters and there are 45 characters worth of information in that field the last 5 characters will not go through the import process In addition the system will eliminate any leading spaces in fields so more information can go through the import process To import files 1 Place the import files on the server 2 Select Manage gt Data Management gt Import Data Import Data screen DBAIMPR 3 Import Data amp Tabl P ke oy at 1 Accounting Categories File All ACCT Lj ACTY Import Standard 3 ADDL C Delete Existing Records Before Import ADIO 3 au Optional File gt ALLP 5 2 ARHD Input File Location sl c cs06 import D ARPD Import Array Size 1000 ARTB C Check Date Bounds on Imported Records hl pees C Show Selected Only E 3 Scroll through the table list on
278. egin with the number 1 If you enter a number in the Sequence Code field that does not exist a blank editor will display so you can manually create a Cartage Ticket Removing an Original Cartage Ticket If a ticket is removed and an additional Cartage ticket exists for the same order with a different sequence code you will receive a message There are multiple cartage tickets for this original ticket Would you like to remove these also e Select Yes to remove all cartage tickets that match the Order Date Order Code and Ticket Code e Select No to remove only the active ticket e Select Cancel to return to the original editor with the ticket loaded Update Cartage Ticket Changes The Update Cartage Ticket process creates an additional cartage ticket for Service products If the cartage ticket is created from Update Cartage Ticket the ticket information will be stored internally if the ticket is created manually the information will not be stored Note New fields for the Order Date Order Code Ticket Code and Internal Order Line Number for the cartage ticket have been added to the CTTK table e Another cartage ticket will be created for a second product that has a Spreaderman Hauler Code and will overwrite the Hauler Code of the ticket that comes from the truck e TLAC records will be created with the selected cartage Item Codes for the order lines e The Cartage Update error list will display tickets for Service products eve
279. el the replacement 334 Materials Manager Mix The Mix Design screen allows you to modify existing mixes in an environment that lets you verifying the mix proportions The screen s functionality enables you to make sure that a proper water cement ratio is maintained specify the maximum allowable water content and ensure that the mix will yield a full cubic yard meter Files gt Item Information gt Material Manager gt Mix Design When the screen is accepted the values are written to the Item Master files just as if the changes had been made in the standard Items editor In addition you can convert a mix design from one location to another taking into account different constituent availability at the various locations To load a mix into the Mix Design Editor There are two different ways of loading a mix into the Mix Design Editor 1 On the Mixes tab of the Material Manager screen single click the mix s line number Loading a mix from the Material Manager screen Mixes Aggregates Cements Admixes i Waters Item Replacement Item Code Description UOM Target W C Strength Notes Selected 1 N 2500 2500 3 4 3 8 o 4 2500 00 gw 2 2501 2500 1 2 3 8 cy LA 3 3000 3000 3 4 3 8 cy 46 d 4 4 3001 3000 Wall Mix cy I 5 3500 3500 3 4 cy 42 3500 00 WW 3501 3500 Wall Mix cy lg E 3502 3500 3 8 Curb cy Je E 8 4000 4000 PSI cy 45 4000 00 vV a 4001 4000 Floor Mix cy v Vu 5000 5
280. elivered The system calculates a projected delivery schedule for the order based on current information however reality is going to alter that schedule If a load is ticketed a little late or a little early how is the system going to adjust the schedule The Adjustment Type field lets you define how the system will adjust the schedule when a load is ticketed early or late The guiding principle for this function is that the delivery rate is paramount once deliveries have started the Truck Spacing or Delivery Rate per Hour depending on Rate Type must be maintained to ensure that the final product can be finished adequately There are four options o Always adjusted Ifa load is ticketed five minutes early all subsequent loads for the order will automatically be shifted up five minutes to maintain the requested truck spacing If a load is ticketed two minutes late all subsequent loads will be pushed back two minutes o When ticketed early An order s schedule will only be adjusted when a ticket is printed early Tickets printed late will have no affect on the calculated schedule o When ticketed late An order s schedule will only be adjusted when a ticket is printed late Tickets printed early will have no affect on the calculated schedule This is the most commonly used option as it allows dispatchers to pre ticket trucks without disrupting the schedule o No Adjustments The calculated schedule will not be adjusted
281. ely that any errors occurred during the invoice run For more information see Printing a Preliminary Detail Invoice Register on page 193 Printing Invoices The complete discussion of Printing Invoices can be found on page 57 of the COMMANDinvoicing user guide Final Invoice Register The totals pages of the Final Invoice Register should match those from the Preliminary Invoice Register printed immediately prior to invoicing If problems are discovered compare the details of the preliminary and final registers until the discrepancy is found Post to Receivables if licensed For a complete discussion of this process please refer to the COMMANDreceivables User Guide Plant level Invoices for Cash Sales Some companies are required to provide a pro forma invoice receipt for cash sales at the time of the sale To accommodate this requirement COMMANDeeries can print a cash invoice from the Ticketing screen In addition the standard invoicing process has been modified to allow greater flexibility invoicing cash sales To use this feature the system must be licensed for the following options e Order Entry amp Ticketing OE CC or OE CA e Cash Management CM e Pricing amp Prep PP e Invoicing IG Configuration Special configuration is only needed to enable ticketing cash sales at the time of ticketing Configuring a system for this feature involves two things e Creating selecting a document format group
282. em 144 Ticketing Certification Legal Text Screen EDTCERT 4 Certification Legal Text Configuration A new drop down field Allow Printing of National Standard Logo and Legal Text has been added to the Configuration gt Distribution tab that will control the printing of the National Standard Logo Certification Fields and Legal Text on the delivery note on the Concrete Ticketing and Shipping screen Below are the options for this field the logo is set up on the Configuration gt National Standards tab e Allow with no Warning if Certification rules are not met the logo and legal text will print with no user warning Allow with Warning if Certification rules are not met the logo and legal text will print with a user warning Do Not Allow with Warning if Certification rules are not met the logo and legal text will NOT print with a user warning Configuration gt Dispatch Tab EDTCNEX System Defauits C 180 30 Never Daily No adjustments Schedule Based et el Allow with no wa gt rmnings E Allow with warnings Do not allow with warnings a Below is the new logic for determining certification for a Concrete Mix Ticketing 145 e First check the SAP Concrete Code Location Code Mix Design Code in the IMLB table e Next check the Mix Design Alternate Item Location Code in the ILOC table Finally check the SAP Concrete Code
283. employee s code The Taken On Extension field lets you record the extension number on which the order was taken Some phone systems record all calls based on extension Entering the extension on this screen makes it easier for the user to retrieve the stored call The Ordered by Name Ordered by Phone fields are used to store site specific information relating to the order These values will default from the Customer Contact and Phone 1 fields respectively in the customer project record Enter the Salesman who generally works with this customer Enter a Delivery Method Hauler Code and Map Page As with the delivery address these fields are considered secondary information because the material has already been delivered Enter a Sales Analysis Code This field is used by COMMANDoexecutive to generate Sales Reports and usually defaults from the Customer or Project file Enter a Resale PO number if necessary For further reference enter a Shipping Customer and a Reference Customer in the associated fields If circumstances surrounding the order s delivery are such that you need to exclude the tickets from time analysis select the Exclude all tickets from Time Analysis check box This option is often used when processing debit credit memos or order in which delivery was delayed by unusual circumstances The User Defined Fields area allows users to append additional information on orders payments customer files etc To add a comme
284. ems are assigned to these tabs based upon their Item Type not Item Category The only search filter available for the constituent tabs is the Plant code The rest of the screen works just like the Mixes tab Materials Manager 327 zl OO amp GA PM Aggregates tab EDTMTMG2 Mixes Aggregates Cements Admixes Waters Item Replacement ltem Code Description UOM SpGravity Notes Yield Adj 10 Sand US lb 2 65 gt e al J 11 Delivered Sand b 265 o a 26 3 8 Stone lb 2 58 gt If d 27 3 4 Stone lb 2 65 WI D 28 11 4 Stone lb 2 65 gt Tf va 29 1 2 Stone lb 2 65 tf al 30 3 8 Lightweight Stone lb gt iz Al When performing item replacements the Material Manager uses fine aggregates to make volume adjustments as needed The Aggregate tab allows you to specify what sand s is to be used for compensation If the Yield Adj cell for an aggregate is gray it is a fine aggregate based on the item type and can be used for volume compensation The cell is white for a coarse aggregate The Yield Adj checkbox is active only for fine aggregates it cannot be checked for a coarse aggregate You can use the Notes button to record additional information about the constituent and you can use Add Occurrence to access the Item editor where you can edit existing items or create new ones Item Replacement From time to time it can become necessary to modify mixes either by adjusting the amounts of the different constituents o
285. eoretical Cement e DIFCEO Difference between Target and Actual Cement e VARCEO Theoretical and Actual Variance e TOTCE1 Total Theoretical Cement 294 COMMAND concrete Reports e TCTCE1 Total Theoretical Cementitious Material TETCE1 Total of Theoretical Cement and Total Theoretical Cementitious Material TOACE1 Total Actual Cement e TCACE1 Total Actual Cementitious Material TEACE1 Total Actual Cement and total Actual Cementitious Material e DIFCC1 Difference in Theoretical and Actual Cement only e VARCC1 Variance for above e DIFCT1 Difference in Theoretical and Actual Cementitious Material only e VARCT1 Variance for above e DIFCE1 Difference in Theoretical and Actual Total Cement and Cementitious Material e VARCE1 Variance for above e DOSWDD Total Theoretical Water e DIFWDD Difference in Total Theoretical Water and Actual Water e VARWDD Variance in Total Theoretical Water and Actual Water e DOSWTT Total Water only without the Water on Board e DOSWRT Total Recycling Water only e TARAGG Total Target Aggregate e actTAGG Total Actual Aggregate e DIFAGG Difference in Actual and Target Aggregate e VARAGG Variance of Actual from Target Aggregate e DIFWCR Difference in Actual and Theoretical Water Cement e VARWCR Variance for above e IFPM1 Difference in Total Actual Weight and Theoretical Weight per unit Mix Design e VARPM1 Variance for above
286. er amp Schedule Tools 107 Editing an Existing Journey Once a journey has been created it may be necessary to re order add or remove orders To edit a journey 1 Open the Journey Editor Dispatch gt Journey Editor 2 Enter the Journey Date and the Plant Code from which the order is to be shipped 3 Detail on the Journey Code field and select a journey Journey screen EDTJOUR Edit journey sequence D Journey fal Fa Joumey Date 12Jan 2008 Plant Code 252 Joumey Code 250000 Truck Code Order Date Order Code Item Code Load Qty Sequence 12Jan 2008 250002 km 7 C25 C30 500 M3 2 12Jan 2008 250003 im z C25 030 500 M3 H 4 The screen is populated with journey information You can now edit the Load Quantity and Sequence entries as required 5 You can also add new stops orders to the journey by tabbing onto the next line or pressing lt F6 gt 6 Accept the changes Ticketing a Journey Once you have created a journey you must ticket each of the orders on that journey COMMANDeeries provides a convenient way to do this all at once To ticket a journey 1 Open the Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping screen Dispatch gt Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping 2 The Order Date defaults to the current date If necessary you can change this once the plant code field has been completed 3 Enter the Plant Code Truck Code and Driver Code as necessary If a truck code was entered on the Journey Editor it is
287. er of days and hours affected by the date range 5 Ifnecessary enter an unavailable Reason Code Reason Codes if present can help you manage and track unavailability statistics for a large fleet Reason Codes must be set up in advance Files gt General Information gt Reason Codes 6 Ifnecessary press the Add Occurrence button to enter another unavailability range or accept the screen Journeys A journey is a feature of COMMANDeseries that allows you to schedule a truck to make one trip with several stops and one product This typically happens when several customers require a small quantity of an identical product Topics in this section Creating a New Journey Editing an Existing Journey Ticketing a Journey Creating a New Journey The Journey screen allows you to create journeys in advance to allow you to plan deliveries ahead of time Typically journeys are created the day prior to delivery using multiple orders placed for that day To create a journey 1 Open the Journey Editor Dispatch gt Journey Editor 2 Enter the Journey Date Typically this will be tomorrow s date 3 Enter the Plant Code from which the order will be shipped 4 Tab through the Journey Code field to allow the system to auto assign a value or enter a custom journey code Ji The Truck Code field is optional but can be completed if necessary 6 Enter the Order Date of the orders you wish to add to the journey If you tab throu
288. er_ Purchase Order Customer Job Sales Analysis Code ED SINGLE DWELLING Hauler Code COD Current Status Normal z Item Code Description Consist Order Qty Delv Oty Price Ext Price 129447 EARLY AGE 25MPA 3DAYS 20M Alf 12 00 M3 00 Hola eee Plant Must Finish Stat Trk Tu Travel Times Spacing Unload Distance Load Qty Loads Products 1140 00 har 16 00 fea 25 3000 s000fioookmf 600 2 Product Charges 1 140 00 Schedule Loads Tax 114 00 Ticket_ Rate Type Mins Apart x Weight This Product 0 00 Total Price 1254 00 Weight for this order 0 00 Payment When you accept a COD order the system will prompt you regarding payment payment prompt COMMANDseries 7 No payment required due to current credit availability Do you wish to make a payment e Ifyou select No the order will be saved You will process the payment receipt at a later time e Ifyou select Yes you will initiate the Cash Payment Routine to enter a payment and automatically allocate it to this order s tickets To enter a cash payment from order entry 1 Open the Cash Payment screen either by responding yes to the above prompt or by pressing the Payment button on the Order Entry screen Cash Management 253 Cash Payments screen EDTPMTS D Cash Payments 2 lt Tab gt through the Receipt Number field The value will be populated upon acceptance of the form 3 Customer Code Project Code Payment Date and Transaction Type wil
289. ere as necessary Note that the UOMs for Delivered and Price Quantity for admixtures are often different Accept the screen to save and return to the main prep screen If there are extra products on the order the Extra Products button displays Press the button to display the Ticket Products screen You may edit information here as necessary Press the Charges button to edit ticket level charges Press the Times button to review enter ticket times for the ticket The colon does not have to be included when you enter a time 1123 will be converted to 11 23 The system looks for military time 0 24 To avoid having to continually add twelve to something during entry of afternoon and evening times add P to the end of a PM time to have the system convert it For example 245P would be converted to 14 45 Accept the screen to save changes and return to the Ticket Information screen Press the Other button to display the Other Ticket Information screen This information can be edited as necessary although it is unlikely that you will need to edit information on this screen on a regular basis Accept the screen to return to the Edit Ticket Information screen The Status button opens a screen that allows you to set the ticket as Active Removed or Suspended Released When the cartage tickets are updated for a dispatch ticket the Cartage Status field is updated accordingly Cartage update has not been run default Do Not Invoice Ticke
290. ered Quantity 5 50 D14 Update Order Types Rebuild Current and Future Schedule Loads 5 51 Convert Check Numbers in ITRN Table Update Map Page Travel Time Convert PRJC for Upgrade from 5 51 and Earlier Convert Price Type Field for Upgrade from V5 51 and Earlier Data Management 363 Version Update 5 52 Update Allow Price Change Flag for COD Customers Projects Update Blank Default Order Types in Projects Clear NEXT Fields in TRUC Table 5 53 16 Update Payment Forms in Orders Tickets Invoices 5 54 Update Batch Entry ID for Payments Correct Zone Price Plant for Wild Card Price Category 5 57 4 Initialize GPS Polling for Orders Projects from Configuration Set tings 5 57 10 Convert Sundry Misc Charges for Upgrade from 5 57 9 and Earlier 5 57 12 Update Accumulation for Items CS06 1 0 B Convert SIGU Records CS06 1 0 D_ Change all Schedule statuses to Order status CS06 1 0 F Truncate Credit Card Numbers to Last Four Digits CS08 2 7 Convert USCF to FCUS Records CS08 2 15 Update GUID Fields for Integration CS08 2 15 Update EDX Synchronization Status There are two additional upgrade related updates that fall outside of the standard list e Ifupgrading from 5 51 run Update Schedule Load Size Flag e If upgrading to V5 Tracking and Scheduling formerly called GIM run Create External Translation Table List of Manual Updates Below are descriptions of the database updates Some updates are sxclusive to V2 or V3 Convert C
291. es Schedule Requirements The basics of this form are the same as the standard Order Line Schedule Information screen there are only a few additional changed fields Start Thru Time To provide the Optimizer with some flexibility you have the option of entering a time range Max Truck Size the maximum load size for optimized operations This value defaults from the Configuration Optimization tab while the field is active as a general rule this value should never be changed Priority This field assigns a priority to the schedule 1 is the lowest priority 9 is the highest 0 or null will be interpreted as 9 Note A Default Priority for all orders can be set on the Configuration Optimization screen Job Wait Time This field specifies how many minutes should be allowed between the time the truck finishes loading and the time it leaves for the job This time is used for inspections batch testing etc This field is linked to a configuration setting in the Optimizer interface that specifies whether this lead time should be applied to every load of the schedule or just the first load Leading Order Code If another order must be finished before delivery can begin on this schedule enter that order code here Doing so links the orders together for the optimizer Gap The required gap in minutes between the finish pour time of the leading order and the desired on job time of the linked order schedule
292. es Jobs Quotes Projects gt Products Tab Now a Job Quote or Project can be created using the rebate and royalty information just set up Items already on the Products tab on the Jobs Quotes and Projects editors will be updated automatically when rebate and or royalty information has been updated for those items on the Items editor When rebates and royalties are enabled the Material Cost found on the Products tab for Jobs Quotes and Projects will be configured differently Material Cost Item Cost Rebate Amount Royalty Amount Products Tab Material Margin EDTPRDL1 Main Contacts Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution Distances Products Orde Plant ll x Display jal Products x Default Price Type Fix Material Delivered Price Restrict Orders by Estimated Quantity Dont Restrict Don t Warn x Material Margin X Cartage Truck Material Material Material Allow Line Product Plant Short Descr Consist Charge Type Quantity Price Cost Margin Auto 1 00 facci Du Do Al TT 150 00 Teeny 6 00 ER Note The effect of rebates and royalties will be reflected on each ticket and will also be reflected in the Material Cost on the Preliminary Invoice Register In addition this amount will be displayed on the following COMMANDexecutive reports Gross Margin Contribution and Top Customer The Material Cost field on the Products tab for Jobs Quotes and Projects is now editable Detailing
293. es Order Entry Schedule section EDTCORD aot PEN So See 11 Press lt F2 gt again to save the order OK the Order s in the System Now What Now that the order has been scheduled let s talk about what the dispatcher will see and do on the Tracking and Scheduling screen Here s what the Tracking and Scheduling screen will initially look like Both the plant and order summary lines show the amount scheduled out of that plant Note that because of the difference in travel times the first truck from plant 43 is scheduled to be loaded before the first one from plant 48 even though the truck from plant 48 will be the first to arrive on site Appendix A Examples 385 Tracking amp Scheduling Multiple Shipping Plant Display separates loads by plant The order appears under both scheduled plants 386 Appendix A Examples Truck 11 order 1 1 Printed at 09 53 17 Batching for Third Parties It is often the case in the concrete industry that the customer that places an order with you the concrete provider is not always the customer that receives the order By setting up third party companies it is possible for your customers to order from you on behalf of one of their customers so in effect a third party customer is defined as a customer of your customer COMMANDseries also allows you to set up different document formats to print tickets with your customer s logo
294. es 17 Logging into COMMANDseries 17 Setting Up the System 16 SmartLookup Screens 22 Starting COMMANDseries 16 Using the Tab Key 19 Constituent Replacement Log 343 Credit Checking 392 Assigning Customer Credit Codes 396 Configuration 394 Credit Codes 394 Reason Codes 395 Using the Credit Checking Function 397 Customer Notes 272 Index Deleting Managing amp Purging Completed Notes 281 Entering Notes 273 Managing Customer Notes 276 Notes Listing 277 Types of Notes 272 Customer Project Order Lookup 70 Customers D Update Unctive Customers 319 Data Maintenance 353 Global Replace 357 Retrieving Records 355 Special Search Operators 358 Data Management 345 Automatic Database Updates 358 Database Locks 373 Export Data 348 Export Orders and Tickets 350 Import Data 346 Import Orders and Tickets 349 Initialize Analyze Files 345 Manual Database Updates 362 Service Control 374 SQL Worksheet 372 Dispatch Memos in Order Entry 278 Dispatching Examples Multiple Loads on One Truck 380 Scheduling an Order out of Multiple Plants 383 Two Products on One Truck 382 Dispatching Reports 290 E Batch Info Report 300 Batching Comparison Report 300 COD Recap Report 295 Customer Sales Recap Report 298 Dispatch Sheet 289 Driver Callout Report 288 Inventory Usage Report 298 Order Audit Log Report 301 Order Recap Report 297 Order Report 291 Plant Loading Report 288 Plant Production Report 298 Product Sales
295. es Tax Reduction Profile Code field to select a valid code 13 Accept the Order Pricing Information screen Other Order Information The Other Order Information screen Invoicing gt Edit Orders amp Tickets gt Other contains additional fields related to the order Any of these fields can be printed on the order and or ticket by including the fields in the appropriate document format Other Order Information EDTPREP3 F Other Order Information x Delivery Address af 973 Eres Dive Taken By Employee Code Ap Taken On Extension B Ordered By Name Ordered By Phone B333 333 3333B Salesman gt 100 Vincent Allpromise Delivery Method lb DELIVERE Hauler Code p Map Page zifar ss Al Sales Analysis Code Je Resale PO Shipping Customer Hoo Alpha Constuction lele Reference Customer fi 000 Alpha Construction T Exclude all tickets from Time Analysis User Defined Fields To enter other order information 1 Enter the Delivery Address for the order In Order Entry this field is required and is located on the primary order screen When entering an order in prep the delivery address is considered secondary information because the material has already been delivered Edit Orders and Tickets 211 10 11 12 The Employee Code of the person entering the order into the system defaults into the Taken By Employee Code field but only if the COMMANDeseries user code is linked to the
296. es extensively old notes can pile up in the database in a relatively short period of time That is why it is important to manage and purge the customer notes in the system on a regular basis Deleting Notes To delete a single note 1 Retrieve the note in question 2 Select the Remove Record button or press lt Shift F5 gt Customer Notes 281 Managing Notes All notes have a Note Completed Checkbox in the lower right of the main Notes screen The Note Completed box Notes Entered Date Time 26 Jun 2007 15 00 Entered By SYSTEM Customer Code ABC ABC Project Code ABC ABC Project Job ID Quote Code sees Revision esa Product Code Transaction Code Order Date 17 Jun 2007 Order Code 1 The driver took out the customer s mailbox with the truck Give the customer one free yard Applies to Auto Display Contact Pe Quotes Phone Number Fax Number Commitment Amount Commitment Date L L Projects LC Receivables IT C Note Completed Follow Up Date sa C Follow Up Completed Batching v Invoice Prep L Tickets Orders COKOLI Managing notes is a matter of making sure that the Note Completed flag is set once the terms of the note have been addressed Purging Notes Purging Notes lets you delete old notes in bulk There is only one key consideration a note cannot be purged unless it has been flagged as completed To purge completed notes 1 Open the Purge Customer Notes screen Mana
297. es to the Project Code field If no projects are found the system automatically checks the customer s credit code What happens next o If the credit code is valid order entry proceeds o If the credit code is invalid the system warns you of the problem and returns the cursor to the Customer Code field so you can enter a valid customer 5 The Order Type and Payment Method default automatically when the customer code is entered See the Order Types section of this manual for additional information regarding order types 6 If this is a project order enter a Project Code Detail or press lt Enter gt to display of list of projects for the selected customer The system verifies the project s credit code or the customer s credit code if the project has no credit code Depending upon the results of the verification the system behaves as follows o Ifthe customer has been cleared for charge orders only the Payment Method field will display Charge The field will be grayed out you cannot change it o Ifthe customer has been cleared for both charge and C O D orders a dialog box will display asking you to select a Payment Method Charge Cash Check or Credit Card Select one and that option will display in the Payment Method field The field will be active you can press the drop down button to change the payment option o There is a button next to the Payment Method field labeled with a dollar sign This button brings up
298. eseries now supports quantity discounts The discounts are established at the price category level and are based on ordered or projected quantities Configuration Configuration involves two main editors e Price Category Items Once configured discounts are applied automatically in Projects Order Entry and Aggregate Ticketing Price Categories Anew checkbox Allow Quantity Discounts has been added to the Price Categories editor Price Categories EDTPCAT D Price Categories Biel Es Description Short JLarge Customer Tier 1 LARGE IV Allow Quantity Discounts Medium Customer Tier 2 MEDIUM Jv Allow Quantity Discounts Small Customer Tier 3 SMALL Jg Allow Quantity Discounts Retail Sales RETAIL M Allow Quantity Discounts gt Lime Customer IME T Allow Quantity Discounts JIntracompany Transfers JINTRACO Iv Allow Quantity Discounts JLocal Authority JLOCSL Allow Quantity Discounts Contracts JCONTRAC T Allow Quantity Discounts ltltltltltlet le E E Enable the field for all price categories for which you may want to use quantity discounts Items When price categories are assigned to an item the system will validate the Allow Quantity Discount field If it is enabled a Qty Discounts button will display i Appendix L Quantity Discounts Main UOM Conversions Sales Tax Override Mig User Fields Locations Costs Price Location Code 104 CRGROHA Cartage Rate Price Ca
299. et is suspended however the delivery still took place materials left inventory and these events will be reported as such on all dispatching reports The order ticket is merely withheld from invoicing until the dispute can be resolved Suspending individual products is slightly more complicated When a product is suspended the system creates a new suspended order and moves the specified products to the new order The suspended products still appear on the original order but the delivered and price quantities fields are zeroed out and inactive At that point the suspension is managed at the order level Once the price has been verified the suspended order ticket product can be released At that point it can be invoiced normally COMMANDeeries provides manual order suspension of orders tickets and products from the options menu and automatic order suspension for specific customers projects or exception items The decision on how or indeed if to use suspension should be made at the company level Topics in this section Manual Suspension of Orders Tickets or Products Automatic Customer Suspension of Orders Exception Suspension Suspended Orders amp Tickets Report Releasing Suspended Orders amp Tickets Editing Suspended Tickets on Invoiced Orders Suspending Orders and Tickets 199 Manual Suspension of Orders Tickets or Products Orders and products are suspended from the main Edit Orders and Tickets screen Ti
300. ethod ticket times must be given extra attention While the system records times as the truck goes through the delivery cycle all those times are assigned to the second ticketed order remember as far as the system is concerned the first order is already delivered Similarly the dispatcher needs the driver to manually alert him as he gets to the different jobs 10 If you charge for excessive unloading time require the driver to manually record the time he arrived on site started pouring and started to wash out Those times will then need to be entered manually through Edit Orders and Tickets Appendix A Examples 381 Two Mix Products on One Truck Sometimes a dispatcher needs to send one truck to a location with two different mixes on board This is possible when deliveries are over short distances and the truck doesn t have to continue to turn the mixer Typically the second product will be a pump priming mix that can be unloaded first The process used to order load and deliver two products on one truck is very simple The order is set up as usual with two different products and upon ticketing two tickets are created and sent to the batch panel To load and ticket two products on one truck 1 Follow the usual order entry process selecting two different mixes and entering a schedule 2 Open Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping Dispatch gt Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping 3 The Order Date defaults to the curren
301. ever you see the Calendar button The Calendar button will usually be found next to the Date field You can also invoke the calendar by pressing lt Enter gt when the cursor is in a Date field Keystroke Function lt Tab gt Left Arrow Advances one day lt Shift Tab gt Right Arrow Backs up one day Up Down Arrow Previous Week Next Week lt PgUp gt lt PgDn gt Previous Month Next Month lt Ctrl R gt Invokes the Calendar lt F11 gt Searching toggle lt F2 gt Closes the Calendar File gt Search Searches for a month You can also press lt F6 gt to execute the Add Occurrence command How to Use This Document 31 Order Entry Order entry is the foundation of COMMANDconcrete and COMMANDaggregate Orders are taken and tickets generated while capturing data for invoicing and reporting Topics in this section Standard Order Entry Scheduling an Order Scheduling an FOB Order Standing Order Entry Contract Integration in Order Entry Order Entry Screen Layout A lot of information is contained on the Orders screen so it s a good idea to be familiar with the layout 32 Order Entry A Orders Order Entry Layout EDTCORD ld le lalelo lele ch am ran au A8 G eh a 1 2 Stone23 K E 1 Header Together the Order Code and Order Date uniquely identify each order in your system Because these two fields are central to keeping database references intact generally referred to as re
302. eview a customer s full balance whenever an order is entered or a ticket is printed and will approve or hold the order based on the credit limit established in the customer s assigned credit code Credit Checking Configuration To use Credit Checking credit codes and reason codes must be set up in COMMANDeeries Do not assume that relevant credit codes and reason codes were set up when the system was initially configured Topics in this section Credit Codes Reason Codes Assigning Customer Credit Codes Credit Codes You can build credit codes that are relevant to Credit Checking using the credit codes screen Files gt Customer and Project Information gt Credit Codes You can then verify credit limits on codes that require credit supervision you needn t verify the credit limits on customers whose credit code reads AAA OK To Sell for example Customers assigned that credit code generally do not need credit supervision Credit Codes EDTCRED D Credit Codes Credit Code AAA Description AAA OK ToS Short JAAOK Credit Type Charge o Cash zl Wy Display Great Gade Descnptior Exceed Limit Authorization Code er E Allow Assignment to Projects Verily Credit Limits F Orders Require Authorization Concrete D I Do not exceed ordered quantity in ticketing a IT Require Project on All Orders 394 Appendix B Credit Checking To build a credit code 1 10 11 12 Enter a new Credit Code
303. f the material COMMANDeseries stores the username when a ticket is removed The Ticket Report includes that name when listing a removed ticket Ticketing With Prebatched Material When a truck returns with material on board and is subsequently ticketed the system will continue to prompt as follows T Concrete Tickets Truck 1 has 2 Cubic Ya of Mix Item 3000 on board from previous ticket number 10887 typed Nov 3 2009 11 08 07 Please enter the amount of this material that will be used as pre batched material on this load Pre batched Quantity __ J Adjust Price Qty and Reschedule for Original Order If the Returned Concrete Options Configuration gt Dispatch tab is set to Prompt User the Adjust Price Qty and Reschedule for Original Order checkbox will be displayed Select or deselect the field as needed If the Pre batched Quantity field is left blank and the screen accepted the system will prompt you as follows 140 Ticketing i COMMANDseries Pre batched quantity is less than returned quantity therefore the xx meters yards on this truck will treated as dumped material If you select OK the material will be treated as dumped and the truck will be ticketed with no pre batched quantity If you select Cancel the system will open the Pre batched Quantity screen Maximum Gross Truck Weight The Maximum Gross Truck Weight feature can be set up to provide you with a warning when the combined mix weight and
304. ferential integrity when you lt Tab gt out of the Order Code field these two fields will become inactive Order Entry 33 If you are entering an order and realize that you have entered the wrong date you will not be able to change it your only option is to clear the screen lt F4 gt and start from the beginning The Item Group identifies the type of items you will be entering on the order 2 Order Information This section contains order delivery information 3 Order Information Buttons Additional order related information is accessible through these buttons The Haul Pricing and Other buttons have a number of fields which generally do not have to be entered manually the values default from the project or customer record If the current order is a COD order the COD Calculator button will display giving you access to the total order price 4 Order Line Information This section has multiple tabs each tab corresponding to a single primary product on the order The schedule for the product can be entered on the tab as well simplifying order entry The first product on the first schedule tab defines the item group that will be used for that order Each item type is entered on a separate schedule tab The first product you enter will be considered the main product with other products treated as extra products Only one item group is allowed per order For instance a concrete product block and a ready
305. field on existing orders tickets and invoices No user input is required 366 Data Management Update Customer s Ticket Charge Tables from Version 4 Upgrade This updates minimum load unloading and seasonal charge settings in customer and project records Ifa given flag is false the corresponding field is cleared The update ensures the database is in line with V5 functionality rather than V4 No user input is required Update Customer s Trade Discount Amount UOM from V4 Upgrade This routine will check all customer and project files If the Trade Discount Amount UOM field is blank it will be set to Yards Meters Concrete or Ton Tonnes Aggregate based on the measurement system specified in the system configuration or in the project No user input is required All V4 users who use trade discounts should run this update when upgrading to V5 Clear NEXT 7 fields in TRUC table COMMANDeeries V5 53 stores aggregate truck assignment data differently than in previous versions Specifically the program uses a different method to store a truck s next assignment To prepare existing data for this new functionality any user upgrading to V5 53 must run this routine to clear existing information from the TRUC file No user input is needed Update Prepayment Adjustments Linkage to Invoices V5 uses a different logic in applying adjustments than V4 This routine identifies prepayment adjustments made in V4 and updates those records to
306. field to select from a list If necessary enter an Override Rate for the cartage charge Enter a Surcharge Code or detail on the field to select from a list If necessary enter an Override Rate for the surcharge If necessary select Apply Surcharge to Hauler Pay If necessary select Add Occurrence to add another surcharge SoN aM FS amp Enter an Override Pay Table or detail on the field to select from a list 10 If necessary enter an Override Rate for the pay table 11 Accept the screen to save the settings and return to the Order Entry screen Editing Tickets Once order level information has been entered or modified tickets can be edited When entering or editing tickets it is important to remember that an item can only be added to a ticket if it has already been added to the order To edit concrete tickets 1 Open the Edit Orders and Tickets screen Invoicing gt Edit Orders amp Tickets 2 Open the order containing the tickets to be edited 3 Edit order information on the main Edit Orders and Tickets screen as needed 4 Press the Tickets button in the lower right of the screen The Edit Ticket Information screen displays Edit Orders and Tickets 213 Edit Ticket Information EDTPREP7 A Edit Ticket Information 02 Jul 2012 2001 ABC 10 00 10 00 Im 1540 00 LOAL mes L Other _ Status La The screen title bar shows the Order Date Order Code and Customer Name in parentheses The Associa
307. formation EDTORDR1 7 Order Haul Information Cartage Charge Information Cartage Charge T able gt 3 Per load Override Rate Surcharges Surcharge Code gt Override Rate C Apply Surcharge to Hauler Pay Override Pay Table ei Override Rate Apply Minimum Haul Pay The existing information has defaulted from the customer or project files Any changes made to this screen will not affect those files but will instead affect only this order 3 Enter a Cartage Charge Table or detail on the field to select from a list gt Charge tables have a default rate or rates Ifyou want to change that rate for this order enter an Override Rate for the cartage charge Enter a Surcharge Code or detail on the field to select from a list If necessary enter an Override Rate for the surcharge If necessary select Apply Surcharge to Hauler Pay If necessary select Add Occurrence to add another surcharge CON AM Enter an Override Pay Table or detail on the field to select from a list 10 If necessary enter an Override Rate for the pay table 11 Ifnecessary select Apply Minimum Haul Pay 12 Accept the screen to save the settings and return to the Orders screen Order Pricing Information The Order Pricing Information screen Dispatch gt Orders gt Pricing lets users set various pricing and taxing related information This information defaults from either the customer or project Pricing
308. function provides a flexible and efficient means of passing additional information to others areas of the company Topics in this section Types of Notes Entering Notes Managing Customer Notes Notes Listing Dispatch Memos in Order Entry Deleting Managing amp Purging Completed Notes Types of Notes Notes are classified based on the type of record with which they are associated A single note can be associated with multiple record types Below are examples of the types of notes users can create e Customer A note reminding order takers that this customer generally under orders and to schedule a cleanup load for all orders or a note for invoice clerks reminding them that this customer should never be charged a minimum load charge e Project A note that the site entry location varies depending on the time of day or perhaps a reminder that this project has special priority That information can then be passed on to the drivers when each load is ticketed e Order A note to inform accounting that the dispatcher has discounted the order due to delivery issues Such notes can be included in the Preliminary Invoice Register Order level notes can only be entered against existing orders To enter a note during intial order entry use dispatch memos e Product Notes concerning placement or finishing instructions most often set within a project record e AR Transaction Reminders to follow up with a customer concerning a
309. g VoiceGate refer to your VoiceGate user manual Workflow Once the Automatic Caller Identification license feature has been added to the License editor a prompt similar to the following will display on your desktop whenever an incoming call is received You have three choices when presented with this prompt 1 Click the gray X to close the prompt and take no further action 2 Do nothing the prompt will fade within 30 seconds 3 Click directly on the prompt to display the Order Prefix screen 408 Automatic Caller ID FA Customer Project Order Lookup E 20200 The If th Phone Number E m 04 29 2008 dames Martin 3639 North Lendale Birmingham ey haere a a Edit Contact Information Se Okay Een Ee em 2020 Lakeshore Drive AAA kay following information displays for each contact on the expanded Order Prefix screen Contact Code Contact Name Contact Address Contact City Telephone Number e contact is linked to a specific Customer Code the Order Prefix screen will also display the last ten orders in the customer s order history In addition the detail button to the left of the Contact Name will open a new Order with the linked Customer Code already entered If the contact is not linked to a Customer Code the button will not display Automatic Caller ID 409 If a caller does not already have information in COMMANDeeries the Contact Editor displays so you can enter information about
310. g one character values to a valid two character format Convert Sundry Misc Charges for Upgrade from 5 57 9 and Earlier 5 57 10 adds the ability to charge sundry unloading seasonal and minimum load charges at the Company and or Plant level This new functionality involves a restructuring of the various charge tables When COMMANDeeries is first run after the upgrade the new database tables and fields are added to the existing charge records but all new fields are set to null This update will establish the existing charge schedule for each type of charge as the default charge both Company and Plant will be set to A11 Note This update must be performed prior to attempting any order entry dispatch or invoice activity or else store errors will occur 368 Data Management Maintenance Routines These routines are not associated with specific version upgrades but are run to address specific issues with database integrity As a general rule these updates should only be run on advice from a Command Alkon Service Representative Correct ARTB CUCO Balances It is possible that the CUCO Customer Company Credit records can become corrupted or that they may get miscalculated This routine will recalculate CUCO records based on the data from the ARTB A R Transaction Balance table When this routine is run you will be prompted for a specific batch date and number Once the information is provided no additional input is required
311. ge gt Application Management gt Purge Customer Notes Purge Customer Notes screen DBACNOT Purge Customer Notes Customer Code Project Code Completed Date 2 Enter a range of Customer Codes Project Codes and or Completed Dates 3 Accept the screen 282 Customer Notes In the highly competitive construction materials market decision makers in your organization need access to various levels of information quickly and easily With this in mind COMMAND concrete includes a large collection of reports that display relevant information in a way that it is easily accessed and processed Topics in this section Generating Reports Scheduling Reports Dispatching Reports Time Analysis Payment Option Reports Generating Reports The COMMANDeeries suite of applications provides a common method for generating reports To generate a report 1 When you select the Print Report function from a COMMANDeeries application a Report Selections dialog box displays This dialog box prompts you for parameters to customize the information you want displayed on the report A sample setup screen is displayed here COMMAND concrete Reports 283 Report Selections SELSLSS 7 Sales Report Selections Friday Sales Reprot w Sales Report v Customer Code EI ltem Code v E Segen Project Code x Sg Detail by Date SE Print amounts and per quantity averages Print all products 2 After y
312. ge Calc Document tags will print when the following is true e The mix is certified and the certification date has not expired Ticketing 147 e The constituent is certified and the certification has not expired Water is not a constituent that needs certification Database Updates The following fields have been added to the IMLB Item Location Batch Code table to accommodate the shift of certification fields to the SAP Quality Concrete Code CERT_NUMBER Certification Number e CERT_BODY Certification Body CERT_LEVEL Certification Level CERT_YR Certification Year CERT_EXP_DATE Certification Expiration Date LEGAL TEXT_1 Legal Text LEGAL TEXT 2 Legal Text LEGAL TEXT 3 Legal Text LEGAL TEXT 4 Legal Text LEGAL _TEXT_5 Legal Text The following fields have been added to the Item Location ILOC table to ensure that certification is maintained for constituent items LEGAL _TEXT_1 Legal Text LEGAL TEXT 2 Legal Text LEGAL _TEXT_3 Legal Text LEGAL TEXT 4 Legal Text LEGAL TEXT_5 Legal Text The following field has been added to the Configuration CNF2 table to provide for controls when printing the National Standard Logo and Legal Text ALLOW PRINT NATIONAL STD LOGO CODE In addition to the above database tables the Generic EU Batch Interface has been updated with the below fields e Interface Field 091 Mix Legal Text 1 AN 40 e Interfac
313. ge dE erd a EEN 13 How Co Use This Document esxpgeseegeeegse iee GESEIS ERE EES EE Reeg 15 EE 15 Bef r YOU Begi EEN 15 Setting Up the System WEE 16 St rting COMMANDSErIES EE 16 Logging into Te 17 Exiting eau e EEN 17 Entering Master File Information e ANEN 17 Biel et 18 ee Lee E EE 18 Five Imp rtant ERENNERT EE 19 Ent nng Dates icsssnedacavesdandeduanunnededieach venancdesank EA AEAEE eeE ege 19 The lt Tab gt KEY EE 19 ACCEDING Saving SCreenS E 20 Add OCCUPCEN enee EE 20 RI te WEE 21 Smat looku edu 22 Standard Lookup EE 22 aM WEE 23 Tt EE 24 ET WEE 24 ODGFALIONS Age ge Dee Een Eege ae 24 ODUONS suxecavtvausuunsnitis voanne ENNER NEEN SEENEN ENNEN ENEE 25 Code Lists ge 28 Exporting Lookup Informati n teg ANERER Se dE ANNER ege ENEE NN EE 20 THe Calendar scussicmsenieninsconnscivnteisccnwi cdasiaenei aca AE E a EE 31 Order 7 da SE 32 Standard Order Enry TEE 34 Order Haul Information eege e geben 38 Order Pricing Information gut deet SN ESA KENE KENNEN 20 Entering Other Order Information s eee deed dee 41 Ent ring Products on an e TEE 43 Other Order Line Information geet ed Eege 50 Associated elt EE 51 Forecasted Shipped Quantity NENNEN ENEE 52 Sched ling an Order EE EE EES Ee aiT 54 Scheduling an FOB Order EE 61 Simplified Order Entry siisiidorsi innon aa ARA ELaNA 61 Standing Order ue EE 64 Entering a Standing ele TEE 65 Switching Between the Standing and Regular Order File ssssssssssssssssses 66
314. gement 4 Press the Apply box The system will automatically allocate the balance of the ticket from the earlier payment D Allocate Payments to Tickets 10 Jun 2008 10 Jun 2008 E C309 My Name is Mudd 10 Jun 2008 5 Accept the screen Yow ll see a confirmation in the message bar that reads Receipt x applied to ticket s y 6 Ifyou attempt to retrieve a ticket that has been completely paid off you will receive the following message COMMANDseries In addition the ticket will no longer appear on the Uncollected Tickets Report Emergency Cash Receipts To enter emergency cash receipts Create a Next Number sequence for emergency receipts The emergency receipt sequence should not have a Next value e Assign each plant an emergency receipt sequence To enter an emergency receipt open the Cash Payments screen and enter a receipt number that falls within the defined range and then enter receipt information as usual Cash Management Tools The Cash Management system in COMMANDeseries provides multiple tools both processing and reporting to review a day s cash income e Cash Reconciliation e Cancel Cash Reconciliation e Reconciliation Report Cash Management 259 e Uncollected Tickets Report e Unallocated Receipts Report e Document Formats Cash Reconciliation The Cash Reconciliation screen is used to balance the amount of cash checks and credit card slips a plant has in the system to the
315. gement features are available Please refer to Appendix B Credit Checking for additional information Enter the Lot Block This field identifies lot block information for a project order This feature is a key component of COMMANDlien and is required if COMMANDIlien is licensed See the COMMANDlien User Guide for more information The Map Page field identifies the map page on which the job site is located Unlike the Zone Code which is associated with the map page the map page represents the distance from a given plant to a specific location identified by its location on a map page in your company s map book If map pages have been entered COMMANDeseries dynamically inserts travel times based on travel times entered for the time period when the delivery is made The Show Map Page in Orders Tickets checkbox on the Dispatch tab of the Configuration screen must be marked for this field to be available Order Entry 37 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 If you change the Map Page that defaulted from the project COMMANDseries automatically changes the Travel Time to correspond with the corrected map page The Delivery Address Instructions Zone Code Purchase Order and Customer Job default from the project file Edit this information as desired If you do not select a project enter a Delivery Address required field Enter a Lot Block code The Delivery Address is the address of the job site where products are
316. ges to the schedule are made be sure to accept them 13 Accept the Order Line Schedule Information screen to save the scheduling information The Scheduling screen will close returning you to the primary Order Entry screen If no additional information is required accept the Order Entry screen to save the order An order number will be assigned and displayed at the bottom of the screen If you are writing orders on paper forms then keying them into the computer write this number on your order form for reference Optimized Scheduling If Optimization is in the system license a customized scheduling screen displays 58 Order Entry Schedule 1 Plant Code Start Time Scheduled Quantity Hold Quantity Truck Type Load Oty Max Truck Size Job Wash Time Pouring Method Unload Rate per Hour Priority Job Wait Time Leading Order Code Total Quantity Ordered Quantity Order Line Schedule Information screen Optimization EDTORDO4 3 Order Line Schedule Information 2500 2500 3 4 3 8 1 BHMPLT 11 00 Thu 50 00 cy cy p REAR Distance Time To Job Time To Plant Truck Spacing Unload Time Delivery Rate per Hour cy Normal Trucks Required 40 00 cy 40 00 cy Rate Type Adjustment Type 8 8 20 00 30 00 SU UU cy 2 9 Mins Apart v Always adjusted v C Default to Exclude from On time report in Ticketing Current Status Normal Gap 0 Minut
317. gh the field it will default to the current date 7 Detail on the Order Code field and select an order to add to the journey By default the list displays orders scheduled from the plant selected in step 3 A different plant can be manually selected if required 8 The Journey Status displayed at the bottom of the screen now displays as Created The journey status messages that you may see here are as follows o Created The journey has been created but not ticketed o Ticketed The journey has been created and ticketed o Removed The journey has been cancelled Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 79 o Added during Shipping The journey was created at the time of ticketing rather than through the Journey Editor 9 Ifthere is more than one product on the order the Item Code field becomes active Select the item that you wish to include in the journey If the order you selected contained only one item the order date order code and item code fields are greyed out and read only The Load Quantity and Sequence fields then become active 10 Enter any Sequence information as necessary The entries must be sequential numbers between one and the number of stops on the journey The number represents the order in which the stops of the journey will take place Accepting the Journey screen with no sequence entries causes the sequence to be saved in the order that the stops were added Journey screen EDTJOUR D Journey Bt S
318. ght choose the Scheduled Plant Code and Scheduled Start Time or even look at the Distance Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 93 Configuration Settings FNDOTRE4 Order Line E Order code Customer name Delivery address Dashes Between Fields Ej Right Click Mouse Functionality Using the Order Tree When using the Order Tree COMMANDseries features special functionality when you click the right mouse button Right clicking while the Order Tree is open will give you the following options Show Order Shows the order screen for the highlighted order Ticket Order Tickets the highlighted order Help Shows the Help Topics screen Screen Help Shows help for the current screen Clear Refreshes the Order Tree display Select Shows the select screen Sort Shows the sort screen Search Repeats the last search The system searches for information already specified using the Request amp Search function If you click the Search button but have no last search defined COMMANDeseries assumes your doing a Request and Search Request amp Search Searches the Order Tree for specified information Columns Shows the columns screen Menu Displays the main menu tool bar Select Configuration Lets you choose a pre set configuration that is more suitable to present needs Save Configuration Save and name a new configuration Delete Configuration Deletes a configuration Exit Exi
319. gle plant The previous ticket was shipped from Plant xxx If a subsequent ticket is in fact shipped from a plant different than the first ticket the field is set to No preventing the message from displaying on any subsequent tickets Optimized Loads If Optimization is in the license The Loads button will call and expanded screen Order Entry E al al a a val al a Changes made in the upper section of the screen will be passed to the Optimizer when the order is accepted the lower part of the screen will be updated once the Optimizer returns the revised schedule Scheduling an FOB Order To schedule an order as an FOB Freight on Board order enter the start time as the time that the customer will arrive to pick up the order Leave the right side of the schedule screen blank FOB displays in the Rate Type field Accept the schedule and return to the Order Entry screen FOB displays as part of the schedule summary Pop 13 00 plt 1 Previously entered rate information such as trucks required will automatically be cleared if FOB is subsequently selected as a Rate Type Please refer to the Tracking and Scheduling section of this manual for additional information concerning FOB orders Simplified Order Entry Order entry can be fast and easy if you use the Simplified Order Entry screen This order screen includes the basic functionality of the Orders screen but eliminates the need to enter secondary screens thr
320. had both Tax ID Code fields added The labels can be changed as needed to more clearly identify a specific tax ID Data Out Tags Support for the following Data Out tags has been added e Minimum Cement Content MINCEM e Maximum Water Cement Ratio MAXCEM e Tax ID Code TAXID e Tax ID Code 2 TAXID2 160 Ticketing Record Sampled Tickets Plant operators often prepare production samples of concrete mixes for quality control when a batch is completed or receive results from off site testing COMMANDseries has been enhanced to mark delivery tickets from which samples were taken and to send this information electronically to the testing laboratory e CS will record the User ID of the person flagging the ticket as sampled as well as the date time the ticket was flagged as such on the TKTL Ticket Line Information table e You can update ticket information if needed in Edit Orders amp Tickets if you do so a new record will replace the old one that was sent to COMMAND ac However once a ticket has been flagged as sampled and is saved you cannot unmark the flag unless you have proper privileges e The existing interface between CS and COMMAND will recognize tickets that were flagged as sampled in CS When a ticket is flagged as sampled in CS the system will update or insert a new Batchwatcher BWGT record for that ticket This record will be used to update COMMAND cc This feature does not include any informa
321. hancement applies only to users who have Concrete Products CB in their system license Plants Editor The following changes have been made to the Plants editor e The Plant tab has been renamed Dispatching e An Assign Truck for Block Ticketing field has been added to the Dispatching tab with the below options Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 109 o Any Status You have the ability to assign a truck regardless of the truck s current status o At Plant Status Default You can only assign trucks that are currently in an At Plant status This field is valid only for Block tickets Plants gt Dispatching tah EDTPLNTF Main Communication Batching Scheduling Costs Dispatching V Concrete IV Agoregate IV Block Warn User and Stop the Process v Assign Truck for Block Tickets x Any Status At Plant Status Order Entry Below is the process flow for ordering with Concrete Products Order lookup is now based on item groups as opposed to the application module The Load Quantity will not display on the Schedule line if the item type is set to Concrete Products CB If the order is for a Concrete Product the Loads field will default to 1 All quantities will then be defaulted to the first load on the Scheduling form You can change this if needed If the Loads field is updated to an amount other than 1 loads in the Scheduling form will be modified by dividing the quantities with the number
322. he quantity is manually changed the system will adjust the remaining scheduled quantities in one of the following ways o The product s last schedule will be adjusted if the ticket is not the product s last schedule o When the ticketing process comes to the last schedule another schedule will be added with any remaining quantity o Ifthe quantity delivered is more than the scheduled quantity the system will adjust the last schedule to follow the previous schedule s until the quantity is adjusted appropriately o The schedule line will be removed when the schedule does not have any quantity for the order because of the delivered quantity adjustment o When anew product is added after the order has been saved you will be allowed to update the schedule manually If you do not schedule the full quantity you will receive an error message and will not be allowed to save the screen e When the ticket quantity is different from the schedule loads quantity the system will adjust the schedule loads based on the scheduled quantity for the order line Ticket Report The Ticket Report Selections screen Dispatch gt Dispatching Reports gt Ticket Report has been updated with a new option Concrete Products Detail which you can run to see information for these deliveries Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 111 Ticket Report Selections screen SELTICK rb Ticket Report Selections Concrete Products Detail Ticket Code
323. he COMMANDseries Program group in Windows Explorer e Select the COMMANDseries shortcut on your Desktop e Implement the COMMANDstart feature which starts COMMANDseries automatically upon start up of your computer After entering a COMMANDseries program you can switch to another COMMANDeeries application by selecting the program from the Alternate Menu list in the Misc drop down menu of all COMMANDeseries applications When COMMANDeeries is loaded it tests for the presence of COMMANDnetwork If COMMANDnret is not running COMMANDeseries will launch it automatically Topics in this section Logging into COMMAN Dseries 16 How to Use This Document Exiting COMMANDeeries Entering Master File Information Logging into COMMANDseries Effective with version 5 57 7 COMMANDseries provides two different options for user verification Windows Security This option integrates COMMANDseries security with Windows security When you launch COMMANDeseries the program retrieves the current Windows username and validates it against the COMMANDseries User list If the Windows username matches a COMMANDseries user that user is automatically logged onto COMMANDseries No username password entry is required COMMANDseries Standard Security After launching COMMANDeeries you are prompted to enter a username and password Note Usernames and passwords are set up by your system administrator To log into COMMANDeeries 1 Enter your
324. he Configuration gt Dispatch tab COMMAND concrete Truck is retuming from order 20000 to Plant 108 do you wish to pre ticket it now or future day order Ticket Now Ticket for Future If Ticket for Future is selected the Earliest Pre Ticketing Status is ignored Truck Punch In The following new fields have been added to the Truck table TRUC to accommodate this enhancement e Future Ticket Code FUTURE_TKT_CODE TRUC e Future Order Date FUTURE_ORDER_DATE TRUC e Future Order Code FUTURE_ORDER_CODE TRUC When a truck is punched in via signaling ticketing Tracking amp Scheduling Operations etc the system will check to see if there are any FUTURE fields in the TRUC table If information is found in the fields the system will compare the future order date with the current date e If the current date is before the future date the future fields will be cleared e Ifthe current date is the same as the future order date ticket information will be stored in the NEXT fields on the TRUC table while the LAST fields on the TRUC table will display current ticket information e If the current date is later than the future order date the future fields will be ignored Tracking and Scheduling After a truck is ticketed for a next day order the truck is shown on the current day s Scheduling screen with the applicable ticket status for the current ticket and in the Truck Tracking First Status set up on the Co
325. he Root folder represent the Branches The selections you make on the branch level of the Sort tab determine how the orders are displayed on the branch level 92 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools Configuration Settings FNDOTRE2 Order date sl Ascending E Order date day name sl scending E Customer name Ascending IT Order type sl JAscending KE Product line code jAscendng e Hauler code Ascending m Use the Select tab to further narrow the group of orders displayed in the Order Tree Choose the range of information the Root level information is chosen from You might choose Order Date As or Between and then the dates While you have the option to look at any range you select keep in mind that larger ranges require more time to build Configuration Settings FNDOTRE3 Order date E Range 2 12 31 1999 03 07 2000 The Columns tab determines how the Order Tree labels the various folders and delivery schedules There are five different branches of information that appear on the screen below the Order Line the Root Order Line Product Line Associated Product Line and Schedule Line e When configuring the Order Line it makes sense to make selections like Order Code Customer Name and Delivery Address e When configuring the Product Line you might choose Product Code Product Description Ordered Quantity and Ordered Quantity unit of measure e When configuring the Schedule Line you mi
326. he screen you can see in parentheses the Item Code and Description of the mix with which the plant entered will be associated Enter a reason code or detail on the field to select one from the Reason Codes file 9 Ifyou accessed Economic Sourcing through Projects the details will be stored and defaulted into any future order using that project and product If you accessed Economic Sourcing through Order Entry when you accept the screen you will return to Order Entry where your plant choice will show in the Plant field The plant entry will also have been updated in the Order Lines file Notes e The Economic Sourcing editor now displays the Material Cost and Plant Cost information that is used by the Economic Sourcing routine e Ifa Cartage Override Rate exists on the order line it will be used for the relevant plant in the Economic Sourcing calculation e Negative values will not be displayed on the Economic Sourcing form for combinations that are considered incomplete e g a haulage cost cannot be determined Pricing Authority Display Percentage Discount Currently when an order taker exceeds the pricing discount authorization set in COMMANDeseries the Pricing Authority form indicates how much the user has exceeded the discount Since the user typically also needs to see by what percentage discount has been 102 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools exceeded the Pricing Authority form has been updated with two new fields
327. he sequence number used for normal ticket transactions Ticketing When a ticket is removed cancelled through the Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping form the system will look to the options you just set up in the Plants editor to determine what to do 152 Ticketing with the ticket If Allow Removed Cancelled Ticket has been selected on the Plants gt Main tab and you remove cancel a ticket e The next sequence number assigned on the Plants gt Next Numbers tab will be assigned to the ticket e The ticket s information will be sent to the assigned printer or other device using the document format code you selected on the Plant Communication Setup screen for Print Removed Cancelled Ticket If Allow Removed Cancelled Ticket Print was selected on the Plants gt Main tab you will have to include a Reason Code when removing cancelling the ticket on the Cancel Adjust Ticket Quantities screen e Ifa ticket is removed and no concrete was produced provide the usual reason code e Ifa ticket is cancelled and concrete was produced a Cancelled Reason Code will be required in the new field below fy Cancel Adjust Ticket Quantities Onginal Ticket Information Truck Code M012 Order Date 07 08 2003 Ticket Code 25019167 Order Code 250000 Concrete was produced Yes O No Concrete Product 2018814 VAN1 Bohripfahibe Dekvered Quantity 7 50 Price Quantity Cancelled Reason Code v x You cannot reactivate a prev
328. heck Numbers in ITRN Table A new feature implemented in V5 52 uses one field in the ITRN Invoice Transactions table to store either the check number or the credit card number used to pay for an invoice Because credit card numbers are longer than check numbers the field must be large enough to accommodate the longer character string The automatic database update converted the database field to the new length This routine reformats the existing data for the new field length No user input is required Update Order Types Until V5 51 Order Type basically meant cash or charge In V5 51 a new system was implemented Order Types now denote the type of sale regular sale internal transfer etc while a new field Payment Method stores the record of how the order is to be paid This routine updates existing order records to version 5 51 Once this option is selected no input is necessary 364 Data Management This update should only be run once Running this update a second time can corrupt existing COD orders Update Map Page Travel Times In earlier versions of COMMANDeseries one Travel Time was used to schedule time to and from the site Effective in V5 52 Map Pages store one time for travel to the site and another time for the travel back to the plant This routine takes the single Travel Time from earlier Map Pages and copies it to both to and from time fields Once this option is selected no user input is required U
329. hedule Once the standing order is created you may use the Schedule Standing Orders function to schedule an order for delivery The Schedule Standing Orders function uses the standing order as a template to create standard orders for the specified dates Concrete standing orders must be scheduled before they can be delivered Aggregate standing orders on the other hand can be dispatched or ticketed from a dispatch ticketing screen At the time of dispatch ticketing a daily order is created from the standing order When scheduling standing orders it is important to remember that you can only schedule for a range of days you cannot schedule a standing order for every other day or every Friday In some situations for example a customer who gets the same material every Wednesday it is more effective to copy an existing order than to use standing orders Standing orders may be based on a project and may be created automatically from the project file The contents of the project are automatically moved to the standing order table and the Standing Order code is set to be the Project Code One feature that distinguishes standing orders from regular orders is that a standing order requires an expiration date If there is a project associated with the order the expiration date defaults from the project If not enter the date you want the standing order to expire a date often selected is the day before the annual price increases go into effect Yo
330. heduling plant is changed manually you will be prompted for a reason code However if the scheduling plant is changed from one priority to another priority a reason code will not be required Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 99 If Do Not Default is selected the scheduling plant will not default in Order Entry However as standard the order cannot be saved without a scheduling plant you must enter select the scheduling plant during Order Entry Defaulting Pricing Plant e Ifthe Default User Login Plant to Pricing Plant flag on the Configuration gt Dispatch tab is selected the User Login Plant will default as the Pricing Plant on new orders e Ifthe User Login Plant is blank there will be no defaulting Orders cannot be saved without a pricing plant so the pricing plant will have to be entered manually e Ifthe Overwrite Pricing Plant from Scheduling Plant flag on the Configuration gt Dispatch tab is selected the order s scheduling plant will be written to the pricing plant e Ifthe scheduling plant is changed the system will overwrite the pricing plant with the new scheduling plant Economic Sourcing Economic Sourcing lets you select the most economical way to fulfill an order The system calculates the plant with the lowest cost to you and lists all other plant possibilities Plant selection considers the material cost distance to the plant calculated using your map pages and the cost of delivering the ma
331. hip changes This code will be the taxation point for the order and all of its tickets Origination based taxation destination based taxation all taxable and non taxable sales and the tax amount itself are related to the tax authority locations assigned to this tax code The Order Tax Code can default from several different locations Customer Project or Zone Because some orders have more than a single taxation point you can adjust both the Plant Tax Code and the Order Tax Code separately if necessary Once the order ships however only the Plant Tax Code may be modified 16 In the Taxable field choose whether the order is Taxable or Non Taxable If the order is non taxable the Non Taxable Reason Code field will display This field identifies the reason the order is non taxable Enter a code or detail on the field to select from a list The system will not save a non taxable order unless a reason code is specified If an order is set to be non taxable each order line on the Order Report shows as non taxable regardless of how the item is set up 17 Accept the Order Pricing Information screen Entering Other Order Information The Other Order Information screen Dispatch gt Orders gt Other contains additional fields related to the order Any of these fields can be printed on the order and or ticket by including the fields in the appropriate document format Salesman and Tracking Order Color are required to accept the order
332. his information if necessary o Ifyou change the shipping plant to a plant different from the truck s plant and leave the Plant Code field or accept the screen without leaving the Plant Code field the system will accept the change and print the ticket o Optimization Only If you change the shipping plant to a plant different from the truck s plant and leave the Plant Code field or accept the screen without leaving the Plant Code field the system will request a confirmation Truck is currently at plant x Do you wish to ticket it If necessary select the Other button to edit the order s batching and pricing information This information defaults from the plant file and the order If the fields are available you can adjust both the Plant Tax Code and the Order Tax Code separately on the Other Ticket Information screen if necessary Once the order ships only the Plant Tax Code may be modified User Defined Comments as opposed to User Defined Fields are not available for editing on the ticketing screen even if they are to print on the ticket Tab through the Times button there are no times to edit when the ticket is initially created Detail on the Delivery field to select a delivery method You must pick a delivery method of type F 0 B or Delivered If you select a delivery method of type Delivered F O B you will receive an error message and be forced to choose again If the Required Tickets flag is checked and you do not choos
333. his section Configuring the Order Tree Right Click Mouse Functionality Using the Order Tree Configuring the Order Tree Configure the Order Tree using the Select Sort and Column tabs on the Configuration Settings screen File gt Select when the Order Tree is open to show the information you need Accept the new configuration You can have several different Order Tree configurations all serving different purposes You might look at one exclusively for orders and another for tickets You might want to look at orders by delivery address for shipping purposes or you might want to sort by delivery method to see all the picked up or FOB orders You also have the option to delete a configuration if necessary The title bar of the Order Tree screen displays the current configuration in parentheses The Root is the primary level of folders you see when Order Tree is selected from the Dispatch menu Choose a sort method for the root level using the Root Level field on the Sort tab of the Configuration Settings screen File gt Select when the Order Tree is open For example if you select Order Date COMMANDeseries sorts the orders on the Root level according to their order date and displays them within those dates accordingly You can add sort criteria at the root level to fit your specific needs For example if your company uses projects extensively you might sort the Root by Order Date Customer Name and Project Name Folders inside t
334. hone Number 2 Phone Number 3 Phone Number 4 Tax Code hi Taxable Taxable z Tax ID Code 41 008 284 688 Tax Exempt ID AU 2 Enter information for the new customer The initial values for these fields as well as the values for fields not available on this screen come from the default customer template as specified on the Plants Next Numbers tab 3 When you have entered the customer information accept the screen The system will save the new customer record using a numeric customer code from the plant s assigned sequence You will be returned to the main Order Entry screen where the new customer will automatically be entered 4 From here continue with standard order entry Payment Entry There are two situations in which you may need to enter a payment e Acustomer is ordering COD and wants to pay at the time of order entry or ticketing 252 Cash Management e Acustomer wants to pay prior to ordering material pre payment COD Orders When a COD order is ready to be saved the order total displays on the screen Concrete Order Entry COD EDTCORD B Order Entry olx Order Date 07 May 2000 v Wednesday Order Code Al Item Group Concrete User Plant 139 Customer Code 600005 Harcourt Fenton Mudd Order Type CONC RS S Project Code Payment Form CASH z Lot Block Haul Map Page Zone Code Pricing Delivery Address 1932 Addison Way a Instructions aj Oth
335. hree steps e Run automatic database updates in COMMANDeseries e Update your license if upgrading from an earlier version e Run any needed manual database updates The time needed for the conversion is dependent on several factors database size processor speed free memory and available hard drive space Small databases under 1GB have taken as little as 5 10 minutes to convert Large databases 20GB have generally taken 30 minutes to 2 hours to convert It is important to restrict access to the system during the conversion particularly machines that run Comm Managers During beta testing someone had to restart a workstation right before the database conversion began The workstation was not being used for anything COMMANDeseries related or so we thought As it turns out a Comm Manager was launched minimized In addition the manager was launched with an audit log switch so that it was monitoring database access The extra load had a massive effect on the conversion process so that a process that should have taken at most one hour ended up taking six hours COMMANDperformance Users The automatic database update process removes the triggers linking the COMMANDseries database to COMMANDperformance Please contact your Technical Account Manager TAM for a database script to restore the triggers This script must be run following every upgrade that involves database updates Data Management 359 Preliminaries All DBs
336. ice that has some A R transaction applied to it Reason Codes EDTRSNC E Reason Codes Removed Item Inventory Adjustment DIE E To build a reason code Select a Reason Usage from the drop down list Enter the Reason Code Use a number that is not already assigned to another reason Enter a Description Enter a Short description Select which COMMANDseries module the reason code should apply to Click on the Add Occurrence button to make another entry Noe won Assigning Customer Credit Codes Customers who require constant credit supervision need their customer file updated to indicate their credit needs before Credit Checking can run effectively Several fields in the Customer File require data to initiate Credit Checking Credit Code Credit Limit High Balance Salesman Pricing Plant and Credit Person Customer Accounting tab EDTCUSTG Weeks Cred EH 500000 5 000 00 e m a E 396 Appendix B Credit Checking To assign customer credit codes 1 Access the Accounting tab on the Customers editor Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers gt Accounting Enter the appropriate Credit Checking Credit Code Detail on the field if necessary 3 Enter the customer s credit limit Any new order exceeding that balance will be flagged with a warning screen if Verify Credit Checking is selected on the Credit Codes screen 4 Ente
337. icing Items will be repriced using the procedure in the Pricing section above e Ifaschedule does not exist items will be repriced as usual from the IPRC table which will return a zero price Journeys A journey is a feature of COMMANDseries that allows you to schedule a truck to make one trip with several stops and one product This typically happens when several customers require a small quantity of an identical product Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 105 Topics in this section Creating a New Journey Editing an Existing Journey Ticketing a Journey Creating a New Journey The Journey screen allows you to create journeys in advance to allow you to plan deliveries ahead of time Typically journeys are created the day prior to delivery using multiple orders placed for that day To create a journey 1 2 3 4 vl 10 Open the Journey Editor Dispatch gt Journey Editor Enter the Journey Date Typically this will be tomorrow s date Enter the Plant Code from which the order will be shipped Tab through the Journey Code field to allow the system to auto assign a value or enter a custom journey code The Truck Code field is optional but can be completed if necessary Enter the Order Date of the orders you wish to add to the journey If you tab through the field it will default to the current date Detail on the Order Code field and select an order to add to the journey By default the list dis
338. icing plant and price set ups for the item 194 Preliminary Invoice Register This field displays only if the Report Type is Preliminary Detail Invoice Register or Preliminary Summary Invoice The same flag has been added to the Print Invoice Selections screen for all Report Type selections The layout of the preliminary invoice register is identical to that of the final invoice register making balancing easier The only difference in the preliminary layout is that the Invoice Code field is blank since that number is not generated until invoices are actually run The end of a Preliminary Detail Invoice Register has the same totals pages as a Priced Orders Report In addition the very last section of the report is a list of all suspended orders tickets that fell within the specified report range These are orders and tickets that would not have been invoiced in an actual invoice run If all orders in the specified range are suspended the system will return a No records to process message To run a report specifically for suspended orders or tickets use the Priced Orders Report Preliminary Summary Invoice Register The Preliminary Summary Invoice Register is primarily used as a balancing tool Instead of providing detailed information on individual orders the summary report only provides a single line of information for each order showing pre tax amount tax amount invoice total extended cost and gross margin Two totals
339. ient s CMDnetwork server If your system has multiple CMDnetwork servers clients on the other servers will not be included on this list Logging Functions The system logs information on each comm manager to the CMML table Adding the commandline switch COMMDETAILLOG will have that comm manager log every message it sends or receives Log information for a comm manager can be viewed by pressing the Display Log button Log Selection screen SELCMML Manager Number Date Time CMML records can be purged using the Purge Log button Purging the table has no impact on production Purge COMMANDcomm Log Details DBACMML 3 Purge CommandComm Log Details Manager Number 1 mr Purge CommandComm Log Details As Of B Please note that the Purge option allows you to purge records for multiple comm managers at once while the Log Selections screen will only retrieve records for one comm manager at a time Run Comm Managers as a Windows Service Comm managers can now be run as Windows services To effect this change two new execurables have been added to the CMDSERIES BIN directory cmdserieService exe This is the application that will run to create the service It will not be run manually cmdserieServiceManage exe This program is used to create and configure all COMMANDeceries services on a system including COMMANDnetwork Data Management 377 To configure a new service 1 Run the cmdserieServiceM
340. ily Invoicing 243 Order Discount Screen SAPRA Ea FB Order Discount EN o The Item Price represents the list price from the Item Master table o The Adjusted Price represents the list price minus any trade discount and or zone adjustments per the settings in the Customer or Project record e When brought forth from the Order Product Charges field the form displays as below Order Discount Screen Zone Code emm 77 CH EI Sg Order Total 1812 00 Discount T IO 1812 00 x After Discount Previously entered discounts will display on the Order Discount form and will show how the discount was applied against the original sales prices or totals as well as the resulting price total If a different discount percentage is entered on the Order Discount form it is always applied to the original price total to compute the new After Discount price total When entering a discount on the Order Product Charges field each individual item and charge is discounted It is at this point or when a discount is entered on the Order Line Price field that the discount is measured against the user s Discount Levels which are set on the Users gt Discount Levels tab The Configuration rule for determining the User Price Latitude is also taken into account at this time e Ifthe Compute User Price Latitude After Discount field Configuration gt Projects Quotes tab is set to Disabled o The user discou
341. ime product The Spreaderman will typically be paid cartage separately from the Hauler With this enhancement you can create two cartage charges one for the Hauler and one for the Spreaderman on one ticket i Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality General Notes e Auto products also known as service products including Lime that are set up for Lime items must also be entered on Projects for any location that might be used when Restricted Project Products is turned on for a Project If there is any Item Code Location change to the auto product of an item the same change must be made for any additional project that has with Restricted Project Products selected e Once the auto product is defaulted with the Lime item into Order Entry from that point on the auto product will be considered an extra product Therefore if you remove the main product the auto product can still be kept on the order line and the order can be created with the Lime product only In addition you can still remove the auto product after it has been defaulted to the order line e The auto product s quantity and price can be changed by the dispatcher who created the order This information will appear on the ticket as well as the invoice e If the order is an FOB order and the auto product is added as an extra product the system will not create a service cartage ticket If one is needed you will need to create a new order with only the auto product and set the
342. imization only This option is similar to the existing quantity per hour option but this option will not be affected by the actual pouring rate at the job site It is intended for use by concrete suppliers who have promised a delivery rate that is independent of the unload rate Trucks Required 56 Order Entry 10 11 12 o Enter a Truck Spacing in minutes The Unload Time value will default to this time The Delivery Rate per Hour and Trucks Required fields will be calculated but grayed out o The Trucks Required field will activate no longer be gray and allow change Enter the number of trucks that you wish to use for this schedule o This option can be useful when working orders into the schedule later in the day when most of your fleet is already committed to other orders Round Trip o Enter a Truck Spacing in minutes The Unload Time value will default to this time The Delivery Rate per Hour and Trucks Required fields will be calculated but grayed out Tab to the Rate Type field and change it to Round Trip o The Trucks Required field will activate no longer be gray and allow changes to be made Enter the number of trucks that you wish to use for this schedule o Select the Loads button and enter the truck numbers you wish to recycle on this job or use the Options menu to enter this data o The system will base the schedule on the premise of one truck round tripping on the order until it has been completely d
343. ine the orders for a single customer during the day to see if certain charges were being applied properly For this example we will use Customer Code ABC and March 19 2007 as the date To retrieve a specific record set of records 1 Select an appropriate table This example uses the ORDR Order table 2 Enter a date in the ORDER_DATE field This example uses 3 19 07 When you lt Tab gt out of the field the date will be reformatted to read 19 Mar 2007 3 Enter a customer code in the CUST_CODE field This example uses ABC The brackets designate that the data is to be key formatted ensuring that the entry will be formatted to match the database When you lt Tab gt out of the field the brackets will disappear and the data will be left justified within the field Data Management 355 Ready to begin the search Data Maintenance Order File Primary key fields such those in the ORDR table Order Date Order Code Customer Code Item Code etc are often used to reference other records To ensure that the linked fields are formatted identically in both tables if they are not searches will fail they are key formatted so that the system can enforce the correct formatting during data entry In the regular application the formatting happens automatically In Data Maintenance however only date fields will automatically format The square brackets force the screen to correctly format the data Select Retrieve O
344. ing No X Alternate ltem Batch Code Limit to Project Product s Alternative Items Batch Codes M Item Lookup If the Lookup Alternate Item by Class Option box is selected then when a lookup is performed for an alternative item the system will automatically filter the results using the criteria entered in the Alternative Item Control Options screen see next E Alternative Item Control Options E mjel x ltem Master Control Fields Agoregate size Y a Assign Mix Deisgn Action wam User and Continue M Batch book type L Strength M Require Field In Item No M Select a criterion from the drop down list on the left When you lt Tab gt out of that field a new field will appear The options to the right of the screen apply to all selected criteria Assign Mix Design Action This field determines what happens if a user attempts to link an invalid mix design to a product e Warn User and Continue e Warn User and Stop Process e Continue Without Warning default Appendix I Assigning Mixes to Technical Products 435 Require Field in Item If set to Yes then all of the selected fields will be considered as required fields in the Items editor Reason Codes Because the assigning of alternate items means that in some cases the rules will be overridden reason codes will be needed to track them A new Reason Usage Alternative Item Override has been added to the Reason Code editor Create new codes as nee
345. ing the standard 8 X 8 X 16 must have a conversion factor even when that conversion factor is 1 0 The user record Files gt System Information gt Users gt Plant for users who will run orders and tickets for this feature must be set up with the plant assigned as the block 90 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools building materials plant This will serve as a default plant in Orders for performing the inventory inquiry and in Tickets for assigning the shipping plant To use the product sales option 1 Enter information on the Order Entry screen as normal 2 Ifyou enter a non concrete product in the Product Code field two new buttons display on the screen Ticket and Inquiry Orders screen EDTORDR E ag Gloves Loather A4 15 00 _ The Inquiry button will only appear if you are licensed for COMMANDinventory 3 Enter the quantity in the field This quantity is checked against the inventory of the product at the assigned plant 4 Press the Inquiry button to see how much of the item is on hand at the plant A warning message is displayed if the ordered quantity exceeds the quantity available Inquire Warning QTYWARN COMMAND series 5 Press the Inquiry button to go to the Item Inquiry screen You can select another plant from which to make the order or you can select OK and ticket the order Selecting OK will result in a negative inventory balance 6 When you have completed the order pres
346. ing time is 30 minutes Exceptions o The customer wants the first few trucks sent close together but will take longer to unload such as for a footing or foundation wall o The customer demands trucks at a high rate but cannot sustain that rate o The order is being supplied simultaneously from two or more plants The delivery rate from each plant will be twice or three times longer than the rate ordered as trucks will be scheduled to arrive alternately from each plant o The customer is unloading in several places simultaneously Here the unload rate will be twice the delivery rate These time values are used to calculate scheduling information used in dynamic scheduling and truck tracking While dispatchers and order takers frequently have to estimate travel time it is important that those estimates be as accurate as possible One underestimated schedule can disrupt the entire day s deliveries Enter a Truck Spacing time in minutes The Unload Time value will default to this time but it is irrelevant The Delivery Rate per Hour and Trucks Required fields will be calculated but grayed out The Unload Time value will be calculated based on the entered Spacing The Load Quantity values will default from the Truck Type and can be edited if necessary Once a value has been entered the number of Loads requried to complete the schedule will be displayed The system will use the information entered thus far to generate a delivery schedul
347. ing totals and batching totals to be different To cancel remove a ticket 1 Press the Remove button on the toolbar go to the File menu and select Remove or press lt Shift F5 gt The Cancel Adjust Ticket Quantities screen displays o Cash tickets with reconciled receipts attached cannot be canceled 2 Confirm the ticket information Ticketing 139 If no concrete was produced 1 Next to Concrete was produced select No A Reason Code field appears and the Price Quantity field becomes inactive 2 Enter a valid Canceled Item Reason Code or detail on the field to select from a list 3 Accept the screen A confirmation message will display on the message line 4 The truck s status will be changed to In Yard Canceling the ticket does not delete the ticket record and its associated records from the database it simply deactivates the ticket That ticket number will not be reused but will be marked as canceled on reports The ticket will have no impact on usage reports adjusted entries will be sent to COMMANDinventory to update inventory records If concrete was produced 1 Next to Concrete was produced select Yes default The Price Quantity field will become active 2 Entera Price Quantity This value represents the quantity for which the customer will be billed 3 Accept the screen A confirmation message will display on the message line 4 The truck s status will not change as it still has to dispose o
348. inning Balance amount This represents petty cash or cash on hand cash that is to be kept at the plant and not deposited at the bank from the last reconciliation 6 Once you tab out of the Payment Types field the system will retrieve the uncollected tickets and all unallocated receipts 260 Cash Management Cash Reconciliation screen EDTCREC Plant Code 101 BLYGARVN Cash Check Direct Deposit Credit Card Reconciliation Date 13 Sep 2010 Total on Hand Sequence Number om Less Payments Logged 12142 70 5000 00 0 00 927 08 Payment Method All x Less Beginning Balance 0 00 Difference Over Under 12142 70 5000 00 0 00 927 08 Receipt Pmt Custome Transaction Ticket Order Order Payment Unallocated Number Meth Name Type Code Code Date Amount Amount Status Notes 30096883 Check CBCASH Paymenton 5000 00 5000 00 Oky A AJ 30096890 Cash B amp F Payment on 1204270 1204270 Okay al 30096891 Cash CBCASH Payment on 100 00 100 00 Okay A Al 30096892 Credit ABC Payment on 927 08 927 08 Okay HA AJ Uncollected Tickets Amount Due Payment Resolution Reason Code Ticket Order Code Order Date Truck Code Driver Amount Difference 181419 20006 19Feb 2009 C23687 JOHN COLLINS 164 85 00 164 85 aj 181420 20007 19Feb 2009 MURRAY Generic Driver 217 28 00 217 28 181412 20001 09Feb 2009 60934 14 69 00 wer 181413 20001 09Feb 2009 95001 77 92 00 77 92 ile Next gt gt Cancel eport All receipt
349. ins mostly the same as before the exception being that the new CDCOL form will display if there are any Deliver To addresses for the customer As each Deliver To is selected the form will then display the associated customer information for that Deliver To If the caller s contact telephone number is not found for any Deliver To addresses you will be prompted to create a new contact You can then select whether or not the contact is going to be a Customer contact or a Deliver To contact If you select Customer contact the Customer Contact Project CCPOL form will be displayed otherwise the Deliver To form CDCOL form will be displayed Automatic Caller ID 411 e Contacts will be linked to a DCON Deliver To Contact record If any DCON records already exist for a Contact the CDCOL form will display If you access the screen manually Dispatch gt Orders gt Options gt Prefix Screen the system will check to see if the contact you entered has any associated Deliver To entries If so the CDCOL screen will display if not the CCPOL screen displays instead Automatic Caller ID Automatic Caller ID 413 Truck Ahead Truck Behind Producers are requesting COMMANDeseries provide automated delivery related communications capability to reduce the amount of delivery related voice communications between drivers and Dispatch In a typical dispatch office there is a steady stream of phones ringing and chatter One of most com
350. ion When the tolerance checking logic is not performed n the batch control system the status and reason code functionality above will be available for manual entry The COMMANDeeries ticket print functionality will accommodate the following o A suitable water cement ratio considering the K factor of the components and the admix water threshold in the configuration o A Ticket Print attribute that considers if the actual weight of a component is batched outside the acceptable tolerance values Add New Reason Code First go to the Reason Codes editor Files gt General Information gt Reason Codes and create anew Mix Non Compliance Reason Code from the Reason Usage drop down box Save the screen Reason Codes Screen EDTRSNC EB Reason Codes Bisi xi Reason Usage Code Description Short oy fei Te ss Economic Sourcing z EP A JEconomic Sourcing lb d JEconomic Sourcing Jm f S JEconomic Sourcing jit f H Femoved Item af f gos ES gf Detail Removed Item Ait f WWW a Detail ia ES ES Detail Mis Non Compliance f5 9 MixNonCompiance JMIXNON hd Appendix G Batch Confirmation and EU Link Enhancements 423 Set Configuration Next go to the Configuration gt TQS tab New fields have been added to specify how the Generic EU link will send information Configuration gt TQS tab EDTCNFXZ w Import Groups Languages National Standards Project Frame P
351. ion screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration Select Allow Order Level Mix Design to activate the feature at a system level 2 The Default Mix Design Approval Status flag determines the operational requirements of the feature Select one of the following options o Mix Not Approved the most common selection The system will not ship the mix until someone with appropriate system privileges retrieves the order opens the Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 87 Order Line Mix Design screen and checks the Mix Design Approved by Quality Control box o Mix Design Approved Modified mix design can be shipped immediately Configuring Order level Mix Design bh Allow Order Level Mix Design Default Mix Design Approval Status Mix Design Not pproved Mix Design Not Approved Mix D IT Generic Location for Mix Conversion 3 Accept the configuration settings 4 Open the Options tab on the Users editor Files gt System Information gt Users gt Users 5 Select Allow Access to Order Level Mix Design to let a given user use the feature Warning If you use Order level Mix Design you must ensure that anyone authorized to enter order level mix designs is qualified to do so as the design might not be reviewed prior to shipment Please refer to the Setting up the System manual for additional information on configuring these two flags Once the system has been set up for order level mix design you ar
352. ional functionality as well as greater flexibility as COMMANDeeries continues to develop Setup Users can choose between the old lookup screen and the new lookup screen on the User Preferences tab User Preferences SYSPREF2 General User Sounds Colors Tracking Fonts Keys Toolbar Forms User SYSTEM Password aoee Language English v Date Format mm dd yyyy or dd mm yyyy Ki Date Order Month before day v Century Date Cutoff A Se Coordinate Format Degrees Minutes amp Seconds v Print Model SCREEN C Only Allow This Print Model Dispatching Assigns Truck to Loading Status C Limit Aggregate Ticketing to Dispatch Only TT Allow Label Translation C Enable New FindCode lt gj If this option is selected the new NET lookup system will be used If it is not selected the old lookup system will be used Operations The new lookup is invoked by detailing on a lookup field just like the old method SmartLookup is still in place if you enter a string into the field the lookup will search for that string 24 How to Use This Document E CUST Lookup Customer lookup A CUST Customer File Name Sort name Alpha Construction ALPHA ABC Construction ABCCONST Abernethy Contrac ABERNATH Advance Paving C ADVANCE Ancon ANCON Arrow Construction ARROW Action Building Co ACTION Alabama Masonry ALABAMA Anderson and Riva ANDERSON ABC AB
353. iously removed ticket that has a removed cancelled reason code If you try to reactivate one of these tickets you will receive a message stating that the ticket cannot be activated along with the removed cancelled ticket code You will however still be able to view the removed cancelled ticket as some of the information on the ticket such as ticket weights is not available outside of the standard reports You CANNOT reactivate a ticket from the Edit Orders amp Tickets screen if it has an audit sequence number on it however if the plant was not set at the time of ticket cancellation removal the ticket can still be reactivated Updates COMMANDeeries has been updated to use the same rules that apply to removed tickets where REMOVE_RSN_CODE TICK is not null to cancelled tickets where CANCEL_RSN_CODE TICK is not null as well This modification relates to Greek Cancelled Ticket Print functionality which allows users to cancel tickets with a reason code Cancelled tickets are tickets that have concrete produced and are identified by populating the CANCEL_RSN_CODE TICK field These reason codes are the same codes that are used for Removing Tickets which have flags that mark whether or not sales tickets should be included when Ticketing 153 O O O O Creating Cartage Tickets Invoicing Tickets Creating Inventory Transactions Generating COMMANDexecutive Reports COMMANDa aartage has been modified as follows O O
354. iption of the schedule Select a Process Type from the drop down list Available options are Master File In Master File Out Order Out Ticket Out Order Ticker In Invoice Out Order Mix to Lab Order Mix From Lab Batch Weights Out Schedule Sample Report OO Oo Oo oo OD DO O This selection determines the availability of the fields on the lower half of this screen Enter a Manager Number This value identifies the COMMANDcomm channel that will manage the process A Manager Number can be entered in this field or the spinner buttons can be used to increase or decrease the number Note Each COMMANDcomm process must have its own manager Enter a Start Time and End Time for the process For all day leave the values at 00 01 and 23 59 Select a Log Warnings Errors amp Summary Information option The available options are O Log Report o None Accept the screen to save the configuration Data Management Data Maintenance The work screens in COMMANDeseries provide secondary access to the database That is you enter the information and then COMMANDeeries organizes the data and stores it to the database For everyday business operations this method of operation is optimal you enter the information you need to and the program does the bulk of the work Sometimes though you need more direct access to the database You might be trying to understand how a table works so that you can design a new document tag or
355. is purchasing the material where it will be shipped and how the customer will be charged Now it s time to get to the heart of the matter and specify exactly what item the customer is purchasing Order Entry 43 Obviously every order requires at least one product However some orders require multiple products and some mixes have additional products admixtures associated with them If you have products that are associated with the mix primary product removing or changing the mix product will remove all associated products from the order The extra products will remain with the order Each primary product along with its delivery schedule is entered on a separate tab To add products to an order 1 Enter the Item Code or detail on the field to select from a list Product Order details EDTCORDTAB 105000 fs ltem Code Description Slump Order Qty Dety Qty Proe Ex Price fios I m PUMP CONCRETE Ji 12 00 fan Mi 1342 00 Hj oj tim aj Must Pist Finish Stat Tek Ty Tiavei Times Spacing Unload Distance Load Qty Loss Truck Code Hauler Code sh o fiso Ja ai aw f 2000 15 00 km f i200 f P Spee Load f Rae Type CE Weight 0 00 to Ticket 2 The first product on the first schedule tab defines the item group that will be used for that order Each item type will be entered on a separate schedule tab up to a maximum of ten The first product you enter will be considered the main product with other products treated as
356. is within the value assigned by the Com Manager Threshold e Processing The comm manager is processing a command e Stopped The manager has been stopped e Not Responding The last status update is less than 24 hours old but outside the Com Manager Threshold Prompt Type The Prompt Type field determines how the comm manager reacts when a user attempts to start a comm manager when an instance is already running but the manager is considered unresponsive based on the established polling interval These three options replace a F command line switch e No Prompt The system will restart the comm manager e Prompt User The system will notify you that an instance is already running and prompt you to continue or cancel e Hard Stop The system will notify you that an instance is already running and that you cannot continue When you press OK to acknowledge the new instance will close Context Menu If you right click on a manager the context menu will contain two key commands Stop Stops the selected comm manager Restart Restarts the selected comm manager You can start a manager that is not responding but if the comm manager instance has closed it cannot be restarted from the console 376 Data Management Network tab The Network tab will display the current users using the CMDnetwork Client list This list is for reference purposes only This list will only show the users connected to the cl
357. ituent by an amount Replace constituent with selected amount of different constituent O O 00 0 0 Remove a constituent The basic pattern is the same for all types of replacement after you configure and accept the screen the system generates a report showing the you the affects of your proposed change From there you can either proceed with the substitution or cancel the operation If a replacement is confirmed and processed the detail of the replacement are stored in the database and can be reviewed at a later date e The Compensate for Volume Changes checkbox allows the system to adjust quantities automatically when replacing one constituent with another constituent with a different specific gravity The default value for this field is True It is highly unlikely that you will ever need to uncheck this box as doing so can result in improperly proportioned mixes Materials Manager 329 Replace One Constituent with Another Constituent This is the simplest of replacements substituting one constituent for another When a location changes its supplier of certain constituents it may be necessary to replace the constituents To replace one constituent with another constituent 1 Select Replace a constituent with a different constituent in the Adjustment Replacement Option field Mixes Aggregates ltem Code Description epes ltem Code Description ltem Code Description UOM Cements l Ad
358. iver the order and leaves a blank for the dispatcher to write in the driver s name Driver Callout Report Selections SELDRVC 3 Driver Callout Report Selections 2 02 07 2008 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 lt Dispatch Sheet Report The Dispatch Sheet report generates a list of the remaining loads to be delivered This information can be used in the event of a critical system malfunction The Dispatch Sheet provides basic order information including required load time plant and order size Because of its use as a backup it is generally run several times during the day COMMAND concrete Reports 289 Dispatch Sheet Selections SELDSPS 7 Dispatch Sheet Selections Detailed Load By Load Report Start Time a 8 E E E Dispatching Reports Dispatching Reports provide summarized information from a specific day or days dispatching business COMMANDeseries provides several dispatch reports These reports generate information regarding orders both delivered and non delivered with their ticket information total quantities for products complete plant production data raw materials needed for future business and batch weight comparisons Topics in this section Order Report Ticket Report Enhanced Ticket Report COD Recap Report Order Recap Report Plant Production Report Customer Sales Recap Report Inventory Usage Report Product Sales Usage Report Raw Materials Requirements Report Batching Compariso
359. ject gt Pricing tab EDTPRICE D Projects Customer Code 428501 Al JOE FORDE Project Code 000 M Frame Project Name COTTSTOWN Main Contacts Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution Products Orders Forecast Standard Haul Costs Purchase Orders Primary Salesman J633 Bernard O G Primary Pricing Plant fi o7 CLASSIS time TY Copy tol Salesman v E33 Bernard O G Trade Discount Percent Sales Analysis Code v JG Agriculture Trade Discount Amount gt Pricing Plant Code 50 GALWAY Terms Code i7 UMERPL Price Category lb LIME Zone Code gt IT LIM AUGH Separate Preferred Hauler gt Charges Invoice Apply Minimum Minimum Load Charge Table E Cartage Pay Table xli Seasonal Charge Table gt E Cartage Charge Table gt IT Haul Charges Unloading Charge T able gt Override Charge Rate Rate Effective Date aj J Sundry Charge gt Previous Hate Surcharge Code gt Sundry Charges on Separate Invoice P Major Contract IV Allow Price Change in 0 E V Apply Zone Charges J Print Prices on Ticket Restrict Orders to Project Products X V Allow Automatic Price Adjustments Map Page Quoted Pay Tax Code gt E VAT O Taxable Taxable x P Compute Max Tax based on Life of Project You can set up Customers and Projects to restrict or allow Lime products from being associated with anything other than specific projects as you would any other Item Category select Restrict Orders t
360. k Spacing in minutes The Unload Time value will default to this time but can be edited The Delivery Rate per Hour and Trucks Required fields will be calculated but grayed out o In all scheduling calculations or recalculations the system will make changes in order to maintain the specified Truck Spacing interval regardless of other factors Quantity per Hour o Tab through the Truck Spacing and Unload Time fields and enter a quantity per hour in the Delivery Rate per Hour field The Trucks Required field will be calculated but disabled the Truck Spacing and Time fields will also be disabled o Particularly with large pours the contractor is more interested in making sure that the mix is arriving at a steady rate This rate keys primarily on individual load sizes Quantity per Hour Unload Optimization only This option is similar to the existing quantity per hour option but this option will not be affected by the actual pouring rate at the job site It is intended for use by concrete suppliers who have promised a delivery rate that is independent of the unload rate Trucks Required o Enter a Truck Spacing in minutes The Unload Time value will default to this time The Delivery Rate per Hour and Trucks Required fields will be calculated but grayed out o The Trucks Required field will activate no longer be gray and allow change Enter the number of trucks that you wish to use for this schedule o This option can be useful when w
361. k on the desired log to pull that transaction into the selection screen Accepting the screen at this point will run a report listing all replacements made within the transaction 5 If desired enter a Mix Code or range of codes to narrow the scope of the report 6 Ifdesired enter a Constituent Code or range of codes to narrow the scope of the report 7 Accept the screen to run the report 344 Materials Manager Data Management COMMANDeceries provides a number of tools to allow you to work more efficiently with the database While these tools give you greater ability to manipulate the database they also give you greater ability to damage the database Use these tools with extreme care Topics in this section Initialize Analyze Files Import Data Export Data Automated Data In Out Import Orders amp Tickets Export Orders amp Tickets Data Maintenance Automatic Database Updates Manual Database Updates SQL Worksheet Database Locks Service Control Comm Manager Console Initialize Analyze Files COMMANDeeries provides a number of database functions that can be used for troubleshooting purposes Two of these are found on the Initialize Analyze Files screen Manage gt Data Management gt Initialize Analyze Files Initialize Analyze Files screen DBAINIT 7 Initialize Analyze Files amp Tables l Data Management 345 Using the screen is simple Select the table s and the desired function s
362. keit d x y You can assign multiple test methods for multiple locations In addition you can also assign the mix to multiple Concrete Testing Families If any family is assigned to an item the test methods of the family dictate sampling and testing rules test methods assigned directly to the item will be ignored Users The Users gt Options tab has a new field Display Test Message in Order Entry If this option is enabled then notification that test samples need to be taken will display during order entry Those notifications can then be entered as dispatch memos if necessary Selection Logic The method for determining whether a test s is to be performed will be governed by e The Production Volume since the last test requirement was satisfied s The Target Volume for the Testing Method s The Maximum Tests per Calendar Year Calendar Month per Calendar Production Week and per Calendar Production Day if the max per month has been met no other lower level checks are necessary likewise per week and per day Productions Days and Weeks will have to be identified as a day that the Concrete Code or a member of the Family was in fact produced at a certain minimum level of m3 Definitions e Production Day o If Null or Zero 0 a Production Day is considered to be a Calendar Day o If Not Null or greater than Zero 0 a Production Day is considered only when the Actual Production Volume is greater than or equal t
363. l all default from the order 4 Select a Payment Form from the drop down list The available options will depend on system configuration and customer credit Enter the information for the selected payment form Note You can update the customer s name and address on the Cash Payments form when a cash and carry customer s Payment Form is changed to a non cash method When anything other than cash is selected the Customer Information Confirmation screen will pop up letting you change the customer s name and street address These two fields along with the City field are mandatory Once information has been changed and saved here it will be relfected in Order Entry Cash Check 254 Cash Management Credit Card Payment Form ER DCRD x Amount 2 612 50 Credit Card Number IR Conter Date TI 4 Credit Card Name zl Responsible Name EFTPOS Payment Form EFTPOS z Amount 261250 Check Number J Sort Code J Credit Card Number J Expiration Date J A Credit Card Name x Responsible Name J Authorization Code J Direct Payment Form ol RECT X Amount Ee 2 50 5 The plant s assigned Bank Agent will default If the customer has multiple forms of payment use the Add button to create a new payment record The area in the lower left will maintain a running total of all entered payments 7 Press the Receipt button The system will print a receipt providing confirmation on the COMMANDseries message
364. ld will display as Collect Balance on Last Load on the Product Descriptions form in Order Entry and Concrete Ticketing and Shipping You will only be prompted for this field when the Load Qty is changed from the Order Qty default In Ticketing when the BALANCE_ON_LAST_LOAD field is Yes the Undelivered Quantity that remains when the last load is scheduled is ticketed System Logic Pricing Logic e When the item s location Price Cartage Code is populated with the Cartage Rate Type of Quantity Distance the price will be taken from the Cartage Range table CTRG e When the item s location Price Cartage Code is populated with the Cartage Rate Type of Plant Zone the price will be taken from the Cartage Plant Zone table CTZN e When the item location Price Cartage Code is NOT populated the price will come from the Item Location Price table IPRC Order Entry Logic e When the schedule information has been completely filled out the system will identify products where the Item Price field CART_CODE is populated for the appropriate schedule plant location and customer project price category e When the Cartage Code field is populated the order lines will be repriced after the completion of the schedule using the procedure in the Pricing section above Edit Orders amp Tickets and Update Costs amp Prices Logic e Ifa schedule exists the system will determine which items are transport items those that have a Cartage Code for pr
365. le Customer Codes checkbox on the System tab of the Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration is checked detailing on the Project field in Order Entry lists the projects for the shipping customer This means that when creating a third party order you should enter the shipping customer in the Customer Code field Third Party Company Document Formats COMMANDeeries also allows you to specify additional document formats to use for tickets provided to third party customers This means that the ticket delivered to the third party customer can display the logo of your customer This enables you to use the billing customer s own ticket formats To set up a third party company document format 1 Go to the Plants screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants 2 Enter the Plant Code of the plant you wish to define the document format for or detail on the field to select one from the list 3 Go to the Communications Tab and ensure the Print Dispatch Copy checkbox is checked 4 Press the Setup button on this line to open the Plant Communication Setup screen The plant code is displayed in the title bar of the screen in parenthesis 390 Appendix A Examples Plant Communication Setup EDTPLNTA 4 Plant Communication Setup 43 5 Ensure that a Document Format and Non Mix Document Format Group are defined as these are mandatory fields and are specific to your document forma
366. lect the file path from the URL field 7 Select the appropriate flags for the note There are two types of flags o Applies to This flag determines which screens are affected by this note If you select Orders whenever the specified Customer Code is entered on an Order screen the Notes button will light up to indicate the presence of an order specific note If the same Customer Code is entered on a Transaction Detail screen the Notes button will not be lit unless there is another note flagged for Receivables Customer Notes 275 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 The system will automatically select the Applies to flag that corresponds to the screen that called the Notes from For example if you create a note from the Orders screen the Orders and Tickets flags will already be set when the form opens o Auto Display This flag indicates that the note should automatically display when the specified screen is invoked For example if an order is given a note with Tickets is flagged for Auto Display every time that order is retrieved in the Ticketing screen the note will automatically display ensuring that the batcher and or dispatcher sees the note prior to ticking the load Enter a Note Reason Code if necessary If necessary enter a Contact for the note For example if a customer has promised that a given invoice will be paid by a certain date enter the name of the person who made that commitment Enter the Phone
367. lect the type of orders the report will include The options are Regular Sale Incoming Material Dumped Credit Debit Memos Select the Payment Method The options are Charge Cash Check Credit Card Select Suspended Orders Tickets for the Invoicing Status on the report Enter the Order Date to specify the order date or range of order dates to include on the Priced Orders Report Enter the to specify the customer or range of customers to include on the Priced Orders Report Enter the Project Code to specify the project or range of projects to include on the Priced Orders Report Enter the Accounting Category to specify the accounting category or range of accounting categories to include on the Priced Orders Report Enter the Company to specify the company or range of companies to include on the Priced Orders Report Enter the Pricing Plant Code to specify the pricing plant or range of pricing plants to include on the Priced Orders Report Select a Salesman or range of salesmen to include on the Priced Orders Report Mark the Exception Items Only checkbox to include only exception items on the report Mark the Release Suspended Orders Tickets checkbox to release any suspended order and tickets upon running the report See Releasing Suspended Orders amp Tickets on page 202 for more information Mark the Include Order Specific Prep Customer Notes checkbox to include all order specific notes to be applied M
368. les The lookup file in use is displayed on the order lookup The default lookup file can be set for a workstation using the Default Order Lookup field on the Preferences gt General tab Misc gt Preferences Whatever that default is you can quickly switch lookup files while performing a lookup To switch from the Regular Order file to the Standing Order File 1 Goto the screen Dispatch gt Orders Tab through the Date field Double click in the Order Code field The Choices Order File screen appears Click Options wm ee NS Select Switch Order File to change from the regular order file to either the standing order file the order schedule file or vice versa The lookup screen will change to the selected lookup file 6 Double click on the order you want COMMANDeseries loads that order s information into the Order screen A quick way to view the standing order file is to enter an S in the Order Date field and detail on the Order Code field This opens the choices screen with the standing order file 66 Order Entry Creating Standing Orders from Projects If standing orders are relevant for a particular project create standing orders straight from the project and skip the daily order entry process The standing order s expiration date is the same as the project s expiration date unless otherwise noted To create standing order from projects 1 De 3 Dy p Open an existing project Files gt
369. lication will check to see if there is any group for the user in the User Name table USNM If there is the application will check if there is a Group set up in the User Scheduling Plant Default table with User name and the Group name If there is the application will process priorities as described above e Ifthere is no Group Name setup available in the User Scheduling Plant Default table the application will check to see if there is any set up with User name and Group name Blank If found the system will act based on the flag and priorities as described above If not found no plant will be defaulted into the pricing plant Exceptions Under certain conditions the default schedule plant logic will not be used e Ifthe new order is a Cash amp Carry order In that case as standard the user login plant defaults into the scheduling plant and is not editable e A TQS mix is used e Ifthe product comes from a project product list and a specified scheduling plant is available Under certain conditions economic sourcing will default the scheduling plant e Ifthere is no user setup in User Schedule Plant Default table e The user may or may not have group name but no group name set up related with user in User schedule plant table e There is no setup in User Schedule Plant default table If the product is not available in the plant and there is no next priority is setup the scheduling plant will be left blank If the sc
370. ll have mixes generated with two sets of naming conventions COMMANDeseries allows you to create an additional set of sort codes for your mixes You can have as many codes as you need but they should all be based on a single measurement For instance you might create a set of codes to allows you to sort based on the percentage of air in the mix So you might have sort codes of 5 5 5 6 etc There are two steps in implementing this additional sort code e Create the Sort Codes e Assign a Sort Code to each mix To create a set of Sort Codes 1 Open the Sort Code screen File gt Item Information gt Materials Manager gt Sort Codes Material Manager Sort Code screen EDTMMSC 7 Material Manager Sort Code Sort Code Description Short 5 AIR 5 Air 5 AIR 5 5 AIR 15 5 Air 5 5 AIR 6ZAIR L7ES An BAIR dl 2 Enter a Sort Code 3 Enter a Description for the Sort Code Materials Manager 323 4 Enter a Short code for the Sort Code This code will be used for reports 5 Press Add Occurrence to enter an additional code or accept the screen Once the sort codes have been entered they can be assigned to the individual mixes This is done by retrieving each mix and entering the sort code on the Items Mix tab 324 Materials Manager Once that is done you can use the Mix Sort Code as a filtering option on the main Material Manager screen 7 Material Manager 1 2 3 4 5 6
371. ll taxable and non taxable sales and the tax amount itself are related to the tax authority locations assigned to this tax code The Order Tax Code can default from several different locations Customer Project or Zone The Tax Code field supports Smart Lookup if you type in the first few letters of a tax code description often a city or municipality name and detail on the field the system retrieves a list of tax codes that match the entered search string If only one tax code matches the string the system automatically retrieved that code into the form Because some orders have more than a single taxation point you can adjust both the Plant Tax Code and the Order Tax Code separately if necessary Once the order ships however only the Plant Tax Code may be modified 210 Edit Orders and Tickets 11 In the Taxable field choose whether the order is Taxable or Non Taxable If Taxable is selected the Non Taxable Reason is unavailable If the order is non taxable enter a Non Taxable Reason Code This field identifies the reason the order is non taxable This code is found in the Reason Code field in the Reason Codes editor Files gt General Information gt Reason Codes If an order is set to be non taxable each order line on the Order Report shows as non taxable regardless of how the item is set up 12 Some allow sales tax reduction for qualified customers If you have tax reduction enabled in your system detail on the Sal
372. lling office who reviews everything or various sales representatives who review the pricing for their customers e Runa Priced Orders Report Preliminary Invoice Register e Review product pricing e Edit Orders and Tickets as needed e Run Exception Items Only Report e Update Cartage Tickets 236 Daily Invoicing Run a Priced Orders Report Preliminary Invoice Register A full discussion of the Preliminary Invoice Register can be found on page 188 Very simply you run the report and review the prices That basic pattern may vary depending on the size or structure of the company If the company does both concrete and aggregate work one person may review concrete orders while another reviews aggregate orders In that case use the Product Line field to run two separate reports If pricing is reviewed by the sales reps then run the report for each Salesman In a multiple company situation the report can be run by Company When a pricing error is discovered attempt to determine the source of the error The Preliminary Invoice Register and the Priced Orders Report both include price source codes PSC for all prices making the search easier By identifying and correcting the source of a pricing error you can prevent the error from occurring in the future Edit Orders amp Tickets Using the results from the price review edit the orders and tickets as needed Please see the Edit Orders amp Tickets section on page 205 for full
373. lowed Messages and statuse x Earliest Pre Ticketing Status 4 0n Job M Earliest Out of Service Status 9 t Plant v Truck Tracking Plant Line Quantity Ordered Quantity z Truck Tracking Order Line Quantity Ordered Quantity Truck Barcode Card Ticket Format A Truck Barcode Card Ticket Sequence A Show Truck Underloaded Prompt Enable M wv Allow P O Change on Ticket Display Delivery Method Default Pricing Plant From User Login Plant Returned Concrete Options IT Overwrite Pricing Plant from Scheduling Plant Show Map Page in Orders Tickets Yes M IT Lookup Short Distance Show Zone Code in Orders Tickets Required Ons Default Schedule Load Size From Truck z Require Truck Code in Tickets Delivered Tickets Only Default Overtime Code ER Default Break Code gt J Workflow Defaulting Schedule Plant Logic During Order Entry the application will test for the appropriate default Schedule Plant as follows e If user setup is available in the User Scheduling Plant Default table it will act based on the flag and priorities as described below o If User Login Plant is the top criterion the Login plant will default into the Scheduling Plant code Economic Sourcing will still be run for the user login plant however economic sourcing will not change scheduling plant You will see the best option based on the cost when you select the economic sourcing button You can change the Scheduling Plant from the
374. lt quantity of the auto product in the IMST file is zero or blank the main product s load size quantity will be defaulted if the UOM is the same as the auto product otherwise you can enter the quantity yourself If the customer needs to have the Hauler Code at the schedule line the Hauler Code will be updated in Prep as well and will be saved in the order table o Cartage Update will look at the schedule line if it is blank the system will retrieve the Hauler Code which in this case will also be the Spreaderman from the order table o Ifyou change the Hauler Code on an existing order the Hauler Code will be set in the order header In addition you will receive the following message Hauler Code setup is in the schedule line Changing the Hauler Code will not affect the Hauler Code in the schedule line User will need to edit Hauler Code in Order Entry to put the new Hauler Code in effect OK The system will then only update the Hauler Code in the order table When an existing order is retrieved in Order Entry the Hauler Code setup is located in the Schedule Line and the Hauler Code in the Schedule line is null with the Hauler Code in the Order Header not null the Hauler Code will be defaulted from the order table for all schedules You can edit based on your user privileges Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality 14 Appendix L Quantity Discounts Overview COMMAND
375. main selections screen 9 Accept the Priced Orders Report Selections screen 10 Select a print model from the Possible Print Models screen 11 Select a printer using the scrollable list Exception Items Only Option The Exception Items report can be run in an exclusive fashion That is the report can be configured to display only those orders that meet at least one of the specified exception criteria This report is especially useful in the latter stages of order amp ticket prep to verify that there are no zero priced primary or secondary products immediately prior to printing invoices To enable the Exception Items Only option simply select the Exception Items Only checkbox on the main Preliminary Invoice Register Selection screen If exception 192 Preliminary Invoice Register items are found they will be displayed in the report as usual If there are no expectation items the system will return a No records to process message COMMANDseries H No records to process Printing a Preliminary Detail Invoice Register There are only a few differences between the Priced Orders Report and the Preliminary Invoice Register but the differences are important to understand The Priced Orders report presents the information by order The Preliminary Invoice Register on the other hand simulates an invoice run That means that customer or project invoice configurations are taken into account For example a project
376. map pages The values indicate travel time from the plant to the site and back You can modify these times as needed for things such as weather or traffic The value entered in the Time To Job field is automatically duplicated in the Time To Plant field however the values can be changed If the values are changed from the default the fields will become shaded to indicate that they have been altered If the order is a non project order enter an estimated travel time for the drive from the specified plant to the job site and then back Good service and delivery efficiency are based upon sending trucks at the rate the customer can unload them There are exceptions but generally there is no need to send trucks at a 15 minute spacing when the unloading time is 30 minutes Exceptions o The customer wants the first few trucks sent close together but will take longer to unload such as for a footing or foundation wall o The customer demands trucks at a high rate but cannot sustain that rate o The order is being supplied simultaneously from two or more plants The delivery rate from each plant will be twice or three times longer than the rate ordered as trucks will be scheduled to arrive alternately from each plant o The customer is unloading in several places simultaneously Here the unload rate will be twice the delivery rate These time values are used to calculate scheduling information used in dynamic scheduling and truck tracking
377. mated Data In Out Ticket Data Out to Oracle Ticket Out S JFATICKETouf CO 158 Ticketing Ticket Weights Data Out SELTOUT 4 Ticket Weights Data Out BY 09 Mar 2010 By 09 Mar 2010 xl el el el Soup 100303 ot m DE e IfExclude Canceled Tickets is checked the automated or manual ticket data out process will skip all tickets that have a Canceled Reason Code Print Send Tax amp Cement Info to Batching System This modification allows the following information to be printed on tickets and passed to the COMMANDbatch Generic 2 Way Interface e Max Water Cement Ratio e Min Cement Content e CST Customer Sales Tax Number e TIN Tax information Number Setup The goal in configuring this modification is to ensure that the correct field values will populate the appropriate fields without user intervention Ticketing 159 Project Product Detail Information The Project level Product Detail Information screen has two new fields e Max Water Cement Ratio e Min Cement Content Max Water Cement Ratio and Max Cement Content will be displayed and editable only if the related product is marked as a Concrete Product Both values will default from the Item Master File if available Customer amp Project Accounting tabs Previously the Customer Accounting tab had a single Tax ID Code field A second field has been added Tax ID Code 2 The Project Accounting tab has
378. mix product cannot be on the same order but two ready mix products can be on the same order You will need to create different orders for different item groups even if they are delivered to the same customer or address The first product on the order line defines the main product if different types of products are added afterward they are considered extra products 5 Schedule Price Totals This section displays the scheduling information for the current Item tab From here you can schedule each load and ticket and can schedule any COD items on the current tab Standard Order Entry COMMANDeeries provides multiple options for order entry In addition to the standard screen you can also enter orders through the ticketing and dispatch screens Standard orders can be entered for any day and are also known in the industry as daily orders or regular orders Use the orders screen to enter daily regular orders Orders do not have to be associated with a project COMMANDeeries accepts stand alone orders For example you might have a one time FOB order that is not a part of a project Related Topics Order Haul Information Order Pricing Information Entering Other Order Information Entering Products on an Order Other Order Line Information Associated Products Forecasted Shipped Quantity 34 Order Entry To enter an order Because of variances in versions screen fields may be in a slightly different order 1 Goto the Or
379. mixes Waters UOM Amount UOM Amount Amount Percent 2 Enter the Item Code for the original constituent Se Enter the Item Code for the replacement constituent 4 Accept the screen Before the system processes the replacement it will produce a report for your review Select a print model at the prompt Possible Print Models screen FNDUPRT 3 Possible Print Models Print Model A Description FILE Report to File OKI 20 OKI 20 REPORT 17 Reports 17CPI Landsca REPORT 20 Reports 20CP Landsca REPORT 20P Report 20 CPI Portrait SCREEN Report to Screen Device Mode Portrait at 10 cpi Portrait at 20 cpi Landscape at 17 cpi Landscape at 20 cpi Portrait at 20 cpi Portrait at 10 cpi Print De Prompt Prompt Prompt Prompt Colu 160 170 200 160 C Save Report File After Printing 5 Select a print model and the system will generate a report listing all of the proposed constituent replacements 330 Materials Manager 6 After generating the report COMMANDconcrete will prompt you for the disposition of the proposed replacements Update prompt Press Update or Cancel as needed Replacing a Constituent by Percentage If you go from stocking a single type of cement to stocking two different types of cement you may need to adjust your mixes to use a combination of the two cements To replace part of a constituent with a percentage by volume
380. mon types of chatter is the communication between the drivers and dispatch While this communication is a necessity minimizing this chatter results in more efficient dispatch operations To reduce communications traffic COMMANDeseries provides the ability to establish automated messaging via signaling units When a load is ticketed this system will send messages to the ticketed truck as well as the truck s ahead of and or behind the ticketed truck in the order s schedule The messages will notify each truck of the trucks immediately ahead of behind them The overall result will be that each truck will have more accurate dispatching information reducing the number of calls to the dispatcher Example TRUCK 1 First ticket TRUCK 2 Second ticket TRUCK 3 Third ticket TRUCK 4 Fourth ticket etc e When the first ticket prints o Truck 1 receives a message similar to Truck Ahead blank Truck Behind blank e When the second ticket prints o Truck 1 if active and not Ar Plant receives a message similar to Truck Ahead blank Truck Behind TRUCK2 o Truck 2 receives a message similar to Truck Ahead TRUCK1 Truck Behind blank e When the third ticket prints o Truck 1 does not receive any message o Truck 2 if active and not Ar Plant receives a message similar to Truck Ahead TRUCK1 Truck Behind TRUCK3 o Truck 3 receives a message similar to Truck Ahead TRUCK2 Truck Behind blank e When the fourth ticket prints o
381. mpany or range of companies to include on the Priced Orders Report If the field is left blank Company will not be used for record selection Enter a Pricing Plant Code or range of pricing plants to include on the Priced Orders Report If the field is left blank Pricing Plant will not be used for record selection Enter a Suspend Reason code or range of reason codes to include in the Priced Orders Report If the field is left blank Suspend Reason will not be used for record selection Enter a Salesman employee code or range of codes If the field is left blank Salesman will not be used for record selection Select Exception Items Only to print an Exception Items Only Report Do not select this checkbox when printing a Priced Orders Report Select Release Suspended Order Tickets to release all suspended orders and tickets that are included in the report range Some people use this option when closing a month to make sure that no suspended orders or tickets have slipped through the cracks Select Include Order Specific Prep Customer Notes to include all notes flagged for invoice prep This will include all records where the Customer file has a note with the Invoice Prep flag checked Select Save Settings on Accept to save the report parameters All selections for the report are maintained and the report is saved as the Report Name Accept the Priced Orders Report Selections screen Select a print model from the Possible Print Models scree
382. mpleted 3 Enter the Plant Code Truck Code and Driver Code as necessary If a truck code was entered on the Journey Editor it is not necessary for the truck code in this screen to match Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 81 4 Detail on the Journey field and select a journey from the list By default the list contains only journeys planned for the present date 5 You will now see each stop in the journey automatically loaded into the ticketing screen You can navigate through the tickets using the Next and Previous buttons Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping EDTSHIP Ticketed journey D Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping Weights Order Dat d Plat Code 57 2502 Scale Code T GENERIC Track Code GE COMPANY Dee Code GENERIC GENERIC Journey E Deel fos Cok Spo Al ben Group CO CONCRETE ket Code Sequence M Oha TravelDitarce 1000 Order Type Pay Distance On Job Time fico Je Shipping Customer gt Al HOMEBUILDERS Lot Block Project Code L Al KOLOM 11 Dekvery Z PICKED UP Map Page Zone Code Part Ticket Purchase Ouder Customer Job Pant hem Code Description Order Oty Dev Dip Lon Un Price Pre Qty Cube Check s ap A100 j 20 m3 mee TT Ottar J ei Weight This Journey Am This Load 200 This Product 200 Lei Adi LL Remove _ Stop 1 of 2 Status New Ticket 6 To add a stop order to the journey at this point press the Add button This adds an occurrence to the screen and allows you to select an Order
383. mported from V4 will not display on the Tracking screen Update Blank Default Order Types in Projects This update scans all projects to determine if there is a value in the Default Order Type field Projects gt Distribution If there is no value the value will be set to the setting for the Customer default Files gt Configuration gt Defaults gt Distribution Normally the default will be Regular Sale No user input is required If this update is run Update Allow Price Change Flag for COD Customers Projects must also be run at the same time Update PRJO for upgrade from 4 27 and earlier Some fields that were stored in the PROJ table in V4 are stored in the PRJO table in V5 This routine moves the affected fields to the new table No user input is required Update Customer s Minimum Haul Flag from Version 4 Upgrade Version 4 stored minimum haul flags in a different field than V5 This update will copy customer and project level minimum haul flags stored under V4 to the corresponding fields in V5 No user input is required Update Payment Forms in Orders Tickets Invoices Earlier versions of COMMANDseries used Payment Method to determine how an order was paid Charge Cash Check or Credit Card Payment Methods have been supplanted with Payment Forms The advantage of Payment Forms is that you have more flexibility in creating payment types Once Payment Forms have been entered run this update to populate the Payment Form
384. n Select a printer using the scrollable list If the priced orders report reveals some discrepancies in orders and tickets correct them at this time using Edit Orders and Tickets Summary Pages The last pages of the register are summary pages they provide various totals from the report which are used during balancing There are four different summaries provided Sales Totals Break down sales totals by Transaction Type and Payment Method Quantity Totals Provide a similar breakdown in addition to breaking out quantities by measurement system i e US Customary metric and total Sales Tax Totals Show taxable sales non taxable sales and tax amounts for all Tax Authority Locations Suspended Orders Tickets Lists all suspended orders tickets that fall in the specified report range The Suspended Order Tickets totals page only prints on the Preliminary Invoice Register Preliminary Invoice Register 191 Printing an Exceptions Report The Priced Orders Report with Exceptions is a variant of the Priced Orders Report that allows you to combine two editing reports into one By running an Exceptions Report you can show all orders as well as create flags to identify the options shown below that may require special attention during the editing process The symbol is a user entered symbol such as or X that will print in the last column on the report indicating a line item that matches the exception indicated In
385. n If changes are made to the tax status of any part of the order the effect can be reviewed immediately Display Haul Charges This option displays the Order Haul Charges screen which provides an easy to read summary and total of all cartage charges and surcharges related to the order This information can be useful when working with pricing that combines material and delivery prices Order Haul Charges screen EDTPREPS FJ Order Haul Charges Suspend Order Suspend Product Edit Suspended Tickets These three options relating to suspension of orders products or tickets are discussed in Suspending Orders and Tickets on page 199 Edit Orders and Tickets 227 Addition Selection of Notes This option calls the Notes editor Please see the section on Notes for complete information 228 Edit Orders and Tickets Daily Invoicing In COMMANDeeries a dispatcher creates orders and tickets with the Dispatching function of COMMANDconcrete and COMMANDaggregate The next day that order and ticket information can be reviewed and edited if necessary in preparation for invoicing The procedure for preparing orders and tickets for invoicing involves printing preliminary registers editing orders and tickets and printing final invoices Preliminary reports and the Edit Orders and Tickets function are used to check and correct order and ticket information before the printing of invoices In some companies this task falls to inv
386. n The full ordered quantity is displayed on the order line and all loads including those that may be affected by the hold quantity amount are displayed Once the hold quantity has been ticketed and the order placed in a hold status two things happen to the Tracking and Scheduling screen e The order is still displayed on the screen but the Ordered and Delivered Quantity fields change color to white If the Plant is displayed in the final column that field is changed to white as well e All loads placed on hold disappear from the Orders to Load column Bid Price Calculator The Bid Price Calculator Misc gt Bid Price Calculator is used to calculate a realistic bid price based on costs and desired profit according to specified product and plant related information This feature can be called from the COMMAND quote module or from the Misc menu The calculator provides material overhead delivery and finance costs and computes the minimum selling price required to meet the plant s desired profit The minimum selling price is automatically updated when other variables are changed The Bid Price Calculator is used mainly by salespeople The following values are displayed on the Calculator tab e Material Cost Represents the total estimated cost of materials for this product per cubic yard or meter This value may differ from plant to plant A detailed breakdown of the cost can be viewed on the Material Costs tab This informa
387. n the Time Status fields Payment Option Reports The Payment Options menu Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Payment Reports has a number of options that can be used to generate reports that give information on payments tickets and receipts Topics in this section Reconciliation Report Uncollected Tickets Report Missing Times Report Reconciliation Report The Reconciliation Report lets users select a range of plants and displays information on reconciled records This is closely linked with the Cash Reconciliation Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Cash Reconciliation screen where payments can be reconciled Information is displayed for each plant sorted by plant code The exception to this is when the Report Sequence is set to Bank Agent In this case information is displayed for each bank agent COMMAND concrete Reports 307 Reconciliation Report Selections SELCREC Reconciliation Report Selections Uncollected Tickets Report The Uncollected Tickets Report lets users select a range of plants and displays information on uncollected tickets An uncollected ticket is defined as any ticket where the full amount has not yet been collected This is determined by comparing the COD Amount in the Ticket file with the sum of the Payment Allocation files for that ticket This is closely linked with the Uncollected COD Tickets Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Uncollected COD Tickets screen which displays similar
388. n the system may open the Cash Payments form please see Cash Management Order Entry for additional information once payment has been entered and accepted the Concrete Ticketing and Shipping screen will open o Ifyou need to take a payment but do not need to ticket the order press the Payment button When the payment is accepted you will return to the Order Entry screen o Ifyou simply want to save the order accespt the screen Other Order Line Information The Other Order Line Information screen displays basic information related only to the item not the entire order It is accessed by pressing the Other button on the order line containing the item Editing the usage code and tax status is allowed in this screen Other Order Line Information EDTORDRS 3 Other Order Line Information 2500 2500 3 4 3 8 Comments Usage Code 2 Taxable Taxable Non Taxable Reason Testing Laboratory Code Lab 1 Contracted Samples L Exclude from Sampling Schedule Report Additional Samples L Apply to Contracted Total Total Samples to Take If your system is configured for concrete Sample Scheduling additional fields will be at the bottom of the form Testing Labratory Code The lab to be used for this sample will default from the project of the system default You can use the drop down to select from a list Contracted Samples The required number of samples to be taken from this order
389. n COMMANDoeeries features that bring additional functionality to Order Entry and Scheduling You may not use these features often or you may use them every day depending on your business requirements Topics in this section Customer Project Order Lookup The COD Calculator The Volume Calculator Updating Projects from Order Entry Changing Units of Measure Removing Orders Copying and Moving Orders Order Types Round Trip Trucking Truck Unavailability Truck Counts Screen Pouring Methods Order Hold Functions Bid Price Calculator Order Level Mix Design The Order Tree The Options Menu Default Schedule amp Pricing Plants in Order Entry Economic Sourcing Pricing Authority Display Percentage Discount Transport Pricing Journeys Multi Drop Concrete Deliveries Customer Project Order Lookup The Customer Project Order Lookup CPOL function lets you list customers their assigned projects and their completed orders using general search parameters 70 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools The Use the Lookup screen to place an order It simplifies and speeds up the process by allowing you to populate order information customer information and project information quickly and accurately The CPOL screen comes up automatically when the Order Entry is opened if the Use Order Prefix Screen checkbox is selected in the Misc gt Preferences menu Otherwise it is available from the Options menu in the Order screen
390. n EE dE ee 309 Application Management sscssccecscceescceeecseeseeeeseeeeesensaeoeeeneeeenenens 310 Calculate a Price e Ce CEET 310 Mix Design Intenmace QA EE 313 Initialize ACHT CC EE 313 Batch Interface Queued Tickets TEE 314 Batch Code Generator ssssessssssenssnererrnnsnenenrosenessesenennanennnnnnenenunnenenrese 314 Edit Project Expiration Dat s sicnivgersivecsuevennandeadetawaves A E AEEA aa 315 Lien Legacy Invoice Manager sisriscissasris tsertas nnti Enna ANETARE ETEC ARRANDA REENA 315 Realign Accounts and Cost CenterS EE 316 Error Log Report eessen g Ee careers dies der ens sends EE RESER NATAR ge 318 Update Zone Salesman n ssssesssssssssnrsnsnunrorenrnsosssessssenennnnnnunnnnnnenenresensene 318 Update Inactive CUSTOMERS lt a icdvivicaevrissassuca need EE EEENE ENEE ENEE 319 GENEE eebe ge E 320 M t rials ET CT 322 Key EE eege EE EEN 322 Material Manager Setup s sesssssssssnrenennnnenenrososenessesenennennnnannnenennorerenrese 322 SV stem LICENSE Zeene Ee E 323 Cab LOCAUION eegen edd de See ARANE 323 Sort COGS eege egene Eege Ee 323 3 27 13 o Item Setup WEE 325 Material Manager Screen SEKR EE NEEN ENN E SNE ENEE AER ER ee g 326 Filtering Bt EE 326 MIXES oren Ee AEE IEE EEE E S EE EEE EE TEETE 327 Constituent TEE 327 Item Replacement ssewsstwsxeceneresieenseeauiainunernarsaminneeaaudeneussacaadeiawnens 328 Lait dee IEN 335 Mix Design Screen LaYOUL ET 336 USING 2 Generi MIX EE 339
391. n Report Batch Info Report Order Audit Log Report 290 COMMAND concrete Reports Order Report The Order Report provides three report types each showing various levels of information about orders Each level of information builds upon the previous one as described below e No detail Produces a one line listing of orders showing order date order code customer and project codes and delivery address e Minimum detail Produces a listing that includes pricing information taxing information and various other information related to the order e Full detail Includes all information shown above plus extra product information for the order The Order report is a one line scheduling report showing comprehensive delivery information for each order for a particular day The Order Report Summary option displays item information in the same format as the Detail option Select Summary with Product Detail to view information in this format Ticket Report The Ticket Report produces a listing of tickets generated It is a single line report that shows basic information about each ticket The report can be sorted by ticket code order code ora list of other selections e g order date ticket code hauler code etc The Ticket Report displays a specific day s activity relating to a certain customer plant or truck Canceled tickets are marked with a dash and a plus represents a missing ticket number An asterisk
392. n customer codes to customers created using the Quick Customer Entry function in Order Entry Quick Customer Entry is used to facilitate one time cash customers Receipt Sequence is the sequence used to assign receipt numbers to receipts generated during order entry Both sequences require the same information Number The sequence number Description The long description of the sequence You may have separate sequences for each plant for example Short The short description Begin At Identifies the starting point for the sequence If you have multiple receipt sequences make sure that there is enough separation based on your business to ensure that it will be a long time before one sequence overlaps another For example 100 and 200 are probably not good starting points but 10000 and 20000 probably are Next Indicates the next number in the sequence and will be incremented automatically It should only be changed to reset the sequence If additional sequences are needed use the Add Occurrence button F6 to add an additional record Bank Codes The Bank Codes editor lets you define codes that represent the various banks used by your organization Banks are assigned to Payment Transaction Batches indicating the financial institution to which deposits are made Bank Codes also define the G L Booking Code for the deposit To set up bank codes 1 Sr 3 A Open the Bank Codes screen Files gt General
393. n if the main ticket has an FOB truck e Sequence Codes are assigned to each cartage ticket by application therefore the Order Date order Code and Ticket Code will remain the same Example 2610002 is a Lime product 2610999 is a service product A user creates an order for 2610002 2610999 is an auto product and defaults to the order line once the main product 2610002 is entered Since 2610999 is a Service Hauler product the Hauler Code is required on the order line A ticket is created with the service product The system will check to see if all cartages are available for the ticket lines by comparing ticket information to the cartage ticket table CTTK for each record If no matches are found the Update Cartage Status will be left alone Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality Cartage Ticket Update is run One ticket will be created for product 2610002 for the truck that is used in ticketing along with its Hauler A Cartage Ticket Edit Another cartage ticket will be created for the service product The Hauler and truck will be taken from the Spreaderman preferred hauler A Cartage Ticket Edit Ticket Line Total si In the above examples cartage rates have Item Codes for 221 and L01 TLAC records for these cartage tickets will be created from those Item Codes A Cartage Rate Tables sae Kilk enny truck s Minimum Load Size times Pay Rate 10 Appendix K Lime
394. n the system and we also hope that you will refer to the manual when questions about the functionality of COMMANDeeries arise Setting Up the System COMMANDeseries manipulates a large database of information and most of this data is unique to your construction materials business For COMMANDeseries to efficiently and properly operate a basic set of information must be entered before you can perform your daily tasks with the system Files such as products plants trucks and customers must be entered along with files pertaining to taxes minimum load charges and accounting periods There is a large amount of information that must exist before you can begin using COMMANDeeries With this in mind Command Alkon has provided a Setting Up the System document to assist you as you enter the information that will make your system unique to your business As the size of the Setting Up the System document shows there is a great deal of information to enter However once this initial information exists in the system the only products projects customers etc that you will have to enter are new ones Properly built files make COMMANDseries extremely easy to use The information you need is either already in place or just a mouse click or keystroke away Starting COMMANDseries There are several ways to start your COMMAN Deeries applications e Select COMMANDseries from the Windows Start menu e Select the application module icon from t
395. n to the left of the Payment Form field labeled with a dollar sign This button brings up a screen for additional information about the customer s payment For checks enter bank and check information for credit cards enter account numbers expiration dates authorization codes etc 9 Edit any further information on the Edit Orders and Tickets screen or fill in fields that had been left blank The Pricing Other Haul for aggregate orders and Tickets buttons enable you to go to those screens and edit the information contained therein 10 When you ve finished editing an order accept the screen If you change a Fixed Material Delivered or Fixed Cartage Delivered price you will have to change the price breakdown The Fixed Price Change screen will display automatically Fixed Price Change EDTPREP9 3 Fixed Price Change The Changed Price is a Fix Material Delivered or Fix Cartage Delivered Price Please enter Appropriate Material and or Cartage Price for New Price Delivered Price New Price Material Price 32 00 Cartage Price 38 00 Total Price 6 00 OK Update the Material Price and Cartage Price and accept the screen to continue When editing an existing ticket if a change will alter its value the system checks for any receipts against that order If the order has a receipt that is not fully allocated the allocated amount is updated appropriately Order Pricing Information The Order
396. nd project codes are the same as the project record s customer code and project code CUST_CODE ORDR CUST_CODE PROJ and PROJ_CODE ORDR PROJ_CODE PROJ Ticketing 169 Web PDA Tickets and Orders for Trowel Ready Mortar Overview CS08 has been updated to handle a new type of ticket import Web PDA tickets which are used for Trowel Ready Mortar TRM orders TRM orders are those that are created when a driver carries multiple orders for multiple delivery addresses on a single truck These orders are typically handled in real time using a PDA Note These orders differ from Journeys in that they deliver mortar not concrete ageregate or concrete block Additionally in Journeys order products can be different whereas with TRM orders the only product allowed is mortar The below explains how ordering and ticketing works when using a PDA for TRM e TRM orders must have a Truck Code Note Orders that do not have a Truck Code will not be uploaded to your PDA e The Truck Code can be entered in either the Order Header or the Schedule Line based on the order set up in the Configuration editor e Once you logged in to COMMANDIog the PDA ticketing interface via your PDA the mobile application calls the COMMAND Web Services application to retrieve the following order information Order Date Order Code and the first item on the Order Line ORDL for the order e At this point you may activate or void any open tickets
397. nd Ticket Data IN ege gege 177 Automated Data In Out NEEN 178 Tasks Conditions and Driver Overtime enee KEE EEN EE Een 180 EE 180 Driver Overtime 082 NOS ENN EEN EEN dE ege EATEN EEEE EEEE 180 COMGINIONS anucedsassartriaecesntencssasanine tun nacwaniaarseniannaeatenncenamaensecentaerdos 181 Eeleren ue RE 182 ie le e NEE 182 RI ue WT 183 Managing Driver Overtime ee eet EEN be degEe 184 Time and Task EN EE 184 Editing Ticket TIMES ee ee 185 Editing Truck Ri EE 186 Editing Driver Kl ET 187 aggies 187 Preliminary Invoice Register ssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 188 Saving Report Configurations s t eekEKN ERAN Eet EERSTEN EEN KENE 188 Printing a Priced Orders Report aciscccedeviassceserdevesscausencssccavensdicaveavervieaseas 189 Elte ATTEN 191 Printing an Exceptions Report 200egex deeg R EES EEN dE de NEE EN 192 Exception tems Only EIERE siden kee Eggs KEN due NEES dE EAESE REN 192 Printing a Preliminary Detail Invoice Register sssssssssssssrsrararrnrnrrrrrerreress 193 6 3 27 13 Preliminary Summary Invoice Register sssssssrrrrrssrrrrrrsrrnrrrnrssnrrnne 195 Transfer Orders Register sixedeasvscasevcenetsxconvesinndrsinateeniageassrearseentaston 195 Suspending Orders and Tickets nee KREE ENEE KEE E EEN E EEN 199 Manual Suspension of Orders Tickets or Products sssssssrsssrrrrrrsrsnrrenns 200 Automatic Customer Suspension Of Orders ssssssssrrrsssrrrnrrsrrnnrr
398. ndicates the actual truck hydraulic pressure measured by the batch control system while loading Sent in field 018 of the T014 Ticket Results section Appendix G Batch Confirmation and EU Link Enhancements 427 Ticket Weights Confirmation The Ticket Weights Confirmation screen has been updated with a field that records the Mix Non Compliance Reason Code Ticket Weights Confirmation Screen EDTBWGT N Ticket Weights Confirmation Ticket 200220 on Truck 1 3811 When the form is loaded with Ticket Weight results the Non Compliance Reason Code field will be populated if the value of the Weight Comply Status in the TICK table is not In Tolerance The Reason Code field can also be blank upon opening the Ticket Weights Confirmation screen It will be mandatory for entry if the Require Reason Code field on the Configuration gt TQS tab has been set to Yes Ticket Print The following information will be printed automatically e For individual Components Product Short Name Batching Unit of Measure Design Weight Extended Design Weight a Moisture Measured by the Batch Control System b Theoretical Absorbed moisture c Theoretical Wet Weight d a 1 b 100 1 100 Actual batched weights O O O O O 0 O 0 O 428 Appendix G Batch Confirmation and EU Link Enhancements Actual Variance to Theoretical Wet Weights Variance to Theoretical Wet Weights Theoretical Water Content d a Theoretical Fre
399. needed to streamline the process 278 Customer Notes To configure dispatch memos 1 Open the Configuration gt Distribution tab Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Distribution 2 Select the Notes button The Notes Configuration screen will display Notes Configuration EDTCNFXT 7 Notes Configuration Display Notes Line in Forms Tv Applies to Auto Display Orders Hide v Disable Tickets Hide v Disable Send to Batch Panel Hide v 3 Set the Display Notes Line in Forms field to Show When Show is selected a Dispatch Memo field will display on the Orders Simplified Orders and Tickets screens Setting Display Notes Line in Forms to Hide will disable the auto display of all order level notes including those entered prior to this modification 4 The remaining fields configure default settings for all order level notes not just dispatch memos o The Applies to options let you establish whether dispatch memos are to be assigned to orders tickets and or batch panels Users will not have access to the standard Notes editor from a dispatch memo so these fields establish the system wide settings o The Auto Display flag enables the customer notes auto display function for all dispatch memos 5 Accept the Notes Configuration screen and the Configuration screen Operations A dispatch memo field will now display on the Orders Simplified Orders and Ticketing screen
400. nfiguration gt Dispatch tab above on the next day s Scheduling screen When the truck punches in the system will check if a future order date exists If it does the FUTURE fields will be defaulted to the LAST fields on the TRUC table e The Future Ticket Code will be stored in the Last Ticket Code field on the TRUC table e The Future Order Date will be stored in the Last Order Date field on the TRUC table Ticketing 167 e The Future Order Code will be stored in the Last Order Code field on the TRUC table e The FUTURE order and ticket fields are cleared from the TRUC table after they are copied to the LAST fields e Ifthe Future Order Date is not the same as the current Order Date Future fields will not default to the LAST fields on the TRUC table The truck will display on the current order with the pre ticketed order at the first status Future day orders will also display at the first status You cannot move a truck from the first status to the next status on pre ticketed or future day orders Tracking and Scheduling Operations Change Truck Info Tab Future Order Date and Future Order Code have been added to the Change Truck Info tab These fields are not editable and are for informational purposes only Tracking and Scheduling Operations gt Change Truck Info tab DBATSOPB hange ruck info i J ange ron H Reset Trucks Tab Future fields on the TRUC table will not be cleared if you press Reset on the Rese
401. nformation will not be stored on the delivery note Certification There are two types of items certified and non certified e Certified The mix and all constituents except water are certified for EN 206 1 e Non Certified Either the mix or any of the constituents excluding water are not certified for EN 206 1 Mix certification is stored only on the delivery note when the item is certified and the certification expiration date has not passed ILOC Table Certification information for cement aggregate admix additions and mixes can be imported from SAP to the Item Location ILOC table in COMMANDeeries The following new columns have been added to the ILOC table to hold the certification information e Certification Number CERT_NUMBER 255 Characters e Certification Body CERT_BODY 255 Characters e Level of Certification CERT_LEVEL 15 Characters e Year of Certification CERT_YEAR 4 Characters e Certification Expiration Date CERT_EXP_DATE 10 Characters Ticketing 143 Certification information is specific to a mix or a constituent item at a certain location Items Editor The Items gt Alternate Items Batch Codes tab and Technical tabs have been updated with a new button Certification Legal text i z Chail On either tab press the Certification Legal Text button to bring up the Certification Legal Text screen where you can enter all certification and legal text for the associated it
402. ng the credit memo you are prompted for inventory sales analysis options for all memo items If necessary enter Comments regarding the background reason for the memo Accept the screen to return to the main prep screen Customer Project Code segment EDTPREP Customer M0000 _ ABC Construction Inc Project Code sf Convalescent Center en Lien Location gt Order Type Debit Memo DI Invoice Code gt When the Order Type is Credit Memo or Debit Memo the Invoice Code field appears Enter the Invoice Code on which this order was originally billed This field links the new credit memo with the original invoice If this field is left blank the system creates an open credit memo that must be manually assigned to an invoice at a later date Enter the additional pricing information Check the Total field at the bottom of the form to verify the additional amount to be charged to the customer Be sure to remove all information from the invoice that will not be affected by the memo Accept the Edit Orders and Tickets screen Use Invoice Print to generate the memo and create a sales batch Options Menu The Options menu on the Edit Orders and Tickets screen provides a shortcut to various functions The Options drop down menu includes Change Order to Metric Ticket Times Reprint Tickets Display Individual Ticket Display Taxes Display Multiple Tickets Display Haul Charge Suspend Order Suspend Product Edit
403. not necessary for the truck code in this screen to match 4 Detail on the Journey field and select a journey from the list By default the list contains only journeys planned for the present date 5 You will now see each stop in the journey automatically loaded into the ticketing screen You can navigate through the tickets using the Next and Previous buttons 108 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping EDTSHIP Ticketed journey r5 Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping S i Se 6 To add a stop order to the journey at this point press the Add button This adds an occurrence to the screen and allows you to select an Order Code to add to the journey Tab through the Ticket Code field to create the new ticket You can also remove any stops that are not required by navigating it and pressing the Remove button 7 Accept the screen The journey stops are ticketed and the journey is updated with any changes made to its stops and or sequence Once a journey has been ticketed changes can no longer be made One ticket instruction is sent to the batch panel for all individual journey tickets If you view the details of a completed journey in the Journey Editor pressing the detail button opens the Journey Details screen and lets you view the completed journey information Multi Drop Concrete Deliveries Overview Order Entry has been modified to accommodate multiple drops for Concrete Products This en
404. nt click in the appropriate field and enter the comment In some cases comments will already be completed Accept this screen to save your changes if any Order Haul Information Order haul charges are initially established by the customer and or project files Most of the time you have no need to modify these settings during order entry In some cases however you may want to modify or review the haul charges for an order The haul charge settings are accessible through the Haul button on the Order Entry or Edit Orders and Tickets screen To modify order level haul charges 1 On the Edit Orders and Tickets screen enter a customer code and if necessary a project code The Haul button will not display until a valid customer code has been entered Select the Haul button The Order Haul Information screen displays Edit Orders and Tickets Order Haul Information EDTORDR1 A Order Haul Information Fa S Cartage Charge Table HC ZERO CHE Ovenide Rate 120 Surcharges Surcharge Code Overnde Rate xD FERRYXNC 075 I Apply Surchaige to Hauler Pay Cartage Pay Information Ovenide Pay T able fase 438 Overide Rate p320 The existing information is defaulted from the customer or project files or from manual entries made in Order Entry Any changes made to this screen will not affect those master files but will instead affect only this order Enter a Cartage Charge Table or detail on the
405. nt gt Database Locks Data Management 373 Database Locks screen DBALOCK 7 Database Locks Issued By CMDseries Host IP Address CMD User Table Table Descrption Primary Key Value zm OEM SYSTEM ORDR Order File ORDER_DATE 20120523 ORDER_CODE 5000 zm emm mm SYSTEM ORDL Order Line Product Fie ORDER_DATE 20120523 0RDER_CODE 5000 mr pm SYSTEM SCHD Order Schedule Fie ORDER_DATE 20120523 ORDER_CODE 5000 My REM mr SYSTEM SCHL Scheduled Load File ORDER_DATE 20120523 0RDER_CODE 5000 Me ERED SYSTEM SCHL Scheduled Load Fie ORDER_DATE 20120523 0RDER_CODE 5000 Ho emm SYSTEM SCHL Scheduled Load fie ORDER_DATE 20120523 0RDER_CODE 5000 Ho mmm SYSTEM SCHL ScheduledLoad Fite ORDER_OATE20120523 0RDER_CODE 5000 My mmm SYSTEM SCHL Scheduled Load Fie ORDER_DATE 20120523 0RDER_CODE 5000 The screen will list current locked records 2 Select the record that you need to release 3 Press lt Shift F5 gt or the Remove button on the toolbar A confirmation box will display 4 Select Yes to terminate the user session If your system is interfaced with third party applications either through COMMANDedx or another interface it is possible taht you can have database locks originating from a program other than COMMANDseries The two buttons at the top of the form allow you to control what locks are displayed e Locks not by COMMANDseries e AU DB Locks Pressing these buttons does not change the display in the current form r
406. nt will not be computed after the Trade Discount Zone Adjustment o The entered discount will be calculated against the Item Price e Ifthe Compute User Price Latitude After Discount field Configuration gt Projects Quotes tab is set to Enabled o The user discount will be computed after the Trade Discount Zone Adjustment o The entered discount will be calculated against the Adjusted Price 244 Daily Invoicing Daily Invoicing 245 Cash Management The Cash Management option provides a means for managing COD payments for COMMANDeseries users who do not have the AR modules It has several key features Quick Customer creation Payment Entry integrated with both order entry and ticketing Automatic and manual allocation of payments to tickets Cash Reconciliation Reporting Configuration Above and beyond standard configuration requirements there are five areas that must be configured to implement Cash Management Next Numbers Bank Codes Contact Types Contacts Plants Users Next Numbers Two next number sequences impact cash management Next Numbers editor EDTNEXT fe fao nont tusten fGNORTH foo fi Concrete Ticket Sequence fCMCTICK ft Tes ees F uick Customer Sequence j The up down buttons indicate that multiple sequences have been entered Customer sequences are i Cartage Invoice Damm assigned at the plant level 246 Cash Management Customer Sequence is used to assig
407. o 1 On the Edit Orders and Tickets screen enter the Order Date and Order Code of the order you wish to correct The rest of the fields automatically fill with previously entered details of the order If the order has already been invoiced a dialog box will appear 222 Edit Orders and Tickets Invoiced Order COMMANDseries Order has been invoiced 5006 Changes not allowed VI J Note the invoice number provided that will be used while creating the debit memo If you do not get this message then you can edit the order directly a debit memo will not be necessary 2 To continue with the memo perform the Save As Copy function lt F9 gt which copies the order 3 Enter the Date for the credit memo and an Order Code number or tab through the field to allow the system to assign the order code If the date is different from the original order date a dialog box displays Do you want to retain the original ticket dates Select Yes or No as needed You will also be asked if you want to Revalidate prices answer No to that one In the Order Type field select Debit Memo 5 Once you select credit or debit memo the Order Credit Debit Memo Information screen displays Order Credit Debit Memo Information EDTPREPU 3 Order Credit Debit Memo Information _ Reason Code gt Credit D ebit Memo How should all quantities effect _ inventory and sales analysis Quantities on hand should b
408. o generate the Extended Price which is the amount the customer is charged for any given item Below is a screen shot of a line item entry on the main Edit Orders and Tickets screen This information comes from the Order Line record ORDL e The Price Source Information displayed below the Description of each product indicates where the price originated It can be used to identify correct pricing or pricing problems e The Price field indicates the unit price If all you need to do is change a primary product s price you can do it from this screen Press the D button to display the entire 206 Edit Orders and Tickets price source code description taken from the PRICE_DERIVED_FROM_CODE field in the ORLD table which describes how the price was entered e The Order Qty field indicates how much material was initially ordered It is included on this screen as a reference the order quantity is not used in any invoicing calculations It is provided primarily as reference e The Price Qty field shows the sum of the item s Price Quantity values from all tickets on the order The field is inactive on the main Edit Orders and Tickets screen To change a price quantity you must edit the individual ticket s e The Extended price is the Price times the Price Quantity It is the total price for the item on this order The important thing to remember is that if you want to change the price of an item you can do it from the main Edit
409. o Project Products on the Customers and Projects Pricing tab Note Auto products will be restricted as well if you select this option If you want to restrict a Project to Lime products only select only Lime for the Item Group Order Entry will automatically validate Lime products against Customers and Projects to ensure that the appropriate Item Type is entered for each Customer and Project on the current order For instance you will receive the below error message if the Item group does not match what is allowed for the Customer COMMAND on rete 2 thom Group Concrete not found The tem group must be added to the Customer before the ton may be iere Projects Editor Now you can begin to add your Lime products to Projects The Allow Auto flag will be available for all Item Types except for Service and Extra Charge on the Projects gt Products tab If the product has any auto product for any location the Allow Auto flag will be checked Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality Projects gt Products tab EDTPRDL1 F Projects D Customer Code 402139 Al B amp F SELECT BUILDING SUPPLIES Project Code 2320 Al Frame Project Name JCURROW CO KERRY Main Deliver To Contacts Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution Products Retail Orders Forecast Standard Haul Costs Purchase Orders Plant All x Display Jal Products x Default Price Type Fix Ma
410. o the value entered e Production Week o If Null or Zero 0 a Production Week is considered to be five Calendar Days o If Not Null or greater than Zero 0 a Production Week is considered to be five Production Days 118 Sampling amp Testing Plan Once the Maximum checks are performed the Minimum per Day Per Production Week per Calendar Month and per Calendar Year are checked Whenever a test is required to meet a Maximum or Minimum testing requirement messages will be generated in Orders if applicable and in Concrete Ticketing Operational Logic When a schedule not an order is saved the system will perform the test sample selection logic on any mix on the order e Identify the Item Code and Location Code for the order or ticket o Ifthe Item Code at the Location has ANY Concrete Families assigned all Testing Methods for the Concrete Family Location will be used o IfNO Concrete Families are assigned all Testing Methods for the Concrete Item Code at the Location will be used For each Testing Method the Start Date and End Date are supplied by FIRE Q and define the date range for the Target Number of Samples and Actual Number of Samples The Actual Number of Samples will be those that were ACTUALLY performed and reported back through the FIRE Q system All queries to CS Tickets for the Samples recorded in CS will be back to the End Date supplied by FIRE Q e Maximum Per Year o Retrieve tickets for the Item o
411. ob tracking code while the Job Cost Phase refers to a set of codes used to track a job through various stages of completion Both Job Cost Job and Job Cost Phase must be entered into the system in advance Files gt General Information gt Job Cost Job and Files gt General Information gt Job Cost Phase e Review RV Automatically assigned to any order that is created or edited by an external access customer assigned user These orders will display on the Tracking screen but they cannot be ticketed until a regular user reviews them and changes the status to Regular Sale e Material Transfer MT Represents inventoried materials shipped to an intra company plant or business for subsequent sale This order type is used for simple material transfers in which inventory is being shifted for one reason or another The order and ticket are processed normally with the following exception the Payment Method field will not be available as this is a non invoiced order Suggested Shipping Plants An option for scheduling is to use the Suggested Shipping Plant feature Options gt Suggested Shipping Plant This screen calculates material cost and delivery cost for each plant for one unit measure of the material and lists those plants in ascending order by total cost For your convenience the difference in total cost between the least expensive shipping plant and the other plants is also listed 76 Advanced Order amp Sche
412. ode fields have been removed 286 COMMAND concrete Reports Order Schedule Report Selections concrete SELOSCH 3 Order Schedule Report Selections Standard Format E Plant Code 2 04 29 2011 E E E E v Truck Demand Graph The Truck Demand Graph generates information on the number of trucks needed at specific dates and times It breaks down the number of trucks necessary to meet the delivery needs for confirmed weather permitting and will call orders and displays these in a graphical format The Truck Demand Graph is used to determine truck requirements and when to take new orders if dynamic scheduling is not being used You can specify the plant s order type s and shipment date on which you want to report The Tracking and Scheduling screen provides a real time demand graph If you have a license for Tracking and Scheduling you may not need the Truck Demand Graph COMMAND concrete Reports 287 Truck Demand Graph Selections SELTRKG 2 Truck Demand Graph Selections Shipment Date m 02 06 2008 Wednesday Order Types sl All Plant Description 1 Birmingham Plant Hoover Plant Bessemer Plant Alabaster Plant Trussville Plant amp Quarry Birmingham Quarry Hoover Quarry All C Print Plant Totals Report LH ICH Plant Loading Report The Plant Loading report shows plant loading demand in 15 minute intervals This information is used to determine if the plant is overloade
413. odel Once the print model is selected the system will generate a report showing the effect of the entered price changes At this point no prices have been changed This functionality allows the user to enter prices changes and review the results before making a final decision to apply the changes When the report has finished printing or if reviewing the report on screen when the report window is closed a confirmation box will display o Update applies the price changes o Cancel does not apply the price changes Many users will print the price change report and then cancel the process They then sit down and review the report making sure that the calculated price changes are acceptable If they decide to apply the changes the information can be re entered and the prices updated 312 Application Management Mix Design Interface QA The Mix Design Interface screen lets the user send mix product constituent information to a batching system After the selection parameters are entered the user is allowed to edit the list of products to be downloaded After the user is satisfied with the products to be downloaded accept the screen and the mix product information is downloaded to the batching system To use the Mix Design Interface L Go to the Mix Design Interface screen Manage gt Application Management gt Mix Design Interface Select a Mix Download Method from the drop down list Options are o Download from
414. oducts primarily admixtures are products that are linked associated with a specific mix on a specific order The mix file itself is not permanently changed This functionality has obvious advantages however users should be cautioned that when the ordered product is changed deleted or replaced the associated products are changed deleted or replaced along with the ordered product Such cases are particularly crucial when admixtures such as accelerators or retarders are included as associated products Extra Products vs Associated Products COMMANDeeries uses a pair of terms to distinguish different types of non mix items e Associated Products are items generally admixtures that are added directly into the mix Other types of items such as color or fiber can also be considered associated products They are added to an order through the Associated Product button for a specific ordered mix e Extra Products are any other items such as gloves expansion joints or rebar that are included on an order but do not go into the mix Extra Products are added to an order on the main order screen just like a mix Some items most notably additives like fiber or color if added manually can be classified as either extra products or associated products In such cases the key is consistency it 1s best to establish company guidelines to ensure accurate reports Order Entry 51 To add a product using the Associated Products butt
415. of days and shows the number and percentage of tickets that were on time Tickets with missing or invalid times are shown separately so that they don t skew the results The On Time Delivery report analyzes delivery records You specify acceptable margins for error on delivery times and the system calculates the percentage of orders that fall with those boundaries Because frequently there are small problems with the first delivery at a site the report provides one range for first loads and a second range for all subsequent loads When orders involve multiple plants they appear in printed reports only under the first relevant plant The order will not be printed under each of the involved plants On Time Delivery Report Selections SELONTM On Time Delivery Report Selections Time Analysis Reports Time Analysis Reports provide valuable management information on delivery efficiency for orders trucks drivers customers and projects Dispatch gt Time Analysis gt Time Analysis Reports COMMANDconcrete Reports 303 Time Analysis Report Selections SELTIMA 7 Time Analysis Report Selections EM Time analysis reports are only useful if the recorded ticket times are accurate Screens for editing ticket driver and truck times are available to allow final editing of the times before reports are printed Dispatch gt Time Analysis gt Ticket Driver Truck Times For each checkbox marked on the selection screen a sepa
416. of throwing an error For example if a maximum field length in the database is 40 characters and there are 45 characters worth of information in that field the last 5 characters will not go through the import process In addition the system will eliminate any leading spaces in fields so more information can go through the import process COMMANDeeries Order Ticket import processes have been updated to allow you to import multiple order and ticket files within the same directory without having to have separate ADIO records for each order and ticket file Exports can include the plant number and time in the file name which will make it easier for you to manage since there will be only one folder and one ADIO record for all plants Data Management 351 To configure an Automated Data In Out schedule 1 Open the Automated Date In Out screen Files gt Automated Data Transfers gt Automated Data In Out Automated Data In Out screen EDTADIO A Automated Data In Out Configuration 1 Description Short Ur Process Type x l Manager Number E Start Time End Time J Log Warings Errors amp Summary Info None zl Enter a Configuration code to identify the schedule The code can be up to three characters in length Detail on the field to select an existing configuration record code from the Automated Data In Out File Once selected this field is unavailable Enter a Description of the schedule Enter a Short descr
417. oicing clerks in others it falls to dispatchers It is for the latter group that these tools are included in the COMMAND concrete and COMMANDaggregate modules The title of this chapter refers to daily invoicing because it is most efficient to invoice on a daily basis By getting transactions through the system as quickly as possible you improve cash flow and quickly identify potential problems with orders and tickets from previous days The same procedures discussed in this section can also be used to invoice on a weekly or monthly basis When invoices are printed on a weekly or monthly cycle the general pattern is to reconcile update and review orders and tickets on a daily basis so that all orders are fully prepped when invoicing day arrives Topics in this section Reconciling Tickets Price Updates Update Costs amp Prices for Orders amp Tickets Calculate Unloading Charges Create Orders for Separate Invoices Price Review Invoice Print if licensed Post to Receivables if licensed Plant level Invoices for Cash Sales Process Overview This chapter is organized around a typical invoice cycle The standard invoicing process is as follows Reconciling Tickets 1 Runa Summary Ticket List to account for all tickets issued Price Updates 2 Update Cost and Prices for Orders and Tickets Daily Invoicing 229 3 Create Unloading Charges if applicable 4 Create Orders for Separate Invoices if applica
418. old This document will take you through all steps needed to associate rebates and royalties with specific items as well as what to do in the order entry process Configuration The Configuration gt System tab has been updated with fields used to determine whether or not rebates and or royalties should be applied If Disable is selected for either the Use Rebates or Use Royalties field none of the associated rebate or royalty fields or tabs will display on any screen If Enable is selected in these fields rebate and royalty fields will display on all associated screens Rebates and Royalties Configuration System Tab EDTCNEX Holcim General 041 10G Noaudts l cr Metric Do Not Convert Vv Use Standard Pricing J ER Disable 2 Workflow When Enabled is selected for Use Rebates and Use Royalties on the Configuration gt System tab the following information should be entered in COMMANDeseries Contact Type Codes Item Editor Jobs Quotes Projects gt Products Tab Ticketing Update Costs amp Prices for Orders amp Tickets Contact Type Codes To begin setting up rebates royalties create some Contact Types that have Rebates and Royalties selected in the System Type field on the Contact Type Codes editor Files gt General Information gt Contacts gt Contact Types See the below example Contact Type Codes EDTCTTY iy Contact Type Codes ROAD AUTHORITY REBATE CONTA
419. omer amp Project Information gt Payment Forms Payment Forms EDTPMTF EB Payment Forms Be ES Code Description Short Payment Method Direct Deposit fi Charge CHARGE Charge l alal j2 Cash CASH Cash z No d E Cheque CHEQUE Check z Entry Rules_ 4 4 Credit Card JCRDCRD Credit Card Entry Rules Li 5 Debit Card JEFTPOS CreditCard Entry Bue Li E Direct Deposit DIRECT Cash No 7 al 2 Press F6 to add a new payment form 3 Enter the appropriate Code Description and Short description for the direct deposit 268 Cash Management 4 Select Cash for the Payment Method When Cash is selected the new Direct Deposit field will appear Cash is the only option you can select for direct deposit to work within COMMANDseries 5 Select Yes for Direct Deposit 6 Accept the form to save your changes Cash Reconciliation Once you have set up the direct deposit payment form you can begin applying direct deposits in Cash Management The Cash Reconciliation form has been updated to reflect direct deposits Cash Reconciliation DBACREC A Cash Reconciliation E Plant Code 10 Cash Credit Card R tion Date 15 Oct 8 Total on Hand Sequence Number D Less Payments Logged 0 00 1400 40 Payment Method All D Less Beginning Balance 0 00 Difference Over Under 0 00 1400 40 A Payment Unallocated Receipt Number Customer Transaction Type Amount Amount Status Notes 10136 Cash MRDODI Ca
420. on 1 Select the Associated Products button from the Order Line The Order Line Associated Products screen displays On the title bar of the screen you can see in parentheses the Item Code and Description of the mix with which the items displayed will be associated If Order level Mix Design is enabled the Associated Products button on the main Orders screen becomes the Mix Design button Order Line Associated Products EDTORDR6 7 Order Line Associated Products 2500 2500 3 4 3 8 Item Code Description Order Qty Trim gt 54 ACC us gt 1 ds 100 000 Ord cem mtl Dsg 1 oz Pre mix qty Other dl 2 Select the Item Code representing the product you wish to associate The Description and Price default from the product file may be edited 3 Enter the Order Quantity for the associated product Detailing allows changing the products unit of measure Enter a Trim Percentage if necessary 5 Select the Other button if you would like to alter any of the product information for the associated product 6 Ifyou would like to associate more than one product with the ordered product use the Insert Occurrence button and repeat Steps 2 4 When you have associated all necessary products accept the Order Line Associated Products screen to save these products in association with the ordered product When you return to the primary order screen the Associated products A button will be ill
421. on gt Users gt Users 5 Select Allow Access to Order Level Mix Design to let a given user use the feature Warning If you use Order level Mix Design you must ensure that anyone authorized to enter order level mix designs is qualified to do so as the design might not be reviewed prior to shipment Please refer to the Setting up the System manual for additional information on configuring these two flags Once the system has been set up for order level mix design you are ready to edit a mix from the Order Entry screen To perform order level mix design 1 Open the Order Entry screen and create an order as normal 2 When the system is set up for order level mix design the Associated Products button on the main Order Entry screen becomes the Mix Design button Order Level Mix Design Order screen Item Code Description Price Order Oty Load Oty Dely Oty Slump 25466 2500 3 41 6 30 00 cy i Scheduling Other Mit Desin d 3 After entering a mix and an Order Quantity press the Mix Design button 4 The Order Line Mix Design screen displays The screen title bar will also show the selected mix o Ifyou are licensed for the Technical Quotation System TQS and use it to create a mix opening the Order Line Mix Design screen will only let you view the mix details you cannot edit them Order Line Mix Design screen EDTORDRP 402 Appendix C Order Level Mix Design Order Line Mix Design screen EDTORDRP
422. on your PDA e At the end of the day import your Web PDA tickets back to COMMANDeeries using Order and Ticket Data In Order Types The Order Types screen has been updated with a new column Web PDA Select this option for any order type you wish to designate as one that can be used on your PDA Additionally you can create a new order type specifically for Web and PDA orders as shown below 170 Web PDA Tickets and Orders for Trowel Ready Mortar Order Types screen EDTCFOT gq 3 Order Types ioe Lomm Loan omn o a KKKKKKKK Configuration Before you begin to download orders and tickets to your PDA set a specific remove reason code for PDA tickets on the Configuration gt Defaults tab This reason code will be used for all tickets that are removed on your PDA Configuration gt Defaults tab EDTCNEXB Warn User and Continue Dro DELTOORG DTT JDELTOTEMP cm Web PDA Tickets and Orders for Trowel Ready Mortar 171 The COMMANDIog Interface Logging In Go to the COMMANDIog Logon screen on your PDA and enter your COMMAND Web Service Username and Password as well as the URL for the Server you are connecting to Once logged in CS will interface with the COMMAND Web Services application COMM username Password Enter usemame and password Server http ebatch beooksey COMMANDwebsvc Note The image example above and for all other image examples may not refle
423. oncrete Item or Family for the Week based on 1 Production Week Equals x days o Determine Quantity Produced and number of Samples recorded o Ifthe Minimum Samples Per Week has not been met request a sample If the Minimum Samples Per Week has been met that is if Actual Production Volume Number of Samples Taken for the Week lt Sample per m3 Produced request a sample Minimum Per Month O O Retrieve Tickets for the Concrete Item or Family for the Calendar Month Determine Quantity Produced and number of Samples recorded If the Minimum Samples Per Month has not been met request a sample If the Minimum Samples Per Month has been met that is if Actual Production Volume Number of Samples Taken for the Month lt Sample per m3 Produced request a sample Minimum Per Year OO O Retrieve Tickets for the Concrete Item or Family for the Calendar Year Determine Quantity Produced and number of Samples recorded If the Samples Per Year Minimum has not been met request a sample If the Samples Per Year Minimum has been met that is if Actual Production Volume Number of Samples Taken for the Year lt Sample per m3 Produced request a sample Operations Importing Test Plans The Master File Data In routine supports the following import types Testing Methods Testing Methods Translations Testing Families Testing Families Translations Testing Families Methods Item Location Testing Method
424. oncrete Testing Families sssicnsdcnvcancnaccasaacnasadtaadsarsegnaseadandnesadaeaiabnonds 116 Item Testing MethodS sssssserusssssrurnrneresesneresasnananannananunnnnnrereseerene 117 USES Ee eg 118 S lection LOgiC eenegen E E EN E Eet 118 Operations EE 120 Importing Test D EE 120 Order Entry amp Ticketing EEN 121 Rebates and Royalties eeneg ERR EEER EE EEEAERe 124 COMfIJUrATION EE 124 tele ccshrsneviceshviaene sedennas a a a a ote cima a A 125 Contact Typ CodeS Z2atginater aen Ae Ehe ea E a iaaii 125 Item EdItOT EE 126 Jobs Quotes Projects gt Products Tab ENEE 127 TICKETING cernita oni EEE ATN ERNE EI eege 129 Update Costs amp Prices for Orders amp Tickets cceccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaes 130 Te eil d e MEET 130 LU d d It rnanca teaa a a a a a a EEEa 133 le e E EE 135 Ticketing Load Size LOG Nees Egeter NEE NEEN RENE EEkE N E EEN ENEE 138 Reprinting Tickets ET 138 Canceling TICKEtS keigaesk daee beet Nee RAR 139 Ticketing With Prebatched Material NENNEN NENNEN 140 Maximum Gross Tr ck EINEN Ee EEN EE 141 Proof of Delivery suujipsdhausasnsuanbaniaensasidaadsandsumsatansnnederisea RAKOEN 142 Process Goods Ee NEE 142 Unscanned Hauler Tickets Report NENNEN EEN 142 Print Certification Text on Delivery Notes NENNEN NEE 142 CSP CING SION E 143 Configuratio ee EE ge Eh 145 BEML PIC EE 148 Greek Cancelled Ticket Print ssssussssesessssessssenensnnsnnnnnnnnnnenrorenessesesensane 150 Next Numbers
425. onflict with an existing order code When you tab out of the Order Code field the header will turn gray indicating that it is no longer available The rest of the form will activate Steps 4 11 refer to creating a new order rather than editing an existing one Edit Orders and Tickets 207 Edit Orders amp Tickets EDTPREP re Edit Orders and Tickets Ps E3 Order Date Z 2008 Veckez ea Order Code sate Al tem Group Ger Biling Customer 1007 mmer stomet Haul j Proiect Code X Al Order Type JREGULAR SALE AS zi lf f Payment Fom 3j CASH zi Customer dob E Zone Cade ER ltem Cade Gider Gty Prine Oty bara sa pee Cen M3 e do M3 1000 aj No Pricing Record Found J _ Assoc Prods moe vd Bal Price Dy Pre tax Mau Tax Total 16 00 M3 2 00 640 13 00 263 00 Tickets f 4 Entera or detail on the field to access the lookup screen Once a is selected the code and the corresponding Customer Name are populated on the form The Customer Name can be only be edited for COD orders 5 After the customer is selected the system checks for the existence of projects for that customer If any are found the cursor moves to the Project Code field Enter a valid project code or detail on the field to select from a list of projects for that customer When the cursor leaves the Project Code field the system begins a basic credit check o Ifa project is present the system checks the credit code of the project o Ifno project is present
426. ons tab a new checkbox Print Tickets to SAP has been added When this field is selected a Setup button displays Press this button to open the SAP Communication Setup screen SAP Communication Setup screen EDTPLNTO Main Communication Batching Scheduling Costs Plants Scales Bins Constituent Order Device lippe No Output 7 M Print Tickets to SER Setu Rint Dispatch Eopy zy SAP Communication Setup Es SAP Webservice URL Allow Order Printing M Allow Report Printing Uolcad olor Design Fram eolo Wispenser lntertace With Each Ticket To enable the interface enter the appropriate SAP Webservice URL Operations Ticket Creation 1 A ticket is created in COMMANDcseries Ticket information is sent via XML to SAP Webservice Ticket send will be acknowledged Ticket will receive an SAP generated control number This field will be stored against the Ticket record in COMMANDseries ON 418 Appendix F SAP On line Ticket Interface Ticket Removal jaj kk ob A Ticket is removed in COMMANDeseries Ticket information is sent via XML to SAP Webservice Ticket removal will be acknowledged by SAP Ticket will keep the SAP generated control number Ticket Reactivation 1 N 3 4 A Ticket is reactivated in COMMANDseries Ticket information is sent via XML to SAP Webservice Ticket reactivation will be acknowledged by SAP Ticket will keep the previously
427. options by selecting the field and choosing another field from the drop down list 2 The next field determines how you wish to search through that field The options are o Begins as Looks at the beginning of each field entry for the specified search string This is most useful for searching for names as opposed to numbers o Range of Similar to Begins as but provides a second field for a search string which allows for broader searches o Contains The system looks through the entire field for the search string as opposed to just the beginning 3 In the field to the right enter the search string If Range of is the search option there will be two fields in which to specify the range 4 Ifyou wish to specify more search criteria press the Add Occurrence button and then place your cursor in the next field to the right of the number 2 If not accept the screen and proceed to step 6 5 You can specify up to 10 criteria When you are finished accept the data you have selected 6 The Choices screen will display the customers that match your criteria 7 When you have located the customer either double click or highlight the desired customer and press lt Enter gt to accept The Choices screen will close and the selected customer code will be entered into the form How to Use This Document 23 NET Fndcode A NEI version of FNDCODE the COMMANDeseries lookup utility is now available This new utility provides addit
428. or importation Enter the location of the import file s in the Input File Location field or detail on the field to specify the location The Import Array Size field determines how many records the system attempts to load at a single time This specifies in effect how much of the import file the system bites off at a time The default of 1000 lets the system process large files quickly and efficiently However the drawback of the large array size is that if the system encounters an error in processing an import array the entire array is discarded and the system moves to the next chunk of data If you are consistently encountering errors while importing data reduce the size of the array The reduction will not only ensure that more of the data is imported but it will help you identify the record that is causing the problem Select the Check Date Bounds on Imported Records checkbox if the data being imported was generated on a pre Y2K system The system will check for invalid data records and give you the option of correcting the date entries during the import process Check the Show Selected Only checkbox to restrict the tables being displayed to the left to only those tables that have been selected Accept the screen to begin the import process A progress bar will indicate the system s progress Export Data COMMANDeseries lets you export data files The export files are text files that conform to COMMANDeseries standards As
429. ordered quantity of the item specified in the Item Code field The customer can change the Order Quantity the day it is being delivered If the customer decreases the ordered quantity or stops delivery before the ordered quantity is reached it is advisable to keep this field at the original quantity ordered This strategy lets you analyze whether this customer over orders on a regular basis Instead of decreasing the ordered quantity change the Order Status field to Completed This strategy will cause any undelivered loads to be removed from the Truck Tracking function screen Delv Quantity is the current total ticketed quantity of the product specified in the Item Code field using the same unit of measure as the Order Quantity field Delivered Quantity cannot be edited through the Order Entry screen The Price is a default value associated with the item code the project or the customer The field is grayed out and cannot be edited unless the Allow Price Change in O E Order Entry 45 10 11 12 13 14 15 checkbox on the Pricing tab of the Projects screen Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects is checked The Ext Price field displays the total price i e the order quantity multiplied by the price of the order item This field can also be edited The Slump value defaults from the item file although it may be edited at this time Pressing the H button opens the Order Line Cartage Charge Inf
430. orking orders into the schedule later in the day when most of your fleet is already committed to other orders Round Trip o Enter a Truck Spacing in minutes The Unload Time value will default to this time The Delivery Rate per Hour and Trucks Required fields will be calculated but grayed out Tab to the Rate Type field and change it to Round Trip o The Trucks Required field will activate no longer be gray and allow changes to be made Enter the number of trucks that you wish to use for this schedule o Select the Loads button and enter the truck numbers you wish to recycle on this job or use the Options menu to enter this data o The system will base the schedule on the premise of one truck round tripping on the order until it has been completely delivered Order Entry 49 10 If you are going to ticket the order fron this screen enter a Truck Code or detail on the field to select from a list 11 Ifthe truck has an assigned Hauler it will default 12 For additional scheduling options press the Schedule Loads button The button opens the Order Line Schedule Information screen which provides more advanced scheduling options see Scheduling an Order 13 To enter an additional primary product on the order press the tab 14 Once you have finished entering order and schedule information you have three options o To ticket the order directly press the Ticketing button Depending on the system and customer configuratio
431. ormation screen This lets you add cartage charge information for this particular item on the current order Order Line Cartage Charge Information EDTORDR7 D Order Line Cartage Charge Information C30 C3007 Pressing the O button opens the Other Order Line Information screen See Other Order Line Information for more details Pressing the I button opens the Item Inquiry screen This screen lets you view the inventory for a particular plant with regard to the current item Inventory must be in your system license in order to view this screen Item Inquiry Screen EDTLCIN7 z 1J Item Inquiry Pressing the A button opens the Order Line Associated Products screen See Associated Products for more details With the appropriate settings this may be an M button See Order Level Mix Design on page 87 for more information If the item that has been ordered is a project product the C button displays This button opens the Calculation Project screen Entering Schedule Information Schedule information can be entered on each product tab 46 Order Entry EDTCORDTAB Schedule detail 2500 105000 Item Code Description Sp Order Oty Dalv Qty Price Ext Price ficsoor0 S STT NOM PUMP CONCRETE als Wo 40 w fos M3 Blous KZ Must Schedule Plant Fish Stat Tt Ty Travel Times Spacing Unload Distance Load Qty Load Loads shie T fioo fis 32 f 30 f 100 f 100 2500 km f ME i Ticket Schedule RateType Mirs
432. ou can generate this report to include a desired range of shipment dates shipment plants and companies In addition you can print the report with hourly detail which illustrates the amount of each product that must be produced at each plant to fill the orders for the day s on the report Raw Materials Requirements Report SELMATR D Raw Material Requirements Report Selections COMMAND concrete Reports 299 Batching Comparison Report The Batching Comparison report shows the COMMAND concrete target batch quantity the batching unit s actual quantity and if an Eagle unit is being used the Eagle s target quantity The report also displays the variance of these quantities The Batching Comparison report is used for QC purposes as well as for the projection of raw material requirements This report will only provide useful data if you have a two way batch interface which allows individual ticket weights to be uploaded to COMMANDeseries If a two way interface is not present the report will only show target weights based on mix design The report includes a summary level at the bottom that lists the constituent materials and summarizes the actual and target weights used for each product used in the selected time period The summary level is generated when the report has been requested with only the plant code and date ranges selected as input parameters Deviations in the batched weights compared to the actual weights are shown in
433. ou have entered the specific report information the Possible Print Models screen displays This lists the output methods available with which to generate the report Print models are defined using the Print Models editor in the System menu 3 There are four ways to generate reports from the Possible Print Models screen o Printer Lets you choose a specific printer for a hard copy printout of the report o Report to Screen Lets you view the report on the screen rather than print a hardcopy o Report to File Automatically saves the report into a WINDOWS TEMP directory o Report to WordPad Lets you create a text file and save in txt form in WordPad for editing and other purposes 4 Select a printer using the scrollable list The system knows the formatting and printing requirements your report so only appropriate print models will be listed Check the Save Report File After Printing checkbox to save the report to disk for later printing or viewing Highlight the print model and accept the screen COMMAND concrete Reports Possible Print Models FNDUPRT 7 Possible Print Models EY 5 After you select an available printer the standard Windows print dialog box appears Press OK to print the report Print Setup amp Print Microsoft Office Document Image Writer lt ia Lil Status Ready CI Print to file Location 4th Floor Accounting z Adobe PDF E G Comment Savin 4060 Printer Copier 4th Floor
434. ou will then be able to select a different order Repeat this process until all the necessary orders have been added to your journey 14 Accept the journey Editing an Existing Journey Once a journey has been created it may be necessary to re order add or remove orders To edit a journey 1 Open the Journey Editor Dispatch gt Journey Editor 2 Enter the Journey Date and the Plant Code from which the order is to be shipped 3 Detail on the Journey Code field and select a journey Journey screen EDTJOUR Edit journey sequence D Journey l E Joumey Date 12 Jan 2008 Plant Code 252 Joumey Code 250000 Truck Code Order Date Onder Code Item Code Load Qty Sequence 12Jan 2008 250002 Jm C25 C30 500 M3 2 12Jan 2008 250003 im X C25 C30 500 M3 H 4 The screen is populated with journey information You can now edit the Load Quantity and Sequence entries as required 5 You can also add new stops orders to the journey by tabbing onto the next line or pressing lt F6 gt 6 Accept the changes Ticketing a Journey Once you have created a journey you must ticket each of the orders on that journey COMMANDeeries provides a convenient way to do this all at once To ticket a journey 1 Open the Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping screen Dispatch gt Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping 2 The Order Date defaults to the current date If necessary you can change this once the plant code field has been co
435. ough buttons All items and their admixtures are displayed on this single screen The screen is also structured to display customer and delivery information more logically Order Entry 61 To use the Simplified Orders screen as the default order entry screen mark the Simplified Orders checkbox on the Preferences screen Misc gt Preferences To switch from Simplified Orders to regular Orders and vice versa select Switch Order Forms from the Options menu e Switching between forms is only allowed when the form is empty Once order data has been entered the system will not switch order forms e The Simplified Orders screen does not have any Detail buttons Double click any field to view a list of choices if any are available To enter an order using simplified order entry 1 Go to the Simplified Orders screen Dispatch gt Orders gt Options gt Switch Order Forms Simplified Orders EDTSORD 2 Enter an Order Date or tab through for the current day 3 Do not enter an Order Code unless the order is already in the system For a new order Tab through this field and an order number automatically assigns according to Next Number settings 4 Press lt Enter gt type a Customer Code or double click on the field The Customer Name and related information defaults from the customer file After the customer code is entered the system automatically checks for the existence of customer projects If any are found the cursor mov
436. ownloaded to the batching system To use the Mix Design Interface 1 Go to the Mix Design Interface screen Manage gt Application Management gt Mix Design Interface 2 Select a Mix Download Method from the drop down list Options are o Download from Item Master o Download from Order o Upload to Orders 3 Select an Output to option from the drop down list The options are o Batch Panel Output o File Output This field will not be available if the selected Mix Download Method is Upload to Orders 4 If File Output is selected enter an Output File and select a Document Format Group 5 Enter a range of values for Item Code Plant Code and Item Category 6 Inthe Mixes with Constituent field enter a constituent item code to be used when retrieving mix items If entered only mix items that contain the specified constituent item will be retrieved and sent to the batching system 7 Ifyou wish to delete all mixes from the batch panel at one or more plants mark the Clear Mix Files checkbox for the specific plants WARNING This function is very dangerous Selecting this checkbox instructs the system to delete all mixes from the batching system and they are NOT retrievable 8 Click Retrieve This will save the products for downloading 9 Accept the Mix Downloads screen to send the mix product constituent information to the batching system or to an output file 404 Appendix C Order Level Mix Design Ticketing
437. pages are provided at the end of the report Sales Tax and Suspended Orders Tickets To run the Preliminary Summary Invoice Register follow the steps outlined for Printing a Preliminary Detail Invoice Register on page 193 but select Preliminary Summary Invoice Register as the Report Type The summary register takes about as long to generate as the detail register All of the individual orders must still be processed Transfer Orders Register Transfer orders are not invoiced and therefore do not show up on the Preliminary Invoice Register Nevertheless you will need a report that provides detailed information on transfer orders to ensure that your records are accurate To print a Transfer Orders Register report 1 Go to the Transfer Orders Register Selections screen Invoicing gt Transfer Orders Register Preliminary Invoice Register 195 Transfer Orders Register Selections SELTROR iy Transfer Orders Register Selections ES Report Name J e Report Type Detail X J zl Report Sequence Order Code Product Line fAlOrders J Order Type sl A Order Date at thu Billing Customer sf thu Company xT thru Pricing Plant Code ER thru Save Settings on Accept If you want to create a custom report configuration to be used on a regular basis enter a Report Name and mark the Save Settings on Accept checkbox at the bottom of the screen Once the report has been configured and accepted it
438. pdate Roster List The structure of the roster table was changed in V5 51 to enable using the roster to dispatch past midnight This routine reformats the changed fields No user input is required Update Schedule Load Size Flag The Schedule Load Size feature was initially implemented in V5 51 In V5 52 we changed the way the flag was stored This routine updates the flag to the new format The functionality of the feature is not changed in any way Once this option is selected no user input is required Update Allow Price Change Flag for COD Customers Projects In previous versions of COMMANDeseries the ability to edit item prices for COD Customers or Projects at the Order level was strictly a function of the Customer Project Credit Type if it was COD the price fields were available V5 53 has enabled field level security for all pricing fields As a result of this new functionality prices on a COD order will not be available unless the Allow Price Change in O E flag in the Customer Project Pricing tab is selected This routine reads through all Customer and Project files finds all records that have a Credit Type of Cash Only and checks the Allow Price Change flag No user input is required If this update is run Update Blank Default Order Types in Projects must also be run at the same time Convert PRJC for Upgrade from V5 57 and Earlier The PRJC table was restructured to enable key indexing This routine updates the table stru
439. pecial removed status this functionality lets you reactivate the order at any time e If the order has had any tickets generated against it it cannot be removed unless all current tickets have been removed e Cash orders and tickets that have a reconciled cash receipt attached cannot be removed To remove an order 1 From the Order Entry screen open an existing order 2 Select the Remove button from the toolbar or press lt Shift F5 gt Remove Button File Edit Options Help se D A Mi Select the Remove button to put the order into removed status 3 Select Yes when prompted for a confirmation to remove the order 4 Before the order can be removed a Reason Code must be supplied for its removal Reason codes are entered on the Reason Codes editor Files gt General Information gt Reason Codes Reactivating Orders A removed order can be easily reactivated Bring up the Order Entry screen and enter the removed order s order date and order code A dialog box will tell you that the order has been cancelled and ask if you wish to edit it as an active order Select Yes and accept the screen to reactivate the order When looking at an order listing removed orders will be marked with a dash Copying and Moving Orders COMMANDeeries allows orders to be duplicated or moved to another day Moving an order is useful when a customer changes his or her order needs Duplicating orders is extremely u
440. plant scale has been selected select the plant printer to be used from the drop down list 6 Ifthe selected plant is configured for plant and or dispatch copies corresponding checkboxes will display defaulting as checked Adjust if necessary 7 Accept the screen to reprint the ticket s Display Individual Ticket This toggle switch controls how tickets are presented on the Edit Ticket Information screen If this option is selected the Edit Ticket Information screen will display a single ticket at a time Single Ticket Display EDTPREP6 D Edit Ticket Information 29 Nov 2007 720001 Thomas Guy Quarry All products are displayed on the main form additional information remains under buttons Selecting this option does not result in a permanent display change If the current order is closed and reopened the Edit Ticket Information screen will revert to the multi ticket format Note Individual Ticket Display is not available for aggregate orders 226 Edit Orders and Tickets Display Taxes The Display Taxes functions provides a convenient means of reviewing the sales tax charged on a particular order Taxes cannot be adjusted on this screen To display order tax information 1 Retrieve the order in Edit Orders and Tickets 2 Select the Display Taxes option Options gt Display Taxes Order Sales Tax Distribution EDTPREPK Order Sales Tax Distribution The screen provides totals by Tax Authority Locatio
441. plays orders scheduled from the plant selected in step 3 A different plant can be manually selected if required The Journey Status displayed at the bottom of the screen now displays as Created The journey status messages that you may see here are as follows o Created The journey has been created but not ticketed o Ticketed The journey has been created and ticketed o Removed The journey has been cancelled o Added during Shipping The journey was created at the time of ticketing rather than through the Journey Editor If there is more than one product on the order the Item Code field becomes active Select the item that you wish to include in the journey If the order you selected contained only one item the order date order code and item code fields are greyed out and read only The Load Quantity and Sequence fields then become active Enter any Sequence information as necessary The entries must be sequential numbers between one and the number of stops on the journey The number represents the order in which the stops of the journey will take place Accepting the Journey screen with no sequence entries causes the sequence to be saved in the order that the stops were added 106 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools Journey screen EDTJOUR D Journey olx oumey Date 12 Jan 2008 Plant Code 252 Birsfelden LP1 ourney Code AUTO ASSIGN Truck Code Order Date Order Code teen Code Load Oty Sequence 12 Jan 2009 SGN
442. ple the Material Manager uses a number of views in building the data on different tabs e Create Database Stored Procedures Databases use stored procedures to handle data processing routines Rather than use generic routines programs can create customized procedures to match the needs of a particular version and or database This routine will generate the stored procedures for your version database e Analyze Required Tables Oracle only COMMANDseries maintains a number of database indexes that are used to speed data retrieval Similarly the Oracle database Data Management 361 engine maintains metadata on each database schema The metadata is roughly equivalent to a library s catalog recording the tables organization and number of tables This information is used by Oracle to optimize all database access functions As the database grows and changes over time the metadata becomes outdated which can have an adverse affect on database performance To run the automatic updates manually 1 Open the Database Updates screen Manage gt Data Management gt Database Updates 2 Select the desired automatic updates 3 Accept the screen to begin the updates Manual Database Updates The manual updates fall into two general categories Updates These options modify the database to incorporate new functionality Unlike the automatic updates which update the database structure these updates modify the contents of the data
443. plicate item codes in the Item Master file it does allow for duplicate codes in project and standing order files Some users take advantage of this feature by using multiple entries to better track mix usage This routine will clean project and standing order records eliminating duplicate product entries When duplicate entries are found the first occurrence is retained while all others are deleted When the menu option is selected you are prompted to select what records you want to clean DBADUPL m Remove Duplicate Products E3 Simply select the options you want and accept the screen You will be prompted for confirmation Confirm the deletion COMMANDconcrete Q The selected records will be cleaned Move Project Balances DBAMVPB W Move Project Balances ahoo ah bh d el This update is for a specific customer and cannot be run by another customer Data Management Repost Sales Tax Data Sometimes sales tax data does not post properly When this happens you can use this routine to repost just the sales tax portion of a batch When the routine runs you will be prompted for a date range DBARPST W Re Post Sales Tax Data x Date Range In Je 2001 thu m 30 Aug 2001 The routine will repost sales tax data for all batches with batch dates that fall within the specified range Create TKTX record for ticket without any TKTX record In some cases Ticket Tax records are
444. ply cartage rates to hauler flag Aggregate apply excess unloading charges flag Aggregate apply minimum haul charge flag Aggregate apply minimum load charge flag Aggregate apply seasonal charges flag Aggregate apply sundry charge flag Aggregate apply surcharge rate to hauler flag Aggregate apply zone charge flag Aggregate auto sundry charge separate invoice fl Aggregate cartage code Aggregate cartage rate Column Name The drop down box allows you to specify a field from the primary lookup table On a customer lookup for example you can filter on any field in the CUST table Filter Allows you to select a filter type e Begin As e Contains e Range Of e Equal to From Enter your search string If your Filter is Range Of the To field will be active Once you ve entered the column criterion Add the operator to the search window at the bottom When your search is complete accept the screen To establish a default search setup open the Options menu and select Save Settings before accepting the screen To close the screen without performing a search retaining the existing lookup results select Exit from the Options menu or simply X out of the screen Columns The columns option allows you to specify the columns to be displayed 26 How to Use This Document Columns ICAT Item Category File ltem category Description Short description ltem type CRY1 CRY1 Chi Other Product 13 1 Concrete
445. ppendix B Credit Checking Payment Form Selection EDTSLPF 7 Payment Form Selection Charge Only The system will simply proceed with the standard order entry process The order will be invoiced under regular business practices If the credit code is flagged to Display Credit Code Description the description will appear in a dialog box Cash or Charge The Payment Form Selection screen will display allowing selection of payment method No Sale The Credit Code Description will be displayed in a dialog box No orders can be entered for a customer with such a credit code Warning screens pop up when specific situations occur in order entry Depending on how credit is set up for individual customers different types of warning screens appear Remember whether or not warning screens appear depends on how the customer s credit code and credit type is set up in the customer file You may want to create multiple No Sale credit codes to cover different situations For example Appendix B Credit Checking 393 e No Sale Contact Credit Manager e No Sale Customer Account is Retired When using this credit method it s important to understand that the system doesn t pay any attention to the customer balance all that matters is the credit type of the customer s assigned credit code Credit Checking licensed feature Full Credit Checking is a licensed option in COMMANDeseries This feature will actively r
446. process every order should have been checked and every product should be priced but before printing invoices it s a good idea to make one last check to make sure that everything at least has a price on it Run an Exception Items Only report configured to look only for zero priced products as shown below For more information on Exception Reports see Printing an Exceptions Report on page 192 Entering a Suspend Reason Code for Exception Orders suspends all the orders that are flagged as exceptions Preliminary Invoice Register Selections screens for Zero Priced Items Only Report If all items have a price then when this report is run the system will return with the message No Records to Process COMMANDseries If this message is displayed all orders in the specified range have a price If the system does generate a report edit the orders listed in the report to ensure that all products are priced 238 Daily Invoicing Invoice Print if licensed Preliminary Detail Invoice Register At this point in the process this report may have already been run multiple times but no matter how many times this report or its counterpart the Priced Orders Report has been run it should be run one last time immediately prior to invoicing This last register will serve as a balancing benchmark after invoicing the results will be compared to the Final Invoice Register If the two reports balance then it is unlik
447. r in some cases by completely replacing one constituent with another The Materials Manager gives you an efficient means of making these changes across multiple mixes and locations To begin the process enter the desired selection criteria on the Materials Manager screen and press Get Data The mixes listed on the screen will be the mixes affected by the Item Replacement routine Retrieved Mixes Mixes Aggregates Cements Admixes ___ Waters l ltem Replacement i Item Code Description UOM Target W C Strength Notes jelectes 2500 2500 3 4 3 8 cy 44 2500 00 d Je 2501 2500 1 2 3 8 cy Now select the Item Replacement tab The system will display an error message if you select the Item Replacement tab before retrieving a list of mixes Once the Item Replacement tab is selected two fields will become active in the top part of the screen 328 Materials Manager Material Manager screen EDTMTMG6 E Joch Dante Location U S Customary Replace a constituent with a different constituent nal Adista Ajustat Zelle Cornstitsant 5 lt Rapa i i i i Ajustas e The Addition Adjustment Replacement Options drop down box allows you to select the specific modification you wish to make The available options are Replace a constituent with a different constituent Replace part of a constituent by percentage Adjust a constituent by an amount or percent Add a constituent by an amount Replace part of a const
448. r Family for the calendar year o Determine number of samples recorded o Ifthe Maximum Samples Per Year has been met exit routine No Sample Needed o Ifthe Maximum Samples Per Year is Null or Zero proceed to next step e Maximum Per Month o Retrieve tickets for the Item or Family for the calendar month o Determine number of Samples recorded o Ifthe Maximum Samples Per Month has been met exit routine No Sample Needed e Maximum Per Week o Retrieve Tickets for the Item or Family for the Week based on 1 Production Week Equals x days o Determine number of Samples recorded o Ifthe Samples Per Week Maximum has been met exit routine No Sample Needed e Maximum Per Day o Retrieve Tickets for the Concrete Item or Family for the Day based on 1 Production Day Equals x m3 o Determine number of Samples recorded o Ifthe Maximum Samples Per Day has been met exit routine No Sample Needed e Minimum Per Day o Retrieve Tickets for the Concrete Item or Family for the Day based on 1 Production Day Equals x m3 Sampling amp Testing Plan 119 o Determine Quantity Produced and number of Samples recorded o Ifthe Minimum Samples Per Day has not been met request a sample o Ifthe Minimum Samples Per Day has been met that is if Actual Production Volume Number of Samples Taken for the Day lt Sample per m3 Produced request a sample Minimum Per Week O Retrieve Tickets for the C
449. r a note that a customer is not to be charged any minimum load charges you can configure the note so that whenever a dispatcher attempts to ticket a load for that customer the note automatically displays Similarly when an invoicing clerk brings up that order for review during ticket prep the note automatically displays as well In addition to the on screen display the Notes Listing function can provide you with a printed copy of Customer Notes filtered according to your selections Even though notes can be entered from a number of different modules the basic procedure is the same All fields on the form s will be described even those that do not pertain to an order level note To enter an order specific note 1 Retrieve a current order Customer Notes 273 2 Select the Notes button to the right of the Order Code If there are no current notes for the current order the Notes editor will display Customer Notes EDTCNOT1 iy Notes CZ ETUDE CU Um EI The header information is already entered Entered Date Time and Entered By If there are existing notes for the current customer the Choices screen appears For example if Notes are accessed from the order screen and there is an order related note for the customer the following displays Choices 3 Choices 274 Customer Notes To view an existing note double click on the Customer Code or highlight a note and select the Display button A viewing windo
450. r both COMMANDconcrete and COMMANDaggregate This report generates a list of tickets for a specified range It is a single line report that shows basic information about each ticket The report can be sorted by ticket code order code shipping plant code or a list of other selections i e order date ticket code hauler code etc The person s responsible for reconciling tickets varies from company to company Some companies have plant managers reconcile tickets for individual plants while some companies have billing clerks reconcile tickets Regardless of who does it the goal is the same to account for all printed tickets The following instructions are for COMMANDconcrete and COMMANDaggregate users If you use another dispatching program you must review the ticket information from your system to check the order and ticket information for any needed edits 230 Daily Invoicing To print a ticket report 1 Open the Ticket Report Selections screen in COMMANDconcrete or COMMANDaggregate Dispatch gt Dispatching Reports gt Ticket Report Ticket Report Selections SELTICK D Ticket Report Selections Report Sequence Die 5 Other Sequence sl COD order amount Order Date la thu 01711 2007 Ticket Code Eo peu Eo Order Code 8 theu Truck Code AR teu fe Plant Code sel 50 theu sor Company Code 001 theu foo Driver Code af 4 zje Order Types v Al M Print Weights TI Print Associated Products I Print Extra
451. r by clicking on its icon 72 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 2 Enter the measured amounts as prompted on the Volume Dimensions screen The system will calculate the needed volume 3 Accept the Volume Dimensions screen to return to the Volume Calculator screen The system will round the calculated quantity up to the next 0 25 unit 4 Ifyou have accessed the Calculator from the Order Entry screen accept the Volume Calculator screen The system will insert the rounded quantity into the Order Quantity field Updating Projects from Order Entry Project information is often incomplete or subject to change when a project is entered into COMMANDeseries As a result maintaining project records can substantially streamline the order entry process You can update project information during regular or standing order entry The following project information is updated Purchase Order Job Number Delivery Address Instructions Map Page and Zone Some or all of these fields are updated depending on which fields differ on the Project and Order screens If only the delivery address is different only the Delivery Address is updated in the project To perform this function the Allow Project Updates from Order Entry Tickets checkbox on the User editor must be selected Files gt System Information gt Users gt Options tab Users can still perform normal editing functions related to the user s privilege and the current screen If yo
452. r the customer s High Balance This is the highest balance a customer has accumulated It is updated by the COMMANDreceivables application when an invoice is posted to the customer s account and a new high balance is reached 5 Ifyou maintain credit by company i e your system is set up so that different companies have different credit codes a Salesman and Pricing Plant can also be defined This is also useful if two different companies use the same credit code but a different salesman and pricing plant Detail on the fields to select appropriate entries This information will then be used when creating orders If these fields are left blank you will be forced to enter them when entering an order If you do not maintain credit by company i e the company code is entered as the salesman and pricing plant fields can be left blank It is only possible to maintain credit by company if the Maintain Credit by Company flag on the Receivables tab of the Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration is checked and this must be done at the time of set up 6 Enter the Credit Person Assign this number to the employee who is responsible for credit matters with customers The selected employee must be contacted by Dispatch for credit authorization and the Exceed Limit Authorization Code Using the Credit Checking Function Once the credit codes and the customer files are updated Credit Checking begins to function
453. r the desired length of the account codes used in the system 4 Enter the New Account Code Length and New Sub Account Code Length for the length of the account and sub account codes used in the system 5 Entera New Company Code to replace an existing company code By default the system shows the existing company code 6 Enter a New Cost Center Code to replace an existing cost center code By default the system shows the existing cost center code Use the scroll bar to page through the list Application Management 317 7 Enter a New Account Code to replace an existing account code By default the system shows the existing account code Use the scroll bar to page through the list 8 Accept the Realign Accounts and Cost Centers screen Error Log Report The Error Log Report allows you to create a report that displays the details of the log file for a particular import To generate an error log report 1 Goto the Error Log Selections screen Manage gt Application Management gt Error Log Report Error Log Selections SELLOGT Error Log Selections x Transaction Date m 03 Dec 2007 Process Type D User Name Batch Number T Report Exceptions Only 2 Enter a date to Transaction Date 3 Select an option from the Process Type drop down list This list is populated with the names of files that have been imported 4 Enter the User Name of the person that performed the import On an Automated Da
454. rate report page is printed Order Analysis Report The Order Analysis report is used to analyze the level of service provided to customers and to examine the level of performance for filling orders Print it daily after status times have been edited The report shows a table of ticket times broken down by category along with the quantity of delivered product per hour Plant Analysis Report The Plant Analysis report gives information on ticket activity at the plant specified including delivered quantity and current truck status for each ticket Driver Analysis Report The Driver Analysis report analyzes each driver based on the time they spend in each delivery status calculating an efficiency rating based on productive time clock time You can see the total time spent between each delivery status for drivers their break time as well as the total clock time Analyze every driver who was on the clock by leaving the Driver Code field blank or analyze individual drivers time by entering that driver s code into the Driver Code field 304 COMMAND concrete Reports Select the Driver Truck Working Past Midnight checkbox to display all drivers and trucks that are working past midnight on the Missing Times Report This field will only display if Driver Analysis is the only report selected Select Show Expanded Startup Shutdown if your system has Optimization and you wish to get additional KPI data Summary Analysis Report The S
455. re out of tolerance on the Ticket Weights Confirmation screen Stored in the database as REQUIRE _NON_COMPL_RSN_CODE CNFB Plants Editor Now go to the Plants gt TQS tab A new Batch Confirm Options field has been added to this tab Select from one of the following options which will determine whether or not the Ticket Weights Confirmation screen displays as well as if the ticket is automatically printed 424 Appendix G Batch Confirmation and EU Link Enhancements Plants gt TQS tab EDTPLNTL Auto Pending Status Auto print no confirm Auto Print Yes e Disabled Ticket Weights Confirmation screen will not display e Yes No Only You will receive a message asking if you wish to have the Ticket Weights Confirmation screen display Allow Pending e Allow Pending Status e Auto Print No Confirm The ticket will be printed automatically without your needing to confirm the auto print e Auto Print Yes The ticket will be printed automatically Cannot be set if the Configuration s Batch Control Tolerance is set to Manual Items Editor The Items gt Batching tab has been updated to include new fields for the Tolerance Code TOLERANCE _CODE ILOC and the Sequence Code SEQUENCE_CODE ILOC The information you enter in these fields will be interfaced with COMMAND at the mix plant level Appendix G Batch Confirmation and EU Link Enhancements 425 Items gt Batching tab EDTIMSTD T
456. revent collisions between COMMANDeseries and the third party system reading writing these files a lock file e Leck must be used A lock file is simply a file that indicates that a particular table is currently in use COMMANDeseries contains logic to handle the creation of or search for this lock file When COMMANDeseries starts a Data In Out process it creates a lock file in the directory specified in the txt line in the files section of the cmdseries asn file If the third party system reading or writing these same files finds a lock file for the file to be read or written this file must be skipped If a locked file is not found it must create a corresponding lock file to indicate that is currently processing the file Third party systems must also remove the lock file s when the process is finished COMMANDeeries creates lock files with the naming convention CDIxxyyy LCK e xx is the function performed e DI DataIn e po Data Out e yyyy is the table being processed TICK tickets CUST customer etc Third party systems must be configured to create lock files named EXTxxyyy LCK where e xx is the COMMANDceeries function e DI Data In e DO Data Out e yyyy is the table being processed TICK tickets CUST customer etc When importing files using any Data In process manual or automated the system will truncate any information that is over the maximum field length specified in the database instead
457. rget Yield not Yield SSD to determine the volume of air in the mix Don t forget to enter a value for non air entrained mixes as some air is naturally entrapped during mixing Flowability This is a non functioning field and is scheduled to be removed frmo the form Job Water The difference between Max Water and the quantity of water in the mix used to show the amount of water to be added on the job site This value can be entered manually or it can be calculated when a Max Water value is entered Job Water does not represent an automatic holdback amount Holdbacks are controlled directly from the batch computer and the holdback amount should be subtracted from the Mix Water value In addition to the above fields totals by weight and volume are provided for coarse and fine aggregates In addition the percentage of coarse and fine aggregate weights in the ageregate weight total is also supplied Yield SSD displays the yield of the current design based on SSD Saturated Surface Dry values This field will be updated as constituents values are changed Using a Generic Mix Many companies face the problem of having plants that acquire their constituent inventory from different sources As a result one plant may have 4 aggregate with a specific gravity of 2 68 while another plant might have the same aggregate with a specific gravity of 2 74 The Materials Manager can accommodate these situations through the use of
458. riginal order will be copied to the new order To copy the order with no scheduling information select No 4 Enter the new Order Date and lt Tab gt through the Order Code field to apply the next order code 5 Ifyou are licensed for Credit Checking the credit status of the customer and project is checked when the cursor tabs past the Order Code field 6 Accept the Order Entry screen to save the new order When an order is copied or moved order information is revalidated based on the settings on the Configuration gt Copy Order Revalidation tab Full information on that tab can be found in the Setting up the System manual Order Types An Order type must be assigned to each order in COMMANDeseries This classification not only describes the order but also determines how the order is processed from dispatch to invoicing and inventory Order Types determine whether or not an order gets invoiced and what sort of inventory transaction is created This feature provides you with greater flexibility and efficiency in processing transactions To better classify sales transactions you can assign user defined descriptions to the order types that COMMANDeeries provides User defined order types are set up on the Order Types tab of the Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration For more information on setting up user defined order types please refer to the Setting Up the System manual The Order Types drop
459. rms Select the desired payment forms and accept the screen 7 Payment Forms to return to the main selections screen If you wish to save the configuration for later use select the Save Settings on Accept flag You must also have entered a Report Name at the top of the screen Accept the screen to generate the report 296 COMMAND concrete Reports Order Recap Report The Order Recap report is used to report orders that have been entered in the system This report shows which ticket was given to particular customers as well as who delivered the order You can report on orders and sort them by order code project code customer code or plant code You can also select from an additional list of sort selections such as order date order status etc The Order Recap report is used by the Dispatch Manager and or Billing Clerk to analyze a day s business This report generates a list of all the orders that have tickets printed on them for a specific date Use the sequence function of this report to show relevant information such as deleted non delivered orders which indicates prohibitive weather or job site delivery or availability problems To ensure that FOB orders that get ticketed to a truck are still reported as FOB orders the Order Recap Report determines whether an order is delivered or FOB Reports using the following rules e Delivered The delivery method is not blank and the delivery type is delivered e FOB
460. roject TQ Mix Test Strength Iz Batch Confirmation Disabled Cement Test Quality zz Aggregate Batch Tolerance Cement Rounding Factor D Cement Batch Tolerance T E Admix water Threshold o Water Batch Tolerance Batch Book Contents jitem D Admix Batch Tolerance J 4 Cement Optimization Automatic z WC Ratio Tolerance Default Consistence Code l Minimum Cement Tolerance Chloride Class Values o Maximum Cement Correction Ovemight Mortar Life Adjust Non Compliance Action wam Sulfate Percentage Limit km Batch Control Tolerance Manual z Pricing Method J x Non Compliance Suspend Reason Code JPH Code Formats Require Reason Code ves i e Non Compliance Action Select Warn to receive a message indicating that the ticket is not intolerance and is unacceptable you can accept the message and proceed or cancel and start over or Stop to receive a message indicating that the ticket is not intolerance and is unacceptable you can only cancel and start over You will not be allowed to continue e Batch Control Tolerance Specifies how the batch confirmation will be set Manual or Batch Control Stored in the database as BATCH_CONFIRMATION_SOURCE CNFB Suspend Reason Code Enter a reason code in this field that has a Reason Code Usage of Suspend Item Stored in the database as NON_COMPL_ SUSP_RSN_CODE CNFB e Require Reason Code Select Yes to indicate ifaMix Non Compliance Reason Code is required for loads that a
461. rom the batch computer this option will restack the ticket 1 2 Enter the Order Date and select the appropriate Order Code 3 From Order Entry press the Ticket button to open the Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping screen From the Edit Orders amp Tickets screen go to the next step 4 From the Options menu select Reprint Ticket s to open the Reprint Tickets screen The above graphic lists all form fields Some fields will not display depending on your selections 5 Ifthe screen was displaying an order that order date and code will be passed to the reprint screen If the screen was blank then enter the Order Date and Order Code associated with the ticket s to be reprinted 6 Select Print all Tickets on Order or specify a Ticket Code or range of codes 7 Ifthe Reprint Tickets screen has been called from Edit Orders and Tickets you may only Print to a standard local or network printer 8 Enter an appropriate Document Format or detail on the field to select from a list 9 Accept the screen to reprint the ticket s 138 Ticketing To reprint to a plant printer You can only print to a plant printer if the reprint screen is called from 1 Enter the Order Date Order Code and Ticket Code s as above 2 Select Plant Printer in the Print to drop down field The lower portion of the screen will activate 3 Specify a Plant Code The reprint ticket will be sent to that plant s default ticket printer 4
462. rrssnrrnne 201 Exception Suspension ME 201 Suspended Orders amp Tickets Report NEEN ENEE 201 Releasing Suspended Orders amp TicketS ssssssrrnssrrrrrrsrrrnrrrrrenrrrsrrnnrrrne 202 Editing Suspended Tickets on Invoiced OrderS s ssssssssrsrrrensnrrrrrssrrnrrrnns 203 Edit Orders and Tickets sisssiicisisistsstsenettacateacsnusiecstansteseseriersnnmnees 205 Edit Orders and Tickets Screen ous SEENEN SEENEN NENESKEEN EE AAR EEE ENKE EE dE ER 205 General Order amp Ticket Prep NENNEN EEN 206 Order Pricing Information eene AE EEN ee EEN geed dE 209 Other Order Information Zen e eege Eeer Eege EEN EENS 211 Order Haul Information seismasrurcraar tn a T Ee Doren 212 Editing WA EEN 213 Removing ET E 217 Removing Editing CNarg s resonis ENN Ode dE dite NEEN 218 Credit amp Debit MEMOS Zeg ge geed eege e 220 Credit Et e EE 220 Debit MEMOS tte edd dE 222 Options MENU sender gerd dene aE ee Ee ee 224 Change Order to Metric Customary NENNEN EEN 225 Ticket TIMES eegen EE 225 Reprinting Tickets s sssssessssssessssenenunnenenunnnnnnenunresensosesenennanununnnnnnenue 225 Display Individual ant EE 226 RE CAE 227 Display Haul Charges issiisisvcissu tiv taasardvaimesiasvwndsaisdeiauereiiateunsneaen 227 Suspend Order Suspend Product Edit Suspended Tickets 0c00e0es 227 Addition Selection of Notes NNN 228 Daily TITTEN 229 Process OvervieW EEN 229 Reconciling Tickets cinssvisnidietivecaisecameseesad EA 230 Price Upd
463. s Customer Notes 279 Concrete Orders Simplified Orders Pies Dispatch memos can be entered on a new order without having to save the order and then retrieve it Detailing on the field will open a zoom box for longer notes When the order is retrieved in order entry or ticketing the information will display in the field If dispatch memos are configured for auto display the memo will display in the standard notes auto display window From there the screen can be closed or the full Customer Notes editor opened Because of space restrictions on the Aggregate Orders screen if dispatch memos are enabled job tracking fields Job Phase and Phase Code are moved to the Other Order Information screen 280 Customer Notes Dispatch memos can be viewed and entered in the Concrete Tickets screen but not in aggregate ticketing and dispatch screens Concrete Ticketing D Concrete Tickets d r CO af 1299 Forward Blvd CO Bf yada yada yada TT Reports The following dispatch reports print order specific customer notes which includes dispatch memos e Order Report e Order Recap Report e Ticket Report The selection screens for all of these reports have a new checkbox Include Order Specific Customer Notes to control the inclusion of notes on the reports Note Order specific notes will not print for aggregate orders Deleting Managing amp Purging Completed Notes If a company uses customer not
464. s Editing Ticket Times To edit ticket times for a specific order 1 Open the Time and Task Manager Dispatch gt Time Analysis gt Time amp Task Manager Enter the Order Date 3 Ifyou want to retrieve tickets associated with a specific order enter the Order Code 4 Ifyou are interested in a specific driver or ticket enter the appropriate codes To view all tickets for an order simply tab through the Ticket Code Truck Code Shipping Plant and Driver fields without entering anything 5 The system will retrieve all tickets attached to the order Canceled or removed ticket are marked with a small hyphen to the right of the Ticket Code Time and Task Manager EDTTMGRA D Time and Task Manager Ticket Times Truck Times Driver Times Order Date 23 Oct 2007 TC Show Only Tickets With Missing Times Order Code MYSTO2 Missing Invalid Times Ticket Code o _ Find next Time Truck Code Calculate next Time on this Ticket Driver Calculate d Times on this Ticket Shipping Plant Tickets Calculate all Times on all Tickets Ticket Order Code To On To At Code Truck Code Printed Load Job Job Unos Wash Plant Pliant 2700774 MYSTO2 f fieas nso fisi7 fisa3 Neo hei Ness f 21 The large area at the bottom of the screen shows the tickets and ticket status times 6 For particularly large orders you can check the Show Only Tickets With Missing Times checkbox to restrict the number of tickets displayed 7 Press the Ticke
465. s Item Location Testing Families 120 Sampling amp Testing Plan Document tags for the import process will have to be created manually Below is a table listing the fields that will most likely be needed for standard import and export routines Standard import fields Item Code ILTF Test Method Description TSME Location Code ILTF Test Method TSME Test Family Code ILTF Test Family Description TSTF_LNG Actual Samples ILTS Test Family Language Code TSTF_LNG End Date ILTS Test Family Short Description TSTF_LN Item Code ILTS Test Family Ocde TSTF_LNG Location Code ILTS Test Family Description TSTF min sample production volume ILTS Test Family Short Description TSTF min samples per day ILTS Testing Family TSTF min samples per month ILTS Actual Saample TSTM min samples per week ILTS End Date TSTM min samples per year ILTS Location Code TSTM max samples per day ILTS min samples per day TSTM max samples per month ILTS min samples per month TSTM max samples per week ILTS Min Sample prod per vol TSTM max samples per year ILTS min samples per week TSTM production day value ILTS min samples per year TSTM production week value ILTS max samples per day TSTM Start Date ILTS max samples per month TSTM target samples ILTS max samples per week TSTM Test Method Code ILTS max samples per year TSTM description TSME_LNG production day value TSTM Language Code
466. s Mark the appropriate orders for release or click the All button to release all orders 10 Accept the screen The report will process all uninvoiced reports the meet the selection criteria In addition any suspended orders or tickets within the selection criteria will be released Editing Suspended Tickets on Invoiced Orders COMMANDinvoicing provides an option in the Edit Orders and Tickets function that allows the user to access suspended tickets once the order has been partially invoiced These tickets can be released and edited without modifying the order You can only edit the suspended tickets of a partially invoiced order You cannot edit any invoiced tickets or the order itself To edit suspended tickets on invoiced orders 1 Select Edit Suspended Tickets from the Option menu on the Edit Orders and Tickets screen The Edit Suspended Ticket screen appears 2 Enter the Order Date and Order Code of the order with suspended tickets The Order Date and Order Code information automatically default to the Edit Edit Suspended Tickets Order Date m Order Code Suspended Tickets screen However the Edit Orders and Tickets screen prompts you that the order has been invoiced and no changes may be made to the order or the invoiced tickets Only the suspended tickets remaining on the partially invoiced order may be changed 3 The Edit Ticket Information screen appears and displays all suspended tickets for
467. s gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants gt Communication tab gt Setup Set up a standard unit of measure to provide equivalent units for block products It should be in the 80000 range and assigned as an Other Unit of Measure Type Otherwise it can be set up similar to 80001 Each Set up an item category or categories for block building materials etc There are item types for both of these The UOMs for this category should all be 80001 Each except for the reporting UOM for the Block category which should be assigned the equivalent unit s UOM For non block products the reporting UOM should be the same as all other UOMs Assign the block and building material products to the appropriate item category For block products the Conversions button on the UOM form will be used to assign the equivalent units conversion factor for each product Typically for block products sales are stated in terms of equivalent units with an 8 X 8 X 16 block equaling one 1 EU The conversion can be either from the product s delivered quantity UOM 80001 to the reporting UOM or vice versa at the appropriate conversion factor Therefore a 4 X 8 X 8 block would need a conversion factor set up in one of the following manners Convert from UOM Convert to UOM Multiplier Del Qty UOM 80001 Rept UOM 800 35 or Rept UOM 800 Del Qty UOM 80001 2 85714290 which is 1 35 All block products includ
468. s projects items and shipping plants for the specified date range Inventory Usage Report 7 Customer Sales Recap The Inventory Usage report shows the inventory items used at each location according to the selection criteria It shows how much of the item was used the ticket code and inventory levels and a total for each location This report is a very useful way of getting an overview of inventory 298 COMMAND concrete Reports Inventory Usage Report Selections SELIUSG D Inventory Usage Report Selections Detail Location Code Item Code Bl 02 07 2008 By 02 07 2008 EEN E Wm Product Sales Usage Report The Product Sales Usage Report provides information on the volume of weighed product associated and extra products sold and the amount of aggregate used to make the products The report includes a Mix Product Sales section which shows a number of totals One useful figure shown in this section of the report is the returned concrete figure This is a combination of the dumped and reused concrete Product Sales Usage Report Selections SELPSLS 7 Product Sales Usage Report Selections 2 02 07 2008 m 02 07 2008 Raw Materials Requirements Report Use the Raw Materials Requirements Report to determine the raw material needed for future production The report shows data on associated products constituent products and extra products for each plant as well as the average material consumption Y
469. s On Job status The options for this field are o Do Not Poll o Poll First Truck Poll the first truck on an order to arrive at a specific site o Poll Every Truck If you are polling select the Update Order Map Coordinates field to have the newly polled coordinates written back to the order This option is useful if an order is to be delivered to multiple locations 12 To Print Mix Weights on Ticket mark that checkbox 13 Select Use Alternate Scale Printer to state that the ticket should be printed from an alternative scale printer rather than the principle one This might be used for a number of business reasons but is commonly used when the business wishes to print the ticket on different paper 14 The User Defined Comments Code field lets you select messages to be printed on an order and or ticket Detailing on the field will display a list of messages containing an ALL type available for use with Orders and Tickets 15 The User Defined Fields area allows users to append additional information on orders payments customer files etc To add a comment click in the appropriate field and type in the comment In some cases comments will already be there For additional information about these features see the Message Text and Configuration sections in the Setting Up the System manual 16 Accept this screen to save your changes if any Entering Products on an Order Information entered up to this point has determined who
470. s for Trowel Ready Mortar 177 Order and Ticket Data In SELOTIN zy Order and Ticket Data In Order Ticket Data In Web PDA Tickets J Seperate Order end Ticket EG GTGER Cones ade MderendiycaucHeve sindy enades EEIE ale Wien M A H a H H M M Ticket records are created when you import your Web PDA tickets back to COMMANDeeries e Ticket line defaults are retrieved from the Order Line in COMMANDoseries based on the Order Date and Order Code from the PDA e Delivery Quantity is defaulted from the PDA e Ticket and ticket line records minimum load charges seasonal charges surcharges and sundry charges are created e Ticket Weights are created and Order Delivery Quantities are updated e The Shipping Plant is assigned where the load is completed e If tickets are voided in the PDA they will still be created in COMMANDeseries e Pricing for voided tickets is set to zero Automated Data In Out Automated Data In Out for orders and tickets has been modified with a new Web PDA Tickets option for the Process Type When selected only the Replace Duplicates Ticket option will be available for editing with all other fields invisible Use this option to have tickets import automatically at the end of each day 178 Web PDA Tickets and Orders for Trowel Ready Mortar Automated Data In Out EDTADIO A Automated Data In Out Ticket Data Out to Oracle TKTDATA Order TicketIn 12 00 21 30
471. s the Ticket button This will automatically produce a ticket at the default plant Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 91 7 Ifthis is a cash order press the COD button to produce the Order Total Amount before the ticket is generated The Order Tree The Order Tree Dispatch gt Order Tree gives you a powerful and flexible means of navigating through your order history It lets you search sort and display all orders in your system based on the criteria you specify The Order Tree is designed to resemble the organization of Windows Explorer using folders that represent roots and branches The base level of organization is called the root At this level orders are sorted into folders based on specific criteria For example you might want to sort your orders based on Order Date and Customer Name Each folder at the root level would be labeled with a specific Date Customer combination Within each root folder are branches The branches or folders closest to the root level are the individual orders You can control how these folders are labeled to expedite order identification Each Order folder contains folders for each mix and extra product on the order Within each mix folder are file icons representing the delivery schedule and any associated products Navigate through the Order Tree by clicking on the Plus and Minus buttons to the left of the folder This expands or collapses the folder respectively Topics in t
472. s up the phone without any manual lookup This new feature operates via an interface with VoiceGate s call processing technology COMMANDeeries will receive Caller ID information from VoiceGate and attempt to match the incoming telephone number to a number in the new database table Contact Phone Number CTTN If the incoming telephone number matches a number in the table a list of matching contacts will be displayed on the updated Order Prefix CPOL screen Although the updated Order Prefix screen will be available to all users including those without VoiceGate the Automatic Caller ID license code ID must be added to the License manager Files gt System Information gt Licenses to support the interaction between VoiceGate and COMMANDeseries Topics in this section Configuration Workflow Manual Lookup Contact Deliver To Customer Order Lookup Form Configuration For those users who have VoiceGate already licensed and installed on their systems setting up Automatic Caller ID is a simple process To enable Caller Lookup Select the Caller ID Enabled drop down box on the User tab in Preferences When selected you can manually look up contacts by phone number on the Order Prefix screen e Select Yes to enable the caller lookup feature e Select No to disable the caller lookup feature Automatic Caller ID 407 A Preferences en CommandAlkon does not support VoiceGate in any way For troubleshootin
473. s when drivers approach overtime limits The system also allows dispatchers to check a driver s hour status at any time To check a driver s overtime status 1 Right click on the truck token to which the driver is assigned on the main Tracking and Scheduling screen Select Driver Overtime from the popup menu OfYr Open the Tracking amp Scheduling Operations screen Dispatch gt Tracking amp Scheduling Operations select the Driver Overtime tab and enter the Driver Code 2 The overtime related information for the driver will appear on the screen Tracking amp Scheduling Operations Driver Overtime Tab DBATSOPL Display Trip Profile Change Task Driver Overtime Change Conditions Driver Code gt Keith Svitak Driver Overtime Code 1 Daily Overtime T able Week Begins Monday Rolling Days Overtime Hours to Clock Hours Alert Hours Hours Overtime On Overtime Today 2 00 3 00 No This Week No Rolling No 3 This information is for reference only it cannot be edited from this screen To edit driver or truck task times use the Time and Task Manager Time and Task Manager The Time and Task Manager provides a practical means of reviewing and editing time and task information for trucks and drivers This tool lets you go back and correct information or fill in missing information 184 Tasks Conditions and Driver Overtime Topics in this section Editing Ticket Times Editing Truck Times Editing Driver Time
474. s with the most current cost information That cost information then becomes available through Invoicing Reports and through Executive Reports Customers running COMMANDexecutive should use the update costs option to ensure that all orders are assigned the correct price Prices are attached to an order at the time the order is entered in the system Because of the delay that can occur between the time a salesman gives a customer a price and the time that new price gets entered into the system it s possible that an order can get priced based on out of date information The update price option offers a useful safety net for this occurrence The update routine lets you update costs prices or both Caution The update does not revalidate using standard pricing logic but instead revalidates using each item s Price Source Code PSC to see if a more current price is available from that source So ifan order gets priced from the Item Master list and then the next day the salesman enters project level pricing the update prices option would not find an updated price In that case you would need to open the order in Edit Orders and Daily Invoicing 233 Tickets remove the project from the order and then add the project back at that point standard pricing rules will be used and the correct price s will be pulled from the project file To update costs amp prices on orders amp tickets 1 Goto the Update Costs amp Prices for Orders
475. s within the date range are displayed showing both the payment and unallocated amount For Direct Deposit and Preliminary Reconciliation Report information please see the corresponding sections in this document 7 The Status of all the receipts defaults to Okay If for some reason you do not wish to include a given receipt in this reconciliation sequence change the status to Hold Receipts on hold are not included in the Payments Logged totals at the top of the screen 8 To allocate a receipt identify both a receipt with unallocated funds and then press the A button for that receipt The Allocate Receipt screen will be loaded displaying the receipt and all the outstanding tickets that qualify Allocate as usual accept the screen and close the screen to return to the Cash Reconciliation screen When you do the screen will automatically recalculate based on the newly entered allocations 9 Total your cash checks and credit card slips and enter those figures The totals section will update accordingly Cash Check Credit Card Tatal on Hand 2905 05 2295 60 500 00 Less Payments Logged 2905 20 2295 60 500 00 Less Beginning Balance 500 00 Difference Over Under 500 15 0 00 0 00 The difference for cash reflects the initial 500 in petty cash plus an additional 0 15 shortage Cash Management 261 10 Press Next The Cash Reconciliation Out of Balance screen will display 8 Cash Reconciliation Out of Balance 500 petty
476. sage frame at the bottom of the screen Ticketing 137 Ticketing Load Size Logic When an order is recalled in a ticketing screen the ticketing form itself suggests a load size for the truck load This load size is determined in one of two ways e Getting the scheduled load size from the load by load schedule Default e Ifthe flag in the schedule is set appropriately get the scheduled load size from the truck In either case the scheduled load size is set to the remaining quantity on the order line if the remaining quantity is less than the scheduled load size To validate under over load condition 1 The system will always validate that the load size suggested by the system or entered in ticketing does not exceed the truck s maximum capacity A truck overloaded message will display if the validation fails 2 Ifyou change the suggested load size in ticketing the system will validate that the changed quantity is not less than the truck s minimum load size A truck under loaded message displays if the validation fails Reprinting Tickets This function only reprints existing ticket information it does not re calculate or update any information in the files The Reprint Tickets function is available in the Options menu in all ticketing screens as well as Edit Orders and Tickets The functionality of the screen depends on the screen from which it was called To reprint a current ticket If tickets are printed f
477. sary flags set in the User editor Additional settings for the feature are located on the Configuration editor s Distribution tab Please refer to the Setting up the System manual for additional information on these screens The basic functioning of this feature is controlled by settings in the Configuration and User files The Configurations setting specifies if the feature is to be used at all while the User level options Files gt System gt Users gt Options determine what specific privileges any given user has with regard to this feature The two User level options are o Allow Access to Order level Mix Design This flag lets a user enter a mix design at the order level o Allow Override of Unapproved Mix Designs in Tickets This flag gives a user the ability to ticket loads with unapproved mix designs Note Dispatch can only ship approved mixes The ticket screen will reject unapproved mixes unless the user is flagged to allow override of non approved mixes Please Consult the Setting Up the System manual for additional information The business process for using Order level Mix design will vary based on companies needs and hardware Of particular importance to the process is whether the company has either a batch interface or a third party QC program Regardless of your specific business practices it is important to determine how many days the QC process will take and make sure that orders are taken far enough in adv
478. screen to initiate the updates The time needed for the update will vary based on your system and the size of your database The system will not provide a report of the costs prices that were updated Calculate Unloading Charges Unlike charges such as Minimum Load or Sundry charges Unloading Charges cannot be created when a load is ticketed During ticket prep the Calculate Unloading Charges function is used to create unloading charges based on the recorded ticket times The routine generates a report that lets you review the calculated unloading charges before applying them COMMANDeeries can automatically calculate and apply unloading charges See the Setting Up the System manual for details on creating Unloading Charge tables and automated calculation profiles To calculate unloading charges 1 Go to the Calculate Unloading Charges screen Invoicing gt Calculate Unloading Charges Define the range of information for which to calculate the unloading charges in the Order Date Order Code Customer Code Project Code Pricing Plant Code and Company Code fields Mark any necessary checkboxes at the bottom of the screen to calculate unloading charges using the ticket order or project calculation method When calculating unloading charges by project a new order must be created for the unloading charges Accept the screen Select a print model from the Possible Print Models screen The system will generate a report showing
479. sed truck counts Truck Counts screen DBALICN Bl Truck Counts OF x Truck Count in Use Licensed Truck Count Ticketing Truck Count 0 Ticketing Truck Count 410 Tracking Truck Count 0 Tracking Truck Count 378 Scheduling Truck Count 0 Scheduling Truck Count 438 SS The form retrieves its information from the Licensing LICN table You can view the corresponding information on the Concrete Tracking and Scheduling tabs on the License editor Field level security can be set for the form in the Users editor Pouring Methods Pouring methods allow for more standardization in the use of pouring methods letting you establish a number of common pouring methods and linking them to an appropriate unloading time Having these values available prevents the order taker from having to estimate unloading rates while talking to the customer Pouring Methods are entered into the system in the Pouring Methods screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Pouring Methods Some examples of possible Pouring Method options are Pouring Method Rate CY Comment Standard 5 min A baseline rate particularly useful if all the com pany s trucks are the same type Pump 2 min We re going for volume here not neatness Curb 15 min Curbs take time to do properly Wheel barrow 10 min In some cases mix must be poured into a wheelbar row and transported to its destination Front loader 4 min If the yo
480. seful for regular weekly monthly orders or for repeat orders from the same customer project etc Customers often call to postpone an order until the following day or to request an order that is similar to one they have already received The Save As button lets you copy the currently displayed order to a new order either for the current date or future dates All delivered quantities are reset to zero e When copying a cash order that has a cash receipt attached if the receipt is not fully allocated the receipt code is also copied to the new order If the receipt is fully allocated no receipt is attached e The ordered products and order quantities can be modified if necessary 74 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools To copy or move an order 1 Open an existing order then select the Save As button from the toolbar or press lt F9 gt Save As Button Fie Edit Options Help D amp B mw Gx Select the Save As button or select F9 to copy or move an order 2 When copying an order with no tickets you will receive the following prompt Copying order Do you wish to keep the original order To move an order select No the original order will be removed To copy an order select Yes the original order will be retained 3 Respond to the next prompt Do you wish to retain the schedule s on this order To copy the scheduling information on this order select Yes all the scheduling details from the o
481. sh Sale 700 00 700 00 WS locate f 10137 Check MRDOO1 Cash Sale 185 90 00 fOky JI _ Allocate 10139 Credit MADOO1 Cash Sale 400 40 00 Oka allocate 10140 Credit MADOO1 Cash Sale 1000 00 81850 Okay z allocate Uncollected Tickets Amount Due Payment Resolution Reason Ticket Order Code Order Date Truck Code Driver Amount Difference Code 123390 6000 18 4ug 2008 60511 FRANK 66 00 00 66 00 a S 123386 6000 18 4ug 2008 60636 JOE 198 00 00 198 00 123387 4 6000 18 Aug 2008 60690 JOHN TURNER 198 00 00 198 00 123388 4 6000 18 Aug 2008 60638 FRANK HEALY 198 00 00 198 0 xl Preliminary Next gt gt Cancel Report Note The Payment Types column header has been renamed Payment Meth Payment Methods Direct Deposits will display in this column as DD Totals for entries on the Cash Payments screen Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Cash Payments that have a payment form of Direct Deposit will display in the Direct Deposit column at the top of the Cash Reconciliation screen You can total your direct deposits here Once all information on the Cash Reconciliation screen has been balanced press the Next button to go to the Cash Reconciliation Final Step screen You will notice a new section dedicated to direct deposits Cash Management 269 Cash Reconciliation Final Step DBACREC1 A Cash Reconciliation Final Step Direct deposit totals will be included in the new direct deposit section of the screen
482. shot Report On Time Delivery Report Time Analysis Reports Missing Times Report Overtime Report Driver Times and Truck Times The Driver Times and Truck Times screens are used primarily for editing missing Punch In and Punch Out times for drivers and trucks A good example of when you might need to edit a time is when an aggregate tractor trailer with mobile signaling breaks down and the driver has to switch over to a rental tractor which does not have mobile signaling to pull his trailer to the job and finish out his day In this case the driver would have valid times up to the point where he broke down and no times showing after that event You can then enter these missing times in COMMANDeeries Edit Driver Times EDTDRVT 73 Edit Driver Times 08 00 00 f12 00 00 15 00 00 200000 2f Edit Truck Times EDTTRKT BS Edit Truck Times 14 00 hem 2 18 00 Em Order Snapshot Report The Order Snapshot report combines the easy to read timeline of the Graphic Analysis report with the detailed analysis of the Order Analysis report It is generally run only to review a specific order or group of orders and can show timings such as the time between loads You can use this report to investigate customer complaints 302 COMMANDconcrete Reports Order Snapshot Report Selections SELOSNP Order Snapshot Report Selections On Time Delivery Report The On Time Delivery report can be run for a single day or range
483. sociated with particular order lines can be viewed and edited by pressing the Haul button in this section of the screen The Other button lets you add other information related to a particular order line The Calculations button displays on order line items that are project products and when pressed displays the amount of that item that has been ordered and delivered so far in the project See Forecasted Shipped Quantity on page 52 for more information The Totals and Tickets section provides totals so that you can confirm your price corrections The Tickets button opens the Edit Ticket Information screen along with all tickets attached to the current order General Order amp Ticket Prep Once pricing reports have been reviewed and edited the corrected information has to be entered into the system Corrections to orders and tickets are made in the Edit Orders and Tickets screen When errors are discovered be sure to determine how the error came about If an order is priced incorrectly because an item is priced incorrectly in a master file you will need to correct the error in the master file as well or else you will be making the same correction over and over again There are multiple screens in the Edit Orders and Tickets system but all of them fall into two distinct functions editing orders and editing tickets Before editing records you should understand how COMMANDeseries uses information from the order and ticket record t
484. spatchers as the drivers get close to overtime wages The task assigned to any given status determines how the system will classify that time The system can track three different types of overtime e Daily Based on the hours worked during a single day e Weekly Based on the number of hours logged during a calendar week e Rolling Based on the number of hours a driver has spent on the road over a specified number of days Unlike weekly overtime rolling overtime looks at a specified number of days into the past for example for the past seven days Each driver can be assigned a Driver Overtime Table the table specifies the allowed number of hours for the three overtime types Enter or edit Driver Overtime Codes in the Driver Overtime editor Files gt General Information gt Driver Overtime In addition the table lets the user define alert hours In other words while a driver may hit daily overtime after eight hours the system can alert the dispatcher when the driver hits six hours this option gives the dispatcher the ability to adjust driver usage without having to look up clock information Conditions In order to use the overtime information as an early warning system there has to be a mechanism by which the dispatcher is notified that a driver is getting close to overtime COMMANDeseries uses conditions to trigger a number of warning mechanisms through the Tracking amp Scheduling screen The default conditions are e
485. t 1 Open the Uncollected Receipts Report Selections screen Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Payment Reports gt Uncollected Receipts report 264 Cash Management WD E Jm DD Uncollected Tickets Report Selections SELUNRC 8 Unallocated Receipts Report Selections Report Name J x Report Sequence Receipt Plant Receipt Code X Receipt Date Le thru Company Code zl Plant Code RES Enter plant codelsl and or company code s separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Cust Code Bl thru Payment Method All z Save Settings on Accept If you want to save a report configuration enter a Report Name and check the Save Settings on Accept field Select a Report Sequence Currently the only option in this field is Ticket Code Enter a Receipt Date or date range Enter a Company Code or detail on the field for a list of companies Select a Plant Code or enter a range of plants Enter a Customer Code or code range Select the Payment Method s to be included on the report Accept the screen to generate the report Document Formats Two new calculation document tags ORORAM and DSPCAM have been created for Order Print and Data In Out These new tags will be used to display the original order amount before any discounts ORORAM as well as the discount amount received DSPCAM These tags will only be used to calculate Cash orders Purging Quick Customers While the abilit
486. t Import Orders amp Tickets Import Orders amp Tickets DBAIMOR 2 Import Orders and Tickets L X E c csO6 importhordr0627 txt Data Management 349 2 The File s to Import field will initially default from settings in your Assignment file The default file name will be based on the previous day s date Enter a file path and name if necessary or detail on the field to browse your system for the import file 3 Select the Delete Import File When Complete checkbox if necessary 4 Accept the screen A progress bar will indicate the status of the import process Export Orders amp Tickets Use the Export Orders amp Tickets function to export orders and tickets The export file can be used as an archive file or can be transferred to another location for invoicing You can select orders and tickets by day order code ticket code plant code or a combination of the same To export orders amp tickets 1 Open the Export Orders amp Tickets screen Manage gt Data Management gt Export Orders amp Tickets Export Orders amp Tickets DBAEXOR 2 Export Orders and Tickets Order Date m 28Jun 2007 thu m 28 Jun 2007 Order Code el thru Ticket Code thru Shipping Plant Code 1 3 6 8 10 Billing Company Code Enter plant code s and or company code s separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Output File c 4cs06 importhordr0628 txt Include Orders Include Tickets
487. t amp Delivery Information gt Plants e Minimum Selling Price Represents an estimate of the lowest price at which this product should be quoted The value is a sum of all product costs plus the amount required to achieve the plant s desired profit minus any applicable terms discounts The value in this field is affected by all cost and discount fields located above it on the screen e Quoted Selling Price Represents an estimate of the amount at which you are bidding the product to be sold per cubic yard or meter Enter a value in this field based mainly on the amount in the Minimum Selling Price field e With An Estimated Profit Represents the estimated profit per cubic yard or meter that will be gained if the product is sold at the price in the Quoted Selling Price field A value will not appear here until a quoted selling price has been entered Bid Price Calculator FNDBPRC1 W Bid Price Calculator Me x Customer gt fo ABC Construction Inc Project Quote Plant sh Main Plant Product gt 25466 2500 psi 1 142 6 AEA Calculator Material Costs Overhead Costs Delivery Costs Average Load Size Travel Time Unload Time Material Cost 3 26 9 00 Cubic Ya 15 minutes 7 minutes Overhead Cost 9 01 Delivery Cost eles Average Days to Pay 60 Financed at 9 Annually Financing Cost FE Terms gt 1 Net 30 Days Terms Discount 1 00 To Achieve Plant s Desired Profit 3 50 Minimum Selling Price 27 04 Quoted Selling Price
488. t Orders amp Tickets gt Tickets button have also been enhanced to accommodate rebate and royalty information A new R button has been added to these screens for rebate and royalty information Edit Ticket Information Concrete Individual EDTPREP6 Edit Ticket Information 01 May 2008 AR 1 Baik Ticket Plant Truck Truck Type Driver Tied SI L Zeite has not ae aa a Mix Products Description Del Qty Price Qiy Price Ext Pace o gue tom to tom M 40007 40000 LR Assoc Product Description Deb Oty Price Qty Price Ext Price tad Extra Products Desctiption Dek Oty Price Qly Price Ext Price Inventory Qty asl ri Ime Otha Staus Total Ticket 400 00 A Ei Edit Ticket Information Concrete Multiple EDTPREP7 Ef Edit Ticket Information OH Ticket Journey Seq Mix Product Description Delv Oty Price Oty Price Ext Price 25000001 2 hf Bl Plant f Truck Truck Type TT Total Ticket maa Haul Times Other Status EI Cartage Status Cartage update has not been run x Rebates and Royalties 129 Edit Aggregate Ticket Information EDTPREP8 D Edit Aggregate Ticket Information 02 Sep 2008 ABC Corporation Ticket Plant Truck Truck Type Product Description Dely Oty Price Oty Product 1 of 1 OO ee 4 Cartage Status Other Prods Times_ Other_ Status Cartage update has not been run X Note On the Edit Aggregate Ticket Information screen the Haul button has been changed to display as H Click on
489. t Trucks tab COMMANDfleet COMMAND Fleet has been updated to support future day ticketing e Trucks display as future orders in Fleet e Ifa ticket is removed before the future date has arrived it will be removed from the Fleet display as well e When a truck is punched in the same fields are checked and processed by Fleet This applies to Signaling as well 168 Ticketing Print User Defined Fields The following Ticket Print document tags are used for pritnting any user defined fields on the customer and project The customer user defined tags are used to print information from the order s shipping customer as well as the order s billing customer BCUSDF Billing Customer User Defined Field This tag retrieves the user defined fields from the customer master table USER_DEFINED CUST where the order s customer code is the same as the customer record s customer code CUST_CODE ORDR CUST_CODE CUST SCUSDF Shipping Customer User Defined Field This tag retrieves the user defined fields from the customer master table USER_DEFINED CUST where the order s customer code is the same as the customer record s shipping customer code SHIP_CUST_CODE ORDR CUST_CODE CUST The project user defined tag is used to retrieve the data from the project master record PRUSDF Project User Defined Field This tag retrieves the user defined fields from the project master table USER_DEFINED PROJ where the order s customer a
490. t are close to one another 20 tons of pea gravel for ABC Construction and 25 tons of pea gravel for XYZ Construction The basic process is simple double ticket the truck However secondary issues need to be considered as described below Any ticket times from signaling or dispatching are useless so you must make a decision ignore the times for this trip or ask the driver to manually record his times on a note pad Either the dispatcher or invoice prep person enters the times into the system at a later date If you charge for excess unloading time the driver needs to record his times If you do not charge for excess unloading times it may be easier to skip manual recording If your company uses minimum load charges you might want to suspend those charges for these two loads To ticket a ruck hauling more than one load 1 Follow the normal order entry process 2 When the truck pulls up to the dispatching batching station drag the truck to the first order it probably doesn t matter which The Ticketing screen appears 3 Press the Other button on the Ticketing screen A dialog box appears containing a number of options for this particular ticket If you wish to disable unloading charges de select the appropriate box and accept the screen 4 Accept to ticket the truck If you have small loads charges enabled a dialog box appears asking if you wish to apply minimum load charges to this ticket Select No You may also
491. t date If necessary you can change this once a plant code has been entered Enter the Plant Code of the order you just created 5 Select a Truck Code 6 Ifa driver was not automatically assigned detail on the Driver Code field and select a driver from the list 7 Enter the Order Code of the order you just created 8 At this stage you can see details for both products but only the Load Quantity of the first product is editable 9 Press the Add button at the bottom of the screen This adds a new ticket and places the cursor in the Order Code field Detail on the field and select the same order as previously Tab through the Ticket Code field 10 The screen now displays the Load Quantity for the second product on the order You can scroll between the first and second products using the Previous Next buttons Concrete Ticketing amp Shipping EDTSHIP Second product on one truck Item Code Description Order Qty Del Oty Load Qty Price PreQty Cube Check CKAION A100 d 300 M3 DI TI cPe309 Cap 200 M3 wo f 2 00 Other The second product must have a load quantity less than or equal to the truck s maximum load minus the load quantity of the first product 11 The Journey field is now read only and displays the Unique Identifier field which always reads 12 Press lt F2 gt to accept the screen and save the changes Two tickets are created and sent to the batch panel 13 You may be prompted with messages rel
492. t for the product are zero If they are not zero return to the Edit Ticket Information screen and verify the Delivered Quantity and Price Quantity values If they are zero use the Remove command to remove the product from the order o Some companies will leave the zeroed out product on the order so that if a credit debit rebill is done the product will appear on both credit and debit memos Accept the screen to save the order Removing Editing Charges Users have a number of options when it comes to editing or removing charges from orders Basic changes such as removing a charge from the entire order can be made at the order level while finer changes such as or removing a charge from a single ticket may need to be made at the ticket level When a charge is removed it can be removed completely from the order When this happens the charge does not show up on the customer invoice If the charge is zeroed out it will still print on the invoice To edit delete a charge at the order level 1 2 3 Open the order in Edit Orders and Tickets Select the Pricing button The Order Pricing Information screen opens From this screen there are a number of options 218 Edit Orders and Tickets o To adda charge select the appropriate Apply checkbox For minimum load seasonal unloading charges select a Charge Table o To remove a charge from an order deselect the appropriate Apply checkbox When the screen is accepted
493. t management 122 Sampling amp Testing Plan Sampling amp Testing Plan 123 Rebates and Royalties Rebates and royalties are often an essential part of the concrete and aggregate business COMMANDeseries can easily handle all aspects of rebates and royalties Areas of COMMANDeseries that report prices costs and gross margins have been modified to incorporate rebate and royalty amounts Rebates and royalties can be tracked from the Job phase all the way through the distribution and delivery phase Note When a Quote is created from a Job and when a Project is created from a Quote rebate and royalty information are automatically carried forward when the new Quote and Project are created e Rebates An amount that is reclaimed from a supplier upon the sale of items that were purchased from that supplier Rebate information that is assigned to items in the Item editor is applicable for Jobs Quotes and Projects As rebate worthy items are ordered and ticketed rebates are associated with the orders and tickets as a reduction in the Material Cost of the item sold e Royalties An amount paid to a land owner for items that were manufactured or extracted from the land Royalty information that is assigned to items in the Items editor is applicable for Jobs Quotes and Projects As royalty worthy items are ordered and ticketed royalties are associated with the orders and tickets as an increase in the Material Cost of the item s
494. t moved to Loading status Notice that the timer portion of the truck token has turned red to alert the dispatcher that this load is falling behind schedule This feature is part of Tracking amp Scheduling functionality and is not influenced by tasks or conditions in any way e The driver of Truck 1 is approaching the limit for weekly overtime A flag C has been added to the beginning of the token and the color of the truck number has changed In the previous example the timer portion of the token changed color e Truck 4 is being deadheaded to plant 2 There is a flag A the truck color has changed and the timer shows the time until the truck arrives at plant 2 Ticketing The ticketing procedure is unchanged On the Ticketing screen Dispatch gt whenever a truck is ticketed the system retrieves the driver s clock time to date and compares it to the information saved in the assigned driver overtime table If the driver s current time is under the specified limit and the projected trip time for the new load does not put the driver into the warning level the load will ticket normally If the driver s hours are over the limit for rolling overtime or the trip will put the driver over the limit then a warning displays when the load is ticketed Tasks Conditions and Driver Overtime Driver on Truck 1 will exceed rolling overtime maximum before this trip has been completed Do you want to use this truck If the
495. t qualifies but at elast one CT TK was n ot created OK to Invoice Ticket qualifies and Cartage Ticket s created OK to Invoice Does not Qualify for Cartage Do Not Invoice User Override OK to Invoice User Override DD D 0 0 0 Edit Orders and Tickets 215 The two override options can only be set manually on this screen or can be set during a ticket import 21 Proceed to other areas of the prep screen or accept the screen to return to the main Edit Orders and Tickets screen To edit aggregate tickets 1 Open the Edit Orders and Tickets screen Invoicing gt Edit Orders amp Tickets 2 Open the order containing the tickets to be edited 3 Ifmnecessary edit order information on the main Edit Orders and Tickets screen 4 Press the Tickets button in the lower right of the screen The Edit Aggregate Ticket Information screen displays 5 Ifyou are editing an existing ticket the Ticket field is inactive Existing ticket codes cannot be changed If you are entering a new ticket enter a Ticket Code The system will alert you if you enter a ticket code that is already in use but it will not prevent you from saving the duplicate number 6 Enter the Plant that provided the material 7 Enter the Truck that delivered the material 8 Enter a Product or detail on the field to select from a list of products on the order o You cannot add a product to a ticket unless that product has already been entered in the order
496. ta In Out this might be Auto Config 5 Enter the Batch Number of the import that you want to detail in the report 6 To Report Exceptions Only mark the checkbox 7 Accept the Error Log Selections screen Update Zone Salesman Under each Item Group set up in Configuration it is possible to define a Zone Salesman The Update Zone Salesman screen lets you quickly update a number of zone salesman records A salesman can be assigned to just one or a range of both item groups and zones at once It is also possible to assign one salesman to all the zone item group combinations that were assigned to another This can be useful when a salesman leaves or the company undergoes a restructure To update a zone salesman 1 Goto the Update Zone Salesman screen Manage gt Application Management gt Update Zone Salesman 318 Application Management Update Zone Salesman SELZNSL 8 Update Zone Salesman Sie E Item Group sl A Zone Code gt 316C0LL thu Zone Code gt 316C0LL To Salesman gt E 0000093 Jayne Chater From Salesman gt JOHN JOHN 2 Press the detail button on the Item Group field to select an item group or select the A11 button 3 Enter a Zone Code or range of zone codes 4 Inthe To Salesman field enter the employee code of the salesman that will now be defined as the salesman for the item group s and zone s stated D Once a To Salesman has been entered the From Salesman field
497. tab on the Plant editor has been modified so you can select the proper certification to be printed for the delivery note The new NS_CONFIG_NAME field has been added to the PLNT table to accommodate the National Standard Configuration field on the Plant editor Main Communication Batching Scheduling Costs Plants Scales Bins Device Type No Output X Print Dispatch Copy Print Delayed Ticket Wait for Weights Allow Order Printing Allow Report Printing Allow Receipt Printing ww GE GE i Allow GR Ticket Printing Allow Cash Sale Invoice Printing Print Server Device None X Material Transfer Inventory T ions Shipped To Thi Create Transfer Transaction For Automatic Posting e National Standard Configuration ET Document Tags The layout of the printed delivery note with certification information will be controlled through the use of document tags The following new document tags have been created for certification information You should apply these document tags to the ticket print document formats so they are included in the ticket print Document Tag Tag Text Tag Code Type Calc Lookup Fixed NSTEXT National Standard Text Lookup CERTNO Certification Number Calc CERTBO Certification Body Calc CERTTX Certification Text Calc CERTYR Certification Year Calc CERTEX Certification Expiration Date Calc NSIMGE National Standard Image Ima
498. tance on the schedule e Prices are based on the scheduled distance on the order and will not change if a ticket is created from an alternative plant that has a different distance e Cartage Rate Tables are assigned to items based on the location so an item can have varying rates if it is priced from different locations e Cartage Rate Tables should be created specifically for transport items since pricing for these items is determined differently from regular items You should not use the Cartage Rate Tables that may have already been created to add cartage charges New Fields Several new fields have been added to forms in COMMANDeseries to accommodate this enhancement Items Editor The Items gt Prices tab contains a new Cartage Rate Table field which is represented as CART_CODE in the IPRC Item Price table Enter the Cartage Rate Table code that you wish to have associated with the transfer item in this field Only Cartage Rate Tables that 104 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools have a Rate Type of Quantity Distance or Plant Zone can be entered in this field The Cartage Type must be either Charge or Both Payment and Charge If you manually enter a price for the item in this field the Cartage Rate Table field will become void and you will not be able to assign a Cartage Rate Table to this item Order Entry and Ticketing A new field BALANCE_ON_LAST_LOAD has been added to the ORDL Order Product table This fie
499. tare truck weight exceed predefined limits This functionality is useful when you are working in areas where there is a legal limit to the maximum gross weight of a vehicle on a public highway This feature ensures that provided the truck weight figures in the system are accurate a driver cannot be issued a dispatch note when the load being carried makes the truck exceed the defined maximum weight Truck Types are set up with a Maximum Gross Weight and in turn each truck added to the system has an associated truck type When an order is ticketed the system compares the combined mix and tare weights with the maximum gross weight for the truck being used If the maximum gross weight is exceeded the system checks to see what action should take place according to the shipping plant To define system action when the maximum gross weight is exceeded 1 Open the Plants screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants enter a plant code and then go to the Scheduling tab 2 Goto the Maximum Gross Weight Exceeds drop down and select one of the following options o Continue Without Warning You will receive no warning and will be able to ticket a truck that exceeds its maximum gross weight normally o Warn User and Continue When ticketing an order the Maximum Gross Weight Action screen opens displaying the Total Mix Weight Truck Tare Weight Truck Gross Weight and Truck Maximum Weight You have the option to either Con
500. ted Products and Extra Products buttons will be displayed on all of an order s tickets if there are associated or extra products on the order If for example an associated product has been delivered on a ticket the Associated Product button for that ticket will be highlighted Similarly the Charges and Haul buttons will display on all tickets if the order is subject to charges If a charge has been added to a ticket the Charge and or Haul buttons for that ticket will be highlighted The Times Other and Status buttons are present for all tickets The Times button will be highlighted if any tickets times are present however the times may not be accurate or complete The Status button will be highlighted if the ticket has been canceled or suspended Ticket Detail 10 00 14 08 TEDD B LOZO Cartage update has not been run v If you are editing an existing ticket the Ticket field is inactive Existing ticket codes cannot be changed If you are entering a new ticket enter a Ticket Code The system will alert you if you enter a ticket code that is already in use on another order but it will not prevent you from saving the duplicate number The system will not allow duplicate ticket numbers within a single order If there is only one mix on the order that mix will default into the Mix Product field If there are multiple mixes on the order enter a Mix Product or detail on the field to select from a list of mixes on the order
501. tegory Price Price Extension Effective Previous Price Extension Table 1 LARGE 100 00 M3 Per unit v 23 Feb 2011 M3 Per unt v d 2 MEDIUM M3 Peut M3 Per unit z iJ al ii LOCAL M3 JPer unit z II M JPer unit gt Hi d el Pressing this button will open the Items Prices Quantity Discounts screen Item Prices Quantity Discounts EDTIMSTIT D Item Prices Quantity Discounts Item 2500 Location 104 P E3 Break Point Discount Effective Previous IT ni 5 000 Peren 23 Feb 2011 Percent z Al J 15 f 90 000 Unit Price 23 Feb 2011 J Percent z To establish a quantity discount 1 Enter a Break Point An ordered quantity greater than this amount will trigger the discount 2 Enter the Discount and Discount Type The discount can be either a percentage off the standard unit price for that price category or a new unit price The current date will default as the Effective date change the value if necessary If you change an existing discount the replaced Discount and Discount Type values are automatically moved to the Previous section 3 Press F6 Add Occurrence to add an additional discount or accept the screen to return to the Item Prices tab In the above screen shots the default price is 100 If the Ordered Quantity is greater than 10 and less than or equal to 15 the material price will be discounted by 5 to 95 If the Ordered Quantity is greater than 15 the material price will be changed
502. terial Economic Sourcing can be accessed through the Projects editor and through Order Entry If you use COMMANDquote it can also be used with Jobs and Quotes The Projects editor records a plant that is to be associated with an individual project product This defaults to the most economical plant choice as calculated by Economic Sourcing When accessing through the Projects editor you can override the default plant for a project product This will then be used as the default plant on orders associated with that project Accessing Economic Sourcing through Order Entry lets you override the default plant on the order with the plant of your choice Economic Sourcing will e Consider all plants in Economic Sourcing rather than those just with Map Page distance records e Provide a detailed breakdown of the cost used in Economic Sourcing e Ensure that items with no haulage or material cost are not incorrectly prioritized in Economic sourcing e Ensure that Cartage Pay Overrides are included in the Economic Sourcing Calculation Using Economic Sourcing To use Economic Sourcing go to the Configuration gt Mix Mapping tab and select which plants will be used in the intial run of Economic Sourcing in the Default Economic Sourcing Mode field 100 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools e Map Page Plants e User Plants e Al Plants A Configuration Piel Es Languages National Standards Project Frame Project Tas Order Entry Form
503. terial Delivered Price Restrict Orders by Estimated Quantity Dont Restrict Don t Warn Price Information z Cartage Truck Material Price Cartage Charges Delivered Price Line Product Plant Short Descr Consist Charge Type Quantity uto IC 14050L ST S5L S Al TI 370 00 0 00 f 370 00 TI Als ALL 25050 ST Base Al D 757 00 ooo 1570 T Als Jal boot ST 20 Al J E J 157 00 0 00 f 15700 TI Alg Du JIO0SOL ST S5NIB 8 J ia J 157 00 0 00 f 157 00 T A Du boot ST 5 D J E J 124 00 0 00 f 1240 T A JLL boot ST 55 Al J lf J 187 00 Dm f 1870 T Als ALL JONTOPUMP CONC Al J E 125 00 13 00 TE 738 00 Alsi Jal 50N10PUMP CONC Al J J 138 00 DT 738 00 T Als IT J40NTOPUMP CONC Al D 742 00 10 f mt Alsi IT E Total Extended Price D Extended Cost 00 Extended Gross Margin 00 Hauler Editor A Hauler Type drop down field has been added to the Hauler editor Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Haulers Select either Delivery Hauler or Spreaderman Haulers EDTHLER zy Haulers Bisi E Hauler Code 95536 Name JPETER ROCHE Contact JG665 95568 G624 95597 4540 Phone Number Company sl Dm John A Wood Ltd Insurance Carrier Name Insurance Expiration Date Contract Ref Hauler Code gt JUMESPO4 Hauler Truck Information Order Entry Ifa product that has Auto Allow set in the Projects gt Products tab is entered on the order line the auto product will be automatically added as an
504. that if the plant is changed for this item the associated rebate royalty information will not be carried forward Project Product Price Change EDTPRDLA iy Project Product Price Change Continuing on the Products tab select the button next to an item to bring up the Product Detail Information screen A new Rebates Royalties tab has been added to this screen so that you can quickly view rebate royalty information for the associated item This screen will load default rebate royalty information taken from the Items editor for new items added to the Job Quote or Project 128 Rebates and Royalties Product Detail Information Rebates Royalties Tab EDTPDTL5 is Product Detail Information 3000 3000 PSI Concrete 7 Hoover Quarry Bisi x Pricing Cartage Surcharges Sundry Charges Purchase Order Febates Royalties Miscellaneous Rebate Infomation oe Effective Dates mert CurentAmt Previous Target Contact From Thru 4mount Effective Amount Quantity Rebate Contact Jdd mmm yyy Jdd mmm yyy 1234 567 dd mmm yyy 1234 567 1200 sl Rebate Contact ddmmm dd mmm 1234 567 fdd mmm 1234 567 1200 Rebate Contact dd mmm yyy fdd mmm yyy 1234 567 dd mmm yyy f 1234 567 1200 zl Royalty Information Current Current Amt Previous Target Contact Amount Effective Amount Quantity Royalty Contact 1234 567 dd mmm pyy 1234 567 1200 Ticketing The various Edit Ticket Information screens Invoicing gt Edi
505. the left side of the screen and double click on the table s you wish to import Or o Select a table you wish to import and select the Import checkbox o To select all tables select the All button o To select only the standard tables select the Standard button The standard are a group of tables that contain basic system information The following are the standard tables CWHD COMMAND writer data These two tables contain layout infor CWLN mation used in generating reports and file listings DOCT Document tags Data Management 347 10 11 UOMS Standard UOM file UOMC UOM conversions file USGE Usages These files are maintained in the CMDSERIE IMPORT folder If any of these files are corrupted or ifa COMMANDeeries service pack updates these files they can be quickly imported by selecting the Standard button If necessary select the Delete Existing Records Before Import checkbox If this box is selected the existing table will be dropped from the database prior to import and rebuilt with the imported data If this box is not selected the imported table will be added to the existing table If duplicate records are encountered data from the imported table will overwrite existing data If the file name is not the standard table name enter the name in the File field or detail on the field to locate the file If necessary use the Optional File field to specify another file f
506. tialize TESYS Data 1 Open the Initialize TESYS Data screen Manage gt Application Management gt Initialize TESYS Data Initialize TESYS Date screen DBAIINF Initialize TESYS Data x Shipment Date af w mf IV Include Orders IV Include Tickets IV Include Vehicles bh Include Locations 2 Enter the Shipment Date s that you want to download 3 Select the inclusion checkboxes as necessary 4 Accept the screen The system will generate the download file and close the screen For additional information on configuring this option consult your Inform Interface manual Batch Interface Queued Tickets If COMMANDeeries has a direct interface to the batching system it sends tickets into the batch panel s print queue As this occurs the batch panel replies with a success fail notification message The Batch Interface Queued Tickets screen shows you the tickets that have been sent to the batch panel along with their current status This screen can be useful in troubleshooting batch communication problems as it provides direct information as to whether or not a ticket was successfully transmitted When weights ar returned fr mo the batch panel they are immediately updated in COMMANDeeries however if a ticket is locked during the update it is lost and not retrieved To resolve this issue COMMANDseries will store the locked ticket s weight information ion the QUBR Queue Batch Results table until the weight can b
507. time of the reused material and the load time of the new material The validations will occur at ticketing If the reused material fails any of the enabled validations the Ticketing Action field determines the available options e Warn User and Continue The system will warn the user and the user must decide whether to continue with ticketing Warn User and Stop Process Hard stop The reused material cannot be ticketed on the current load the dispatcher can attempt to use the pre batched material on another load The system will inform the user of the specific reason for the validation failure If the Ticketing Action field is set to Allow with Warning a Reason Code field will display in the warning window Pre Batch Validation Enter a valid reason code or detail on the field to select from a list then press OK to proceed with ticketing Appendix J Validate Reused Concrete 439 Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality Overview Lime Spreader functionality is now available and configurable in CS08 You will be able to identify any additional hauler services and pay the hauler for those services as they relate to lime spreading In addition you can separate cartage payments for additional hauler activities such as spreading lime Previously Lime business was limited to customers who had Terms Codes that allowed for Lime activities and all Lime functionality was limited to certain hardcoded user data
508. ting units of measure acknowledges that other types of products aggregate sand cement etc may be sold through the COMMAND concrete application The totals for those products can then be represented in the report s total section 16 Select COD only to feature only COD ticket items on the report 17 Select Print Dumped Resold Information to print any ticket information regarding dumped concrete or resold concrete 18 Accept the Ticket Report Selections screen 19 Select a print model from the Possible Print Models screen 20 Select a print destination If the selected print model has a Print Device setting of Prompt a Windows dialog box will appear in which you can specify a printer Price Updates These routines provide for some general price and order updates prior to formal pricing review These routines will not eliminate mistakes but provided that the system is correctly configured they will reduce the chance of a mis priced order e Update Costs amp Prices for Orders amp Tickets e Calculate Unloading Charges if applicable e Create Orders for Separate Invoices if applicable Update Costs amp Prices for Orders amp Tickets Many variables enter into assigning costs and prices to individual items Because of the many ways a company can manage cost information in the system COMMANDseries ticketing routines do not create ticket level cost records This update routine populates the ticket order level cost field
509. tinue and ticket the truck or Cancel the action o Warn User and Stop the Process The Maximum Gross Weight Action screen opens displaying the Total Mix Weight Truck Tare Weight Truck Gross Weight and Truck Maximum Weight You will only have the option to Cancel the action Ticketing 141 The default value for the Maximum Gross Weight Exceeds drop down list is defined on the Defaults tab of the Configuration screen 3 Press lt F2 gt to accept the screen and save the changes Proof of Delivery Proof of Delivery located under the Dispatch menu option allows for input manually or via a bar code scanning device of a ticket As the ticket is returned from delivery with a signature from the customer either the driver scans the ticket or a Dispatch person collects all tickets and enters them at once This indicates that the driver completed the task by turning in the ticket The Ticket record is updated with a Delivery Verification Date and User Name The Plant table has a flag that requires or does not require depending on the setting the Delivery Verification for Hauler Payment to take place Therefore at Plants that require delivery verification drivers who do not turn in their tickets Proof of Delivery do not get paid Process Goods Returned Sometimes when an order or ticket has been delivered there may be a need for some of the delivered items to be returned the customer may not need the items or they could have
510. tion is retrieved from the Item Master file for the product and plant entered e Overhead Cost Represents the total cost of overhead expenses per cubic yard or meter This value may differ from plant to plant A detailed breakdown of the cost can be viewed on the Overhead Costs tab This information is retrieved from the Plant file and represents estimates of the cost required to cover the overhead expenses e Delivery Cost The total estimated cost of delivering the product per cubic yard or meter from the plant to the job site A detailed breakdown of the cost can be viewed on the Delivery Costs tab This data is retrieved from the Plant file and with the Average Load Size estimated Travel Time and Unloading Time is used to calculate the cost of delivering the product to the site e Financing Cost Represents the cost of financing the sale of the product based on the annual finance charge rate in the company file and is affected by the value entered in the Average Days to Pay field Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 85 e Terms Discount Represents the discount if any that applies to the current product The discount is determined by the terms that have been set up in the terms code e To Achieve Plant s Desired Profit Represents the amount added to the total product cost to achieve the plant s desired profit This information defaults from the Desired Profit Per Quantity field on the Plants screen Files gt Plan
511. tion regarding fresh concrete test data e g slump temperature air content and the number of specimen prepared This information will need to be manually recorded and transferred to the concrete lab where the test data can then be entered into COMMAND cc Set Up Configuring your system for Sampled Tickets involves changes in the following areas e Users editor e Reason Codes editor Users Editor The first thing you should do is give any authorized personnel privileges to remove the Cube Check sampled flag from tickets Go to the Users editor and select the new Allow Cube Check Removal in Edit Orders Tickets flag on the Restrictions tab Users gt Restrictions tab EDTUSNMF references Licenses Privileges Order Printers Options Restrictions Discount Levels Order Entry Defaults Order Type Defau Orders Tickets Options Generic Allow Project Updates from Orders Tickets Allow Access to Quotes for Orders Allow Access to Order Level Mix Design Allow Override of Unapproved Mix Designs in Tickets Allow override of Minimum Load Charges lt P lt 1 lt 1 Unlimited Reprint Tickets Receipts Display AR Balances in Credit Inquiry for ALL Customers Iv Allow Cube Check Flag Removal In Edit Orders Tickets Override Do not Allow Project Edit Restrict customer lookup to company Allow Update of Imported Item Quality Codes No Ticketing 161 If at any point a user removes the Cube Check fl
512. titious Material 03 Cementitious Material 03 Aggregate Fine GA Other Product 13 ZAooregate Coarse 04 Aggregate Coarse 04 Water 05 Water 05 ZA Entraining Agent 06 ir Entraining Agent 06 Accelerator 07 Accelerator 07 Code List Editor An editor has been added to COMMANDeseries Files gt System Information gt Code Lists so that users may review and even edit code list entries How to Use This Document 29 Code Lists ECDLS 3 Code Lists File Column ICAT Item Category File ITEM_TYPE Item type Description Concrete Reinforcing Material Admix Plasticizer Other Admixture Other Product Extra Charge Block Brick Pipe Steel Building Material Asphalt Lolelololelolololelolols To use the editor select a database table in the File drop down All of the codelist fields in the selected table can then be selected from the Column drop down If no fields are listed then the selected table currently contains no code list fields Once you ve selected a field the system will pair each Code with it s associated Description You may edit descriptions but you cannot change the code values nor can you add additional codes to the list Command Alkon strongly suggests that you use COMMANDeseries security to control access to this form Exporting Lookup Information The Select screen
513. to the system please see the Setting up the System manual Material Manager Screen The Material Manager screen is used to search for mixes and their constituents Files gt Item Information gt Materials Manager gt Materials Manager Material Manager screen EDTMTMG 7 Material Manager 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15 16 17 Aggregates Cements 2500 3 4 3 8 A4 2500 00 2500 1 2 3 8 3000 3 4 3 8 45 3000 Wall Mix 3500 3 4 3500 00 3500 Wall Mix 3500 3 8 Curb Mix 4000 PSI 4000 00 4000 Floor Mix 5000 3 4 3 8 5000 00 Filtering Items The fields at the top of the screen act as search filters for the various mixes in the system the results of the search are displayed in the list at the bottom By default all plants to which you have permissions default into the Plant Code field This list can be altered as needed 326 Materials Manager Use a dash to indicate a plant range and commas to delineate single plants for example 1 3 6 8 Once the search parameters have been entered press the Get Data button to retrieve the items that match the criteria Mixes The Mixes tab lists the mixes available according to the filter parameter settings in the fields at the top of the screen Mix tab EDTMTMG1 p M bes Aggregates Cements Admixes Waters ltem Replacement ltem Code Description UOM Target W C Strength Notes Selected 1 2500 2500 3 4 3 8 cy 44 2500 00 Fi SC 2501
514. ts 6 Enter the third party document format into the Third Party Company Document Format field or detail to select one from the list 7 Press lt F2 gt to accept the screen and save the changes Press lt F2 gt again to accept the Plants screen This document format will now be used for third party tickets from the specified plant Appendix A Examples 391 Appendix B Credit Checking Topics in this section Credit Checking Overview Credit Checking Configuration Using the Credit Checking Function Credit Checking Overview Credit Checking is a comprehensive component of the accounting system that helps keep Accounts Receivable at a manageable level Credit Checking helps prevent shipment of orders to customers who have overdue balances or some other kind of limit on their account COMMANDeseries supports two levels of credit checking Standard no license needed Each customer is assigned a credit code Each credit code can be set to one of four Credit Types e Cash Only e Charge Only e Charge or Cash e No Sale Once a customer or customer project has been entered the system retrieves the appropriate credit code and the order screen will respond accordingly Cash Only The Payment Form Selection screen will display allowing selection of payment method If the credit code is flagged to Display Credit Code Description the description will appear in the top of the Payment Form Selection screen 392 A
515. ts button to retrieve tickets If no plant code has been entered the system will use the plant code specified for you in the User gt Plants tab 8 To edit a specific ticket s times click the ticket s status field and enter the correct time using one of the COMMANDeeries standard formats Tab to move to the next field If the existing data on a ticket is correct but there are one or two missing fields select Calculate all Times on this Ticket Calculate all Times on all Tickets checkbox Based on the existing data and the schedule information the system will extrapolate the missing data This option can also be performed on all tickets Tasks Conditions and Driver Overtime 185 9 Once the necessary corrections have been made accept the screen to save the changes Editing Truck Times In most cases one driver stays with the same truck all day long Consequently a truck s times match the driver s times however if a driver s times are edited it may be necessary to edit the truck s times as well To edit a truck s times in the Time and Task Manager 1 2 De Select the Truck Times tab Enter an Order Date Enter a Truck Code or detail in the field to display a list of trucks Once these two values are entered the times for the truck will be displayed Time and Task Manager Edit Ticket Times EDTTMGRB WE 1J Time and Task Manager Edit Clock Times as necessary Use the Add Occurrence bu
516. ts the Order Tree 94 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools The Options Menu When the Order Entry screen is displayed the Options menu becomes available Use the Options menu to navigate quickly to commonly used functions in COMMANDceries Prefix Screen Select this menu option to call the Customer Project Order Lookup screen Switch to Concrete Aggregate Block Asphalt If you are licensed for both COMMANDconcrete COMMANDaggregate and COMMANDasphalt use these commands to switch from a concrete order form to an ageregate or asphalt order form For companies that have a concrete plant and an aggregate quarry at the same location switching order forms is a convenient feature for order takers Use Switch to Block to change the order form to a block order form This option only works when viewing a completely blank order form If any order information has been entered the system will not switch screens Test Order Print Use the Test Order Print option to test print an order You should test print a single order before printing a series of orders to determine if the information printed correctly if the print format is correct and whether or not the order information printed out on the right printer Change Order to Metric Use this feature to switch between metric and US customary Addition Selection of Notes This option calls the main Addition Selection of Notes screen Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 95
517. tton to add In Service events Edit Task Times as necessary To delete a task select the task and press lt F5 gt To add a task select the task you wish to precede the new task and press lt F6 gt The new task field will appear Select a specific task from the drop down list and edit the task times as needed The Add Occurrence button or lt F6 gt will create a task after the currently selected task Insert Occurrence lt Shift F6 gt will create a task before the currently selected task Accept the screen to save the changes or proceed to another tab 186 Tasks Conditions and Driver Overtime Editing Driver Times Accurate recording of driver times is critical to the proper reporting of driver overtime To edit a driver s times in the Time and Task Manager 1 2 3 8 Select the Driver Times tab Enter an Order Date Enter a Driver Code or detail in the field to display a list of drivers Once these two values are entered the times for the truck will be displayed Time and Task Manager Edit Ticket Times EDTTMGRC Fa Time and Task Manager Edit Clock Times as necessary Use the Add Occurrence button to add In Service events Edit Task Times as necessary To delete a task select the task and press lt F5 gt To add a task select the task you wish to precede the new task and press lt F6 gt The new task field will appear Select a specific task from the drop down list and
518. u are allowed to make project updates COMMANDeseries prompts you as follows Project information has been changed Update Project Yes No To update the project click Yes Changing Units of Measure Every salable item or constituent in the system is assigned a number of unit of measure tags UOM The UOM tag establishes how that particular item is to be measured at different stages in the business cycle A unit of measure drop down menu located on the toolbar lets you toggle between Metric and Customary units of measure However the option only lets you view the order s quantities in the opposite unit of measure Order entry also gives you the ability to enter order line information in the opposite unit of measure The application in turn automatically converts your information to the original unit of measure For example if your current unit of measure is U S Customary the entry of 15m3 in the Order Qty field would be automatically adjusted to 19 61 cubic yards once you have tabbed out of that field Removing Orders Order screens in COMMANDseries let you remove orders However to remove an order y you must supply a reason for removal These reason codes provide documentation for later reporting Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 73 Selecting the Remove button lets you remove cancel orders of any status Removing an order does not actually delete the order from the system but instead puts the order in a s
519. u cannot create a regular order from a standing order that has expired Even though a standing order is created from the Order Entry screen it is in itself not a true order Simply creating a standing order will not place the order on the delivery schedule The Schedule Standing Orders function takes the standing order template and creates standard orders 64 Order Entry Related Topics Entering a Standing Order Switching Between the Standing and Regular Order File Creating Standing Orders from Projects Scheduling Standing Orders Entering a Standing Order Enter standing orders using the Orders screen Simply select Standing in the date field You can only schedule a Standing Order for Concrete Item Groups If the Standing Order is scheduled from the standard Order Entry screen a new selection form Scheduling Standing Orders will be displayed only products you select on this screen will create schedule tabs for each product Scheduling Standing Order screen EDTSCHD I Schedule Standing Orders sl 0000 To enter a standing order 1 De Go to the screen Dispatch gt Orders Type S or select Standing from the drop down box in the Order Date field and tab through Unlike regular orders which get an Order Code assigned automatically Order Codes for standing orders must be entered manually You can enter anything you like for the standing order code but here are some useful guidelines
520. u have different truck types you might need separate pouring methods for each There are two basic ways of setting up pouring methods e Based on method of delivery front loader pump etc e Based on the type of construction being made slab sidewalk etc Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools 83 These two options are not an either or proposition you can set them up any way you want Once a Pouring Method has been established it can be used by entering its assigned code in the Pouring Method field on the Order Line Schedule Information screen In addition to considering what pouring methods are needed you might also want to consider if your unloading charge practices should mirror your pouring rates Ifa company can let you know ahead of time that more pouring time is necessary do you want to charge the company the same as another customer that cannot supply advance notice You might end up with one or two unloading charge tables for each pouring method Pouring methods cannot be set at the project level To enter pouring methods 1 Open the Pouring Methods screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Pouring Methods Pouring Methods EDTPMET 3 Pouring Methods Pouring Method Unload Rate per Description Hour CURB CURB MACHINE 30 00 cy WB WHEEL BARROW 10 00 cy DR DIRECT 20 00 cy HST HOISTED 60 00 cy CONV CONVEYOR 120 00 oY PUMP P
521. ues based on existing times and the load schedule When the Only Tickets with Missing Invalid or Out of Tolerance Times checkbox is checked only these tickets will appear on the report COMMAND concrete Reports 305 Missing Times Report Selections SELMIST D Missing Times Report Selections Overtime Report The Overtime report shows the overtime for each driver for a particular day or range of days as well as the total overtime hours The report can be ordered by the hours left before overtime or the driver code and include daily weekly or rolling time left before overtime starts Overtime Report Selections SELOVTM D Driver Overtime Report Selections The report displays Concrete orders when run from COMMAND concrete and Aggregate orders when run from COMMANDaggregate When run from COMMAND concrete the order of the time statuses is e Printed e Load e End Load e On Job e Unload e End Unload e Wash e To Plant 306 COMMAND concrete Reports e At Plant When run from COMMANDaggregate the order of the time statuses will be e Load e End Load e Printed e On Job e Unload e End Unload e Wash e To Plant e Ar Plant The following options are available for the Report Sequence e Source of Status Update e User Name of Status Update e Tickets with Multiple Status Updates for a Single Time Status You can further limit the report by opting to have only a range of time statuses selected i
522. uminated indicating the presence of at least one associated product for the mix Forecasted Shipped Quantity When setting up projects estimates for the quantity of each project product required to complete the project can be entered for quoting purposes The forecasted shipped quantity is a calculation performed to show the user how much of that estimated quantity has already been ordered and shipped and how much is remaining in order to give an indication of project progress In order to access this information users can either click on the C button in Order Entry or the Calculations button on the Edit Orders amp Tickets screen One button displays Order Entry for each order line item Pressing one of these buttons opens the Calculation screen which is a read only display of figures related to the order line item Calculation screen EDTCALP F Calculation Project 200040 Product 4100 fim EZ Estimated Quantity 500 00 cu meter Total Ordered Amount 15 00 cumeter s Total Delivered Amount 0 00 cumeter s Remaining Scheduling Amount 485 00 cu meter Non Delivered Scheduling Amount 15 00 cu meter Ticket Data Out Total cu meter The Calculation screen shows the following information o Estimated Quantity Displays the estimated quantity of the line item required for the project This value comes from the Project Product table and is entered on the Projects screen at the time of project creation
523. ummary Analysis report analyzes the delivery activity of one or more plants specifying the number of loads trucks and loads per truck as well as the delivered quantity average load order quantity and quantity per truck Graphic Analysis Report The Graphic Analysis report presents a timeline of each ticket delivery Just a quick glance at an order can reveal whether or not the report was delivered in a timely manner Customer Analysis Report The Customer Analysis report shows customer activity based on specifications defined on the Time Analysis Report Selections screen This report can help determine if problems in delivery are being caused by a driver or a customer Truck Analysis Report The Truck Analysis report is similar to the Driver Analysis Report save that it measures the efficiency of individual trucks Companies that move drivers from truck to truck may need to use both Driver and Truck Analysis Reports to get an accurate picture of delivery cycles Missing Times Report Status times for all tickets are stored in the system in most cases however if problems arise and the driver or dispatcher has to manually update the status errors can be made The Missing Times report identifies tickets with missing or unusual times Unusual times are defined by the values entered in the Time Tolerance fields on the selection screen When the Calculate Missing Times checkbox is checked the system calculate approximate missing time val
524. unctionality Inventory flag in the case of a Service Lime item but it is there in case you have only a certain number of Lime spreaders available Items gt Main tab EDTIMST1 Items lLime Spreaderman Service 2612 LIMESP Set up your service items first Then when you create the Lime product itself you can add the spreader service as an automatic product The Automatic Products tab displays for all Item Types except for Service and Extra Charge This will apply to items in the Item Category you set up earlier for non Service Lime items Items gt Automatic Products tab EDTIMSTH z 2610999 Lime Spreaderman Service xl ho xi Reminders Automatic Products are set up by location for available plants Only non mix products can be entered as auto products If a mix product is entered you will receive an error message Only products that match the measurement system of the main product can be entered e Ifthe quantity is anything other than blank that quantity will be defaulted into Order Entry Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality 4 Assigning Item Groups to Customers and Projects Finally assign that Item Group to any Customer or Project that will have Lime delivery You will also need to set up pricing information for the Lime here Customers gt Pricing tab EDTPRICE P Customers JOE FORDE Non nterCompany i FOR Appendix K Lime Spreader Functionality Pro
525. update is run the routine will recalculate both concrete and aggregate orders Update Batch Entry ID for Payments Effective in 5 54 when a payment is entered a unique ID is assigned to all invoices paid with that payment cash check or credit card This payment ID is used by various routines such as Void Payments and Deposit Registers when recalling payment information This update populates each existing payment with a unique entry ID No user input is required Correct Zone Plant Price for Wild Card Price Category This update converts ZNPC entries with wild card price categories to correct ZNPL entries If an existing ZNPL record conflicts with a price in ZNPC the routine generates a report to notify the user with instructions to correct the error No user input is required Initialize GPS Polling for Orders Projects from Configuration Settings This update should be run only after system level GPS polling defaults have been set The update will then write those defaults to all existing orders and projects No user input is required This update is intended for users adding GPS functionality and should not be used by a customer who already has GPS configured Update Accumulation for Items 5 57 12 adds additional options for configuring accumulation of admixes and admix designs The new options necessitated modifying the exiting Accumulation Code field from one character to two characters This update reformats the existin
526. uspend Reason code on the Suspend Products Selections screen Click on the detail button for a list of codes 4 Enter a Next Order Sequence Code on the Suspend Products Selections screen Click on the detail button for a list of codes 5 Click the checkbox of the product s to suspend 6 Accept the Suspend Products Selections screen 200 Suspending Orders and Tickets 7 The system will create a new order for the same order date move the selected product s to the new order and suspend the new order A prompt will display the new order and the product s suspended Click Ok to accept the suspended product Automatic Customer Suspension of Orders Automatic suspension can be useful for customers with particularly convoluted pricing structures It helps ensure that you will be able to review the order thoroughly prior to invoicing Automatic order suspension is initiated through the entry of a code in the Suspend Order Reason Code field on the Customer Accounting Information Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers and the Project Accounting Information Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects screens When this field contains a valid suspend order reason code all new non project orders for that customer should default to a suspended state When the same field has a valid reason code in the project file all new project based orders for that customer will default to a suspended state
527. usted a Schedule Status Normal Total Quantity o The Customer Code defaults from the standing order file This uniquely identifies the customer of the displayed order o The Project Code defaults from the standing order file o The Expiration Date of the standing order defaults from the standing order file The standing order cannot be scheduled past the expiration date 3 Enter the Schedule Date This date is the first day the standing order is scheduled for delivery 4 Enter the Thru date The system will create a regular order for each and every day from the Schedule Date through the Thru date 5 The Item Code is a default value from the Order Entry screen but may be edited by the load Use the drop down list to change the product for a particular load 6 Edit individual load information for a schedule using the Loads button 7 Edit the To From Plant Load Quantity or Truck Code fields for an individual order using this secondary screen 8 Accept the screen The system will use the information to create a regular order file for every day in the specified date range You can see confirmation messages for the new orders by detailing on the message line at the bottom of the screen 9 These regular order files are completely independent of one another if you edit or cancel one order the rest are unaffected Order Entry 69 Advanced Order amp Schedule Tools This section contains information o
528. ustomer Job Map Page Zone Code and Instructions as necessary In COMMANDaggregate scheduling an order is optional If the order needs to be scheduled continue with this procedure Enter a mix for this order in the Item Code field The Description field defaults automatically o You can enter only one mix per order using the Simplified Order screen o On the Simplified Order Screen you cannot enter an associated product or an extra product unless you first enter a mix Enter the amount of the order in the Order Qty field Enter the slump or trim if necessary in the Slump Trim field Tab through to continue Enter associated products and extra products on the lines that follow When you complete entry on one line another line displays underneath Select the Plant field and enter the plant from which this order will be shipped Double click on the field for plant selections Enter the remaining information for the order including Start Time Scheduled Quantity Truck Type Load Size Travel Time and Truck Spacing At this point the Unload Time Quantity Per Hour and Number of Trucks are calculated and entered automatically Edit this information if necessary Select a Current Status from the drop down list o Normal The order has a normal status The system defaults this status unless otherwise specified o Will Call The order is waiting on a confirmation call from the customer to be shipped It does not display in the lo
529. w displays allowing you to view all notes associated with this order Notes Viewer A Choices A Customer Notes File New The driver took out the customer s mailbox with the truck Give the customer one free yard On this screen browse through the notes using the arrow buttons at the bottom of the form To enter a new note select the New button The Notes editor displays Pressing the Edit button at the bottom of the form will load the current note into the Notes editor The List button will return you to the list of notes 3 The Date Time the note was entered and the User Name of the person who entered the note is automatically attached to the note 4 The next section of the Notes screen has a number of fields that are used to assign the note to a particular type of record Customer Code Project Code Job ID Quote Code Revision Product Code Transaction Code Order Date Order Code These fields are set according to the screen from which the Notes screen was accessed For example if you are in Order Entry and select the Project Note button the system will set the Customer and Project fields for the new note Similarly if you select the note button next to an invoice transaction in COMMANDreceivables the system will set the Transaction Code 5 Enter the text of your note in the Text area The viewing area will scroll to accommodate a longer note 6 Ifyou wish to attach a file to the note se
530. w fields have been added to the Ticket Line Information record TKTL to accommodate the information being stored and sent to COMMAND ac CUBE_CHECK USERNAME CUBE _CHECK UPDATE DATE CUBE_CHECK_REASON_CODE 164 Ticketing The CUBE_CHECK USERNAME and CUBE_CHECK_UPDATE_DATE fields can be retrieved through CS Data In Out routines as well as standard database access tools These two fields are not viewable on any form within the system The CUBE_CHECK_REASON_CODE field is not retrievable or viewable on any form within the system Future Day Ticketing Overview COMMANDeeries has been updated to handle next day concrete loads Often a dispatcher s working day ends before loads are delivered to customers Therefore dispatchers need the ability to schedule loads for the next day and print tickets so the truck can pick up its load and be sent for delivery before the dispatcher arrives to the office For documentation purposes pre ticketing refers to ticketing for the same day while future day ticketing refers to tickets that are created for a future date that is not the next day for instance an order for Monday morning is created on Friday e You can pre ticket trucks for the current date while the same truck can be future ticketed for the next day If the truck is already pre ticketed for a next day order it cannot be pre ticketed for another future day order unless the truck is removed from the ticket
531. will be considered Uncollected on the Uncollected Ticket Report Cash Reconciliation Report and Receipt Allocation report Reports A new report Receipts Detail Dispatch gt Payment Options gt Payment Reports gt Receipts Detail Report has been created so that users will have a hardcopy of cash payment detail information for the records that are being purged It is a good idea to run this report before you purge cash management records Information can be entered on this screen the way you do for all other reports in COMMANDeseries Receipts Detail Report SELPMTS F Receipts Detail Report EN Report Name e Report Sequence Ip eceipt Number Plant Code gt fio Payment Date fi7 Oer2008 thru fi7 Det 2008 Bank Agent gt JSUNMIXC SUNMIX Payment Method age IT Show Banking Detail IT Show Allocation Detail Page Break by Report Sequence Save Settings on Accept Note Select Show Banking Details to display all information related to banking such as account numbers for each receipt Show Allocation Detail will display all allocation information related to each receipt When Page Break By Sequence is selected the report will have a page break for each receipt To save the report settings select Save Settings on Accept before pressing F2 Cash Management 267 Below is an example of a generated report that shows both banking details and allocation details Date 17 Oct 2008 Boral
532. will be saved under the Report Name you gave it and will be available from the drop down list Select a Report Type from the list to determine the format to use when printing the Transfer Orders Register Report Select from the following options o Detail O Summary Select the Report Sequence option to determine the method of sorting to use when printing the G L Distribution Report Select from the following options Oo Order Code O Order Type From the Product Line field s list select one of the following options Oo All Orders Oo Concrete O Aggregate From the Order Type field select the type of orders to include on the Transfer Orders Register Report The options are o Job Transfer Accommodates the shipment of inventoried materials to job sites for inter company construction related activity A Job Cost Phase code will be associated with the order to accommodate the needs of the construction job cost environment No invoicing will be associated with this order type o Material Transfer Used for shipping inventoried materials to an inter company plant or business No invoicing will be associated with this order type o All To select both Job and Material Transfers Enter the Order Date to specify a date or range of order dates to include on the Transfer Orders Register Report Enter the Billing Code to specify a customer or range of customers to include on the Transfer Orders Register Report 196 Preliminary
533. x or concrete family e Description Short Description Standard descriptions e Norm Standard This field identifies fact sheet or publication that specifies the criteria to be used for this test It is provided for reference purposes only Field level security can be applied to all fields on this form Concrete Testing Families A Concrete Family is a collection of mixes that are grouped together for testing purposes When a testing plan calls for a test of Family A any mix in Family A is eligible for the test You can organize your families however you wish by strength by cement type etc This data is stored in the Testing Families TSTF table and its child tables Testing Families Location TSTL and Testing Families Testing Methods TSTM The TSTF table is itself a child table of the Locations ILOC table 116 Sampling amp Testing Plan Concrete Testing Families screen B Concrete Testing Families Testing Concrete Families CONFAM P 24 11 2008 23 01 2009 e 7 e Concrete Testing Family Code used to identify the testing record e Description Short Description Standard descriptions e Location Testing parameters are assigned by COMMANDseeries location e Test Method ID The Test Method ID code to be used for this family location Detail on the field to select from a list e Sample parameters These parameters determine the conditions under which a sample may be requested If the
534. y Invoice Manager e Realign Accounts and Cost Centers e Error Log Report e Update Zone Salesman e Update Inactive Customers There are multiple purging options in the system some of which are found in thie menu All purging options are discussed in a separate section Calculate a Price Change The Calculate Price Change function lets the user issue a general price increase for all products and for project specific products without having to edit individual products and projects The price change can be either an increase or decrease in the existing price An effective date is registered so that current prices stay in effect until the effective date is reached Also the effective date allows the price change to be entered and verified in advance of the effective date In addition the price change can be targeted at specific projects Products affected by the price change can be selected individually by product category or by product type The system provides a great deal of flexibility You can make a change as broad as raising the price of all concrete mixes by 5 or as narrow as changing the price of all aggregate items from a specific plant for a specific project All items in the item master file IMST are automatically subject to having their prices changed via this routine In order for a project item to be subject to this routine the product must have the Allow Automatic Price Adjustment checkbox selected This field is lo
535. y Status returned from the batch computer is OOT When an OOT load is received from the batch computer the following actions will take place e The truck will be moved back to an In Yard status e The Price Quantity for the OOT ticket will be zeroed out If there is material still in the truck after an OOT load the following actions still take place using standard COMMAN Deeries functionality e You must manually enter the returned material that is in the truck if any or all of the material will be reused on future loads e Materials will be considered dumped unless the material is reused For delayed ticket prints it is suggested that OOT load tickets include an indication that they are not to be shipped i e omit the Customer Name on the ticket print In other words print these tickets using a different format and layout than the standard ticket print if desired Set Up To accommodate this enhancement a new Allow Removed Cancelled Ticket Print field has been added to the Plants gt Main tab When selected the Default Cancelled Ticket Reason Code field will display Enter the Reason Code you wish to have associated with all automatically cancelled OOT tickets 156 Ticketing Plants gt Main tab EDTPLNT1 Data In Out Automated Data In Out and Ticket Weights Data Out have been changed to include an Exclude Canceled Tickets option Ticketing 157 Automated Data In Out EDTADIO 4 Auto
536. y for credit debit memos it will default otherwise detail on the field and select one from the list 7 Select a How should all quantities effect inventory and sales analysis option The inventory sales analysis adjustment options are as follows o Quantities on hand should be adjusted for all products All items appearing on the credit memo will be returned to inventory Generally used when doing a credit rebill when issuing a credit memo for a delivery that never took place or any credit memo that adjusts the amount of material received by the customer O Quantities should be handled as damaged goods for all products Items on the credit memo will not be placed into inventory they will be tagged as damaged goods for inventory and reporting purposes Edit Orders and Tickets 221 10 11 12 13 o No adjustment to quantities should be made for any products No adjustments are made for any item on the credit memo Only used for adjustment credit memos in which you are crediting a customer who has been overcharged O Prompt for this information with each product code entered Upon accepting the credit memo you are prompted for inventory sales analysis options for all memo items If necessary enter Comments regarding the background reason for the memo Accept the screen to return to the main prep screen Customer Project Code segment EDTPREP Customer gt ABC e ABC Project Code gt ABC Al
537. y to create Quick Customers prevents order takers from having to wait for a standard customer account to be created it can result in a large number of quick customer records filling up the database The Purge Customer routine allows you to filter customer by accounting category and credit code and will purge records from the following tables CUST Customer CUSO Customer overflow CUCO Customer Credit CUSG Customer Sundry Charge CUIG Customer Item Groups CUIU Customer Item Groups Unloading Charges CUHS Customer History Cash Management 265 Note Any customer note linked to a customer being purged will have its status set to Completed the new status will allow the note to be purged using the Purge Customer Notes routine Exceptions The following customer records will not be purged e Customers assigned as the configuration quick customer template or default quick customer e Any customer assigned as the default quick customer template for a plant e Any customer with active orders standing orders projects quotes or payments To Purge Customers 1 Open the Purge Customers form Manage gt Application Management gt Purge Customers Purge Customers form DBACUST Purge Customers Accounting Category 1234 Acct Cat Desc Credit Code 1234 Credit Code Desc 2 Enter an Accounting Category or detail on the field to select from a list If the field is left blank all accounting categories
538. you may be trying to troubleshoot a problem with a customer s tickets The Data Maintenance screen provides you with direct access to the database where you can see and edit the data first hand The screen provides a very flexible tool for editing the database This section will only document the most commonly used functions WARNING Because you are accessing your database directly it is very easy to seriously damage the integrity of your data with this tool Topics in this section Retrieve a Specific Record or Set of Records Global Replace Special Search Operators To retrieve a table record This procedure shows the basic functioning of the Data Maintenance screen 1 Open the Data Maintenance screen Manage gt Data Management gt Data Maintenance The Data Maintenance screen DBAUFLD Data Maintenance zs OES SC Views 2 The display area to the left allows you to select individual database tables and views o Table The primary storage area for the database o View A temporary lookup index used to speed processing Because the views are dependent on the tables it is highly unlikely that you will need to edit a view 3 Select the plus sign next to the Tables icon to expand the list of tables 4 Select the table that you wish to view The table structure will display in the main section of the screen Data Management 353 Ticket Charges Table DBAUFLD 1 Data Maintenance Ticket
539. ze Table Statistics in Database Note This routine applies only to Oracle databases COMMANDeeries maintains a number of database indexes that are used to speed data retrieval Similarly the Oracle database engine maintains f metadata on each database schema The metadata is roughly equivalent to a library s catalog recording the tables organization and number of tables This information is used by Oracle to optimize all database access functions As the database grows and changes over time the metadata becomes outdated which can have an adverse affect on database performance The Analyze Table Statistics function refreshes the Oracle metadata The primary worktables are analyzed every time the database is upgraded however other tables particularly the Master Files are not included in the automatic process It is probably a good idea to perform periodically a full analysis of all tables particularly for larger databases or databases involved in replication Nothing will display on screen to indicate the progress of the routine nor will the updated statistics display Import Data COMMANDeseries lets you import existing COMMANDseries data files You can restore your database by importing all files importing a customer file etc 346 Data Management This function can only import files that were exported from COMMANDeseries using the related Export Data function or files that have been formatted to conform to COMMAND

COMMANDconcrete - Command Alkon User Gateway

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents